CNC PROGRAMING FOR HEIDENHEIN AND ARDUINO thb416 PDF

Technical Manual
TNC 416
TNC 406
TNC 306
For the NC software types
March 2000
286 18x
up to version 04 (TNC 416)
280 62x
260 03x
260 05x

208 829-21 2.1 3/2000 S Printed in Germany Subject to change without notice
(208 829-E8)
Preface
This Technical Manual is intended for manufacturers and distributors of machine tools. It contains all
necessary information for assembly, electrical installation, commissioning and PLC-programming for
the HEIDENHAIN TNC 406 and TNC 306 contouring controls.
Whenever HEIDENHAIN improves the hardware or software in these controls you will receive a free
delivery of updated information. Please insert this updated information into your manual without
delay. This will ensure that your manual always reflects the current revision level.
You can use excerpts from this manual for your machine documentation. Enlarging the manual
format (17 cm x 24 cm) by a factor of 1.225 will produce pages in A4 format.
No documentation can be perfect. This manual undergoes continual change and will benefit from
your impulses and suggestions for improvement. Please help us by letting us know your ideas.
DR. JOHANNES HEIDENHAIN GmbH

Department PE
PO Box 1260
D-83292 Traunreut
Germany
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
Contents Technical Manual TNC 416, TNC 406, TNC 306

Update Information No. 15 - 11
Introduction
Mounting and Electrical Installation
Machine Integration
Machine Parameters
Markers and Words
PLC Programming
Data interfaces
OEM Cycles
Appendix
Subject Index
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Introduction Contents
1 Hardware concept
2-2
2 Technical data TNC 416/406/TNC 306
2-3
3 Software
3.1 NC Software
2-8
2-8
3.1.1 NC Software number
2-8
3.1.2 Software types and hardware
2-9
3.1.3 Software releases
2-9
3.2
PLC Software
2-10
3.3.
EPROM sockets
2-11
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Hardware concept
2-1
1 Hardware concept
The HEIDENHAIN TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306 controls are designed for ram-type electrical
discharge machines.
The TNCs consists of several different assemblies. The main component is the logic unit.
The logic unit is connected to the other assemblies and to peripheral equipment by means of
connecting cables.
Encoders
Nominal value
outputs
PLC I/0 unit
Visual display unit

TNC keyboard unit
Machine operating panel
Short circuit/
touch probe
Electronic handwheel
Common
data area
NC
PLC
Data interfaces
PLC inputs
PLC outputs
Analogue input
for gap control
The logic unit contains the circuitry for both the NC and the PLC sections of the control. The
common data area contains the machine parameters, PLC markers and words. The machine
parameters define the machine hardware configuration (traverse ranges, acceleration, number of
axes, etc.). The PLC markers and words are used for the exchange of information between the NC
and the PLC.
2-2
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Hardware concept
3/2000
2 Technical data TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Components
TNC 416/TNC 406
TNC 306
LE 406:
LE 406 logic unit
TE 400 keyboard unit
BC 110 14 color CRT
640 x 400 pixels
LE 360C logic unit

BF 110 mono chrome flat
screen (192 x 120mm)
or
BE 212 12 monochrome
CRT512 x 256 pixels
LE 416:
LE 416 logic unit
BF120 color flat screen 10,4
or
BC 120 15 color CRT
640 x 480 pixels
Control type
Program memory
Contouring control for 5 axes

with eroding gap control
Linear interpolation in 3 out of
5 axes
Circular interpolation in 2 out
of 4 axes
Helical interpolation with
simultaneous C-axis motion
10 000 program blocks

for up to 100 files
Contouring control for 4 axes

with eroding gap control
Linear interpolation in 3 out of
4 axes
Circular interpolation in 2 out of
4 axes
Helical interpolation with
simultaneous C-axis motion
5000 program blocks

for up to 32 files
(NC programs, EDM parameters tables, one datum shift table)

PLC program (if not contained in EPROM)
EPROM 128 Kbytes for PLC program, user cycles, EDM parameter
tables, dialogs for user cycles, PLC error messages
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Technical data TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
2-3
TNC 416/TNC 406

Operating modes
Program input
Manual
Jog positioning
Positioning with MDI
Program run, single block
Program run, full sequence
Programming and editing
Test run (logical and graphical)
In HEIDENHAIN plain language format

Manually on keyboard
Externally over data interface
Input resolution
1 m
display resolution
0,1 m
Programmable functions
2-4
TNC 306
1 m
Nominal position (absolute or incremental) in Cartesian or polar

coordinates
Linear path in 3 out of 4 axes
Circular path in 2 out of 4 axes
Helical path with simultaneous C-axis motion
Corner rounding, chamfer
Tangential contour approach and departure
Tool number and length, radius compensation, tool undersize
Spindle speed for axis C
Rapid traverse
Feed rate
Insertion of programs into other programs
Subprograms and program section repeats
Fixed cycles: disk pocket, EDM polishing, tool definition,
generator definition
Datum shift, coordinate system rotation, mirror image, scaling
Dwell time, miscellaneous functions M, program stop
Remote control via LSV2 protocol (only TNC 416/406)
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406

Parameter programming
TNC 306
cos,
Mathematical functions (=, +, , , , sin,______
angle from r * sin and r * cos , , a + b;
variable parameter comparison (=,,>,<)
indexed data assignment
output of parameter values over RS-232-C data interface
Maximum traverse range
30 000 mm (1181 in.)
Maximum traverse speed
30 m/min (1181 ipm)
Data interface
RS-232-C./.V.24
Baud rate 38 000; 19 200; 9600; 4800; 2400; 1200; 600; 300; 150; 110
RS-422 / V.11 (assigned to PLC)
Cycle times
Block processing time
15 ms
60 ms
Closed-loop cycle time
2 / 4 ms (selected with MP)
4 ms
PLC cycle time
20 / 40 ms (selected with MP)
40 ms
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
(with 2000 logical PLC

commands)
2-5
TNC 416/TNC 406
TNC 306
Encoders
HEIDENHAIN incremental linear encoders, optionally with distancecoded reference marks, grating period 0.01/0.02/0.1 mm (or rotary
encoders)
Control inputs
LE 406:
6 encoder inputs (4 sinusoidal,
2 square-wave inputs)
5 encoder inputs (4 sinusoidal,

1 square-wave input)
LE 416:
5 sinusoidal encoder inputs
1 analog input for eroding gap
signal
1 analog input for eroding gap

signal
1 input for electronic handwheel 1 input for electronic handwheel

1 input for short circuit
detection
56 PLC inputs + 1 input for
EMERGENCY STOP signal
Additional 64 PLC inputs on
PLC board PL 410 B (optional)
Control outputs
5 analog outputs for axes
1 input for short circuit detection

55 PLC inputs + 1 input for
EMERGENCY STOP signal
Additional 64 PLC inputs on PLC
board PL 410 B (optional)
4 analog outputs for axes
31 PLC outputs
Additional 31 PLC outputs on PLC board PL 410 B (optional)
Integral PLC
Programming according to instruction list, 4000 PLC commands

(Entry on HEIDENHAIN keyboard or over data interface)
Power supply for LE
24 Vdc
2-6
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
3/2000
Power consumption
Ambient temperature
Weight
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406
TNC 306
NC:
6W
PLC:
6W
BC110: 70W
BC120: 80W
BF 120: 15W
PL 410 B: 25 W (approx.)
NC:
Operation:
0 to 45 C
Storage:
30 to 70 C
LE 416
LE 406
TE 400
BC 110
BC 120
BF 120
PL 410 B
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
6 kg
8.5 kg
2.4 kg
11 kg
14 kg
3 kg
1.5 kg
27 W (approx.) with
BE 212
BF 110: 33 W
PLC:
2 4 W (approx.)
(BF 110: 0 to 40 C)
LE 360C
TE 355
BF 110
BE 212
PL 410 B
8 kg
1.6 kg
1.7 kg
11 kg
1.5 kg
2-7
3 Software
The logic unit contains separate software for the NC section and the PLC section.
The software is identified by an 8-digit number. After the control is switched on, the NC and
PLC software numbers are displayed on the screen. The software number can also be directly requested
with the aid of the MOD function.
3.1 NC Software
3.1.1 NC Software number
The 8-digit NC software number identifies the control model, the dialog language
(language of the country) and the software version.
2 8 6 1 8 x -01
Software type
TNC 416
National language
0= English
1= English 2= English
German
German
German
French
Swedish
Czech
talian
Finnish
res.
Software version
2 8 0 6 2 x -01
Software type
TNC 406
National language
0= English
1= English 2= English
German
German
German
French
Swedish
Czech
Italian
Finnish
res.
Software version
2 6 0 0 3 x -01
Software type
TNC 306
National language
0= English
1= Czech
2= French
3= Italian
Software version
In addition to the above languages the TNC 306 can always use German, which may be
selected via machine parameter MP7230.
2-8
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Software
3/2000
3.1.2 Software types and hardware

HEIDENHAIN has up to now offered several different versions of the LE 360 and LE 360C logic units
and a new LE 406. The following table shows which software type will run on which hardware
version. Since the TNC 306 and TNC 406 are not subject to export restrictions, special export
versions are not necessary.
Control
Hardware Id.-Nr.
Software type
TNC 416
336 487 3x (for flat panel display BF)

336 486 3x (for CRT color screen BC)
286 18x
TNC 406
288 513 15
280 62x
TNC 306 for BE 212

TNC 306 C for BE 212
TNC 306 C for BF 110
264 085 96
270 641 25
270 642 25
260 03x
260 03x
260 05x
3.1.3 Software releases

New NC software versions are periodically released by HEIDENHAIN.
Software version
Release date
TNC 416
286 18x-01
286 18x-02
286 18x-03
286 18x-04
3/99
4/99
4/99
2/2000
Software version
Release date
TNC 406
280 62x-01
280 62x-02
280 62x-03
280 62x-04
280 62x-05
280 62x-06
280 62x-07
280 62x-08
280 62x-09
280 62x-10
3/94
10/94
11/95
11/96
2/97
10/98
12/98
3/99
12/99
2/2000
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Software
2-9
Software version
TNC 306
260 03x-03
260 03x-04
260 03x-05
260 03x-06
260 03x-07
260 03x-08
260 03x-09
260 03x-10
260 03x-11
260 03x-12
260 03x-13
260 03x-14
260 03x-15
260 03x-16
Release date
2/92
3/93
8/93
11/93
3/94
6/94
6/94
11/94
2/95
6/95
11/95
2/96
11/96
1/97
Software version
TNC 306
260 05x-03
260 05x-04
260 05x-05
260 05x-06
260 05x-07
260 05x-08
260 05x-09
260 05x-10
260 05x-11
260 05x-12
260 05x-13
260 05x-14
260 05x-15
260 05x-16
Release date
2/92
3/93
8/93
11/93
3/94
6/94
6/94
11/94
2/95
6/95
11/95
2/96
11/96
1/97
3.2 PLC Software

The PLC software is produced by the machine manufacturer. Either HEIDENHAIN or the machine
manufacturer can store this software in EPROMs. HEIDENHAIN assigns PLC software numbers to
the machine manufacturers on request. HEIDENHAIN can archive the specific PLC programs in a
database, so that the installation of the correct PLC program is assured if a control has to be
exchanged.
2-10
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Software
3/2000
3.3 EPROM sockets

EPROM sockets LE 416
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Software
2-11
Danger of electrical shock!

Unplug the power cord before opening the housing.
Danger to internal components!
When handling components that can be damaged by electrostatic discharge (ESD),
observe the safety recommendations in DIN EN 100 015. Use only antistatic
packaging material. Be sure that the work station and the technician are properly
grounded during installation.
2-12
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Software
3/2000
Mounting and electrical installation Contents

1 Hardware components
1.1 Components of the TNC 416
34
34
34
34
1.4 Options
34
2 Installation
2.1 Electrical noise immunity
36
36
2.2 Heat generation and cooling
37
2.3 Humidity
38
2.4 Mechanical vibration
38
2.5 Mounting position
38
2.5.1
Logic unit
2.5.2
Visual display unit
2.5.3
PLC Input/Output board PL 410 B
39
312
312
2.6 Degree of protection
312
3 Overview of connections
313
4 Power supply
4.1 Overview
317
317
4.1.1
NC power supply
318
4.1.2
PLC power supply
319
4.1.3
Buffer battery
321
4.2 Power supply for the visual display unit
322
4.3 Grounding plans
324
4.3.1
Grounding plan TNC 416
324
4.3.2
325
4.3.3
326
5 Measuring systems
5.1 Linear measuring systems
329
329
5.2 Angular measuring systems
329
5.3 Measuring system inputs for sinusoidal signals
330
5.3.1
Connector assignments
330
5.4 Measuring system input for square-wave signals
332
5.4.1
Connector assignments
332
6 Nominal value output / Gap signal input

6.1 Connector assignment
333
334
7 Visual display unit (VDU)

337
337
3/99
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Hardware components
31
8 Short-circuit signal/Touch probe input

8.1 Connection of the short-circuit signals
340
341
8.2 Connection of the touch probe system
341
9 Data interface
9.1 RS-232-C/V.24 data interface
343
343
9.2 RS 422/V.11 data interface
344
10 Handwheel input
10.1 Portable handwheel HR 410
345
345
10.2 Panel-mounted handwheel HR 130
348
11 PLC inputs/outputs
11.1 Technical data
350
350
351
11.2.1
PLC output
352
11.3 PLC I/O expansion board PL 410 B
354
11.3.1
355
PLC inputs/PLC outputs on the PL 410 B
12 Machine control panel
358
13 TNC keyboard
360
14 Cable overview
14.1 Cable overview TNC 416
362
362
363
364
32
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Hardware components
3/99
15 Mounting dimensions
15.1 LE 416
366
366
15.2 LE 406
367
15.3 TE 420
368
15.4 TE 400
369
15.5 BC 120
370
15.6 BF 120
371
15.7 BC 110 B
372
15.7.1
373
LE 360 C
15.8 Keyboards for TNC 306
374
15.8.1
TE 355 A
374
15.8.2
TE 355 B
375
15.9 Visual display units for TNC 306
376
15.9.1
BE 212
376
15.9.2
BF 110
377
15.10
Input/Output boards PL 410B
378
15.11
Handwheel HR
379
15.11.1 Panel-mounted handwheel HR 130
379
15.11.2 Portable handwheels HR 410
383
15.11.3 Touchprobe system TS 220
383
15.12
384
3/99
Cable adapter
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Hardware components
33
1 Hardware components
LE 416 Logic Unit for BC 120
for BF 120
Id.-Nr. 336 486-3x

Id.-Nr. 336 487-3x
TE 420 Keyboard Unit
Id.-Nr. 313 038-01
BC 120 Visual Display Unit

(15-inch color monitor)
Id.-Nr. 313 037-01
BF 120 Visual Display Unit

(10.4-inch color flat panel display)
Id.-Nr. 313 506-01

LE 406 Logic
Id.-Nr. 288 513-19
Id.-Nr. 250 517-03
BC 110 B Visual Display Unit

Id.-Nr. 260 520-01

LE 306 Logic Unit for BE 212
for BF 110
Id.-Nr. 270 641-2x

Id.-Nr. 270 642-2x
TE 355A Keyboard Unit

TE 355 B Keyboard Unit
Id.-Nr. 255 015-06

Id.-Nr. 255 016-04

Id.-Nr. 267 209-01
(9-inch monochrome flat panel display)
BE 212 Visual Display Unit
(12-inch monochrome monitor)
Id.-Nr. 242 370-01
1.4 Options
PL 410 B PLC I/O board
Handwheel HR 410
Touch Probe System TS 220
34
Id. Nr. 263 371-12

Id. Nr. 296 469-01
Id. Nr. 293 488-xx
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Hardware components
3/99
3/99
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Hardware components
35
2 Installatio n
2.1 Electrical noise immunity
Please note that the vulnerability of electronic equipment to noise increases with faster signal
processing rates and higher sensitivity. Please protect your equipment by observing the following
rules and recommendations.
Noise voltages are mainly produced and transmitted by capacitive and inductive coupling. Electrical
noise can be picked up by the inputs and outputs to the equipment, and by the cabling.
Possible sources of interference are:
Strong magnetic fields from transformers and electric motors

Relays, contactors and solenoid valves
High-frequency equipment, pulse equipment and stray magnetic fields from switch-mode
power supplies
Mains leads and leads to the above equipment
Electrical interference can be avoided by:
A minimum distance between the logic unit (and its leads) and interfering equipment > 20 cm.
A minimum distance between the logic unit (and its leads) and cables carrying interference
signals > 10 cm.
(Where signal cables and cables which carry interference signals are laid together in metallic
ducting, adequate decoupling can be achieved by using a grounded separation shield)
Screening according to DIN VDE 0160.
Potential compensating lines 6 mm (see grounding plan).
Use of original HEIDENHAIN cables, connectors and couplings.
36
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Installation
3/99
2.2 Heat generation and cooling

Please note that the reliability of electronic equipment is greatly reduced by continuous operation at
elevated temperatures. Please take the necessary measures to maintain the permissible ambient
temperature range.
Permissible ambient temperature during operation: 0 to 45 C (BF 110: 0 to 40 C)
The following means may be employed to ensure adequate heat removal:
Provide sufficient space for air circulation.

Build in a ventilator fan to circulate the air inside the control cabinet. The fan must reinforce the
natural convection. It must be mounted so that the warm air is extracted from the logic unit
and no pre-warmed air is blown into the unit. The warm air should flow over surfaces
that have good thermal conductivity to the external surroundings (e.g. sheet metal).
For a closed steel housing without assisted cooling, the figure for heat conduction is 3 watt/m
of surface per C air temperature difference between inside and outside.
Use a heat exchanger with separate internal and external circulation.
Forced-air cooling by blowing external air through the control cabinet to replace the internal air. In
this case the ventilator fan must be mounted so that the warm air is extracted from the control
cabinet and only filtered air can be drawn in. HEIDENHAIN advises against this method of
cooling, since the functioning and reliability of electronic assemblies are adversely affected by
contaminated air (fine dust, vapors, etc.). In addition to these disadvantages, an inadequately
serviced filter can lead to a loss in cooling efficiency. Regular servicing is therefore essential.
Correct
Incorrect
LE
Obstructive
elements
LE
Heat generating
elements
3/99
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Installation
37
2.3 Humidity
Permissible humidity:
< 75% in continuous operation,

< 95% for not more than 30 days p.a. (randomly distributed).
In tropical areas it is recommended that the TNC remain permanently switched on to prevent
condensation on the circuit boards.
2.4 Mechanical vibration

Permissible vibration:
< 5 m/s2; 0-500 Hz
2.5 Mounting position

Note the following fundamental points on mounting:
Mechanical accessibility
Permissible environmental conditions
Electrical noise immunity
The electrical regulations which are in force in your country
38
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Installation
3/99
2.5.1 Logic unit

HEIDENHAIN recommends the following mounting position of LE 416
5.91"
>3.54"
Air outlet
>4.72"
Air inlet
>3.54"
7.87"
3/99
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Installation
39

>577
>110
80
80
40
40
C Air outlet
100
Minimum clearance
for servicing!
recommended: =
approx. 250 mm
*
30
*
Maintain clearance
for screwdriver
C
Air inlet
100
Connecting cables
must not hinder
swivel movement
of the control
30
160
246
160
C
30
60
83
Measuring point for

ambient temperature
Free space for air circulation
Free space for servicing
C
40
*
PL
C
32
Illustration of
max. swivel range.
The minimum angle of
swivel for exchange
of subassembly should
be at least 90.
145
40
270
40
310
40
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Installation
3/99
>577
>110
80
80
40
40
C
Air
outlet
*
30
100
Minimum clearance
for servicing!
recommended:=
approx. 250 mm
Maintain clearance
for screwdriver
Air
inlet
30
Connecting cables
must not hinder
swivel movement
of the control
218.5
100
160
132.5
C
30
60
83
Measuring point for

ambient temperature
Free space for air circulation
Free space for servicing
40
*
PL
C
32
Illustration of
max. swivel range.
The minimum angle of
swivel for exchange
of subassembly should
be at least 90.
145
40
270
40
3/99
40
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Installation
311
2.5.2 Visual display unit

Permissible ambient temperature:
BC 120/BC 110/BE 212/BF 120:
BF 110:
max. 45 C
max. 40 C
The VDU must be installed with a minimum clearance of 25 mm to the housing. It is particularly
recommended that a large area is left free above the unit for heat escape.
Temperature is measured at a distance of 25 mm to the housing. The above mentioned
temperatures must not be exceeded.
When installing the BC 120/BC 110/BE 212, remember that this VDU is very sensitive
to magnetic interference. The image position and geometry can be disturbed by stray
magnetic fields; alternating fields can cause periodic movement or image distortion.
For this reason, keep a minimum distance of 0.5 m between the VDU housing and sources of
interference (permanent magnets, motors, transformers, etc.)
2.5.3 PLC Input/Output board PL 410 B

One PL 410 B can be connected to the LE 406 or LE 360 C, if desired. There is no preferred
mounting position for heat removal.
2.6 Degree of protection

Visual display unit when mounted
Keyboard unit when mounted
HR 410 handwheel
Protection class IP54

IP54 = Protection against dust and splashwater
312
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Installation
3/99
3 Overview of connections
LE 416
X1
X2
X3
X4
X6
Measuring system 1 (1Vss/11A)

X8
Nominal value outputs 1,2,3,4,5,

gap signal input
X12
Triggering touch probe for workpiece

measurement
Triggering touch probe for tool
measurement
X13
X21
X22
RS-232-C/V24 data interface

RS-422/V11 data interface
X23
Handwheel interface
X41
X42
X43
X44
X45
X46
X47
X48
X49
120)
X31
PLC output
PLC input
BC 120 VDU (alternative to BF 120)
PLC power supply
TNC keyboard
PLC expansion
PLC analog input
BF 120 flat panel (alternative to BC
NC power supply
X13, X30 Do not use

X65
not installed
B
Signal ground
Protective ground (YL/GN)
Interfaces X1, X2, X3, X4, X6, X8, X12, X21, X22, X23, X41, X42, X43, X45, X46, X47, X49
comply with the recommendations in VDE 0160, 5. 88 for separation from line power.
Do not engage or disengage any connections while the unit is under power.
The outputs at connection X.... (indicate pin number if appropriate) are metallically isolated
from the device electronics by means of optocouplers.
3/99
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Overview of connections
313
LE 406
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
Measuring system 1 (11A)

)
Measuring system 5 (
Measuring system 6 (
)
X8
Nominal value outputs 1,2,3,4,5

gap signal input
X12
Touch probe system;

Short-circuit signal input
X21
X22
Data interface RS-232-C/V.24

Data interface RS-422/V.11
X22
X23
Electronic handwheel HR 130/HR 410
X23
X41
X42
X43
X45
X46
X47
PLC output
PLC input
VDU BC 110
TNC keyboard TE 400
PLC I/O board PL 410 B
X31
X44
Power supply 24 V for NC

Power supply 24 V for PLC
Signal ground
X1
X12
24V
X2
X44
X41 X45
X8
X31
X3
X21
X4
X42 X46
X5
X6
X47
X43
Interfaces X1, X2, X3, X4, X5, X6, X8, X12, X21, X22, X23, X41, X42, X43, X45, X46 and X47
comply with the recommendations in VDE 0160, 5. 88 for separation from line power.
314
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
3/99
LE 306
X21 X24
X1
X2
X3
X4
X6

)
Measuring system (
X25
X8
Nominal value outputs 1,2,3,4;

gap signal input
X9
VDU BE212/BF110
X11
Electronic handwheel HR 130/HR 410
X12
Touch probe system
X1
X11
24V
X2
X12
X31
X3
X4
X22
X8
X26
Short-circuit signal input

X6
X23 X27
X9
X21
X22
X23
X25
X26
X27
PLC output
PLC input
TNC keyboard TE355
Data interface RS-232-C/V.24
PLC I/O board PL 410 B
X31
X24
Power supply 24 V for NC

Power supply 24 V for PLC
Signal ground
Interfaces X1, X2, X3, X4, X6, X8, X9, X11, X12, X21, X22, X23, X25, X26, and X27 comply
with the recommendations in VDE 0160, 5. 88 for separation from line power.
3/99
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
315
316
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
3/99
4 Power supp ly
4.1 Overview
The supply voltages must meet the following specifications:
Unit
Supply
voltage
Voltage range
LE 416
400 Vac
330 Vac 450 Vac
24 V DC
(VDE 0551)
lower limit
LE 406
LE 306
NC
Max. current
consumption
Power
consumption
35 W
LE 406 1.3 A
LE 306 1.5 A
24 W
28.8 to 36 W
(the BE 212 is
also supplied)
1.8 A
when half of the
inputs/ outputs
are switched on
simultaneously
Approx. 6 W
when approx. 1/3 of
inputs/ outputs are
switched on
simultaneously
PL 410 B
21 A
when half of the
inputs/ outputs
are switched on
simultaneously
Approx. 25 W
when approx. 1/3 of
inputs/ outputs are
switched on
simultaneously
BF 110
24 W typical
Approx. 1 A
with full display 32 W max.
BF 120
24 W typical
Approx. 1 A
with full display
20.4 V - - -
upper limit
PLC
BC 110
BC 120
BE 212
24 V DC
31 V - - - 1)
Base
insulation acc.
to VDE 0160)
110 V / 230 V 85 - 132 V/170 -264 V

110 V / 230 V 85 264 V
Powered through the LE 306
70 W
80 W
1) Voltage surges up to 36 V - - - for t < 100 ms are permissible.
3/99
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Power supply
317
4.1.1 NC power supply

LE 416
Terminal
X31
Assignment
Protective ground (YL/GN)
U1
Phase 1
330 Vac to 450 Vac;
U2
Phase 2
50 to 60 Hz
UZ
Do not use
+UZ
Do not use
LE 406/LE 306
Pin number
X 31
Assignment
1
2
+ 24 V DC
0V
The NC section of the LE must not be supplied

from the control voltage of the machine. It
requires its individual, external and separately
generated supply voltage according to
VDE 0551. Use 24 V DC with a permissible AC
component of 1.5 Vpp (recommended filter
capacitor 10 000 F/40 V DC).
U
1.5 Vpp
24 V
318
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Power supply
3/99
4.1.2 PLC power supply

Power supply for the PLC on board
LE 416/LE 406
LE 306
Pin number
1
2
3
X44
X24
Assignment
+ 24 V DC, switched off by EMERGENCY STOP
+ 24 V DC, not switched off by EMERGENCY STOP
0V
Power supply for the PL 410 B

The PLC outputs are powered in groups.
Terminal
X9
X10
X11
X12
X13
X14
Assignment
0V
+24 V power for logic and for "Control is operational"
+24 V power for outputs
PLC output
O32 to O39
O40 to O47
O48 to O55
O56 to O62
The PLC inputs and outputs on the LE and PL 410 B are powered by the 24 V machine control voltage
supply.
Voltage sources for external circuitry must conform to the recommendations in VDE
0160, 5. 88 for low-voltage electrical separation.
Superimposed AC components, such as those caused by a three-phase bridge rectifier without smoothing,
are permissible up to a ripple factor of 5% (see DIN 40110/10.75, Section 1.2). This means an absolute
upper voltage limit of 32.6 V and an absolute lower voltage limit of 18.5 V:
U
32.6 V
31 V
20.4 V
18.5 V
The 0 V line of the PLC power supply must be grounded with a ground lead ( 6 mm2) to the main
signal ground of the machine.
3/99
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Power supply
319
320
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Power supply
3/99
4.1.3 Buffer battery

The buffer battery is the voltage source for the RAM memory for NC-programs, PLC-programs
and machine parameters when the control is switched off.
If the message "EXCHANGE BUFFER BATTERY" appears, the batteries must be exchanged.
The 3 batteries may be found behind a screw cap in the power supply section of the logic unit.
As well as the batteries, the logic unit contains an additional energy store, mounted on the
processor board, for buffering the memory contents.
This means that the mains can be switched off when replacing the batteries. The energy
store will ensure that the memory is retained while the batteries are exchanged.
LE 416
Battery type:
Three AA-size batteries, leak-proof
IEC designation: LR6
LE 406/LE306
Battery type:
Three AA-size batteries, leak-proof
IEC designation: LR6

Power of before opening the housing.
3/99
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Power supply
321
4.2 Power supply for the visual display unit

BC 120
Mains supply voltage
Supply voltage range 85 V to 264 V
Fuse rating
F 3.15 A
Frequency range
50 to 60 Hz
Power consumption
80 W
BC 110
X3 = Mains supply connection
Mains supply voltage 110 V
220 V
Supply voltage range 85V to 132 V
170V to 264 V
Fuse rating
F 3.15 A
F 3.15 A
Frequency range
50 to 60 Hz
Power consumption
70 W
Connection
L1
N
Assignment
Live (BK)
Neutral (BL)
Protective earth (GN/YL)
X4 = DC connections (only for BC 110, Id.-Nr. 254 740 01)

Pin Number
1
2
Assignment
Do not use
Do not use
Power supply for integral fan:

The power supply for the fan must be connected separately to the BC 110 (Id.-Nr. 254 740 01).
The connection to the +24 V machine control voltage must be according to VDE 0550.
Permissible voltage range +18 to +28 V; power consumption 5 W at +24 V DC.
The power supply for the fan is taken internally from the main supply voltage.
BE 212
The BE 212 visual display unit is powered through the LE 306 (connector X9).
The BE 212 and BC 110 generate high voltages.
Unplug the power cord before opening the housing.
322
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Power supply
3/99
BF 120/BF 110
X1 power supply
Pin number
1
2
Assignment
+ 24 V
0V

Voltage sources of external circuitry must conform to the recommendations in VDE
0160, 5. 88 for low-voltage electrical separation.
3/99
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Power supply
323
4.3 Grounding plans

4.3.1 Grounding plan TNC 416

Connect a protective ground. This connection must never be interrupted.
3/99
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Grounding plans
324

3/99
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Grounding plans
325

3/99
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Grounding plans
326
3/99
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Power supply
327
328
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Power supply
3/99
5 Measuring systems
HEIDENHAIN contouring controls are designed for the installation of incremental linear and angular
measuring systems.
The control measures the actual position with a measuring step of 0.001 mm or 0.001. Measuring
systems with a graduation period of 0.001 mm or 0.001 to 1 mm or 1 may be used.
It does not matter whether the measuring system has one or several reference marks. However,
HEIDENHAIN recommends measuring systems with distance-coded reference marks, since this
reduces the traversing distance when homing on the reference marks to a minimum. See chapter
"Machine Integration."
5.1 Linear measuring systems

Measurement of length is best performed by a linear measuring system. Insofar as it is compatible
with the accuracy requirements, linear measurement can also be made using a rotary encoder on
the ballscrew.
HEIDENHAIN recommends use of the following linear measuring systems:
LS 103 C, LS 106 C, LS 405 C, LS 406 C, LS 706 C, LB 326, ULS 300 C
For linear measurement using a rotary encoder and a ballscrew it would be possible to use, for
example, the ROD 450.
5.2 Angular measuring systems

For direct angular measurement in the A, B or C axes the following incremental angular measuring
systems are available: ROD 250 C, ROD 700 C, RON 255 C, and RON 705 C.
To meet accuracy requirements HEIDENHAIN recommends line counts of at least 18 000.
3/99
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Measuring systems
329
5.3 Measuring system inputs for sinusoidal signals

The LE 406/LE306 can have measuring systems with sinusoidal inputs 11 APP.
The LE 416 can have measuring systems with sinusoidal inputs 11 APP or 1VPP switched over via
MP115.0.
MP115.0 Axis-specific encoder setting 11A or 1VPP (LE 416)
Input:
%xxxxx
0 = 1VPP
1 = 11A
Maximum input frequency LE 416

The maximum input frequency of the position encoder inputs of LE 416 depends on MP115.2.
MP115.2 Low/high input frequency of the position encoder inputs (LE 416)
Input:
%xxxxx
0 = 50 kHz for 1VPP; 50 kHz for 11A
1 = 350 kHz for 1VPP; 150 kHz for 11A
(recommended input value for linear encoders 50 kHz)
Maximum input frequency LE 406 50 kHz
Maximum input frequency LE 306 30 kHz
5.3.1 Connector assignments

LE 406/LE306
X1, X2, X3, X4 measuring system 1, 2, 3, 4
Flange socket with female connector insert (9-pin)
Pin number
Assignment
I1+
I1
I2+
I2
I0+
I0
+ 5 V (UP)
0 V (UN)
Inner shield
Housing
Outer shield = unit housing
330
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Measuring systems
3/99
LE 416
X1, X2, X3, X4 and X6 Encoder (1 VPP/11A)
Logic unit
Encoder cable
D-sub
terminal
(male) 15-pin
Assignment
1 VPP
Assignment
11A
D-sub
connector
(female) 15pin
1 VPP
11A
+ 5 V (UP)
+5V
Brown/Green
Brown
0 V (UN)
0V
White/Green
White
A+
I1+
Brown
Green
I1
Green
Yellow
0V
0V
B+
I2+
Gray
Blue
I2
Pink
Red
0V
0V
+5V
+5V
Blue
10
R+
I0+
10
Red
11
0V
0V
11
White
12
I0
12
Black
13
0V
0V
13
14
Do not use
Do not use
14
15
Do not use
Do not use
15
Housing
External
shield
External shield Housing
3/99
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
White/Brown
(internal shield)
Gray
Pink
Violet
External shield
Measuring systems
External shield
331
5.4 Measuring system input for square-wave signals

One measuring system with square-wave signals can be connected to the LE 306 at input X6, two
such systems can be connected to the LE 406 at input X5 and X6.
The maximum input frequency:
LE 406 300 kHz
LE 306 200 kHz
5.4.1 Connector assignments

X5 (only LE 406), X6 measuring system 5, 6 (only LE 406/LE 306)
Flange socket with female insert (12-pin)
Pin number
Assignment
Ua1
Ua1
Ua2
Ua2
Ua0
Ua0
UaS
+ 5 V (UP)
12
+ 5 V (UP)
11
0 V (UN)
10
0 V (UN)
9 (contact spring)
shield = housing
Use only HEIDENHAIN measuring system cables, connectors and couplings.
332
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Measuring systems
3/99
6 Nominal v alue output / Gap signal input

Nominal value output
The HEIDENHAIN contouring controls regulate the position loop servo with a nominal value potential
of 10 volts.
Maximum loading of the nominal value outputs: 2 mA
Maximum load capacitance: 2 nF
Gap signal input
The gap signal (voltage) is connected to analog input X8 of the logic unit. The gap signal voltage
must be between 0V and + 5V. The TNC uses the gap signal to calculate new nominal values for the
analog outputs. (For a detailed description, see "Gap control").
The following RC circuit is integrated in the logic unit at the analog input for filtering of surge pulses
and for storing the analog signal.
LE
Ra
X8 Pin 2 220
0V
Pin 10
100 nF
Time constant:
T = 22 s (220 100 F)
5T = 110 s
Since the output impedance Ra of the driver stage affects the entire time constant, a low output
impedance is necessary (for example 33 ).
3/99
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Nominal value output / Gap signal input 333

X8 nominal value output/Gap signal input
D-sub connector (15-pin female insert)
X8 Nominal Value Output
Logic unit
Connecting Cable
D-sub terminal
(female) 15-pin
Assignment
D-sub
connector
(male) 15-pin
Color
Nominal value output 1
BN
Analog input, gap signal
BN/GN
YL
RD/BL
PK
0V Nominal value output 5
GY/PK
RD
VI
WH
10
0V Analog input
10
WH/GY
11
11
GN
12
Not used
12
13
13
GY
14
14
BL
15
15
BK
Housing
External shield
Housing
External shield
No more than one intermediate terminal clamp is allowed on the connecting cable to the nominal
value outputs. The clamp must be made in a grounded connection box. This is necessary when the
cable must branch to physically separate servo inputs. It is only possible to ground the shielding of
the servo leads in this way. If required, suitable connection boxes are available from HEIDENHAIN
with the Id.-Nr. 251 249 01.
Connection box
The casing of the connection box must be electrically connected with the frame of the machine.
The 0 V of the nominal value differential input must be joined to signal ground, (cable cross-section
6 mm, see also under "Grounding plan").
334
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Nominal value output / Gap signal input 3/99
Suggested solution for connecting and wiring the shielding in the connection box:
Insulated against housing
LE
Leads are provided

with end sleeves.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
IV
S
GAP
SERVO
Pin number
Assignment
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
11
12
13
14
15
16
Analog output
Analog output 0V
Analog output
Analog output 0V
Analog output
Analog output 0V
Analog output
Analog output 0V
Analog input
Analog input 0V
Screen connection
Screen connection
Screen connection
Screen connection
3/99
Cable screens are led onto 0.14 mm2

insulated strands via crimp eyelets.
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
X-axis
X-axis
Y-axis
Y-axis
Z-axis
Z-axis
IVth axis
IVth axis
Gap signal
Gap signal
Nominal value output / Gap signal input 335
6 Nominal value output / Gap signal input
336
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Nominal value output / Gap signal input 3/99
7 Visual disp lay unit (VDU)

The LE 406 is prepared for connecting the BC 110 CRT screen, the LE 306C for connecting the BE
212 CRT screen or BF 110 flat luminescent screen. The status is indicated by the Id.-Nr. on the ID
label (Id.-Nr. 270 641 for BE 212 and Id.-Nr. 270 642 for BF 110).

X9 Visual display unit BE 212 and BF 110
X43 Visual display unit BC 110
Flange socket with female insert
Pin number
1
BE 212
0 V power supply
BF 110
BC 110
GND
+12 V power supply
Not used
Not used
Not used
Not used
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Housing
+12 V power supply

Not used
Not used
0 V power supply
V SYNC
H SYNC1
0 V Signal
Video
3/99
Not used
Not used
Video
V SYNC
0 V Signal
H SYNC 2
CLOCK
Outer shield = Unit housing
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Not used
Not used
Not used
R
GND
V SYNC
H SYNC1
GND
Not used
Not used
G
B
Visual display unit (VDU)
BC 120
R
Do not use
Do not use
GND
GND
GND
Do not use
GND
GND
Do not use
HSYNC
VSYNC
Do not use
337
X49 Visual Display Unit BF 120 (option for LE 416)

Logic unit
Connecting cable Id. Nr.312 875../Extension cable
BF 120
Id. Nr.312 876.. or Connecting cable Id.-Nr.312 874..

D-sub connector
D-sub connector
(female) 62-pin
(male) 62-pin
(female) 62-pin
(male) 62-pin 3-row
3-row
3-row
3-row
D-sub terminal
Assignment
D-sub connector
Assignment
0 volt
CLK.P
HSYNC
BLANK
VSYNC
0 volt
R0
R1
R2
10
R3
10
10
10
11
0 volt
11
11
11
12
G0
12
12
12
13
G1
13
13
13
14
G2
14
14
14
15
G3
15
15
15
16
0 volt
16
16
16
17
B0
17
17
17
18
B1
18
18
18
19
B2
19
19
19
20
B3
20
20
20
21
0 volt
21
21
21
22
0 volt
22
22
22
23
CLK.P
23
23
23
24
HSYNC
24
24
24
25
BLANK
25
25
25
26
VSYNC
26
26
26
27
0 volt
27
27
27
28
R0
28
28
28
29
R1
29
29
29
30
R2
30
30
30
31
R3
31
31
31
32
0 volt
32
32
32
33
G0
33
33
33
34
G1
34
34
34
35
G2
35
35
35
338
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
3/99
D-sub terminal
D-sub connector
D-sub connector
(female) 62-pin
Assignment
D-sub connector
(male) 62-pin
Assignment
(female) 62-pin
(male) 62-pin 3-row
3-row
3-row
3-row
36
G3
36
36
36
37
0 volt
37
37
37
38
B0
38
38
38
39
B1
39
39
39
40
B2
40
40
40
41
B3
41
41
41
42
0 volt
42
42
42
43
DISP.LOW
43
43
43
44
DISP.LOW
44
44
44
45
DISP.ON
45
45
45
46
DISP.ON
46
46
46
47
C0
47
47
47
48
C1
48
48
48
49
C2
49
49
49
50
C3
50
50
50
51
C4
51
51
51
52
C5
52
52
52
53, 54, 55, 56, 57,
Do not use
53, 54, 55, 56, 57,
53, 54, 55, 56, 57,
53, 54, 55, 56, 57,
58, 59, 60, 61, 62
58, 59, 60, 61, 62
58, 59, 60, 61, 62
Housing
Housing
58, 59, 60, 61, 62

Housing
3/99
External shield
Housing
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
External shield
339
8 Short-circ uit signal/Touch probe input

This input allows detection of short circuits during the eroding process (see the chapter "Machine
integration", section "Gap control with feed forward control"). In addition, workpieces can be
measured or set up electronically with the manual or programmable probing functions (see the
User's Manual for the TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306).
Either electrodes or 3D probe systems TS 220 from HEIDENHAIN can be used for such functions.
For start-up and adjustment of the "Probing" function or of a 3D-touch probe system, see the chapter
"Machine integration."
X12 Short circuit signal/Touch probe system TS 220

Flange socket with female connector insert (15-pin)
Pin number
Signal designation
Inner shield (0 V)
Ready/standby
Start
+15 V 10 % (UP)
+ 5 V 5 % (UP)
Battery warning
0 V (UN)
Trigger signal
10
Trigger signal
2, 11 to 15
not used
340
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Short-circuit signal/Touch probe input
3/99
8.1 Connection of the short-circuit signals

The short-circuit signal line must be connected according to the diagram, otherwise a short-circuit
message will result. If you do not wish evaluation of the short-circuit signal, set PLC Marker M2622
(see chapter "Machine integration", section "Gap control with feed forward control ").
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Short-circuit-signal1)
2.2 k
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Standby
+15V 10% (U P)
+ 5V 5% (U P)
Battery warning
0V (UN)
Trigger signal
1)
Trigger signal
1) Contact closed means no short circuit, HIGH level on pin 10
8.2 Connection of the touch probe system

The TS 220 touch probe systems are connected directly to the logic unit via a cable adapter.
See also section "Cable overview".
TS220 Id. Nr. 293 488 ..

(TS120 Id. Nr. 265 348 ..)
Adapter cable Id. Nr.274 543
D-sub
connector
(male) 15-pin
Coupling on
mounting base
6-pin
Quick
disconnect
6-pin
Gray
Pink
Gray
Brown/Green
Brown
Gray
Gray
White/Green
White
Green
Green
10
Yellow
Yellow
Housing
External shield Housing
Housing
External shield
3/99
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
341
342
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
3/99
9 Data inter face

9.1 RS-232-C/V.24 data interface
HEIDENHAIN guarantees that, if properly connected, the serial data interface RS-232-C/V.24 will
transmit data correctly up to a distance of 20 m between the logic unit and the peripheral unit.
The connection to the peripheral unit is made via a cable adapter which is attached to either the
operating console or the control cabinet. See also section "Cable overview".
For connection to the peripheral unit HEIDENHAIN offers a standard connecting cable
(Id.-Nr. 274 545 01), length 3 m.
LE 416/LE 406 X21
LE 306
D-sub
X25
Connecting cable
Adapter block
Id. Nr. 239 760 ..
Id. Nr. 239 758 01
Connecting cable
Id. Nr. 274 545 01
D-sub
D-sub
D-sub
D-sub
D-sub
D-sub
terminal
connector
connector
terminal
terminal
connector
connector
(female)
(male)
(female) 25-
(male)
(female)
(male)
(female)
25-pin
25-pin
pin
25-pin
25-pin
25-pin
25-pin
Assignment
GND
WH/BN
WH/BN
External
External
shield
shield
RXD
Green
Yellow
TXD
Yellow
Green
CTS
Gray
Pink
RTS
Pink
Gray
DTR
Blue
20
20
20
20
Brown
Signal GND
Red
Red
20
DSR
20
Brown
Blue
20
8 to 19,
Do not use
Housing
Housing
Housing
Housing
21 to 25
Housing External
shield
Housing
External
shield
External
shield
Housing
The interface complies with the recommendations in IEC 742 EN 50 178 for separation from
line power.
If your peripheral unit has a connector layout that differs from the above, the HEIDENHAIN
connecting cable cannot be used.
3/99
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Data interface
343
9.2 RS 422/V.11 data interface

The RS-422/V.11 data interface is only integrated in the logic unit LE 416 and LE 406. It is
designated to control the generator.
If used correctly, the RS-422/V.11 serial data interface will ensure error-free data transmission up to
a distance of 1000 m between logic unit and peripheral unit.
The connection to the peripheral unit is made via a cable adapter which is attached to either the
operating console or the control cabinet. See also under the heading "Mounting dimensions" and
Cable Overview.
The cable adapter Id.-Nr. 249 819 01 is connected to the logic unit with the HEIDENHAIN
connecting cable Id.-Nr. 250 478 ..
LE416/LE 406 X22
D-sub
Adapter Block
Id. Nr. 289 208 ..
Id. Nr. 311 086 01
D-sub
D-sub
D-sub
D-sub
terminal
connector
connector
terminal
terminal
(female)
(male)
(female)
(male)
(female)
15-pin
15-pin
15-pin
15-pin
15-pin
Assignment
Connecting Cable
Chassis GND
Black
External
shield
RXD
Blue
CTS
Gray
TXD
White
RTS
Green
DSR
White/Green
DTR
Green/Pink
Signal GND
Black
RXD
Red
10
CTS
10
Pink
10
10
10
11
TXD
11
Brown
11
11
11
12
RTS
12
Yellow
12
12
12
13
DSR
13
Brown/Green 13
13
13
14
DTR
14
Red/Blue
14
14
14
15
Do not assign
15
Violet
15
15
15
Housing
External
Housing
Housing
Housing
Housing
shield
The interfaces complies with the recommendations in IEC 742 EN 50 178 for separation
from line power.
The following cable type must be used for the connection to the peripheral unit:
LIYCY 7 x 2 x 0.14 Cu
344
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Data interface
3/99
10 Handwhee l input
The HR 130, HR 410 handwheels can be connected to the TNC 416/TNC 406 and
TNC 306. See also chapter "Machine Integration."
LE 416/LE 406 connector X23
LE 306 connector X11
Pin number
LE X23 or X11
CTS
0 V (UN)
RTS
+ 12 V (UP)
DTR
TxD
RxD
DSR
Housing
Outer shield
10.1 Portable handwheel HR 410

The HR 410 is a portable electronic handwheel with:
Five axis-selection keys
Two traverse direction keys
Three keys with predefined traverse speeds (slow, medium, fast)
Actual-position-capture key
Three keys for machine functions to be determined by the machine tool builder
Two permissive keys
EMERGENCY STOP button
Holding magnets
3/99
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Handwheel input
345
Dummy plug for EMERGENCY STOP circuit (option)

Connecting cable (spiral cable)
Connecting cable (normal cable)
Connecting cable (with metal armor)
Id. Nr. 271 958 03

Id. Nr. 312 879 01
Id. Nr. 296 467 ..
Id. Nr. 296 687 ..
Extension cable
Adapter cable
Connecting cable
HR 410
Id. Nr. 281 429..
Id. Nr. 296 466..
Id. Nr. 296 467 05
Id. Nr. 296 469 01
D-sub
D-sub
D-sub
Coupling
Connec-
Connec-
Connec-
connec-
connec-
connec-
on mount-
tor
tor
tor
tor
tor
tor
ing base
(male)
(female)
(male)
(male)
(female)
(male)
(female)
18-pin
18-pin
18-pin
9-pin
9-pin
9-pin
18-pin
Housing
Shield
Housing
Housing
Shield
Housing
Housing
Shield
Housing
Housing
White
White
White
Brown
Brown
Brown
Yellow
Yellow
Yellow
Gray
Gray
Gray
Green
Green
Green
WH/BK
YL/BK
WH/RD 5
WH/BL
WH/GN 2
WH/YL
WH/BN 1
WH/BN 3
Contact 1 + 2
WH/YL
Contact 2 (left)
WH/GN 1
Contact 1 (right)
WH/BL
Contact 1
WH/RD 2
Contact 1
YL/BK
Contact 2
WH/BK
Contact 2
Shield
Permissive button
EMERGENCY STOP
The adapter includes plug-in terminal strips for the contacts of the EMERGENCY STOP button and
permissive button (maximum load 1.2 A, 24 V).
346
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Handwheel input
3/99
Internal wiring of contacts to permissive buttons and EMERGENCY STOP button of the HR 410:
Right
Left
The plug-in terminal strips are included in delivery with the adapter cable. If you have an immediate
need for these terminal strips before the adapter cable, they can be ordered separately:
Plug-in terminal strip, 3-pin
Id. Nr. 266 364 06
Plug-in terminal strip, 4-pin
Id. Nr. 266 364 12
3/99
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Handwheel input
347
10.2 Panel-mounted handwheel HR 130

The HR 130 is the panel-mount version of the HR 330 without axis keys, rapid traverse keys, etc. It
is connected to the logic unit directly or by extension cable.
The HR 130 is available in various versions (standard cable length 1 meter):
Small knob, axial cable outlet: Id. Nr. 254 040 01
Small knob, radial cable outlet: Id. Nr. 254 040 02
Large knob, axial cable outlet: Id. Nr. 254 040 03
Large knob, radial cable outlet: Id. Nr. 254 040 04
Ergonomic knob, radial cable outlet:
Id. Nr. 254 040 05
(See also the "Dimensions" section in the Appendix)
Extension cable Id. Nr. 281 429 ..
D-sub connector
(male) 9-pin
HR 130 Id. Nr. 254 040 ..
D-sub connector
(female) 9-pin
D-sub connector
(male) 9-pin
Housing
Shield
Housing
Housing
Shield
White
White
Brown
Brown
Yellow
Yellow
Green
Green
Gray
348
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Handwheel input
3/99
3/99
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Handwheel input
349
11 PLC input s/outputs

The HEIDENHAIN contouring control TNC 416/TNC 406 has a capacity of max. 56 PLC inputs and 31
PLC outputs, the TNC 306 has a capacity of max. 55 PLC inputs and 31 PLC outputs.
These, PLC inputs and PLC outputs can be connected directly to the logic unit.
In addition, one PLC I/O-board PL 410 B, with 64 PLC inputs and 31 PLC outputs, can be connected
to the logic unit.
11.1 Technical data

PLC inputs
PL 410B/logic unit
Potential range:
1-signal: Ue
0-signal: Ue
Current range:
1-signal: Ie
0-signal: Ie
13 V to 30.2 V
20 V to 3.2 V
3.8 mA to 8.9 mA
1.0 mA at Ue = 3.2 V
PLC outputs
Open-collector outputs with current limiting
Logic unit
Min. output potential
for 1-signal
Nominal operating
current per output
PL 410B
3 V below supply voltage

0.1 A
1.2 A

Connect inductive loads only with a quenching diode parallel to the inductance.
It is not permissible to short-circuit more than one output from the logic unit simultaneously.
A short-circuit of one output will not cause an overload.
350
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
PLC inputs/outputs
3/99

The PLC inputs I128 to I151 are on connector X46 (LE 416/LE 406) or X27 (LE 306) for the machine
control panel.
LE416/LE 406 connector X42
Con. cable Id.-Nr 244 005 .. / Id. Nr. 263 954

..
D-sub connector
(female) 37-pin
Assignment
D-sub connector
(male) 37-pin
I0
Gray/Red
I1
Brown/Black
I2
White/Black
I3 acknowledge "control-is-ready"; main processor
Green/Black
I4
Brown/Red
I5
White/Red
I6
White/Green
I7
Red/Blue
I8
Yellow/Red
10
I9
10
Gray/Pink
11
I10
11
Black
12
I11
12
Pink/Brown
13
I12
13
Yellow/Blue
14
I13
14
Green/Blue
15
I14
15
Yellow
16
I15
16
Red
17
I16
17
Gray
18
I17
18
Blue
19
I18
19
Pink
20
I19
20
White/Gray
21
I20
21
Yellow/Gray
22
I21
22
Green/Red
23
I22
23
White/Pink
24
I23
24
Gray/Green
25
I24
25
Yellow/Brown
26
I25
26
Gray/Brown
27
I26
27
Yellow/Black
28
I27
28
White/Yellow
29
I28
29
Gray/Blue
30
I29
30
Pink/Blue
31
I30
31
Pink/Red
32
I31
32
Brown/Blue
33
Do not use
33
Pink/Green
34
Do not use
34
Brown
35
Do not use
35
Yellow/Pink
36
Do not use
36
Violet
37
Do not use
37
White
Housing
External shield
Housing
External shield
3/99
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
PLC inputs/outputs
351
11.2.1 PLC output

The PLC outputs O0 to O7 are also to be found on the connector X46 (LE416/LE 406) or X27
(LE 306) for the machine control panel. See also section "Machine control panel."
LE 416/LE406 X41
LE 306
X21
Connecting cable
Id. Nr 244 005 .. / Id. Nr. 263 954 ..
D-sub terminal
(female) 37-pin
Assignment
D-sub connector
(male) 37-pin
O0
O1
Brown/Black
O2
White/Black
O3
Green/Black
O4
Brown/Red
O5
White/Red
O6
White/Green
O7
Red/Blue
O8
Yellow/Red
Gray/Red
10
O9
10
Gray/Pink
11
O10
11
Black
12
O11
12
Pink/Brown
13
O12
13
Yellow/Blue
14
O13
14
Green/Blue
15
O14
15
Yellow
16
O15
16
Red
17
O16
17
Gray
18
O17
18
Blue
19
O18
19
Pink
20
O19
20
White/Gray
21
O20
21
Yellow/Gray
22
O21
22
Green/Red
23
O22
23
White/Pink
24
O23
24
Gray/Green
25
O24
25
Yellow/Brown
26
O25
26
Gray/Brown
27
O26
27
Yellow/Black
28
O27
28
White/Yellow
29
O28
29
Gray/Blue
30
O29
30
Pink/Blue
31
O30
31
Pink/Red
32
Do not use
32
Brown/Blue
33
Do not use
33
Pink/Green
34
Control-is-ready signal
34
Brown
35
24 V (PLC) test output; Do not use
35
Yellow/Pink
36
36
Violet
37
37
White
Housing
External shield
Housing
External shield
352
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
PLC inputs/outputs
3/99
3/99
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
PLC inputs/outputs
353
11.3 PLC I/O expansion board PL 410 B

One PL 410 B board with 64 PLC inputs, 31 PLC outputs and the "Control is operational" output can
be connected to the logic unit. The PL 410 B can be mounted directly on the logic unit. See section
"Power supply" for the power connection.
Connecting cable Id. Nr. 289 111 ..
1st PL 410 B

X47 D-sub
D-sub
D-sub
X1 D-sub
terminal
connector
connector
terminal
(male)
(female)
(male)
(female)
25-pin
25-pin
25-pin
25-pin
0V
0V
0V
Serial IN 2
Address 6
Assignment
0V
Brown, Yellow, Pink, Red,
Assignment
Violet
2
0V
Red/Blue, Brown/Green,
Yellow/Brown, Gray/Brown,
Pink/Brown
0V
Brown/Blue, Brown/Red,
Brown /Black, Yellow/Gray,
Yellow/Pink
Do not use
Address 6
White/Green
INTERRUPT
Pink/Green
INTERRUPT
RESET
Green/Blue
RESET
WRITE EXTERNAL
White/Blue
Gray/Green
WRITE
EXTERNAL
WRITE EXTERNAL
White/Red
WRITE EXTERNAL
10
Address 5
10
Gray/Pink
10
10
Address 5
11
Address 3
11
Blue
11
11
Address 3
12
Address 1
12
Green
12
12
Address 1
13
Do not use
13
13
13
Do not use
14
PCB identifier 4
14
14
14
+ 12 V
15
15
+ 12 V
Yellow/Blue, Pink/Blue,
Yellow/Black
15
PCB identifier 3
15
Yellow/Red, Gray/Red,
Pink/Red
16
Do not use
16
Gray/Blue
16
16
PCB identifier 2
17
Do not use
17
Green/Black
17
17
PCB identifier 1
18
Address 7
18
White/Yellow
18
18
Address 7
19
Serial IN 1
19
White/Black
19
19
Serial IN 1
20
EMERGENCY STOP
20
Green/Red
20
20
EMERGENCY STOP
21
Serial OUT
21
White/Gray
21
21
Serial OUT
22
Serial OUT
22
White/Pink
22
22
Serial OUT
23
Address 4
23
Black
23
23
Address 4
24
Address 2
24
Gray
24
24
Address 2
25
Address 0
25
White
25
25
Address 0
Housing
External shield
Housing
External shield
Housing
Housing
External shield
354
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
PLC inputs/outputs
3/99
11.3.1 PLC inputs/PLC outputs on the PL 410 B

The PLC inputs and outputs on the PL 410 B are distributed over 6 switches. The 16-pin connectors
are arranged in vertical pairs.
PLC inputs
X3
X4
Pin number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Assignment
I64
I65
I66
I67
I68
I69
I70
I71
I72
I73
I74
I75
I76
I77
I78
I79
X5
Assignment
I80
I81
I82
I83
I84
I85
I86
I87
I88
I89
I90
I91
I92
I93
I94
I95
X6
Pin number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
3/99
Pin number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Assignment
I96
I97
I98
I99
I100
I101
I102
I103
I104
I105
I106
I107
I108
I109
I110
I111
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Pin number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Assignment
I112
I113
I114
I115
I116
I117
I118
I119
I120
I121
I122
I123
I124
I125
I126
I127
PLC inputs/outputs
355
PLC outputs
Assignment of the grouped power supply:
Terminal
X9
X10
X11
X12
X13
X14
Assignment
0V
+24V PL supply and "Control is operational"
+24 V Supply
O32 - O39
+24 V Supply
O40 - O47
+24 V Supply
O48 - O55
+24 V Supply
O56 - O62
X7
X8
Pin number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Assignment
O32
O33
O34
O35
O36
O37
O38
O39
O40
O41
O42
O43
O44
O45
O46
O47
Pin number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Assignment
O48
O49
O50
O51
O52
O53
O54
O55
O56
O57
O58
O59
O60
O61
O62
"Control is operational"
The analog inputs (X15 to X22) of the PL 410 cannot be evaluated in the LE 360 C! The PLC outputs
are powered in groups and are therefore switched off via EMERGENCY STOP in groups.
Connect inductive loads only with a quenching diode parallel to the inductance.
356
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
PLC inputs/outputs
3/99
3/99
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
PLC inputs/outputs
357
12 Machine c ontrol panel

A separate 37-pin female connector is mounted on the logic unit for the connection to the
manufacturer's proprietary machine control panel. This connector includes the 0 V and +24 V of the
PLC power supply. The PLC inputs I128 to I151 may be connected only with the power supply from
pins 36 and 37, since this power supply is internally secured as required.

D-sub terminal
(female) 37-pin
Assignment
D-sub connector
(male) 37-pin
I128
I129
Brown/Black
I130
White/Black
I131
Green/Black
I132
Brown/Red
I133
White/Red
I134
White/Green
I135
Red/Blue
I136
Yellow/Red
Gray/Red
10
I137
10
Gray/Pink
11
I138
11
Black
12
I139
12
Pink/Brown
13
I140
13
Yellow/Blue
14
I141
14
Green/Blue
15
I142
15
Yellow
16
I143
16
Red
17
I144
17
Gray
18
I145
18
Blue
19
I146
19
Pink
20
I147
20
White/Gray
21
I148
21
Yellow/Gray
22
I149
22
Green/Red
23
I150
23
White/Pink
24
I151
24
Gray/Green
25
I152
25
Yellow/Brown
26
O0
26
Gray/Brown
27
O1
27
Yellow/Black
28
O2
28
White/Yellow
29
O3
29
Gray/Blue
30
O4
30
Pink/Blue
31
O5
31
Pink/Red
32
O6
32
Brown/Blue
33
O7
33
Pink/Green
34
0 V (PLC)
34
Brown
35
0 V (PLC)
35
Yellow/Pink
36
+24 V (PLC)
36
Violet
37
+24 V (PLC)
37
White
Housing
External shield
Housing
External shield
358
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Machine control panel
3/99
3/99
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
359
13 TNC keyb oard

The TNC keyboard TE 420/TE 400 and TE 355 A/B are connected to the logic unit by a connecting
cable.
LE 416/LE 406 connector X45
TE 420/TE 400
TE 355
RL0
RL0
Gray/Red
RL1
RL1
Brown/Black
RL2
RL2
White/Black
RL3
RL3
Green/Black
RL4
RL4
Brown/Red
RL5
RL5
White/Red
RL6
RL6
White/Green
RL7
RL7
Red/Blue
RL8
Do not use
Yellow/Red
10
RL9
Do not use
10
Gray/Pink
10
10
11
RL10
Do not use
11
Black
11
11
12
RL11
Do not use
12
Pink/Brown
12
12
13
RL12
Do not use
13
Yellow/Blue
13
13
14
RL13
Do not use
14
Green/Blue
14
14
15
RL14
Do not use
15
Yellow
15
15
16
RL15
Do not use
16
Red
16
16
17
RL16
Do not use
17
Gray
17
17
18
RL17
Do not use
18
Blue
18
18
19
RL18
Do not use
19
Pink
19
19
20
SL0
SL0
20
White/Gray
20
20
21
SL1
SL1
21
Yellow/Gray
21
21
22
SL2
SL2
22
Green/Red
22
22
23
SL3
SL3
23
White/Pink
23
23
24
SL4
SL4
24
Gray/Green
24
24
25
SL5
SL5
25
Yellow/Brown
25
25
26
SL6
SL6
26
Gray/Brown
26
26
27
SL7
SL7
27
Yellow/Black
27
27
28
RL19
Do not use
28
White/Yellow
28
28
29
RL20
Do not use
29
Gray/Blue
29
29
30
Not used
Do not use
30
Pink/Blue
30
30
31
RL21
Do not use
31
Pink/Red
31
31
32
RL22
Do not use
32
Brown/Blue
32
32
33
RL23
Do not use
33
Pink/Green
33
33
34
Spindle override (wiper)
34
Brown
34
34
35
Feed rate override (wiper)
35
Yellow/Pink
35
35
36
+5 V override potentiometer
36
Violet
36
36
37
0 V override potentiometer
37
White
37
37
Housing
External shield
Housing
External shield
Housing
Housing
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
D-sub
connector
(male) 37-pin
X2 D-sub terminal
(male) 37-pin
Assignment
X45
360
Assignment
X23
D-sub connector
(female) 37-pin
D-sub terminal
(female) 37-pin
TNC keyboard
3/99
X1 on the TNC keyboard TE 420/TE 400 for the connecting the soft keys on the VDU
Pin Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
3/99
Assignment
SL0
SL1
SL2
SL3
Do not use
RL15
RL14
RL13
RL12
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
TNC keyboard
361
14 Cable overview
3/99
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Cable overview
362
TNC 406
TE 420
313 038-01
BC 120
313 037-01
40m
MB 420
293 757-12
PL 410 B
263 371-12
VL: Extension cable

for separation points with connecting cable
for extending existing connecting cable
20m
23.02.99
263 954-xx
1m
Included with
visual display unit
Encoders
244 005-xx
60m
VL
312 878-xx
11 APP
310 125-xx
310 130-xx
VL
263 955-xx
Accessories
289 111-xx
296 466-xx
HR 410
50m 296 469-01
312 879-01 3 m
VL
309 774-xx
11 APP
HR 130
254 040-xx
VL
281 429-xx
4 inputs
LE 406
60m
11 APP VL
309 774-xx
289 208-xx
PC
274 545-xx
239 760-xx
2 inputs
RS-232-C Adapter
310 085-01
11 APP
20m
VL
298 400-xx
290 109-xx
244 005-xx
290 110-xx
263 954-xx
15-pin male connector

243 971-ZY
298 399-xx
3/99
TS 220
293 488-xx
40m
20m
TTL
50m
TS 120
265 348-xx
274 543-xx
Terminal box
251 249-01
309 773-xx
TTL
20m
RS-422-C Adapter
310 086-01
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306

243 937-ZY
Nominal value
output
PLC I / 0
Cable overview
363
TNC 306
BF 110
267 209-01
TE 355 A
255 015-06
or BE 212
or 242 370-03
PL 410 B
263 371-12
or TE 355 B
255 016 04
VL: Extension cable

for separation points with connecting cable
for extending existing connecting cable
25m
20m
311 533-xx
311 531-xx
Encoders
23.02.99
263 954-xx
60m
Accessories
289 111-xx
11 APP
310 125-xx
310 130-xx
VL
311 534-xx
VL
311 532-xx
VL
263 955-xx
296 466-xx
312 879-01 3m
HR 410
50m 296 469-01
VL
281 429-xx
HR 130
254 040-xx
11 APP
VL
309 774-xx
20m
PC
239 760-xx
4 inputs
LE 306
60m
11 APP
VL
309 774-xx
274 545-01
RS-232-C Adapter
310 085 01
1 input
50m
VL
263 955-xx
263 954-xx
11 APP
TS 120
265 348-xx
274 543-xx
309 773-xx
244 005-xx
TS 220
293 488-xx
25m
TTL

243 971-ZY
VL
298 400-xx
Terminal box
251 249-01
TTL
20m
298 399-xx
20m
3/99
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Machine
operating
panel
243 937-ZY
290 109-xx
244 005-xx
290 110-xx
263 954-xx
Nominal value PLC I / 0

output
Cable overview
25m
364
3/99
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Cable overview
365
15 Mounting dimensions
15.1 LE 416
366
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Mounting dimensions
3/99
135.5+2
5.3"+.08"
132.5+2
5.2"+.08"
15
.6"
13
.51"
2670.2
10.5".008"
Mounting dimensions
392
15.43"
12.5
.5"
10,5
.41"
83.5
3.29"
9
.35"
367
25
1"
328
12.9"
Befestigungsmglichkeit
PL 400
MOUNTING POSSIBILITY
PL 400
2800.3
11.024".012"
7
.28"
20
.79"
10
.4"
3260.5
12.83.02"
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
456+2
17.95"+.08"
M3 (Einschraublnge max.3)
M3 (LENGTH OF ENGAGEMENT .12")
427
16.8"
15.2 LE 406
3/99
476+5
18.7"+.2"
15.3 TE 420
368
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Mounting dimensions
3/99
371
14.6"
18
.7"
18
.7"
3880.2
15.276".008"
196
7.7"
232
9.1"
274
10.8"
2620.2
10.315".008"
105
4.1"
369
9.5
.37"
Montageflche
MOUNTING SURFACE
242+0.5
9.53"+.02"
10
DIA.4"
2620.2
10.315"0.2"
36+5
1.4"+.2"
8+1
DIA.3+.04"
25
1"
Mounting dimensions
47
1.8"
5.5
.217"
2
.08"
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
60.2
.236".008"
400
15.75"
0.5
.02"
M5
Frontplattenausschnitt
FRONT PANEL OPENING
380+0.5
14.96"+.02"
388+0.2
15.276"+.008"
15.4 TE 400
3/99
60.2
.236".008"
15.5 BC 120
370
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Mounting dimensions
3/99
BF 120
12
.47"
5.6
DIA .22"
25
.98"
2460.3
9.685.012"
264
10.39"
10
.39"
400
15.75"
3760.3
14.803.012"
20
.79"
15.6
M5
80
3.15"
252
9.92"
367
14.45"
34
1.34"
11.5
.45"
12x45
.47"x45
248+1
9.763+.039"
8
.315"
3/99
70 6"
7
2.
R
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
2
.08"
380+1
14.96+.039"
3760.2
14.803.008"
5
.18"
238
9.37"
0.5
.02"
2460.2
9.685.008"
M5
Mounting dimensions
371
375
14.76"
10
DIA.4"
8.6
DIA.34"
max.275
MAX. 10.83"
60.2
.236".008"
15
.59"
2-0.5
.08"-.02"
19
.75"
Ansicht A
VIEW A
8-1"
.31"-.04"
372+2"
14.65"+.08"
M5
292+2"
11.50"+.08"
365
14.37"
FRONT PANEL OPENING
8-1"
.31"-.04"
20
.79"
Mounting dimensions
16
.63"
1
.04"
2
.08"
14
.55"
3880.2
15.275".008"
3080.2
12.162".008"
320
12.6"
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
60.2 1120.2
2760.2
.236".008" 4.41".008" 10.866".008"
15.7 BC 110 B
372
0
400
15.75"
X4
X3
X1
X2
3/99
456+2
18"+.08"
311.5
12.26"
411.5
16.2"
132.50,2
5.2".08"
.78"
DI
15
.6"
36
20
45
1.77"
13
.51"
100.5
3.95"
.32
7
.28"
R 50
R 2.4"
36
1.42"
10
4"
800.2
3.15".008"
392
15.43"
3400.2
13.39".008"
M3 (Einschraublnge max. 3)
12.5
.5"
M3 (LENGTH OF ENGAGEMENT .12")
10.5
.41"
Mounting dimensions
Anschlukabel drfen Schwenkbereich der

Steuerung nicht beeintrchtigen!
CONNECTION CABELS SHOULD NOT INTERFERE
WITH TILTING RANGE OF CONTROL UNIT!
2100.2
8.26".008"
9
.35"
25
1"
427
16.8"
272.5
10.73"
Schutzerde M5
PROTECTION EARTH M5
Betriebserde M6
SYSTEM EARTH M6
83.5
3.3"
145
5.7"
328
12.9"
DI 10,
A 3
.4
"
2350,2
9.25".008"
280o.2
9.25".008"
134
5.3"
6.34"
160
3260.5
12.93".02"
Befestigungsmglichkeit PL 400
(Befestigungsschrauben M3x5)
MOUNTING POSSIBILITY PL 400
(FIXING SCREWS M3x5)
2670,2
10.5".008"
"
R 40
R 1.5
8"
140.50.2
5.53".08"
R 32
5
R12.8
"
8
.31"
560
22"
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
7.30.3
.29.012"
476+5
18.8"+.02"
Schwenkbereich der Steuerung

FIELD OF SWIVEL FRAME TRAVERSE
15.7.1 LE 360 C
3/99
84
3.3" 10
.4"
373
15.8 Keyboards for TNC 306
60.2
.236".008"
2690.2
10.591".008"
5.5
.217"
281
11.063"
262
10.315"
274
10.787"
60.2
.236".008"
15.8.1 TE 355 A
55
2.165"
112
4.409"
Frontplattenausschnitt 236+0.5 x 224+0.5

FRONT PANEL OPENING 9.21"+.020" x 8.819"+0.20"
8+1
25
.98"
1
.039"
31+5
1.16"+.19"
25
.98"
4
.157"
2
.079"
DIA.315"+.039"
10
DIA.394"
Dichtung 3 dick, im eingebauten Zustand 2 dick

GASKET .118" THICK INCORPORATED .079 THICK
234+2
9.212"+.079"
23.5
0.925"
224+0.5
8.819"+.020"
222+2
8.740"+.079"
18
.708"
X2
R60
R2.36
236+0.5
9.291"+.020"
374
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Massenanschlu M5
GROUND CONNECTION M5
FRONT PANEL OPENING
Mounting dimensions
3/99
350
13.78"
3380.2
13.307".008"
205
8.07"
66.5
2.62"
1930.2
7.598".008"
96.5
3.80"
5.5
.217"
60.2
.236".008"
60.2
.236".008"
15.8.2 TE 355 B
51
2.01"
25
.98"
10
DIA .394"
3380.2
13.307".008"
187.5+1
7.38"+.04"
1910.5
752".020"
1930.2
7.598".008"
.040"
750.4
2.95".016"
248+1
9.76"+.040"
8.50.4
.335".016"
2
.079"
1
.40"
4
.157"
31+5
1.16+.19"
8+1
DIA.351"+.04"
50+5
1.97"+.20"
Dichtung 3 dick, im eingebauten Zustand 2 dick

GASKET .118" THICK INCORPORATED .079 THICK
X2
X1
R60
R2.36
"
3000.5
11.81".020"
19
.748"
Montageflche
MOUNTING SURFACE
3/99
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
0.5
.02"
FRONT PANEL OPENING
Mounting dimensions
375
15.9 Visual display units for TNC 306

15.9.1 BE 212
5.5
.217"
Freiraum fr Belftung
FREESPACE FOR AIR VENTILATION
94
3.20"
30
1.18"
.236"
3380.2
13.307".008"
min. 12
MIN. .47"
328+0.5
12.91"+.020"
max. 303
MAX. 11.93"
322.5
12.70"
Montageflche
0.5
MOUNTING SURFACE
.02"
40
1.58"
20.5
.08".02"
1
.040"
5
.197"
280
11.02"
10
DIA .394"
max. 300
MAX. 11.80"
26
1.02"
FRONT PANEL OPENING
7.8
DIA .307"+.008"
5
.197"
min. 20
MIN. .79"
30
1.18"
max. 242
MAX. 9.53"
max. 160
MAX. 6.30"
196
7.72"
2440.5
9.61".020"
2620.2
10.315".008"
274
10.79"
60.2
.236".008"
350
13.78"
60.2
.236".008"
Dichtung 3 dick
im eingebauten Zustand 2 dick
GASKET .118" THICK
INCORPORATED CONDITION .079" THICK
20
.79"
20
.79"
Freiraum fr Belftung
FREESPACE FOR AIR VENTILATION
47.5
1.87"
max. 326
MAX. 12.83"
376
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Mounting dimensions
3/99
11,50.5
.45".02"
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Mounting dimensions
141
.55".04"
6.50.5
.26".02"
170+1
6.7"+.04"
60.2
.236".008"
1930.2
7.598".008"
M5
205
8.07"
.22"
5.5
2531
9.96".04"
256+1
10.03"+.04"
2690.2
10.59".008"
R40
R 1.6"
8
DIA
.32"
Masseanschlu M5
FRONT PANEL OPENING
MOUNTING SURFACE
Montageflche
201
.79".04"
1651
6.5".04"
3/99
55+5
2.2"+.2"
4
.16"
8+1
.32"+.04"
60.2
.236".008"
281
11.06"
0,5
.02"
10
Dichtung 3 dick
GASKET .12" THICK
1
.04"
15.9.2 BF 110
377
15.10 Input/Output boards PL 410B

282
11.1"
2350.2
9.252.008"
23.5
.93"
8
.315"
52.5
2.07"
9
.35"
180.5
.7.02"
3.6
.14"
PL-Eingnge
PL INPUTS
10.5
.04+.02"
47.5
1.87"
2100.2
8.268.008"
228
8.98"
9.3
DIA.37"
PL-Ausgnge
PL OUTPUTS
33+2
1.3"+.08"
Masseanschlu M5
378
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Mounting dimensions
3/99
15.11 Handwheel HR
15.11.1 Panel-mounted handwheel HR 130
100.01
100.02
DIA .3937.0004"
DIA .3937.0008"
361.5
1.417.06"
FIXING HOLE M3 x .197"
48
16
1.890"
.630"
12.5
.492"
3 x 120
120
14
.551"
36 f8
DIA 1.4173.0010"
DIA 1.4173.0025"
58
DIA 2.283"
Befestigungsgewinde M3 x 5
0.2
DIA .008"
3x
30
4.4
DIA .173
19.5+1
.768+.04"
10
.394"
3/99
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Mounting dimensions
379
Handwheel knobs
Knob, small
M3
M3
SW 5.5
18
.709"
3x
max. 10
7
.276"
MAX .394"
6
.236"
61
DIA 2.402"
.0394"
HR ...
10
DIA .394"
SW 14
18
.709"
(18)
(.709")
Frontplatte (2)
FRONT PANEL (.079")
380
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Mounting dimensions
3/99
Knob, large
M3
M3
SW 5.5
12
.472"
3x
7
.276"
max. 15.5
MAX .610"
6
.236"
HR ...
SW 1.5
27
1.063"
48
1.89"
(12)
(.472")
Frontplatte (2)
FRONT PANEL (.079")
3/99
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
90
3.543"
10 F7
DIA .3937 +.0011"
DIA .3937 +.0005"
Mounting dimensions
381
Knob, ergonomic
M3
17.7
.697"
M3
SW 5.5
12
.472"
3x
10
.394"
7
.276"
6
.236"
4
.158"
HR ...
SW 2
(12)
(.472")
6
.236"
70
2.756"
22
.866"
Frontplatte (2)
FRONT PANEL (.079")
382
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
10 H7
DIA .3937 +.0006"
Mounting dimensions
3/99
FCT
C
FCT
A
IV
FCT
B
70
2.756"
2.5
.984"
83
3.27"
Portable handwheels HR 410
50
1.969"
15.11.2
311
12.244"
331
13.031"
15.11.3
3/99
Touchprobe system TS 220
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Mounting dimensions
383
15.12 Cable adapter

Cable adapter TS 220
Cable adapter HR 410
Mounting detail, wall thickness S<4
384
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Mounting detail, wall thickness S>4
Mounting dimensions
3/99
92
3.62"
780.2
3.071.008"
7
.28"
780.2
3.071.008"
60+1
2.36+.04"
38
1.5"
M4
21+0.5
.83"+.02"
Adapter RS232C and RS-422
57
2.24"
R
4
1.5 0
7"
5
.2"
3
.12"
M5
3/99
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Mounting dimensions
385
Machine integration Contents 4

1
1.1
Machine axes
Measuring systems
4-5
4-5
1.1.1 Signal period
4-5
1.1.2 Direction of traverse
4-7
1.1.3 Encoder monitoring

1.2
Axis designation
4-8
4-10
1.2.1 Assignment
4-11
1.2.2 Current tool axis
4-12
1.3
VDU display
4-12
1.4
Software limit switch
4-13
1.5
Lubrication pulse
4-16
1.6
Axis error compensation
4-18
1.6.1 Linear axis error compensation
4-18
1.6.2 Non-linear axis error compensation
4-19
1.6.3 Temperature compensation
4-22
1.7
PLC positioning
4-24
2
2.1
Reference marks
Passing over the reference marks
4-27
4-28
2.1.1 Encoders with distance-coded reference marks
4-29
2.1.2 Encoders with one reference mark
4-31
2.2
Machine datum
4-34
3
3.1
Servo positioning of the NC-axes

The position control loop of an NC-machine
4-37
4-37
3.2
Control with lag
4-39
3.3
Offset adjustment
4-44
3.3.1 Offset adjustment by code number
4-44
3.3.2 Automatic cyclical offset adjustment
4-44
3.4
4-45
Contouring behavior in corners
3.4.1 Radial acceleration
4-45
3.4.2 Constant feed rate in corners
4-45
3.5
4-46
Monitoring functions
3.5.1 Position monitoring for operation with lag
4-46
3.5.2 Monitoring the analog voltage difference
4-47
3.5.3 Movement monitoring
4-47
3.5.4 Standstill monitoring
4-48
3.5.5 Positioning window
4-48
3.6
4-50
Controlled axes
3.6.1 Axes as programmable position displays
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
4-50
4-1
3.6.2 Axis enable
4-51
3.6.3 Axes in position
4-52
3.6.4 Open control loop
4-53
3.6.5 Actual/nominal value transfer
4-53
3.6.6. Feed rate override by the PLC
4-54
3.7
Non-controlled rotary axis (M03/M04)
4-54
4
4.1
Gap control
Input characteristics of the gap signal
4-56
4-56
4.2
Short Circuit Behavior
4-59
4.3
Retraction of the electrode during erosion
4-59
4.4
Arc recognition
4-60
4.5
Free run and spark-out
4-61
4.6
Flushing the gap
4-61
4.7
Eroding parameters
4-62
4.7.1 Eroding parameters as Q-parameters in the NC program
4-63
4.7.2 Eroding parameters in erosion tables
4-63
4.7.3 Create erosion parameter table in the PLC program
4-64
4.7.4 Servo sensitivity (SV)
4-66
4.8
Transmission of eroding parameters to the PLC
4-67
4.9
Data exchange between PLC and generator control
4-68
4.9.1 Transmission from the generator control to the PLC
4-68
4.9.2 Transmission from the PLC to the generator control
4-70
5
5.1
EMERGENCY STOP routine

Connection diagram
4-71
4-72
5.2
Flow diagram
4-73
6
6.1
Display and operation

Setting the machine datum point
4-76
4-76
6.2
Graphics
4-79
6.3
Status window
4-80
6.3.1 Positional and status display
4-80
6.3.2 Feed rate display
4-82
6.3.3 Display of the M-functions M03, M04, M05, M08
4-83
6.3.4 Display of the Way-To-Go (WTG)
4-83
6.3.5 Control operational
4-84
6.3.6 Cancel status display
4-84
6.4
Display of currently active power stage number
4-84
6.5
Display of actual machining time
4-84
6.6
Error messages
4-85
6.7
Cycles
4-86
6.7.1 Cycle inhibit
4-86
6.7.2 Cycle Scaling factor
4-87
4-2
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
6.8
User-parameters
4-88
6.9
Code-numbers
4-89
6.10
Programming station
4-89
6.11
Decimal sign
4-89
6.12
Memory test
4-90
6.13
New program start/End of program run
4-90
6.14
Restore position
4-90
6.15
Overwrite Q-parameters
4-91
6.16
Color adjustment
4-91
7
7.1
M-functions
Generator ON/OFF (M36/M37)
4-93
4-96
7.2
Program-halt on M-functions
4-98
7.3
Program-halt on M06
4-99
7.4
M-function M89
4-99
8
8.1
Key simulation
TNC-keyboard
4-101
4-101
8.2
4-110
9
9.1
Short circuit/probing
Interfacing the probing function
4-112
4-112
9.2
Successive probing
4-114
9.3
Manual probing
4-114
10
Handwheel
4-117
11
Analog inputs
4-120
12
Jog increment positioning
4-122
13
Datum correction
4-125
14
14.1
Electrode changer
Controlling an electrode changer
4-127
4-127
14.2
PLC program example
4-128
14.2.1 PLC module "TOOL CALL"
4-131
14.2.2 PLC module "REPLACE OLD TOOL"
4-132
14.2.3 PLC Module "PLC POS. NEUTRAL"
4-133
14.2.4 PLC module "SELECT NEW TOOL"
4-134
14.2.5 PLC module "POC. REG."
4-135
14.2.6 PLC Module "PLC POS. POC. 1/2/3/4/5"
4-136
14.2.7 PLC module "PLC POS. Z DOWN"
4-137
14.2.8 PLC module "PLC. POS. Z UP"
4-137
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
4-3
15
15.1
Commissioning and start-up procedure

Code numbers for commissioning
4-138
4-138
15.2
Preparation of the machine
4-138
15.3
Commissioning the control
4-142
15.3.1 Entry of the provisional and pre-defined machine parameters
4-142
15.3.2 Entry of the PLC-program
4-142
15.3.3 Testing the EMERGENCY STOP routine
4-142
15.3.4 Testing the direction of traverse
4-142
15.3.5 Setting the software limit switch ranges
4-144
15.3.6 Optimizing control with servo lag
4-144
15.3.7 Offset adjustment
4-147
15.3.8 Adjusting the monitoring functions
4-147
4-4
TNC 406/TNC 306
3/97
1 Machine axes
The TNC 406 and TNC 306 contouring controls from HEIDENHAIN permits the control of up to four
machine axes.
The 5th axis cannot interpolate with other axes. This axis can only be started in manual mode or in
the NC-program with a M-function (PLC-positioning)
Machine parameter MP10 can be set to define which axes should be operational on the machine.
If necessary, MP10 can be used to select all the axes functions (control, display, pass over
reference marks etc.).
MP10
Active axes
Entry range: 1 to 31
Bit 0
X axis
Bit 1
Y axis
Bit 2
Z axis
Bit 3
Axis 4
Bit 4 *
Axis 5
+0 = not active
+1 = active
+0 = not active
+2 = active
+0 = not active
+4 = active
+0 = not active
+8 = active
+0 = not active
+16 = active
1.1 Measuring systems

Incremental encoders can be connected to HEIDENHAIN contouring controls.
See also chapter "Assembly and electrical installation ."
1.1.1 Signal period

The signal period of the connected encoder in m or 0.001 is entered in machine parameter
MP330.x .
Linear measurement
For linear encoders with sinusoidal output signals the signal period is the same as the graduation
period:
Signal period (~) = grating period
The standard linear encoders from HEIDENHAIN have a graduation period of 20 m
(LS models; except for LS 101 and LS 405: 10 m) and 100 m (LB model) .
If linear measurement is performed by rotary encoder and ballscrew, the line count of the rotary
encoder (see encoder technical data) as well as the ballscrew pitch must be considered when
calculating the signal period:
spindle pitch[mm] 1000 [m/mm]
Signal period (~) =
line count
Up to 3 decimal places can be entered in MP330.x.
* only TNC 406
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
1 Machine axes
4-5
The TNC always does a 4-fold evaluation of the signals at the square-wave inputs.
If a counting step of < 1 m or 0.001 is desired, the signal period (
than 4 m or 0.004.
) must not be greater
Angular measurement : the signal period of angle encoders is calculated as follows:

Signal period (~) =
360
1000
line count
Signal period (
)=
or
360
1
1000
line count interpolation factor
If angular measurement is made by gearing up or down, this must be taken into account when
calculating the signal period.
MP330
Signal period
Entry range 1 to 360 in [m] or
MP330.0
MP330.1
MP330.2
MP330.3
MP330.4 *
1
[1000
]
X axis
Y axis
Z axis
Axis 4
Axis 5
* only TNC 406
4-6
TNC 406/TNC 306
1 Machine axes
3/97
1.1.2 Direction of traverse

The machine parameters MP210 and MP1040 determine the direction of traverse for the axes.
The direction of traverse for the axes of numerically controlled machine tools are defined by DIN
(see also under "Axis designation").
MP210 defines the counting direction for the encoder signals. The counting direction depends on
the mounting orientation of the encoders.
MP210
Count direction of the encoder signals

Bit 0
X axis
Bit 1
Y axis
Bit 2
Z axis
Bit 3
Axis 4
Bit 4 *
Axis 5
+0 = positive
+1 = negative
+0 = positive
+2 = negative
+0 = positive
+4 = negative
+0 = positive
+8 = negative
+0 = positive
+16 = negative
Machine parameter MP1040 determines the polarity of the nominal value voltage during the positive
direction of traverse.
MP1040
Polarity of nominal value voltage for positive direction of traverse

Bit 0
X axis
Bit 1
Y axis
Bit 2
Z axis
Bit 3
Axis 4
Bit 4 *
Axis 5
+0 = positive
+1 = negative
+0 = positive
+2 = negative
+0 = positive
+4 = negative
+0 = positive
+8 = negative
+0 = positive
+16 = negative
* only TNC 406
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
1 Machine axes
4-7
The NC uses markers to tell the PLC in which direction the axes are to travel (only active in the
operating mode "Manual"):
0 = positive
1 = negative
M2160
Set
NC
Direction of traverse
X axis
Y axis
Z axis
Axis 4
Axis 5
M2161
M2162
M2163
M2164 *
Reset
NC
1.1.3 Encoder monitoring

HEIDENHAIN contouring controls can monitor the signals from the encoders. This function must be
activated by a machine parameter.
Two different conditions can be checked:
Error
message
The amplitude of the encoder signals
The edge separation of the encoder signals
A
B
If one of these conditions is not fulfilled, the error message "Encoder <axis> defect A/B" will appear.
MP31
Checking the amplitude of the encoder signals

Bit 0
X axis
Bit 1
Y axis
Bit 2
Z axis
Bit 3
Axis 4
Bit 4 *
Axis 5
+0 = not active
+1 = active
+0 = not active
+2 = active
+0 = not active
+4 = active
+0 = not active
+8 = active
+0 = positive
+16 = negative
* only TNC 406
4-8
TNC 406/TNC 306
1 Machine axes
3/97
MP32
Checking the edge separation of the encoder signals

Bit 0
X axis
Bit 1
Y axis
Bit 2
Z axis
Bit 3
Axis 4
Bit 4 *
Axis 5
+0 = not active
+1 = active
+0 = not active
+2 = active
+0 = not active
+4 = active
+0 = not active
+8 = active
+0 = positive
+16 = negative
* only TNC 406
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
1 Machine axes
4-9
1.2 Axis designation

The coordinate axes and their directions of travel are standardized in ISO 841.
It is easy to determine the directions of traverse by using the "right-hand rule":
+Z
+Y
+X
In the direction of the spindle axis the convention is:

The movement of the tool towards the workpiece is the negative direction of traverse.
NC programs are always written assuming that the tool moves and the workpiece remains
stationary.
If it is the workpiece that moves rather than the tool, then the direction of motion and the direction
of the axis are opposite to each other. The positive relative directions of movement are then
designated +X', +Y' etc.
+X
+X
The fourth axis can be used as an axis of rotation.

While the three main axes have the standard designations X, Y and Z, the designations of the fourth
axis can be selected by a machine parameter.
An axis of rotation is designated by the letter A, B or C. The correlation with the principle axes and
determination of the direction of rotation is standardized in ISO 841.
+Z
+Y
+C
+B
+A
4-10
+X
TNC 406/TNC 306
1 Machine axes
3/97
An extra linear axis is designated by the letter U, V or W. The correlation with the principle axes
and the direction of travel are also standardized in ISO 841.
+Z
+Y
+W
+V
+U
MP410
+X
Designation of axis 4
Entry:
MP411 *
0=A
1=B
2=C
Entry:
0=A
1=B
2=C
3=U
4=V
5=W
1.2.1 Assignment
The encoder inputs X1 to X6 and the analog outputs, Output 1 to Output 4 (on connector X8) can be
assigned to the individual axes. The assignment is determined by the machine parameters MP110
and MP120.
MP110
Assignment of the encoder inputs to the axes

Entry:
MP110.0
MP110.1
MP110.2
MP110.3
MP110.4 *
0 = encoder input X1
4 = encoder input X5 *
X axis
Y axis
Z axis
Axis 4
Axis 5
* only TNC 406
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
1 Machine axes
4-11
MP120
Assignment of the analog outputs

Entry:
MP120.0
MP120.1
MP120.2
MP120.3
MP110.4 *
0 = output 1
1 = output 2
2 = output 3
3 = output 4
4 = output 5 *
X axis
Y axis
Z axis
Axis 4
Axis 5
1.2.2 Current tool axis

In the NC-block "TOOL CALL" it is determined whether the tool moves parallel to one of the principle
axes X, Y, Z or to the fourth axis. The markers M2100 to M2103 are used to show which of the four
axes is currently defined as the tool axis. The appropriate marker is then set.
M2100
M2101
M2102
M2103
Set
NC
X-axis is tool axis

Y-axis is tool axis
Z-axis is tool axis
Axis 4 is tool axis
Reset
NC
1.3 VDU display

Machine parameters can be used to select which of the active axes (MP10) should be displayed in
the status window.
MP40
VDU display
Bit 0
X axis
Bit 1
Y axis
Bit 2
Z axis
Bit 3
Axis 4
Bit 4 *
Axis 5
+0 = not active
+1 = active
+0 = not active
+2 = active
+0 = not active
+4 = active
+0 = not active
+8 = active
+0 = positive
+16 = negative
* only TNC 406
4-12
TNC 406/TNC 306
1 Machine axes
3/97
1.4 Software limit switch

For each of the four axes, three different software limit switch ranges can be defined by machine
parameters (e.g. for pendulum machining).
The input values for the software limit switch are related to the reference point of the encoder. The
momentary software limit switch range is selected by the markers (M2817, M2816) and activated
by the strobe marker (M2824).
The MOD function "Axis-limit" can be used to enter an additional limitation for the actual software
limit switch range within the range of traverse.
MP910/MP920 Software limit switch range 1
Entry range:
Linear axis
Axis of rotation
30 000.000 to +30 000.000 [mm]

30 000.000 to +30 000.000 []
Software limit switch range 1

Initial values after switch-on;
Activated by PLC M2817 = 0, M2816 = 0
MP910.0
MP910.1
MP910.2
MP910.3
MP910.4 *
Software limit switch X+

Software limit switch Y+
Software limit switch Z+
Software limit switch 4+
MP920.0
MP920.1
MP920.2
MP920.3
MP920.4 *
Software limit switch X

Software limit switch Y
Software limit switch Z
Software limit switch 4
Activated by PLC M2817 = 0, M2816 = 1
MP911.0
MP911.1
MP911.2
MP911.3
MP911.4 *

MP921.0
MP921.1
MP921.2
MP921.3
MP921.4 *

* 0nly TNC 406
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
1 Machine axes
4-13

Activated by PLC: M2817 = 1, M2816 = 0
MP912.0
MP912.1
MP912.2
MP912.3
MP912.4 *

MP922.0
MP922.1
MP922.2
MP922.3
MP922.4 *

The markers M2816 and M2817 are used to define the software limit switch range.
M2816
M2817
Software limit switch range
Range 1 (MP910.X; MP920.X)
The change-over to the selected software limit switch range must be activated by the strobe-marker
M2824 by the PLC. This strobe-marker is reset by the NC after the change-over has been carried
out.
M2824
Activation of the software limit switch ranges
Set
PLC
Reset
NC
If one of the software limit switches is reached, the error message "LIMIT SWITCH ..." appears and
the appropriate marker (M2624 to M2633) is set.
Marker
Function
Set
Reset
M2624
M2625
M2626
M2627
M2628
M2629
M2630
M2631
M2632*
M2633*
Limit switch X+
Limit switch X
Limit switch Y+
Limit switch Y
Limit switch Z+
Limit switch Z
Limit switch 4+
Limit switch 4
Limit switch 5+
Limit switch 5
NC
NC
* 0nly TNC 406
4-14
TNC 406/TNC 306
1 Machine axes
3/97
Example:
PLC program example for changing the software limit switch ranges. PLC-input I10 is used as a
condition for change.
I10 = 0
I10 = 1

127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
LN I10
AN M555
R M2816
R M2817
S M2824
S M555
R M556
L I10
AN M556
S M2816
R M2817
S M2824
S M556
R M555
;Range 1
;already done?
;select range 1
;select range 1
;activate change
;edge recognition range 1
;reset edge recognition range 2
;Range 2
;already done?
;select range 2
;select range 2
;activate change
;edge recognition range 2
;reset edge recognition range 1
I10
M2816
M2817
M2824
M555
M556
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
1 Machine axes
4-15
1.5 Lubrication pulse

The PLC can control the lubrication of the guideway according to the distance traveled on each axis.
Machine parameter MP4060.X defines the distance for each axis after which lubrication is to be
performed. Entry is in units of 65 536 m.
Example:
Desired traversing distance: 100 m
Value entered =
100 000 000 m

= 1526
65 536 m
If the stored path limit for an axis is exceeded, the NC sets a marker (M2012 to M2015) to 1.
After carrying out the lubrication the PLC is able reset the accumulated traverse distance (M2548 to
M2551).
MP4060
Path-dependent lubrication
Entry range: 0 to 65 535 (units of 65 536 m)
MP4060.0
MP4060.1
MP4060.2
MP4060.3
MP4060.4 *
X axis
Y axis
Z axis
Axis 4
Axis 5
M2012
Lubrication pulse X axis, since value of MP4060.0

was exceeded
Lubrication pulse Y axis, since value of MP4060.1
was exceeded
Lubrication pulse Z axis, since value of MP4060.2
was exceeded
Lubrication pulse axis 4, since value of MP4060.3
was exceeded
was exceeded
M2013
M2014
M2015
M2016 *
Set
NC
Reset
NC
* only TNC 406
4-16
TNC 406/TNC 306
1 Machine axes
3/97
M2548
Reset of accumulated distance for

lubrication X axis
lubrication Y axis
lubrication Z axis
lubrication axis 4
lubrication axis 5
M2549
M2550
M2551
M2576*
PLC
NC
Example:
Example of PLC program for activating the lubrication for the X-axis.
The traverse distance after which the X-axis is to be lubricated is entered in machine parameter
MP4060.0. The duration of lubrication is defined by timer T0 (MP4110.0).
The PLC-output O24 is to be set for the duration of the X-axis lubrication.
In our example, lubrication is activated as soon as the marker M2012 is set. If the lubrication is only
to be activated when the axis is at rest, then this must be taken into account in the PLC-program.
MP4060.0 = 1 000 (approx. 60 m)
MP4110.0 = 100 (approx. 4 sec.).
.
.
45
46
47
48
49
.
L M2012
= T0
= M2548
L T48
= O24
;lubrication pulse X axis

;start timer for duration of lubrication
;reset accumulated distance
;duration of lubrication for X axis
;set output for lubrication
M2012
M2548
T0
T48
024
* only TNC 406
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
1 Machine axes
4-17
1.6 Axis error compensation

The HEIDENHAIN contouring control can compensate for mechanical defects in the machine.
The following axis error compensation is possible:
linear axis error compensation,
non-linear axis error compensation,
Either linear or non-linear axis error compensation can be activated.
1.6.1 Linear axis error compensation

One linear axis error can be compensated per axis. The axis error is entered, with the correct sign, in
machine parameter MP720. The error is positive if the table travel is too long, and negative if the
travel is too short.
Error
[mm]
0.02
0.01
0
Ref. mark
-0.01
-0.02
500
1000
Measuring system
[mm]
MP720
Linear axis error compensation

Entry range: 1.000 to +1.000 in [mm/m] or [1/1000]
MP720.0
MP720.1
MP720.2
MP720.3
MP720.4 *
X axis
Y axis
Z axis
Axis 4
Axis 5
* only TNC 406
4-18
TNC 406/TNC 306
1 Machine axes
3/97
1.6.2 Non-linear axis error compensation

Depending on the design of the machine or external factors (e.g. temperature) a non-linear axis error
can occur.
Such an axis error is usually determined by a comparator measuring instrument (such as HEIDENHAIN
VM 101).
For example, the lead-screw pitch error for the Z axis (Z=F(Z)) or the sag as a function of the Y axis
(Z=F(Y)) could be measured.
In the HEIDENHAIN contouring control, an axis can only be corrected as a function of one errorrelated axis. So in our example either the lead-screw pitch or the sag can be compensated. For each
of the four axes one table of corrections with 64 correction values per table can be entered. The
following definitions must be fixed for this purpose:
Correlation:
Datum point:
Distance:
Correction as a function of which axis?

(X=F(X); X=F(Y) etc.)
Distance to the reference mark of the encoder.
The error curve must always start with
correction value = 0 at the datum point.
Distance between the correction points (grid).
entry of the exponent to base 2
(e.g. entry 11 = 211 = 2,048 mm).
When determining the error curve with the aid of a comparator measuring instrument, the above
definitions must be already taken into account.
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
1 Machine axes
4-19
Example:
Y = F(Z)
Measurement length on Z axis = 1 000 mm
Desired distance between correction points = 1 000 mm : 64 = 15.62 mm
Possible exponent (base 2) = 214 = 16.384 mm
Datum point: 990
Error in Y
[mm]
0.1
0.08
Datum
0.06
0.04
0.02
940.848
875.312
973.616
908.08
924.464
990
957.232
891.696
Machine
datum
0
56.112
23.344
39.728
6,96
-0.02
Z
[mm]
+9.424
+25.808
-0.04
-0.06
-0.08
-0.1
-0.12
The errors which have thus been determined can be entered in the form of a table directly into the
control unit. However, axis error compensation is only effective when it is enabled for a specific axis
by the machine parameter MP730.
Before entering the correction table the code number 105 296 must be entered and the function
"COMPENSATION VALUE LIST" must be selected. The control will initially show the correction table
for the X axis, whereby "SETUP" is the interval between correction points:
X = F(X)
DATUM POINT +0.000
SETUP 1
0 X+0.000 X+0.000
1 X+0.001 X+0.000
2 X+0.002 X+0.000
.
.
.
The orange axis key can be used to select a different fault-causing axis for the X axis. After pressing
the GOTO key, the axis keys can be used to select a correction table for one of the other axes. The
correction value which is entered may not exceed the maximum correction-value difference.
4-20
TNC 406/TNC 306
1 Machine axes
3/97
The correction-value difference is calculated as follows:

Max. correction-value difference =
Distance between correction points

64
In our example, the result is

16.384 mm
= 0.256 mm
64
Only the compensation points of the error curve should be entered. The control will automatically
make a linear interpolation between the compensation points. In the example above the correction
table is thus:
Y = F(Z)
DATUM POINT
SETUP
0 Z990
1 Z973.616
2 Z957.232
3 Z940.848
4 Z924.464
5 Z908.08
6 Z891.696
7 Z875.312
8 Z858.928
.
.
.
990
14
Y+0
Y0.06
Y0.09
Y0.12
Y0.12
Y0.1
Y0.09
No entry is necessary in lines 3 and 4 (press the NO ENT key). The individual lines of the correction
table are selected either by the arrow keys or with the GOTO key. Press the END
key twice to
leave the correction table.
Special case: Axis of rotation

In a correction table for a rotary axis, the entered distance between correction points must be large
enough that the 64 correction points will cover a complete revolution of 360. An angular separation
of at least 5.625 is therefore necessary. For an axis of rotation, correction values will only be
recognized for entries from 0 to 360.
Input and output of the correction table via the data interface
After entering the code number 105296 and selecting the function "COMPENSATION VALUE LIST"
the correction table can be entered or read out via the data interface.
As usual, data transfer is initiated with the EXT key.
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
1 Machine axes
4-21
MP730
Non-linear axis error compensation

Bit 0
X axis
Bit 1
Y axis
Bit 2
Z axis
Bit 3
Axis 4
Bit 4 *
Axis 5
+ 0 = not active
+ 1 = active
+ 0 = not active
+ 2 = active
+ 0 = not active
+ 4 = active
+ 0 = not active
+ 8 = active
+ 0 = not active
+ 16 = active
* only TNC 406
4-22
TNC 406/TNC 306
1 Machine axes
3/97
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
1 Machine axes
4-23
1.7 PLC positioning

The four axes of the control can also be positioned by the PLC. The positions of the individual axes
must be stored as doublewords (D528 to D540) before activating the positioning.
The feed for positioning the individual axes is stored in W560 to W566.
The transfer of the positions and the feed to the PLC is carried out, for example, by Q-parameters
or machine parameters (MP4210.X, MP4220.X).
All four axes can be traversed simultaneously [simultaneous activation of all the strobe-markers
(M2704 to M2707)].
PLC positioning can be interrupted by resetting the strobe-marker (M2704 to M2707).
The doublewords D528 to D540 have a multiple usage. They have the following meaning for the
PLC positioning:
Address
Function
D528
D532
D536
D540
D544 *
Position X axis [1/ 1000 mm]

Position Y axis
Position Z axis
Position axis 4
Position axis 5
Feed for PLC positioning

W560
W562
W564
W566
W568 *
Feed X axis [mm/min]

Feed Y axis
Feed Z axis
Feed axis 4
Feed axis 5
M2704
M2705
M2706
M2707
M2708 *
Activate PLC-positioning X axis

Activate PLC-positioning Y axis
Activate PLC-positioning Z axis
Activate PLC-positioning axis 4
Activate PLC-positioning axis 5
Set
PLC
Reset
NC
Note:
The positions refer to the reference marks.

Software limit switches are not taken into account.
Tool compensations not calculated.
The path compensation must be terminated before a PLC positioning.
PLC positioning is not displayed in the test graphics.
* only TNC 406
4-24
TNC 406/TNC 306
1 Machine axes
3/97
Example:
PLC positioning of the Z-axis
A PLC positioning in the Z-axis is to be initiated with the M-function M70. The target position is
stored in the machine parameter MP4210.2. The feed for the PLC positioning is defined in machine
parameter MP4220.2
.
.
L M0
ON M0
S M2719
;word processing
.
CASE B260
;M-code
.
CM 70
.
ENDC
LBL 70
CM 110
S M2706
;activate PLC positioning Z axis
LN 2706
;PLC positioning Z axis done
S M2482
;acknowledgment M-function done
LN M2045
;no M-function?
R M2482
;acknowledgment reset
EM
LBL 110
;load Z position and feed rate
L D776
;load target position from MP4210.2
= D536
;target position PLC positioning Z axis
L W964
;load feed from MP4220.2
= W564;feed PLC positioning Z axis
EM
M1970
M2045
M4
M2706
M2482
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
1 Machine axes
4-25
4-26
TNC 406/TNC 306
1 Machine axes
3/97
2 Reference marks
When a datum point is set, a definite position value (coordinate) is assigned to each axis position for
workpiece machining. Since the actual position value is established incrementally by the encoder,
this correlation between axis positions and position values must be re-established after every power
interruption.
HEIDENHAIN linear encoders are therefore equipped with one or more reference marks. When the
scanning head of the encoder passes over a reference mark, a signal is generated which identifies
that particular position as a reference point. Passing over the reference marks after a power
interruption re-establishes the relationship between axis positions and display values (and, at the
same time, the fixed machine relationships) last defined by datum setting.
+Z REF Value REF Value
0
44.985
Workpiece
datum
0
10 20 30 40
+X
Workpiece
Machine table
Measuring system
Reference mark
Machine datum
Since it is often inconvenient to re-establish the reference points by traversing large distances after
switch-on, HEIDENHAIN recommends the use of encoders with distance-coded reference marks.
With this kind of encoder the absolute position is available after crossing two reference marks.
The scale graduation consists of the line grating and a reference mark track which runs parallel to it.
The distances between any two consecutive reference marks are defined differently, so that the
absolute position of the machine slide can be determined from this distance.
Scale with one reference mark
Scale with distance-coded reference marks
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
2 Reference marks
4-27
2.1 Passing over the reference marks

The reference marks for axes must be passed over after the control is switched on. This can be
achieved by
pressing the external START key. The axis sequence is determined by machine parameter
MP1340.X (automatic passing of the reference marks),
pressing the external axis direction keys. The sequence is determined by the operator.
Only after passing over the reference mark
can the software limit switch be activated,

can the most recently set datum point be reproduced,
is PLC positioning and positioning with the miscellaneous functions M91 and M92 possible,
is the counter value for non-controlled axes set to zero.
For encoders with distance-coded reference marks, the software limit switches, PLC positioning and
positioning by M91 and M92 are referenced to the Zero reference mark. In linear encoders the Zero
reference mark is the first reference mark after the start of the measuring length; in angular
encoders the Zero reference mark is marked.
The direction of traverse and the velocity on passing the reference marks is defined by machine
parameters (MP1320, MP1330.X).
The functional sequence for passing the reference marks can be fixed specifically for the axes by
machine parameters (MP1350.X).
The operating condition "PASS OVER REFERENCE MARKS" is sent to the PLC by the NC (M2057 or
W272).
In order to avoid exceeding the traverse range when passing over the reference marks a trip dog
(reference end-position) is necessary. This trip dog must be fixed at the end of the traverse range by
the machine manufacturer. The trigger signal from the trip dog is connected to an available PLC
input. In the PLC program this PLC input is combined with the markers for "Reference end position"
(M2556 to M2560).
4-28
TNC 406/TNC 306
2 Reference marks
3/97
2.1.1 Encoders with distance-coded reference marks

Machine parameter MP1350.x = 0
Reference marks
Trip dog
"Reference end position"
Closed
Open
Traverse direction MP1320.x
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
2 Reference marks
4-29
Sequence "Automatic passing over reference marks" (press the external START key).
MP1350.x = 0
Press external START key
Trip dog
closed?
No
Traverse direction from

MP1320.x
Yes
Invert traverse direction

from MP1320.x
Pass over two consecutive

reference marks
Is the machine
outside the software
limit switch range?
Yes
Machine moves to
software limit switch range
No
Machine stops
4-30
TNC 406/TNC 306
2 Reference marks
3/97
2.1.2 Encoders with one reference mark

Machine parameter MP1350.x=1
Reference marks
Trip dog
Closed
Open
Traverse direction MP1320
For linear measurement using a rotary encoder a reference pulse is produced on each revolution of
the encoder. It must be ensured that, after switching on the machine, always the same reference
pulse is evaluated. This can also be achieved by using the trip dog "Reference end-position."
Measuring length
Reference pulse
Desired reference pulse
Trip dog
Closed
Open
Traverse direction MP1320
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
2 Reference marks
4-31
Sequence "Automatic passing over reference marks" (Press the external START key).
MP 1350.x = 1
Press the external START key
No
Trip dog
closed?
Yes
Machine traverse in direction from

MP1320 with velocity from
MP1330.x to the trip dog
"Reference end positon"
Machine traverse in inverted direction

from MP1320 and with reduced velocity from MP1331.x
The first reference pulse after opening of the trip dog
"Reference end position" is evaluated
Is the
machine outside
the software limit
switch range?
Yes
Machine moves to
software limit switch
No
Machine stops
4-32
TNC 406/TNC 306
2 Reference marks
3/97
MP1320
Direction for traversing the reference marks

Bit 0
X axis:
Bit 1
Y axis:
Bit 2
Z axis:
Bit 3
Axis 4:
Bit 4 *
Axis 5:
+ 0 = positive
+ 1 = negative
+ 0 = positive
+ 2 = negative
+ 0 = positive
+ 4 = negative
+ 0 = positive
+ 8 = negative
+ 0 = positive
+ 16 = negative
MP1330
Feed rate for traversing the reference marks

Entry range: 80 to 30 000 [mm/min]
MP1330.0
MP1330.1
MP1330.2
MP1330.3
MP1330.4 *
X axis
Y axis
Z axis
Axis 4
Axis 5
MP1331
Feed rate for leaving the reference end position

(only for encoders with one reference mark MP1350=1)
Entry range: 80 to 500 [mm/min]
MP1331.0
MP1331.1
MP1331.2
MP1331.3
MP1331.4 *
X axis
Y axis
Z axis
Axis 4
Axis 5
MP1340
Sequence for traversing reference marks

Entry:
MP1340.0
MP1340.1
MP1340.2
MP1340.3
MP1340.4 *
0 = no evaluation of the reference mark

1 = X axis
2 = Y axis
3 = Z axis
4 = Axis 4
5 = Axis 5
1st axis
2nd axis
3rd axis
4th axis
5th axis
* only TNC 406
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
2 Reference marks
4-33
MP1350
Type of reference mark approach

Entry:
MP1350.0
MP1550.1
MP1350.2
MP1350.3
MP1350.4*
0 = encoder with distance-coded reference marks

1 = encoder with one reference mark
X axis
Y axis
Z axis
Axis 4
Axis 5
M2556
M2557
M2558
M2559
M2560
Reference end position for X axis

Reference end position for Y axis
Reference end position for Z axis
Reference end position for axis 4
W272
Operating mode
0 = Edit
1 = Manual operation
2 = Handwheel
3 = Positioning with manual entry
4 = Program run/single block
5 = Program run/full sequence
6 = Program test
7 = Pass over reference points
Set
PLC
Reset
PLC
NC
2.2 Machine datum

The reference mark defines a point on the encoder. The reference points of all axes define the scale
datum. MP960.x contains the distance from the scale datum to the machine datum. All REF-based
displays and positioning movements refer to the machine datum (see also Section "Display and
operation").
* only TNC 406
4-34
TNC 406/TNC 306
2 Reference marks
3/97
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
2 Reference marks
4-35
4-36
TNC 406/TNC 306
2 Reference marks
3/97
3 Servo positioning of the NC-axes

This section describes all the control functions which are important for the control and monitoring of
the NC-axes.
Further parameters for the NC-axes can be found under "Machine axes."
The control of the gap is described under "Gap control."
3.1 The position control loop of an NC-machine

In NC machines the servo control is normally implemented as a cascade control (see following block
diagram).
The motor speed control and the current control (both in the drive amplifier) are integrated into the
servo position control (NC-control). The servo controlled system consists of the motor and machine
slide.
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
4-37
Machine
Block diagram of the position control loop, here cascade control.
Motor
Linear/
Rotary
encoder
Tacho
Actual position
Current
regulator
Actual
current
rpm
Nominal
Nominal
regulator current
rpm
Actual
rpm
Servo amplifier
Actual
rpm
TNC 406/TNC 306
Nominal Trailing Position

position error regulator
(lag)
Actual
position
4-38
CNC Control
3/97
3.2 Control with lag

Two control methods are possible with the control:
1. Control with lag
2. Control with feed forward control only during erosion (see "Gap control with feed forward
control")
During operation the TNC automatically selects the appropriate control method.
Control with lag

Control with lag means that there is a difference (lag) between the nominal position of the axes as
defined by the NC and their actual position. Control would not be possible without this lag.
In the operating modes "Positioning with manual input", "Program run/single block" and "Program
run/full sequence" positioning without eroding (M37) is always with lag.
Lag operation is depicted in simplified form in the following block diagram for the X axis. It shows a
part of the cascade control mentioned previously.
All machine parameters which influence the control characteristic are shown here.
kv factor:
v=
at
ax
sax
X Actl
vx Noml+ +
v s
Vx
XNoml+ sax
vx Actl
Servo
amplifier
XS
MP1810
s=s0+vt
Acceleration:
MP1060
YS
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
4-39
The control calculates a nominal velocity value every 4 ms from the feed programmed in the NC
program and the final position (X-, Y-, Z-, C-axis), allowing for the acceleration which has been
stored (MP1060). The stored acceleration is valid for the rising as well as the falling slope. If two
or more axes are traversed simultaneously, the smallest value for acceleration will be effective.
Every 4 ms a nominal path value is calculated from the velocity nominal value.
s = so + v t
s
so
v
t
=
=
=
=
nominal path value

previous nominal path value
nominal velocity value
cycle time 4 ms
The nominal path value is resolved into the individual axis components, depending on which axes
have been programmed.
The axis-dependent nominal path value is compared with the actual value of the positions and
the lag sa is calculated.
sax = xNoml - xActl
sax = lag for X-axis

xNoml = nominal path value for X-axis
xAct l = actual path value for X-axis
The lag is multiplied by the kv factor MP1810 and passed on to the drive amplifier as a nominal
velocity value (analog voltage).
vx= kv sax
vx
= nominal velocity-value for X-axis
The kv factor (position loop gain) determines the control loop response of the machine, and it must
be matched to the machine.
If a very high kv factor is chosen, the lag is very small; however, this can lead to an overshoot when
approaching a new position. On the other hand, if the kv factor is too small then the new position will
be reached too slowly.
The optimal kv factor must be determined by trial and error (see the section "Commissioning and
start-up procedure").
The following diagram shows the response for various kv factors:
U [V]
MP1810
kv correct
kv too large
kv too small
MP1060
MP1810
t [s]
The acceleration can be programmed with machine parameter MP1060. The acceleration
determines the slope of the ramp on the rising and falling edges.
4-40
TNC 406/TNC 306
3/97
For axes which are mutually interpolated the kv factor must be the same, in order to avoid contour
distortion.
MP1060
Acceleration
Entry value 0.001 to 3.0 [m/s2]
MP1060.0
MP1060.1
MP1060.2
MP1060.3
MP1060.4 *
Acceleration X axis
Acceleration Y axis
Acceleration Z axis
Acceleration axis 4
Acceleration axis 5
The Kv factor in MP1810 is, in general, determined by the rapid traverse (MP1010) of the machine
and the lag, using the following formula:
m/min
kv = Ve
sa [ mm ] kv = position loop gain
ve = rapid traverse
sa = lag
or
sa = Ve
kv [mm]
Rapid traverse
[m/min]
10
kv = 2
kv = 1
6
kv = 0.5
4
2
10
12
sa [mm]
The rapid traverse (maximum traversing speed) must be adjusted by the desired analog voltage (e.g.
9 V) on the servo-amplifier (see section "Commissioning and start-up procedure"). For each axisspecific rapid traverse there is an analog voltage which is stored in machine parameter MP1050.
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
4-41
The resulting lag error sa thus depends on the analog voltage.

U[V]
10
8
kv = 1, Rapid traverse 10 m/min
6
4
2
10
12
sa [mm]
A special feed rate for manual operation (manual feed) is stored in machine parameter MP1020. In
general, it is significantly lower than the rapid traverse. Unlike the rapid traverse, this special feed
rate has no effect on the servo behavior.
MP1810
Kv factor for operation with lag

m/min
Entry range 0.1 to 10 [
]
mm
MP1810.0
MP1810.1
MP1810.2
MP1810.3
MP1810.4 *
kv factor X axis
kv factor Y axis
kv factor Z axis
kv factor axis 4
kv factor axis 5
MP1010
Rapid traverse
Entry range 80 to 30 000 [mm/min]
MP1010.0
MP1010.1
MP1010.2
MP1010.3
MP1010.4 *
Rapid traverse X axis

Rapid traverse Y axis
Rapid traverse Z axis
Rapid traverse axis 4
Rapid traverse axis 5
MP1050
Analog voltage for rapid traverse

Entry range 4.5 to 9 [V]
MP1050.0
MP1050.1
MP1050.2
MP1050.3
MP1050.4 *
Analog voltage X axis

Analog voltage Y axis
Analog voltage Z axis
Analog voltage axis 4
Analog voltage axis 5
* only TNC 406
4-42
TNC 406/TNC 306
3/97
MP1020
Manual feed
Entry range 80 to 30 000 [mm/min]
MP1020.0
MP1020.1
MP1020.2
MP1020.3
MP1020.4 *
Manual feed X axis

Manual feed Y axis
Manual feed Z axis
Manual feed axis 4
Manual feed axis 5
Servo accuracy
The internal servo accuracy and the display step of the control is always 1 m.
The control must be able to generate at least one voltage step per 1 m position deviation.
Calculation of the smallest voltage step

The control produces an analog voltage of 0 to 10 V. In the TNC the 10 V analog potential is
produced by a 14-bit ADC, giving 16 384 divisions. The resulting smallest potential step is 0.6 mV.
Potential steps per m position deviation. As described above, moving with rapid traverse (MP1010)
results in a certain lag distance sa. The rapid traverse rate is reached at a definite voltage (MP1050).
So it is possible to calculate a definite potential U per m of position deviation (lag).
U = MP1050 [mV] / sa [m]
If U is divided by the smallest voltage step which can be produced (0.6 mV), the result is the
number of voltage steps which are produced per m position deviation.
for the TNC 306:

n = U [mV]/0.6 [mV]
Example:
kv = 2
rapid traverse 5 000 [mm/min], U = 9 [V]
sa =
5 000 [m]
= 2 500 [m]
2
U =
9 000 [mV]
= 3.6 [mV/m]
2 500 [m]
n=
3.6 [mV/m]
= 6 steps/m position deviation
0.6 [mV]
* only TNC 406
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
4-43
3.3 Offset adjustment

The TNC includes several possibilities for compensating an offset voltage which would cause the
axes to drift.
The maximum permissible offset voltage in the control is 100 mV. If this voltage is reached or
exceeded, the error message
"Gross positioning error E"
will appear.
3.3.1 Offset adjustment by code number

An automatic offset adjustment can be activated with the code number 75368. After entering the
code number the control shows the offset values for the axes X, Y, Z, 4, in the dialog line. The
values indicate the voltage in 0.15 mV (LE406) and 0.6 mV (LE360) units. Thus a display of 10 means
10 x 0.6 mV = 6.0 mV (LE360). The display 0 means no offset.
The displayed offset value is derived from the offsets in the drive amplifier and control system.
On pressing the "ENT" key the offset values which are displayed on the VDU are automatically
compensated. The control puts out a compensating voltage. The compensation only takes place if
the offset voltage is > 0.6 mV.
To switch off the offset adjustment, enter the code number and press the "NO ENT" key.
The offset values are stored in the control and are non-volatile.
After a control exchange the offset compensation via code number must be re-activated.
3.3.2 Automatic cyclical offset adjustment

The machine parameter MP1220 can be used to program a time interval, after which an offset
adjustment will be performed cyclically. An automatic adjustment will be carried out when the
predetermined time has elapsed and the following conditions are fulfilled:
- all axes are stopped,
- MO5 status active,
- the axes are not clamped.
For each adjustment cycle there will be a 1 mV correction if the offset voltage is larger than 1 mV. If
the offset voltage is smaller than 1 mV then compensation steps of 0.6 mV will be used .
MP1220
Automatic cyclical offset adjustment

Entry value: 0 to 65 535 [s]
0 = no automatic adjustment
4-44
TNC 406/TNC 306
3/97
3.4 Contouring behavior in corners

3.4.1 Radial acceleration
In addition to the normal acceleration (MP1060) there is also a machine parameter for radial
acceleration (MP1070).
The machine parameter limits the feed for circular movements according to the following formula:
v=
r [m] MP1070 [m/s2]
v = feed rate for circular movements [m/s]

r = radius [m] (cutter mid-point contour)
It is recommended that a value is entered which is 50100% of that in MP1060 (Acceleration). If the
programmed feed is lower than that above, then the programmed feed will be used.
MP1070
Radial acceleration
Entry value: 0.001 to 3.0 [m/s2]
3.4.2 Constant feed rate in corners

Machine parameter MP7460 defines the angle which can still be traversed with constant feed rate.
This machine parameter is effective for corners without a radius compensation, for internal corners
it is also effective with a radius compensation.
MP7460
The permissible size of the angle depends on the drives in the machine.
Realistic values are 5 to 20.
The resulting path is as follows:
Axis standstill
= Change of axis movement direction
sa = Servo lag
sa
Path when MP7460 <

Path when MP7460 >
MP7460
3/97
Constant feed rate in corners

Entry value: 0.001 to 179.999
TNC 406/TNC 306
4-45
3.5 Monitoring functions

The NC monitors the axis positions and the dynamic behavior of the machine. If the fixed values in
the machine parameters are exceeded, an error message is displayed and the machine is stopped.
Position, standstill, movement and analog voltage are monitored.
If monitoring is not wanted at all, the following markers must be set in the PLC program:
M2688
M2689
M2690
M2691
M2692 *
Set
PLC
No monitoring X axis
No monitoring Y axis
No monitoring Z axis
No monitoring axis 4
No monitoring axis 5
Reset
PLC
Monitoring can be reactivated by resetting the markers in the PLC.
3.5.1 Position monitoring for operation with lag

The machine parameters MP1710 and MP1720 determine the ranges for the continuous position
monitoring in the machine (lag monitoring). The monitoring is active as soon as the axes are under
the control of the position control loop.
If the limits of parameter MP1710 are exceeded, the error message
"Position error"
will appear and the machine stops. The error message can be canceled by the "CE" key.
If the limit of parameter MP1720 is exceeded, the flashing error message
"Gross positioning error A"
appears.
This error can only be canceled by switching off the control. An entry value of approx. 1 to 1.4 times
lag for rapid traverse is realistic. MP1720 is larger than MP1710.
MP1710
Position monitoring for operation with lag (cancelable)

Entry value: 0.0001 to 100 [mm]
MP1720
Position monitoring for operation with lag (EMERGENCY STOP)

* only TNC 406
4-46
TNC 406/TNC 306
3/97
3.5.2 Monitoring the analog voltage difference

Monitoring of the maximum voltage difference between two control loop cycles.
As soon as the difference is greater than the value which is stored in MP1141, the flashing error
message
"Gross positioning error F"
is displayed.
MP1141
Maximum voltage difference between two control loop cycles

Entry value: 0.03 to 10 [v]
3.5.3 Movement monitoring

Movement monitoring functions in operation with feed forward control as well as with lag.
During movement monitoring, the actual path traveled is compared with a nominal path calculated
by the NC at short intervals (several servo cycles). If during this period the actual path traveled
differs from the calculated path, the flashing error message
"Gross positioning error C"
is displayed.
Machine parameter MP1140 can store a voltage below which movement monitoring is inactive.
If 10 [V] is entered in this machine parameter, movement monitoring becomes

inactive. It is not possible to operate the machine safely without movement
monitoring.
MP1140
3/97
Movement monitoring
Entry value 0.03 to 10 [V]
TNC 406/TNC 306
4-47
3.5.4 Standstill monitoring

The monitoring functions when the axes have reached the positioning window. The range in which
the axes may move is defined in MP1110.
As soon as position deviation is greater than the value which is stored in MP1110, the flashing error
message
"Gross positioning error D"
is displayed. The message also appears if, on running-in to a position, an overshoot occurs which is
larger than the value in MP1110 or the axis moves in the opposite direction on beginning a
positioning movement.
MP1110
Standstill monitoring
3.5.5 Positioning window

The positioning window defines the limits within which the control considers that a position has
been reached. After reaching the position the control starts the execution of the next block.
The size of the positioning window is defined in machine parameter MP1030.
If the value which is entered is too small, the run-in time and therefore the time between one
program block and the next will be lengthened.
If the axes have reached the positioning window after a movement, the markers M2008 to M2011
are set (see section "Axis in position").
MP1030
Positioning window
Entry value: 0.001 to 2 [mm] or []
MP1030.0
MP1030.1
MP1030.2
MP1030.3
MP1030.4 *
X axis
Y axis
Z axis
Axis 4
Axis 5
* only TNC 406
4-48
TNC 406/TNC 306
3/97
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
4-49
3.6 Controlled axes

Machine parameter MP50 determines which of the four NC-axes should be controlled.
MP50
Controlled axes
Entry value: 0 to 31
Bit 0
X axis
Bit 1
Y axis
Bit 2
Z axis
Bit 3
Axis 4
Bit 4 *
Axis 5
+0 = not controlled
+1 = controlled
+0 = not controlled
+2 = controlled
+0 = not controlled
+4 = controlled
+0 = not controlled
+8 = controlled
+0 = not controlled
+16 = controlled
Further parameters for the NC-axes may be found in the section "machine axes."
The PLC functions which are described in the following sections are only effective for controlled
axes.
3.6.1 Axes as programmable position displays

Machine parameter MP60 defines individual axes as programmable position displays (POSITIP
function).
For example: If MP60 = 3, the X and Y axes are considered to be programmable position displays
and only Z and 4th axes would be in closed loop control. X- and Y-axis positioning can still appear in
the NC program but the axes must be moved manually before the program can continue.
MP60
Axes as programmable position displays

(POSITIP function )
Entry range 0 to 31
Bit 0
X axis
Bit 1
Y axis
Bit 2
Z axis
Bit 3
Axis 4
Bit 4 *
Axis 5
+0 no POSITIP function
+1 with POSITIP function
* only TNC 406
4-50
TNC 406/TNC 306
3/97
3.6.2 Axis enable

After switching on the control voltage the "Axis-enable markers" are automatically set by the NC, so
that the machine axes can be held in closed position loops by the control.
The axis-enable markers can be reset by the NC if the control loop is opened by the PLC (see
section "Open control loop").
M2000
M2001
M2002
M2003
M2004*
Axis enable X
Axis enable Y
Axis enable Z
Axis enable 4
Axis enable 5
Set
NC
Reset
NC
* only TNC 406
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
4-51
3.6.3 Axes in position

When the axes have reached the defined positioning window (MP1030, see section "Positioning
window") after a movement, the "axis in position" markers are set by the NC. This also happens after
the control voltage is switched on.
The markers will only be reset by the NC if the axes leave the positioning window when being
traversed in manual operation or automatic operation. This is also valid when passing over the
reference marks.
The "Axis in position" markers are not set for contours which can be machined at constant feed rate.
M2008
M2009
M2010
M2011
M2032 *
X axis in position
Y axis in position
Z axis in position
Axis 4 in position
Axis 5 in position
Set
NC
Reset
NC
* only TNC 406
4-52
TNC 406/TNC 306
3/97
3.6.4 Open control loop

Under certain conditions it may be necessary to open the control loop for one or more axes. If the
markers M2544 to M2547 are set, the control loops for the relevant axes will be opened and the
appropriate markers M2000 to M2003 (see section "Axis enable") will be reset by the NC.
If, after the execution of an NC block, the control loop for a particular axis is opened and this axis is
clamped, then it is necessary to delay this opening to give the clamp sufficient time to operate. The
markers M2492 to M2495 and M2572 were introduced for this purpose. If one of these markers is
set, and the appropriate axis is in position, then the next NC block will only then be processed when
the "Open control loop" marker (M2544 to M2547 and M2572) has been set.
M2544
M2545
M2546
M2547
M2572 *
Open control loop X axis

Open control loop Y axis
Open control loop Z axis
Open control loop axis 4
M2492
M2493
M2494
M2495
M2568 *
Await open control loop X axis

Await open control loop Y axis
Await open control loop Z axis
Await open control loop axis 4
Set
PLC
Reset
PLC
PLC
PLC
3.6.5 Actual/nominal value transfer

If the markers M2552 to M2555 are set, then the actual position value will be transferred to the
nominal value.
The transfer of the actual value is possible in the "Manual" operating mode, and also during an M-ST-strobe, but not in the "Full sequence" operating mode.
M2552
Actual-nominal value transfer X axis
M2553
Actual-nominal value transfer Y axis
M2554
Actual-nominal value transfer Z axis
M2555
M2564*
Actual-nominal value transfer axis 4
Set
PLC
Reset
PLC
* only TNC 406
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
4-53
3.6.6 Feed rate override by the PLC

The feed rate may be altered by the override potentiometer or the PLC word W766. Whenever a
value is loaded into W766 the potentiometer becomes inactive. The actual position of the override
potentiometer is loaded into PLC word W494.
W494 position of the feed rate override in percent (NC -> PLC).
W766 percent factor for the feed rate override (PLC -> NC) entry range 0 to 150.
3.7 Non-controlled rotary axis (M03/M04)

If axis 4 is defined as a rotary axis it may be operated as a freely rotating spindle with the
M-functions M03, M04 and M05.
The speed for the rotary axis is taken from machine parameter MP2090 if the PLC doubleword D726
does not contain a value. (M-function M03, M04 and M05: see section M-Functions.)
The markers M2485 and M2486 change the polarity of the analog voltage for the C-axis.
The rotation speed may be altered by the spindle override potentiometer or the PLC word W764.
Whenever a value is loaded into W764 the potentiometer becomes inactive. The actual position of
the override potentiometer is loaded into PLC word W492.
MP2090
M2485
M2486
M2487
D752
W492
W764
4-54
Speed for non-controllable rotary axis (M03/ M04)

Entry range 1 to 83 (RPM)
Status display and sign of analog voltage for C-axis

(M03)
Status display and sign of analog voltage for C-axis
(M04)
Status display for C-axis (M05)
Set
PLC
Reset
PLC
PLC
PLC
PLC
PLC
Speed for non-controlled rotary axis (M03/M04)

Position of the spindle override in percent
(NC -> PLC)
Percentage factor for spindle override
Entry range 0 to 150
TNC 406/TNC 306
3/97
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
4-55
4 Gap control
The gap control is switched on with M36 and switched off with M37 (see Chapter 7 M-Functions).
The control responds to the analog gap signal (0 to 5V), and the input of the gap signal as described
in the following, by sending an analog voltage to the nominal value outputs. If the gap is too small
and there is a tendency towards short-circuiting or arcing, the electrode is retracted along the
programmed contour. If the gap is too largeor at the start of the eroding processthe electrode
advances along the programmed contour. When the eroding process is stable, the gap is only
controlled to within a few m.
Feed forward control allows the control to react extremely quickly to the gap signal, resulting in very
low servo lag at low speeds. In particular this improves the gap control behavior when eroding with
graphite.
Machine parameter MP2130 defines the maximum speed at which feed forward control is to be
maintained during the eroding process. If the value is exceeded, the control switches to servo lag
mode. During an active eroding process marker M2785 is set.
MP2130
Maximum speed for feed forward control during eroding

Input range: 0 to 500 (mm/min)
M2785
Eroding process is active
Set
NC
Reset
NC
4.1 Input characteristics of the gap signal

The input characteristic of the gap signal can be adapted to the particular machine being used. The
input characteristic is defined with machine parameters MP2010, MP2020 and MP2030 (see also
Chapter 13.2.1 "Servo sensitivity").
Machine parameter MP2070 defines the speed at maximum gap voltage (5V) if MP2010 = 1 and
MP2020 = 1 and thus the scale. With machine parameter MP2080 the gap can also be inverted
(MP2080 = 1). The input characteristic can still be influenced by machine parameters MP2131 and
MP2132 over the gap signal range of 2.5 to 5V.
For calculations in the PLC, the current value of the gap signal is stored in word W392.
MP2010
MP2010.0
MP2010.1
MP2020
MP2020.0
MP2020.1
4-56
Characteristic gradient
Entry range: 0.1 to 10.000
Input characteristic range 2.5 to 5V
Input characteristic range 0 to 2.5V
Multiplication factor
Entry range: 1,000 to 10,000
TNC 406/TNC 306
4 Gap control
3/97
MP2030
Characteristic kink
Entry range: 0 to 100 (%)
MP2030.0
MP2030.1
MP2070
Feed rate at maximum gap voltage (5V)

and MP2020 = 1 and MP2030 = 1
Entry range: 1 to 100 (mm/min)
MP2080
Gap signal
Entry range: 0 to 2
0 = not inverted
1 = inverted
2 = analog input from spindle potentiometer
(for test purposes)
MP2131
Feed rate limited for switching to new eroding feed rate from MP2132
Entry range: 0 to 500 (mm/min)
MP2132
New eroding feed rate when value from MP2131 is exceeded

Entry range 0 to 500 (mm/min)
W392
Current value of the gap signal (NC -> PLC)

Range: 0 to 500 (1/100 V)
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
4 Gap control
(100% = 5V)
(0% = 2.5V)
(100% = 0V)
(0% = 2.5V)
4-57
Example:
F
[mm/min]
60
50
9
40
30
20
7
3
10
0
2.5
0
5V
10
Ugap [V]
Range for typical

process run
20
30
6
40
50
60
70
Electrode
moves towards
workpiece
Electrode
retracts
80
90
10
Short circuit
0V
Standstill
2.5 V
Freerun
5 V (MP 2080 = 0)
MP2030.0 = 30
MP2030.1 = 30
MP2010.0 = 1
MP2010.1 = 1
MP2020.0 = 2
Characteristic kink (characteristic range 2.5 to 5V)

Characteristic kink (characteristic range 0 to 2.5V)
Characteristic gradient (characteristic range 2.5 to 5V)
Characteristic gradient (characteristic range 0 to 2.5V)
Multiplication factor (characteristic range 2.5 to 5V)
(new slope starting at kink point is the product of MP2020 MP2010)
MP2020.1 = 2.4 Multiplication factor (characteristic range 0 to 2.5V)
(new slope starting at kink point is the product of MP2020 MP2010)
MP2070 = 20
Feed rate at maximum gap voltage (= scaling)
MP2131 = 30
Feed rate limited for a new eroding feed rate from MP2132
(MP2132 = 30)
MP2132 = 0
New eroding feed rate when value from MP2131 is exceeded
MP2133 = 100 Retracting speed during short circuit (signal at X12)
4-58
TNC 406/TNC 306
4 Gap control
3/97
4.2 Short Circuit Behavior

M36 on
The control must be able to react very quickly to a short circuit. A short circuit can occur during
normal positioning, but also during erosion.
If a short circuit occurs during erosion, i.e. when M36 is on and the gap control is active according to
the characteristic (see Chapter 4.1), the control reacts by retracting the electrode along the
programmed path. The control retracts the electrode until the short circuit is eliminated, or until 20
blocks have been retraced, or back to the NC block in which M36 was programmed. The retraction
velocity is determined by the characteristic or by the machine parameter MP2133, if a value has
been entered there.
M36 off
Marker M2623 causes a special short-circuit behavior during normal positioning (M36 off). As long
as this marker is set, the electrode retracts until the short circuit stops, then returns to the
workpiece at the programmed feed rate.
With Marker M2622, the PLC can suppress the short-circuit input X12. This may be required for a
tool change or to retreat from a eroded contour.
A short circuit is reported to the NC via X12. The NC then sets Marker M2782. The letter F is then
highlighted in the status display.
MP2133
Retraction speed during short circuit

Entry value: 0 to 500 [mm/min]
0 = Retraction speed from characteristic curve
Set
Reset
M2782
Short circuit reported at Input X12
NC
NC
M2622
Short circuit suppressed at Input X12
PLC
PLC
M2623
Retraction if short circuit occurs and M36 is off
PLC
PLC
4.3 Retraction of the electrode during erosion

If the electrode should be retracted during the erosion process (M36 on), for example to inspect it,
Marker M2617 must be set (e.g. with a button). The electrode is retracted as long as the marker is
set or for up to 20 NC blocks, or back to the NC block in which M37 was last programmed. If the
marker is reset, the electrode returns along its previous path at the last programmed feed rate or, if
no feed rate was programmed, at the feed rate entered in Machine Parameter MP1090; or if Marker
M2620 is set, at the feed rate entered in MP2060. Marker M2780 is set during electrode retraction
and reapproach. Marker M2784 is also set during reapproach. Marker M2781 is set if the maximum
retraction point is reached.
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
4 Gap control
4-59
Machine parameter MP2050 defines a distance to the last eroded position for traverse at the feed
rate from MP1090 or MP2060, or from the NC program. From this point on the characteristic curve
is active again.
MP1090
Feed rate for reapproach

Entry value: 0 to 30 000 [mm/min]
MP2060
Feed rate for retraction during erosion (M2620)

Entry value: 1 to 500 [mm/min]
MP2050
Distance to eroded position during reapproach (M2617)

Entry value: 1 to 500 [m]
Set
Reset
M2617
Electrode retracts as long as the marker is set
PLC
PLC
M2620
Feed rate from MP2060 becomes active

(for special applications, e.g. feed rate via key))
PLC
PLC
M2780
Electrode is retracting / reapproaching
NC
NC
M2781
Maximum retraction point has been reached
NC
NC
M2784
Electrode is reapproaching
NC
NC
4.4 Arc recognition

If a voltage between 0 V and 2.5 V (negative feed rate) is measured at the analog input for the
duration entered in machine parameter MP2120, the control positions the electrode to the beginning
of the last executed erosion block and switches erosion off with M37. Then the error message
"ERODING ERROR" is output. Marker M2788 is set at the same time.
If the control should automatically continue the program run, the start marker M2642 must be set by
the PLC. Marker M2788 is then reset by the NC, the error message is cleared and the reapproach
point is sought. If it is found, the control resumes program execution at the reapproach point. If the
reapproach point is not found, the NC program is at the program beginning, since the search is
aborted at the END PGM block of the main program.
MP2120
Time for arc recognition

Entry value: 1 to 99.9 [s]
Set
Reset
M2642
Start marker after faulty erosion process
PLC
PLC
M2788
Error message is displayed
NC
NC
4-60
TNC 406/TNC 306
4 Gap control
3/97
4.5 Free run and spark-out

If the distance between the electrode and workpiece has become so large that the gap signal has
reached 5 V, the generator can transmit a free run signal through a PLC input to the control. This can
be used to set Marker M2616 for "free run during erosion ."
When the programmed position has been reached for the first time (WTG=0) Marker M2783 is set
by the NC. The electrode remains in this position until Marker M2616 is set, and the time in machine
parameter MP2110 has expired. Then the next NC block will be executed.
Spark out in a disk cycle see chapter 6.7.3.
MP2060
MP2110
Feed rate for infeed when eroding (M2620 is set)

Delay of signal for "spark-out is completed" (marker M2616)
Entry range: 0.1 to 99.9 [s]
M2616
Free run during erosion or spark-out is completed
Set
PLC
Reset
PLC
M2783
End of eroding path reached (WTG = 0)
NC
NC
M2620

(input characteristic then has no effect)
PLC
PLC
D388
Current way to go (WTG)
4.6 Flushing the gap

To make it possible to flush the erosion gap, the electrode can be automatically and cyclically lifted
away from the workpiece and returned again. This "auto jump" distance must be entered in the
Doubleword D730 and the erosion time in Doubleword D734. The cyclic movement for flushing is
started by Strobe Marker M2621. Marker M2780 is set during the up-and-down motion, Marker
M2784 is set only during downward motion, and Marker M2781 is set when the return point has
been reached. Machine Parameter MP2051 defines a distance to the last eroded position up to
which the electrode moved at the feed rate from MP1090 or MP2060, or from the NC program.
From this point on the characteristic curve is active again.
MP2051
Distance to the last eroded position during reapproach

Entry value: 1 to 500 [m]
M2621
Strobe marker for gap flushing
D756
Auto jump distance during flushing
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
4 Gap control
Set
Reset
PLC
PLC
4-61
The following examples for TNC 306 show how the flushing timer may be written in the PLC
program:
L
X
=
L
X
=
L
R
L
A[
L
>
]
CMT
EM
LBL
L
>
JPT
L
=
LBL
L
=
<=
S
EM
W676
K + 100
D730
W678
K + 100
D734
M2621
M2621
M910
; Auto Jump Distance (AJD)
D734
K+0
; Eroding time
; Eroding time (ER)
; Request flushing
; Flushing on buffer marker
31
31
D212
K+0
32
D734
D212
32
D212
K + 40
D212
K+0
M2621
;Timer Module
; Timer Buffer
; Eroding Timer
:PLC Cycle Time
; Request Flushing
4.7 Eroding parameters

In order to control the generator as required, the TNC stores appropriate data as eroding parameters.
Machine parameters MP2199 defined whether these eroding parameters are stored as Qparameters in the NC program or in the form of erosion tables.
MP2199 Enable erosion tables
0 = Tables not active
2 = Tables active
4-62
TNC 406/TNC 306
4 Gap control
3/97
4.7.1 Eroding parameters as Q-parameters in the NC program

If machine parameter MP2199 = 0 (erosion tables not active), Q-parameters Q90 to Q99 are
reserved for the storage of eroding parameters and are transferred to the PLC doublewords D668 to
D704 accordingly.
D668
D672
D676
D680
D684
D688
D692
D696
D700
D704
Q-parameter
Q-parameter
Q-parameter
Q-parameter
Q-parameter
Q-parameter
Q-parameter
Q-parameter
Q-parameter
Q-parameter
(NC PLC)
Q90
Q91
Q92
Q93
Q94
Q95
Q96
Q97
Q98
Q99
4.7.2 Eroding parameters in erosion tables

If machine parameter MP2199 = 2 (erosion tables active), the eroding parameters are stored in the
form of erosion tables and transferred to the PLC addresses as defined below. Furthermore, Qparameters (Q96Q98) are also used for NC to PLC transfers.
(NC PLC)
D412
D416
D420
Q-parameter
Q-parameter
Q-parameter
B666
B667
B668
Maximum power stage

Minimum power stage
Power stage number
NR
B669
B670
B671
W672
B674
B675
W676
W678
B680
B681
W682
W684
W686
D688
W692
W694
B696
B697
B698
B699
Low voltage current

High voltage current
Nominal gap voltage
Pulse on duration
Pulse off duration
Servo sensitivity
Auto Jump Distance
Erosion Time
Arc sensitivity
Polarity electrode
High voltage selector
Wear rate
Surface finishing
Stock removal
Two-times gap
Minimum undersize
Auxiliary parameter 1
LV 2)
HV 2)
GV 2)
TON 2)
TOF 2)
SV 2)
AJD 2)
ET 2)
AR
P
HS
WR
RA
SR
2G
UNS
AUX1
AUX2
AUX3
AUX4
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
Q96
Q97
Q98
1)
(.E - table PLC) can be changed during

machining via Q-parameter Q99
2)
These eroding parameters can be

temporarily changed during machining
via the screen status display
(.E - table NC)
(.E - table PLC)
4 Gap control
4-63
W700
W702
AUX5
AUX6
For further calculations various eroding parameters are also assigned to extra Q-parameters:
Q96 to Q98
Q99
Q150
Q151
Q152
Q154
Q155
Q156
Q157
Q161
Q201 to Q225
Q231 to Q255
Additional eroding parameters

Current power stage number NR
Maximum NR
Minimum NR
Current eroding table number
Minimum undersize UNS of minimum NR
Two-times gap 2G of minimum NR
Two-times gap 2G of maximum NR
Value of MP2040
Eroding time
Two-times gap 2G of minimum to maximum NR
Minimum undersize UNS of minimum to maximum NR
MP2040
Factor, transmitted to Q157 if TOOL CALL or EL CALL is executed

Entry value: 0.1 to 500 [mm/min]
4.7.3 Create erosion parameter table in the PLC program

The machine tool builder can create his own erosion parameter tables in the instruction list of the
PLC through special code words. With MP 4020 one can select whether the table should be
activated from the NC (defined by HEIDENHAIN), or from the PLC.
MP 4020
Erosion parameter table from NC or PLC

Entry values: 0 or 1
0 = Erosion parameter table from NC
1 = Erosion parameter table from PLC
In order to be able to enter the code words EROTAB, TXT0, TXT1, TXT2, TXT3, NAME, ELEM,
ENDTAB for the creation of the erosion table in the instruction list, the cursor field must be opened
with the SPACE key (see example below).
Each column of the erosion parameter table requires the following information:
TXT0 ..... TXT3
NAME
ELEM
Dialog (4 languages) shown when the column in the erosion parameter

table is selected (depending on MP7230)
Column designation
B/W/D ,#, type of number, routine no., characteristic; comments
B/W/D Memory for input values
, , element is editable during erosion
,#, element is locked during erosion
Type of number (see below)
Routine no. = 0: no specification when entering a value
Routine no. = 1: specification check if value already exists
Characteristics: (must all be programmed at one time)
FRST First element on-line
4-64
TNC 406/TNC 306
4 Gap control
3/97
SENS
LAST
Q154
Q155
Q201
Q231
Element servo sensitivity (used directly by the TNC)

Last element on-line
Element of min-nr. = Q154
Element of min-nr. = Q155, element of max-nr. = Q156
Elements transferred to Q201 ... Q225 from min to max
Elements transferred to Q231 ... Q255 from min to max
Type of number
Integer (I)
I1-9999 1...9999
I1-2000
I1-255
I1-150
I1-99
I1-31
I1-25
I1-20
I1-15
I1-9
I1-3
W
1...2000 W
1...255 B
1...150 B
1...99 B
1...31 B
1...25 B
1...20 B
1...15 B
1...9
B
1...3
B
Integer (I)
I9999
I999
I255
I180
I150
I120
I100
I99
I90
I60
I31
I30
I25
I21
I20
I15
I9
I3
I2
I1
0...9999
0...999
0...255
0...180
0...150
0...120
0...100
0...99
0...90
0...60
0...31
0...30
0...25
0...21
0...20
0...15
0...9
0...3
0/1/2
0/1
W
W
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
Real (R)
R1D200
R1D200I
R1D99
R1D99I
0.0 ... 200.0
W
W
0.0 ... 99.0
W
W
R3D9999 0.000 ... 9999.999 D

R3D9999I
R3D1000 0.000 ... 1000.000 D
R3D1000I
R3D999
R3D999I
0.000 ... 999.999 D
R3D9
R3D9I
0.000 ...
9.999 W
R3D1
R3D1I
0.000 ...
1.000 W
(The identifier I means that the

values are converted to inch if
the table is switched to INCH.)
Conditions for table structure:
The maximum number of elements in the eroding table is 32

The first two elements must be of the "byte" type
The first element must be the power stage number
Word or long elements must start at an even address
The total number of bytes must be even
The names of the elements determine the length of the element and must be equal or longer
than the cursor length (fill with space)
The cursor length is specified by the type of number
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
4 Gap control
4-65
Example of a table created in the PLC program:

EROTAB
;first element: byte
TXT0 "POWER STAGE NUMBER"
TXT1 "LEISTUNGSSTUFE NR."
TXT2 " French dialog"
TXT3 " Italian dialog"
NAME "NR"
ELEM B,#,I1-25,1
;byte 668 = begin of PLC-location
;
;second element: byte
TXT0 "LOW VOLTAGE CURRENT"
TXT1 "STROM BEI NIEDRIGER SPANNUNG"
TXT2 " French dialog "
TXT3 " Italian dialog "
NAME "LV"
ELEM B, ,I99,0,FRST
;669
.............
TXT0 "SERVO SENSITIVITY 1..99%"
TXT1 "SERVO EMPFINDLICHKEIT 1..99%"
TXT3 " Italian dialog "
NAME "SV"
ELEM B, ,I1-99,0,SENS ;675
.............
TXT0 "TWO-TIMES GAP [MM/INCH]"
TXT1 "DIAMETRALER SPALT [MM/INCH]"
TXT3 " Italian dialog"
NAME "2G "
ELEM W,#,R3D9I,0,Q201,Q155 ;692
..............
ENDTAB
4.7.4 Servo sensitivity (SV)

The eroding parameter Servo Sensitivity SV in the erosion table is evaluated directly by the control.
Its function is to adjust the gap control characteristic and thus the reaction speed to the gap signal.
SV is expressed as a percentage (099%) of the original characteristic gradients.
F
[mm/min]
SV = 99
0
2.5
4-66
TNC 406/TNC 306
SV = 60 5 Ugap [V]
4 Gap control
3/97
4.8 Transmission of eroding parameters to the PLC

The following PLC markers define the transmission of eroding parameters to the PLC:
Set
NC
Reset
PLC
If MP2199 = 2:
Values have been changed in editing mode in the
currently active Stage Number of the erosion table
during program run.
Acknowledgment is by a reset from the PLC.
NC
PLC
M2796
If M2795 has indicated changed values in the

currently active erosion table, M2796 should be set
by the PLC if these new values are to be
transferred immediately to the PLC (B668 and
following). The NC will reset the marker to
acknowledge successful execution.
PLC
NC
M2798
A new parameter table is active (first CYCL DEF

GENERATOR)
or M36
or eroding parameters displayed in the status during
program run have been changed
or the value of Q99 (Power Stage Number NR) has
been changed if M36 is active.
NC
PLC
M2799
Strobe marker for starting transmission to the

generator control
PLC
NC
M2794
If MP2199 = 0:
a Q-parameter in the range Q90Q99 has been
changed and the values transferred to the
appropriate addresses in the PLC.
If MP2199 = 2:
a Q-parameter in the range Q96Q98 has been
changed and the values transferred to the
appropriate addresses in the PLC.
M2795
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
4 Gap control
4-67
4.9 Data exchange between PLC and generator control

The TNC 406 can transfer data from the NC to the generator control and vice versa.
This data transmission is activated by the PLC and runs through the RS-422/V.11 interface. The
RS-422/V.11 interface is permanently allocated for transmission. It can be considered an extension
to the available PLC inputs and outputs. The data is transmitted in hexadecimal code in Motorola
format (first high-byte, then low-byte).
The data format has the following fixed setting:
1 start bit, 8 data bits, even parity, 1 stop bit, 9600 baud
After reception of one data block, the receiving unit checks whether the BCCs of the transmitted
and received data blocks match. If this is the case, the receiving unit confirms the data block by
transmitting <ACK>. Otherwise it transmits <NAK> and outputs an error message.
4.9.1 Transmission from the generator control to the PLC

The transmission protocol consists of the following sequence:
Generator transmits:
<SYNC> <Number n> <ID character> <Hi-byte no.> <Low-byte no.>

<Byte 1> < > <....> <Byte n> <BCC>
Meaning of the characters:

<SYNC>
<Number n>
<ID character>
<Hi-byte no.>
<Low-byte no.>
<Byte 1>
<......>
<Byte n>
<BCC>
= Synchronization character (= CA)

= Number of following data bytes including <ID character> without
<BCC>. Maximum 100 data bytes are allowed (01H to 64H)
= Code for command to be executed
00 = Read 8 markers (all markers permitted)
02 = Set or reset a marker (permitted M0 to M1999 and M2930 to M3023)
04 = Read x bytes or read x words (permitted B0 to B1023)
06 = Load byte or load word (B0 to B255)
= Start address High Byte
= Start address Low Byte
= Number of data bytes or data bytes (1 to n), or none of either (depending of

the function)
= Block Check Character (generated to describe all bytes except SYNC)
If the PLC has received a data block, checked the BCC and acknowledged with ACK, it then
evaluates the command byte (ID character) and executes it. A new transmission must not be started
until the old transmission has been concluded with ACK.
4-68
TNC 406/TNC 306
4 Gap control
3/97
Example: Read 8 Markers:

Eight Markers are to be read starting from Marker M1800.
Marker states: 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0

<BCC>
CA 03 00 07 08 0C
PLC transmits:
ACK or NAK
PLC protocol:
PLC transmits:

<00..FF> <BCC>
CA 04 00 07 08 1E 14
ACK or NAK
Generator protocol:
Example: Reset a Marker

Marker 1800 is to be reset.

<00..FF> <BCC>
CA 04 02 07 08 00 09
PLC transmits:
ACK or NAK
Generator protocol:
Example: Read Bytes

Five bytes are to be read starting with Byte 22 (B22=1F, B23=07, B24= 2A, B25=11, B26=00).

<Number of data bytes> <BCC>
CA 04 04 00 16 05 13
PLC transmits:
ACK or NAK
PLC protocol:
PLC transmits:

<Byte 1> < > <....> <Byte 5> <BCC>
CA 08 04 00 16 1F 07 2A 11 00 3B
ACK or NAK
Generator protocol:
Example: Load Bytes

Three bytes (B100, B101 and B102) are to be loaded into the 3 bytes starting with B22.

<Byte 1> < > <Byte 3> <BCC>
CA 06 06 00 16 64 65 66 71
PLC transmits:
ACK or NAK
Generator protocol:
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
4 Gap control
4-69
4.9.2 Transmission from the PLC to the generator control

It becomes necessary for the PLC to transmit to the generator control when, for example, M36 is
output, a generator setting must be changed during erosion, or the operating mode of the control
must be changed.
For transmission the PLC provides Words W760 and W762, which must be loaded with the first
byte to be transmitted or with the number of the bytes to be transmitted. Strobe marker M2799
starts data transmission. If transmission is successful, ACK is transmitted to the PLC and the strobe
marker M2799 is reset. Marker M2799 must be reset before a new transmission can be started.
Data is transmitted according to the following protocol:
PLC transmits:

<Byte 1> < > <....> <Byte n> <BCC>
ACK/NAK
If the NC recognizes an error during data transmission, it sets one of the markers from Marker
M2924 to M2928. These markers from the memory area of the PLC error messages are
permanently reserved for displaying the transmission error and must not be used for any other
purpose. Markers M2930 to M3023 can be changed as desired.
If the generator control transmits NAK (faulty transmission) to the PLC, the data will be transmitted
two more times. If the generator control transmits NAK three times, the transmission is aborted and
Marker M2924 for "transmission error" is set.
Marker
Function
Set
Reset
M2799
Strobe marker for starting transmission

to the generator control
PLC
NC
M2924
M2925
M2926
M2927
M2928
Transmission error (after three NAKs )

False marker numbers
Address exceeds memory area
Generator setting missing
External unit is not ready
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
W760
W762
No. of the first byte to be transmitted

Number of bytes to be transmitted
PLC
PLC
PLC
PLC
4-70
TNC 406/TNC 306
4 Gap control
3/97
5 EMERGENCY STOP routine

A PLC-input (LE360 X22/4, LE406 X42/4) and a PLC-output (LE306 X21/34, LE406 X41/34 and in the
PL410 X8/16) with the designation "control operational" are available in the control for the
EMERGENCY STOP routine.
If a malfunction is recognized in the control, the TNC switches the "control operational" output off, a
flashing error message appears on the VDU-screen and the PLC-program is stopped. This error
message cannot be canceled. After removing the fault the switch-on routine must be gone through
again.
If the input "control operational" is switched off by an event outside the control, the error message
"External EMERGENCY STOP" is displayed and the NC sets the marker M2190 and M2191. This
error message can only be canceled after the control voltage is switched on again.
The external EMERGENCY STOP is evaluated by the control as an external stop. If the external
EMERGENCY STOP is triggered during an axis movement, the moving axis is stopped in a
controlled manner. If the drive amplifiers are blocked by the external EMERGENCY STOP, the set
value output may exceed the position-monitoring fixed by the machine parameter. In this case, the
error message "Positioning error" or "Gross positioning error" will be displayed.
Set
Reset
M2190
Cancelable error message is displayed
NC
NC
M2191
Error message "EXTERNAL EMERGENCY

STOP" is displayed
NC
NC
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
4-71
5.1 Connection diagram

Under fault conditions, the "control operational" output should switch off the 24-volt supply. Because
of the enormous importance of this function this output is tested by the control every time the
power is switched on.
This diagram represents a proposal for circuitry. The machine tool builder is responsible for
complying with applicable safety regulations.
Logic unit
Switch opens briefly when the control voltage
of each microprocessor is switched on
LE406
LE360
X41/34
X21/34
X44/2
X24/2
X44/1
X24/1
"Control is
ready"
24V not
24V
interruptible interruptible
EMERGENCY
STOP
buttons
Control
voltage
on
4-72
X42/4
X22/4
"Control ready"
feedback
k1
k1
K1
TNC 406/TNC 306
24 V
PLC
3/97
5.2 Flow diagram

The external electronics must meet the specified conditions. In particular, the acknowledgment for
"Control operational" must reach the TNC after a maximum of 146 ms.
X21/34
X41/34
X22/4
X42/4
1
4 5
VDU-display
1.
Wait for control voltage.
2.
Recognize the control voltage on X22/4 or X42/4 and

reset the "Control operational" output on X21/34 or
X41/34 (t < 70 ms).
3.
Maximum time during which the "Control operational"

on X22/4 or X42/4 must go to 0 (t < 146 ms). If
exceeded,
4.
Recognize the acknowledgment and set output X21/34

or X41/34 (t < 24 ms).
5.
Wait for control voltage.
6.
Normal control operation. Output and acknowledgment

"Control operational" are high.
7.
Control voltage switched off externally.
8.
After the control voltage is switched on again, the error

message can be canceled, followed by normal control
operations.
9.
The control switches off the output "control operational"

(X21/34 or X41/34 ) after recognizing a fault.
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
EXTERNAL DC VOLTAGE MISSING
EMERGENCY STOP DEFECTIVE
EXTERNAL DC VOLTAGE MISSING
External EMERGENCY STOP
Flashing Error Message
4-73
4-74
TNC 406/TNC 306
3/97
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
4-75
6 Display and operation 4

Machine parameters and PLC-markers can be used to influence the control behavior for certain
functions. All machine parameters and PLC markers which influence the display and the operation of
the control, and those for which there is no separate section in this manual, are described in the
section "Display and operation" .
The VDU-screen displays can be changed by machine parameters and PLC-markers.
6.1 Setting the machine datum point

A workpiece datum point can be defined in the operating mode "Manual operation."
NC positioning blocks normally refer to the set datum point (workpiece datum point). If a positioning
block is to be referenced to the reference point of the encoder instead of the set datum point, this
can be achieved with M91.
The distance from the machine datum to the scale datum is entered in machine parameter MP960.x.
All REF-related displays and positioning commands refer to the machine datum.
A third datum point can be defined in machine parameter MP950.X. If a positioning block is to be
referenced to this datum point, this can be achieved with M92.
M91 and M92 are effective only for the block in which they are programmed in (non-modal). The
workpiece datum, once set, will not be lost.
M91 and M92 are non-modal.
RM
RM
Workpiece datum
Scale datum
4-76
TNC 406/TNC 306
RM
Machine datum
RM = Reference mark
3/97
MP950
MP950.0
MP950.1
MP950.2
MP950.3
MP950.4 1)
Datum point for positioning blocks with M92

Entry range: 30 000.000 to +30 000.000 [mm] or []
Values referenced to the machine datum
X axis
Y axis
Z axis
Axis 4
Axis 5
MP960
Shift of the reference point

Entry range: 30 000.000 to +30 000.000 [mm] or []
MP960.0
MP960.1
MP960.2
MP960.3
MP960.4
X axis
Y axis
Z axis
Axis 4
Axis 5
1) only
3/97
1)
TNC 406
TNC 406/TNC 306
4-77
4-78
TNC 406/TNC 306
3/97
6.2 Graphics
Three different graphics display modes are available.
With the aid of a menu the operator can select fast image data processing instead of graphics (see
User's Manual). The graphics display on the VDU-screen can be altered by machine parameters.
The following choices are available:
The view in 3 planes mode can be generated according to either European or American convention.
Preferred European
Preferred American
Example:
The coordinate system can be rotated by +90 in the machining plane

This is useful when, for instance, the Y-axis is fixed as the tool axis.
Z
X
Rotation by +90
No rotation
MP 7310
Graphics display
Entry range: 0 to 3
Bit 0
Changeover of
view in 3 planes
+ 0 = European convention
+ 1 = American convention
Bit 1
Rotation of the coordinate system

in the machining plane by +90
+ 0 = no rotation
+ 2 = coordinate system rotated by +90
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
4-79
6.3 Status window

In the operating modes "Program run/single block", "Program run/full sequence", "Programming and
Editing" and "Test Run" the status information (position values, current tool, feed rate, eroding
functions etc.) are all displayed in the bottom half of the screen. In "Manual Operation" or "Electronic
Handwheel" mode the status information occupies the whole screen.
6.3.1 Positional and status display

The entry and display step for the HEIDENHAIN-contouring control TNC406/TNC 306 is 0.001 mm or
0.001.
The most recently selected axis is displayed inversely. The PLC is informed (by a marker) which axis
has an inverse display. This information can be evaluated, for example, in connection with handcontrol equipment.
M2096
X Key last pressed
M2097
Y Key last pressed
M2098
Z Key last pressed
M2099
M2095
1) only
4-80
Set
Reset
NC
NC
IV Key last pressed

1)
V Key last pressed
TNC 406
TNC 406/TNC 306
3/97
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
4-81
6.3.2 Feed rate display

In the operating modes "Program run/single block" and "Program run/full sequence" the programmed
contouring feed rate is displayed when the feed potentiometer is in the 100% position. The feed
potentiometer can be used to vary this programmed feed rate from 0 to 150%.
In the manual operating modes the axis feed rate is displayed, after the axis-direction key is pressed.
MP7271
Feed rate display

0 = display
1 = no display
4-82
TNC 406/TNC 306
3/97
6.3.3 Display of the M-functions M03, M04, M05, M08

The miscellaneous functions for control of the freely rotating rotary axis (M03, M04, M05) and for
the flushing (M08) are displayed in the status display. The display of these M-functions is controlled
by the PLC, i.e. the manufacturer of the machine must take this into account when creating the PLCprogram. The markers M2485 and M2486 change the polarity of the analog voltage for the rotary
axis.
M2485
M2486
M2487
Status-display and sign of S-analog for M03 PLC

Status-display and sign of S-analog for M04
Status-display for M05 and rotary axis stop
M2508
Status-display M08
0 = No status-display M08
1 = Status-display M08
M2609
Status-display M08 inverse
Set
PLC
Reset
6.3.4 Display of the Way-To-Go (WTG)

During the eroding process, the momentary "distance-to-go" of the programmed eroding path is
displayed as WTG <Position> beneath the axis display.
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
4-83
6.3.5 Control operational

If the control is operational, i.e. a positioning or M-function is performed, the status window displays
the symbol "*". If a current NC-program is interrupted with the external stop key, the "*" will flash in
the status-display.
Set
Reset
M2183
Program interruption (display "Control

operational" flashes)
NC
NC
M2184
Control operational (display "Control

operational" on or flashes)
NC
NC
6.3.6 Cancel status display

A machine parameter can be used to define whether the status display should be reset with the Mfunctions M02 and M30, as well as with NC-block "END PGM" . All the programmed values in the
status display, e.g. tool number, tool length, tool radius, scaling factor, datum-shift, feed rate etc.,
will then be reset.
The Q-parameters Q0Q255 are not immediately deleted after a power interruption. They are stored
in the battery-buffered memory. They are not defined as deleted until a program is selected with the
keys "PGM NR" and "ENT."
MP7300
Cancel Status display

Entry: 0 or 1
0 = status display not canceled
1 = status display canceled with M02, M30 or END PGM
6.4 Display of currently active power stage number

In the operating modes "Program run/single block" and "Program run/full sequence", the currently
active power stage and the first erosion parameters (LV, HV, GV, TON, TOF, SV, AJD and ET) are
displayed above the status window and can be changed directly (temporarily) with the cursor keys if
the erosion tables are activated with machine parameter MP2199 (see chapter "Eroding parameters")
6.5 Display of actual machining time

Between the erosion table with the actual power stage and the status window the actual machining
time can be displayed using MP7272 (only TNC 306).
MP7272
Display of actual machining time

Entry: 0 or 1
0 = display
1 = no display
4-84
TNC 406/TNC 306
3/97
6.6 Error messages

Under certain conditions error messages from the NC or the PLC will be displayed on the screen
under the display for the operating mode. Non-flashing error messages can be canceled with the CEkey. In the event of a flashing error message the machine must be switched off and the fault
corrected. If a non-flashing error message is displayed on the screen, marker M2190 will be set.
The machine manufacturer determines the conditions under which the PLC will produce error
messages. Up to 200 different PLC error messages can be generated.
The dialogs for PLC error messages can be determined by the manufacturer of the machine. Please
contact HEIDENHAIN about this. The standard version has dialogs with the reserved designations
"PLC: ERROR 0" to "PLC: ERROR 99". These PLC error messages can be activated by the PLCmarkers M2924 to M3123.
The error messages can be canceled either by pressing the CE-key or by resetting the appropriate
markers.
If several PLC error messages are activated simultaneously, they can be displayed in turn by
pressing the CE key. Then the next PLC error message activated by the lowest marker is displayed.
If the program run is to be stopped on output of a PLC error message, this must be explicitly
programmed in the PLC-program (NC STOP).
In order to show a PLC error message as a flashing message, the marker M2815 must also be set.
If marker M2815 is set, but none of the 200 PLC error messages is activated, then the flashing error
message "EMERGENCY STOP PLC" will be displayed.
Set
Reset
M2815
Flashing PLC error message
PLC
PLC
M2190
Non-flashing error message
NC
NC
PLC
PLC
is displayed
M2924
PLC error message 0 (reserved to RS-4221))
M2925
M2926
M2927
M2928
M3122
PLC error message 198
M3123
PLC error message 199
1) only
3/97
TNC 406
TNC 406/TNC 306
4-85
6.7 Cycles
The HEIDENHAIN contouring controls permit calling HEIDENHAIN standard-cycles within the NC
program (e.g. pecking, tapping, pocket milling etc.).
In addition, the manufacturer of the machine can program manufacturer-cycles and store them in
the control (see "OEM-cycles"). The sequence of some cycles can be altered by machine parameters
and PLC-markers.
6.7.1 Cycle inhibit

Machine parameter MP7245 can be used to selectively inhibit the HEIDENHAIN standard-cycles.
MP7245.0
Inhibit Cycles 1 to 15
Input range: 0 to 65 535
MP7245.1
Inhibit cycles 16 to 30
Cycle 1
+ 0 = enable
+ 2 = inhibit
+ 0 = enable
+ 4 = inhibit
+ 0 = enable
+ 8 = inhibit
+ 0 = enable
+ 16 = inhibit
+ 0 = enable
+ 32 = inhibit
+ 0 = enable
+ 64 = inhibit
+ 0 = enable
+ 128 = inhibit
+ 0 = enable
+ 256 = inhibit
+ 0 = enable
+ 512 = inhibit
+ 0 = enable
+ 1024 = inhibit
+ 0 = enable
+ 2048 = inhibit
+ 0 = enable
+ 4096 = inhibit
+ 0 = enable
+ 8192 = inhibit
+ 0 = enable
+ 16 384 = inhibit
+ 0 = enable
+ 32 768 = inhibit
Cycle 16
+ 0 = enable
+ 2 = inhibit
+ 0 = enable
+ 4 = inhibit
+ 0 = enable
+ 8 = inhibit
+ 0 = enable
+ 16 = inhibit
+ 0 = enable
+ 32 = inhibit
+ 0 = enable
+ 64 = inhibit
+ 0 = enable
+ 128 = inhibit
+ 0 = enable
+ 256 = inhibit
+ 0 = enable
+ 512 = inhibit
+ 0 = enable
+ 1024 = inhibit
+ 0 = enable
+ 2048 = inhibit
+ 0 = enable
+ 4096 = inhibit
+ 0 = enable
+ 8192 = inhibit
+ 0 = enable
+ 16 384 = inhibit
+ 0 = enable
+ 32 768 = inhibit
Cycle 2
Cycle 3
Cycle 4
Cycle 5
Cycle 6
Cycle 7
Cycle 8
Cycle 9
Cycle 10
Cycle 11
Cycle 12
Cycle 13
Cycle 14
Cycle 15
4-86
TNC 406/TNC 306
Cycle 17
Cycle 18
Cycle 19
Cycle 20
Cycle 21
Cycle 22
Cycle 23
Cycle 24
Cycle 25
Cycle 26
Cycle 27
Cycle 28
Cycle 29
Cycle 30
3/97
6.7.2 Cycle Scaling factor

Machine parameters can be used to decide whether the "Scaling factor" cycle only operates in the
machining plane or also parallel to the tool axis.
MP7410
Cycle "Scaling factor" effective in two or three axes

Entry: 0 or 1
0 = "Scaling factor" operates in all three principle axes
1 = "Scaling factor" only operates in the machining plane
6.7.3 Disk Cycle

The Disk cycle makes it possible to program various electrode motions through MOD entries (see
your User's Manual).
The sparking-out is also influenced by MOD entry:
MOD 0 to 3 fast sparking out
MOD 4 to 7 complete sparking out
MOD 0 to 3
As soon as the Disk cycle is started in the NC program, the NC sets Marker M2786. When the final
vector is reached (i.e. the electrode has reached the programmed depth and radius), the NC sets
Marker M2783.
When the generator sets Marker M2616 (sparking out process ended) through a PLC input, it starts
a Timer (MP2110, e.g. 2 sec). If the Marker is not reset within this time, the sparking out will
continue for 1 revolutions past the point at which the marker was set. The cycle is then finished
and the NC subsequently sets Marker M2790.
If Marker M2616 is reset within the time from MP2110, the timer is also reset, and it is restarted
when the marker is set again. The sparking out process begins again.
MOD 4 to 7
As soon as the Disk cycle is started in the NC program, the NC sets Marker M2786. When the final
vector is reached (i.e. the electrode has reached the programmed depth and radius), the NC sets
Marker M2783.
When the generator sets Marker M2616 (sparking out process ended) through a PLC input, it must
remain set for 1 revolutions so that the cycle can be recognized as finished eroding. Then the
NC sets Marker M2791.
If Marker M2791 is reset within these 1 revolutions, the sparking out process begins again.
Feed rates for MOD 0 to 7:

The feed rate in the direction of the expansion vector (see the User's Manual) is determined by the
gap monitor.
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
4-87
Circular feed rates in the disk cycle

(if marker M2640 is set)
MP1092
to
MP1097
MP1092
Modes: 0 and 4 (erosion, M2640=0)
MP1093
Modes: 0 and 4 (spark-out, M2640=1)
MP1094
Modes: 1 and 5 (erosion, M2640=0)
MP1095
Modes: 1 and 5 (spark-out, M2640=1)
MP1096
Modes: 2/3 and 6/7 (erosion, M2640=0)
MP1097
Modes: 2/3 and 6/7 (spark-out, M2640=1)
M2616
Free run during erosion or spark-out is completed
Set
PLC
Reset
PLC
M2640
Selects the circular feed rate in the disk cycle
PLC
PLC
M2783
NC
NC
M2787
Disk erosion in the last circle
NC
NC
M2620
PLC
PLC
M2790
Disk erosion completed (MOD 0 to 3)
NC
PLC
M2791
NC
PLC
W394
Actual angle while disk cycle
NC
NC
6.8 User-parameters
With the MOD-function up to 16 different machine parameters can be made accessible to the
machine operator as User-parameters.
The machine manufacturer determines in machine parameter MP7330.x which machine parameters
are to be defined as User-parameters.
The dialogs for the user-parameters are defined in the PLC dialogs.
MP7330
Determination of user parameters accessible via MOD function

Entry range: 0 to 9999.00 (No. of the desired machine parameter).
MP7330.0
MP7330.1
.
.
.
.
MP7330.14
MP7330.15
User-parameter 0
User-parameter 1
4-88
User-parameter 14
User-parameter 15
TNC 406/TNC 306
3/97
6.9 Code-numbers
The MOD functions can be used to enter code-numbers for the control. These code numbers can be
used to activate certain control functions.
Code-number
Function
95 148
807 667
105 296
86 357
75 368
123
531 210
Select machine parameter list

Select PLC mode
Correction tables for the non-linear axis-error compensation
Remove program protection
Automatic offset adjustment
Select the user-available list of machine parameters
Erase markers M1000 to M2000 and Byte 0 to Byte 127
The value of the code-number which is entered is stored in Doubleword D276, except the code
numbers above The machine manufacturer can evaluate this code with the aid of the PLC and define
his own functions for code numbers or disable the preset code numbers.
D276
Value of the code-number most recently entered by MOD
6.10 Programming station

Machine parameters can be used to set the control so that it can be utilized as a programming
station, without the machine. In this setting only the operating modes "Programming and editing"
and "Test run" function. It is possible to select whether the PLC should be active or not in the
"programming station" setting.
MP7210
Programming station
Entry: 0, 1, 2
0 = Control and programming
1 = Programming station, "PLC active"
2 = Programming station, "PLC inactive"
6.11 Decimal sign

The decimal sign can be selected by machine parameter.
MP7280
3/97
Decimal sign
Entry: 0 or 1
0 = Decimal comma
1 = Decimal point
TNC 406/TNC 306
4-89
6.12 Memory test

A machine parameter can be used to select if the RAM and the EPROM memory areas should be
tested upon switching on the control.
MP7690
Memory test at switch-on

Entry: 0 to 3
Bit 0 RAM-test
Bit 1
EPROM-test
+ 0 = Memory test at switch-on

+ 1 = No memory test at switch-on
+ 0 = Memory test at switch-on
+ 2 = No memory test at switch-on
6.13 New program start/End of program run

If a new program is started, marker M2060 is set.
If the end of the program is reached in operating modes "Program run/single block" or "Program
run/full sequence", the NC sets marker M2061. This marker is only reset at the start of the next
program.
The information "End of program" can be evaluated by the PLC. This is necessary when operating,
for instance, with a pallet-changer.
M2060
M2061
A new program is started

END PGM, M02 or M30 has been executed
Set
NC
NC
Reset
PLC
NC
6.14 Restore position

The reapproach function can be started with the following key sequence:
TEST, PGM-NR, NR, ENT, UP TO, BLOCK NUMBER, ENT, PROGRAM RUN, NC START.
During the Test Run mode marker M2059 is set by the NC. If the TNC is then switched to Program
Run mode (full sequence or single block), marker M2059 is reset by the NC.
If the reapproach is now activated with NC-START, marker M2019 is set by the NC. The marker is
reset by the NC, when the reapproach position is reached.
M2019
M2059
4-90
Reapproach activated with NC-START

TNC in Test Run mode
TNC 406/TNC 306
Set
NC
NC
Reset
NC
NC
3/97
6.15 Overwrite Q-parameters

The values in the Q-Parameters Q100 to Q107 can be overwritten by the PLC. In this way
information from the PLC can be transferred to the machining program.
The value which is to be transferred is stored in Doubleword D528. The Q-parameter which is to be
overwritten is defined in Word W516. The transfer is initiated by the strobe-marker M2713.
The Doubleword D528 has a multiple usage. See also Sections "PLC positioning" and "Datum-shift."
M2713
Set
PLC
Activate the transfer of the value from D528 to the

Q-Parameter defined in W516
Number of the Q-parameter to be overwritten
(Q100 to Q107)
Value to be transferred to the Q-Parameter
W516
D528
Reset
NC
6.16 Color adjustment

The BC 110 (only TNC 406) is a 14 inch color graphics screen with a resolution of 640 x 490 pixels.
The colors in the screen-display can be selected by machine parameter. For example, the colors can
be adjusted to suit the corporate image of the machine tool builder image or the design of the
machine.
The following color adjustments cannot be altered by machine parameters:
HEIDENHAIN company logo after switching on the machine (GREEN),
flashing error messages (RED),
error message for invalid machine parameter (RED),
plan view in the graphics display (BLUE),
cursor (always inverse).
The entry values for color adjustment are byte-oriented. The preferred entry is hexadecimal.
Color
HEX Ranges
Adjustment
Entry for yellow:
$0....
Red
Green
Blue
0 to 3
Coarse
0 to F
Fine
0 to 3
Coarse
0 to F
Fine
0 to 3
Coarse
0 to F
Fine
Since it is possible to make mistakes when setting the colors (e.g., red error messages on red
background), HEIDENHAIN recommends a standard color adjustment. This standard color setting is
the setting generally used by HEIDENHAIN and is prompted by the control system when creating
the MP list.
The new soft key "SETUP COLORS" (code number 98148) enables you to adjust the colors red,
green, and blue in the machine parameter for the respective color. You can mix the colors for
foreground and background separately and accepted the change with ENT. Pressing END terminates
without changing the color.
The standard color-adjustment is given in the following list.
Machine
parameter
MP7350
MP7351
3/97
Color for ...
Standard color adjustment
Window frame
Error messages
$30200C
$3F0000
TNC 406/TNC 306
4-91
MP 7352
MP7352.0
MP7352.1
MP7352.2
Operating-mode "Machine"
Window Background
Operating mode display
Dialog
$000000
$342008
$3F3828
MP7353
MP7353.0
MP7353.1
MP7353.2
Operating-mode "Programming"
Window Background
Operating mode display
Dialog
$000000
$342008
$3F3828
MP7354
MP7354.0
MP7354.1
MP7354.2
MP7354.3
Program-text display "Machine"

Background
General program-text
Current block
Background of active window
$080400
$38240C
$38341C
$302410
MP7355
MP7355.0
MP7355.1
MP7355.2
MP7355.3
Program-Text display "Programming"

Background
General program-text
Current block
$080400
$38240C
$38341C
$302410
MP7356
MP7356.0
MP7356.1
MP7356.2
Status- and PLC-window

Background
Axis positions in the status-display
Status-display, except axis positions
$0C0800
$3F2C18
$3F280C
MP7357
MP7357.0
MP7357.1
Soft key display "Machine"

Background
Symbols
$000000
$3F3828
MP7358
MP7358.0
MP7358.1
Soft key display "Programming"

Background
Symbols
$000000
$3F3828
MP7360
MP7360.0
MP7360.1
MP7360.2
MP7360.3
MP7360.4
Graphics: 3D-depiction
Background
Surface
Front face
Text-display in graphics window
Side face
$000000
$203038
$0C1820
$3F3F3F
$102028
MP7361
MP7361.0
MP7361.1
MP7361.2
MP7361.3
MP7361.4
Graphics: view in three planes

Background
Plan (Grid)
Front and side view
Axes cross and text
Cursor
$000000
$203038
$203038
$3F3F3F
$3F0000
MP7362
MP7362.0
MP7362.1
MP7362.2
MP7362.3
Additional status-display in graphics window

Background graphics window
Background status display
Status symbols
Status values
$080400
$0C0800
$38240C
$3F2C18
4-92
TNC 406/TNC 306
3/97
7 M-functions
Up to 100 miscellaneous functions (M-functions) can be programmed. The code for these Mfunctions is transferred to the PLC either before or after execution of the NC-block. A number of
these M-functions have a fixed meaning for the NC. Such M-functions are marked with * in the
following table. The other M-functions are freely available.
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
MEffective at:
Function Start of End of
block
block
O
M 00
O
M 01
O
M 02
O
M 03
O
M 04
O
M 05
O
M 06
O
M 07
O
M 08
O
M 09
O
M 10
O
M 11
O
M 12
O
M 13
O
M 14
O
M 15
O
M 16
O
M 17
O
M 18
O
M 19
O
M 20
O
M 21
O
M 22
O
M 23
O
M 24
O
M 25
O
M 26
O
M 27
O
M 28
O
M 29
O
M 30
O
M 31
O
M 32
O
M 33
*
*
*
*
MEffective at:
block
block
O
M 34
O
M 35
O
M 36
O
M 37
O
M 38
O
M 39
O
M 40
O
M 41
O
M 42
O
M 43
O
M 44
O
M 45
O
M 46
O
M 47
O
M 48
O
M 49
O
M 50
O
M 51
O
M 52
O
M 53
O
M 54
O
M 55
O
M 56
O
M 57
O
M 58
O
M 59
O
M 60
O
M 61
O
M 62
O
M 63
O
M 64
O
M 65
O
M 66
O
M 67
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
MEffective at:
block
block
O
M 68
O
M 69
O
M 70
O
M 71
O
M 72
O
M 73
O
M 74
O
M 75
O
M 76
O
M 77
O
M 78
O
M 79
O
M 80
O
M 81
O
M 82
O
M 83
O
M 84
O
M 85
O
M 86
O
M 87
O
M 88
O
M 89
O
M 90
O
M 91
O
M 92
O
M 93
O
M 94
O
M 95
O
M 96
O
M 97
O
M 98
O
M 99
*M-function with fixed meaning for the NC
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
7 M-functions
4-93
Evaluation of the M-function must be programmed in the PLC. When transferring an M-function to
the PLC the code for the M-function is stored in Word W260 and the strobe-marker M2045 is set.
The execution of the M-function must be signaled to the NC by setting the markers M2482. The
next NC-block is only processed when the signal is acknowledged and the marker M2045 (strobe
signal for M-function) is reset by the NC.
Marker
Function
Set
Reset
M2045
M2482
Strobe signal for M-function

Acknowledgment of M-functionPLC
NC
NC
NC
W260
Code for M-function (NC PLC)
4-94
TNC 406/TNC 306
7 M-functions
2/97
Example:
Evaluation of the miscellaneous function M03 in the PLC.
PLC-output:
PLC-input:
199
200
201
.
.
.
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
.
.
.
930
931
.
.
.
1170
1171
1172
1173
1174
1175
1176
1177
1178
O10 = C-axis enable/disable

I10 = Acknowledgment of M-function
L M2045
RN M2482
CMT 77
;Change signal for M-function

;Reset acknowledgment of M-function
;Evaluation of M-function
EM
LBL 77
CASE W260
CM0
CM1
CM2
CM3
CM4
;End of main program
ENDC
EM
LBL 3
L M1
S M2485
R M2486
R M2487
S O10
L I10
S M2482
EM
;M-code
;End of module
M-function M03
Status display M03, sign of C-axis analog
Reset M04
Reset M05
C-axis enable/disable
Acknowledgment of M-function?
Acknowledgment of M-function
M2045
M2485
O10
I10
M2482
2/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
7 M-functions
4-95
7.1 Generator ON/OFF (M36/M37)

The generator and gap control are switched on and off with M36 and M37. Both M-functions are
evaluated in the PLC program (M2045 is the M function/signal, the M function is stored under Word
W260).
With M-function M36 the gap control is switched on with M37 switched off.
The markers M2618 and the complementary marker M2619 activates also the status display M36,
or M37.
If eroding process is active, marker M2785 is set.
Before M36 is evaluated by the PLC, marker M2798 (set by the NC) need to be feedback by the PLC
(see section 4.7).
M2618 = 1 Gap control on, M36 displayed

M2619 = 0
M2618 = 0 Gap control off, M37 displayed
M2619 = 1
M2785
Eroding process active
4-96
TNC 406/TNC 306
7 M-functions
Set
PLC
Reset
PLC
PLC
PLC
NC
NC
2/97
PLC example:
400
.
.
436
437
.
.
500
501
.
.
1020
1021
1022
1023
.
.
1050
1051
1052
1053
.
.
1211
1212
1213
1214
.
.
1412
1413
1414
1415
1416
1417
.
.
1476
1477
1478
1479
1480
1481
1482
2/97
CASE W260
;M-code
CM 36
CM 37
;Generator ON
;Generator OFF
ENDC
EM
LBL36
CM361
CM101
EM
;Generator ON
;M36
;Acknowledgment for M-function
LBL37
CM371
CM101
EM
;Generator OFF
;M37
LBL101
LN M2482
S M2482
EM

:If no feedback signal available
LBL361
LN M2618
S M2618
R M2619
S O10
EM
;M36
;If gap control is off
;Switch on gap control
;Complementary marker for switch on gap control
;Generator ON
LBL371
L M0
ON M0
R M2618
S M2619
R O10
EM
;M37
;Set Accu to "1"
;Set Accu to "1"
;Switch off gap control
;Complementary marker for switch off gap control
;Generator OFF
TNC 406/TNC 306
7 M-functions
4-97
7.2 Program-halt on M-functions

Normally, when an M-function is produced, the program run in the operating modes "Program
run/full sequence" and "Program run/single block" is interrupted until the PLC acknowledges that the
M-function has been performed.
In some applications the program should be executed continuously and not wait for the
acknowledgment of the M-function. This function can be selected by machine parameter MP7440,
Bit 2.
If this function is selected then PLC-positioning, datum-correction, or limit switch range-change are
all not permitted during the output of the M-function.
4-98
TNC 406/TNC 306
7 M-functions
2/97
7.3 Program-halt on M06

According to ISO 6983, the M-function M06 means a tool change. Machine parameter MP7440,
bit 0 can be used to select whether on transferring M06 to the PLC the program should halt. If the
control is set so that a program-halt occurs on M06 then the program must be restarted after the
tool change. This can also be carried out directly by the PLC.
7.4 M-function M89

M89 can be used for the modal cycle-call.
The possibilities for calling a cycle are:
With the NC-block "CYCL CALL."

With the miscellaneous function M99. M99 is only effective for a single block and must
be reprogrammed for each execution.
With the miscellaneous function M89 (depending on the machine parameter).
M89 as a cycle-call is modally effective, i.e. for every following positioning block
there will be a call of the last-programmed machining-cycle. M89 is canceled by M99 or
a CYCL CALL-block.
If M89 is not defined as a modal cycle-call by machine parameters, then M89 will be transferred to
the PLC as a normal M-function at the beginning of the block.
MP7440
Output of M-functions
Entry range: 0 to 7
Bit 0
Program-halt on M06
Bit 1
modal cycle-call M89
Bit 2
Program-halt on
M-functions
2/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
+ 0 = Program-halt on M06
+ 1 = No program-halt on M06
+ 0 = Normal code-transfer of
M89 at beginning of block
+ 2 = Modal cycle-call M89 at end of block
+ 0 = Program-halt until acknowledgment
of M-function
+ 4 = No program-halt,
do not wait for acknowledgment
7 M-functions
4-99
4-100
TNC 406/TNC 306
7 M-functions
2/97
8 Key simulation
Data entry on the HEIDENHAIN contouring controls are made with the TNC keyboard and the
manufacturer's own machine control panel. The two control panels are joined to connectors X23 and
X27 (LE 306) or X45 and X46 (LE406) on the logic unit by a connecting cable (see "Mounting and
Electrical Installation").
The key-code from the TNC-keyboard is directly evaluated by the NC. PLC inputs and outputs for the
machine-control panel are available on connector X27 or X46. These PLC inputs and outputs must be
evaluated by the PLC and the appropriate information passed to the NC.
8.1 TNC-keyboard
The key-code from the TNC-keyboard is directly evaluated by the NC.
The keys on the TNC-keyboard and the soft keys on the BC 110 B can be inhibited by the PLC. With
M2876 the entire alphabetic keyboard can be inhibited. M2877 inhibits the soft-key row and M2878
inhibits the changeover keys to the right of the screen. All other keys can be inhibited selectively
with M2854 to M2923. If an inhibited key is pressed, the NC sets the marker M2182 and deposits
the key-code for the key which was operated in word W274. If a not inhibited key is pressed, the NC
sets the marker M2181 and deposits the key-code for the key which was operated in word W274.
The PLC must reset the markers M2182 or M2181 after evaluating this information.
The keys on the TNC-keyboard and the soft keys on screen can also be simulated by the PLC. To
achieve this the appropriate key-code is entered in Word W516 and activated by the strobe-marker
M2813. After execution of the key-code the NC resets the strobe-marker M2813.
A fixed code has been introduced for certain soft key functions. As with key simulation, this function
is executed by entering the required code in W516 and activating with M2813. The appropriate soft
key function must be displayed in the foreground or background mode for this. With the trailing edge
of M2813 the PLC is told whether the function was properly executed.
Address
Function
Set
Reset
W272
Operating mode
2 = Electronic handwheel
7 = Pass over reference point
Key-code for the operated, inhibited key or
not inhibited key
Word with multiple-function
Key-code for simulating TNC-key
activated by M2813
not inhibited key was operated
Inhibited key was operated
Soft key function not executed
Activate the key from W516
Inhibit the alpha keyboard
Inhibit the soft-key row below the screen
Inhibit the changeover keys at right of screen
NC
NC
NC
NC
PLC
PLC
NC
NC
NC
PLC
PLC
PLC
PLC
PLC
PLC
NC
NC
PLC
PLC
PLC
W274
W516
M2181
M2182
M2187
M2813
M2876
M2877
M2878
2/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
8 Key simulation
4-101
Marker
Function
inhibit
M2854
CHF
M2855
PGM
NAME
Keycode
Keycode
Set
Reset
M2871
75
PLC
PLC
59
M2872
76
PLC
PLC
77
PLC
PLC
58
Marker
Function
inhibit
M2856
60
M2873
M2857
RND
61
M2874
TOUCH
PROBE
78
PLC
PLC
CT
M2858
CC
62
M2880
TOOL
DEF
84
PLC
PLC
M2859
63
M2881
TOOL
CALL
85
PLC
PLC
M2860
64
M2882
R-L
86
PLC
PLC
M2861
65
M2883
R+R
87
PLC
PLC
M2862
MOD
66
M2884
88
PLC
PLC
M2863
67
M2885
89
PLC
PLC
68
M2886
90
PLC
PLC
M2864
M2865
PGM
CALL
69
M2887
CYCL
DEF
91
PLC
PLC
M2867
CR
71
M2888
CYCL
CALL
92
PLC
PLC
M2868
72
M2889
LBL
SET
93
PLC
PLC
M2869
73
M2890
LBL
CALL
94
PLC
PLC
M2870
74
4-102
TNC 406/TNC 306
8 Key simulation
2/97
Marker
Function
inhibit
Keycode
Marker
Function
inhibit
Keycode
Set
Reset
M2891
NO
ENT
95
M2907
111
PLC
PLC
M2892
STOP
96
M2908
112
PLC
PLC
M2893
EXT
97
M2909
113
PLC
PLC
114
PLC
PLC
115
PLC
PLC
M2894
CL
PGM
98
M2910
M2895
DEL
99
M2911
100
M2912
116
PLC
PLC
101
M2913
117
PLC
PLC
102
M2914
118
PLC
PLC
103
M2915
END
119
PLC
PLC
PLC
PLC
M2896
M2897
M2898
ENT
GOTO
M2899
M2901
CE
105
M2920
+/
124
M2902
IV
106
M2921
125
PLC
PLC
M2903
107
M2922
126
PLC
PLC
M2904
108
M2923
127
PLC
PLC
M2905
109
PLC
PLC
M2906
110
PLC
PLC
2/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
8 Key simulation
4-103
Key-code for the alphabetic keyboard:

xx 50 (Hex)
ASCII key-code (see "Appendix")
Key-code for the soft-key row on the screen:

xx51 (Hex)
xx results as follows:
08
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
09
Key code for changeover keys at right of screen:

xx52 (Hex)
xx results as follows:
00
GRAPHICS
TEXT
SPLIT
SCREEN
01
Special codes:
0080 (Hex): NC-Start
0081 (Hex): NC-Stop
The HEX-Code must be calculate to the Decimal-Code before entered in W516!
4-104
TNC 406/TNC 306
8 Key simulation
2/97
Example:
If the "Position-transfer" key is pressed in the operating mode "Positioning with manual entry", a
linear NC-block with all three principal coordinates (X, Y, Z) is to be generated.
66
.
70
.
75
.
1102
CASE W272
.
CM 3
.
ENDC
.
EM
;Interrogate - operating mode

.
;Positioning with manual entry
.
1103
1104
1105
1106
1107
1108
LBL 3
L M10
SN M2896
L M2182
CMT 31
EM
;Operating mode: Positioning with manual entry

;Key simulation active?
;No, then disable "Position-transfer" key
;Disabled key pressed?
;Yes, then call key simulation
1109
1110
1111
1112
1113
1114
1115
1116
1117
1118
1119
1120
1121
1122
1123
1124
LBL 31
L M10
R M2896
SN M10
CASE B200
CM 130
CM 131
CM 132
CM 133
CM 132
CM 134
CM 132
CM 135
CM 141
ENDC
EM
;Key simulation
;Key simulation active?
;Yes, then enable "Position-transfer" key
;Otherwise set key simulation active
;Perform single-step
;Key L(line)
;Key X
;Key "Position-transfer"
;Key Y
;Key Z
;Key "END-BLOCK"
;Reset key simulation
1125
1126
1127
1128
1129
1130
1131
1132
1133
1134
LBL 130
L K60
= W102
CM 136
EM
LBL 131
L K109
= W102
CM 136
EM
;L(ine)
;Key-code for L(ine)
1135
1136
1137
1138
1139
LBL 132
L K100
= W102
CM 136
EM
2/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
.
;End main program
;Simulate key
;X
;Key-code for X
;Simulate key
;"Position-transfer"
;Key-code for "Position-transfer"
;Simulate key
8 Key simulation
4-105
1140
1141
1142
1143
1144
LBL 133
L K108
= W 102
CM 136
EM
1145
1146
1147
1148
1149
LBL 134
L K107
= W102
CM 136
EM
1150
1151
1152
1153
1154
LBL 135
L K119
= W102
CM 136
EM
1155
1156
1157
1158
1159
1160
1161
1162
1163
1164
1165
LBL 136
L M2813
JPT 137
L B200
+ K+1
= B200
L W102
= W516
LN M2813
S M2813
EM
1166
1167
LBL 137
EM
;Return marker
1168
1169
1170
1171
1172
1173
1174
1175
1176
LBL 141
L M2813
JPT 137
L K+0
= B200
L M10
R M10
R M2182
EM
;End key simulation

;Simulation performed?
;No, then wait
4-106
TNC 406/TNC 306
;Y
;Key-code for Y
;Simulate key
;Z
;Key-code for Z
;Simulate key
;"END BLOCK"
;Key-code for "END BLOCK"
;Simulate key
;Key simulation
;Strobe - key transfer from W516
;Still set, then wait
;Case byte
;Increment case byte
;Buffered key-code
;To NC
;Set strobe (activate simulation)
;Reset step counter

;Reset marker "Key simulation active"
;Reset marker "Disabled key pressed"
8 Key simulation
2/97
2/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
8 Key simulation
4-107
4-108
TNC 406/TNC 306
8 Key simulation
2/97
2/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
8 Key simulation
4-109
8.2 Machine control panel

A manufacturer's specific machine control panel can be connected to the HEIDENHAIN contouring
controls. See "Mounting and Electrical Installation."
There are 24 PLC inputs (I128 to I151) and 8 PLC outputs (O 0 to O 7) available on the female
connector X27 for the evaluation of the keys on the machine control panel. The evaluation of the
signals from the machine control panel must be performed in the PLC-program. The appropriate
markers will be set thereby. For safety reasons a complement-marker must be reset when some
functions are activated. If the complement-marker is not properly set or reset, the flashing error
message "Error in PLC-program" will appear. The displayed code identifies the marker where the
error has occurred.
An axis-direction key which has been pressed can be stored by marker M2450 (Complement-marker
M2466) . This means that the axis will be traversed until the marker M2450 is reset. This memory
function must be activated by machine parameter MP7680 Bit 9.
MP7680
Memory function for axis-direction keys

0 = Not stored
1 = Stored
Marker
Function
Error
message
Set
Reset
M2448
M2464
NC-start (edge evaluation)

Complement NC-start
1A
PLC
PLC
M2449
M2465
Rapid traverse
Complement rapid traverse
1B
M2488
M2450
M2466
NC-stop ("0" signifies stop)

Memory function for axis-direction keys
Complement memory function for axisdirection keys
M2451
M2467
Feed enable
Complement feed enable
1D
M2456
M2472
Manual traverse X+
Complement manual traverse X+
1I
M2457
M2473
Manual traverse X
Complement manual traverse X
1J
M2458
M2474
Manual traverse Y+
Complement manual traverse Y+
1K
M2459
M2475
Manual traverse Y
Complement manual traverse Y
1L
4-110
TNC 406/TNC 306
1C
8 Key simulation
2/97
Marker
Function
Error
message
Set
Reset
M2460
M2476
Manual traverse Z+
Complement manual traverse Z+
1M
PLC
PLC
M2461
M2477
Manual traverse Z
Complement - manual traverse Z
1N
M2462
M2478
Manual traverse 4+
Complement manual traverse 4+
1O
M2463
M2479
Manual traverse 4
Complement manual traverse 4
1P
M2452
M2468
Manual traverse 5+
Complement manual traverse 5+
2M
M2453
M2469
Manual traverse 5
Complement manual traverse 5
2N
Example:
NC-start key with two contacts I128 and I129
axis-direction key X+ with one contact I130
71
72
73
74
100
101
102
103
2/97
.
L I128
= M2448
LN I129
= M2464
.
L I130
= M2456
LN I130
= M2472
;First contact NC-start key

;NC-start
;Second contact NC-start key
;Complement NC-start
;Axis-direction key X+
;Manual traverse X+
;Complement - manual traverse X+
TNC 406/TNC 306
8 Key simulation
4-111
9 Short circuit/probing
The TNC normally uses input X12 as the short-circuit input (see also section "Short circuit, CYCL
STOP and arcing"). If the TNC probing functions are to be utilized, either the electrode or a probe
system from HEIDENHAIN (such as the TS 120) can be used to perform the probing.
Marker M2028 indicates whether the control is currently in one of the probing functions, for
example so that a test voltage can be turned on between the electrode and the workpiece.
The chapter "Installation and electrical connection" contains instructions for connecting the short
circuit input X12.
9.1 Interfacing the probing function

If the probing function is used (such as the TS 120 touch probe), the machine tool manufacturer
must ensure that the rotary axis, if present, cannot turn when the touch probe is in use.
The probing functions can be controlled either with the probing cycles in the "Manual" and "Electronic
Handwheel" modes or by the "Touch Probe" function in the NC program (see TNC User's Manual).
The probing function is interfaced to the measuring conditions using machine parameters MP6120
to MP6150.
F2
Max. measuring range

(MP6130)
F2 = Probing feed rate (MP6120)
4-112
TNC 406/TNC 306
2/97
The error message "Touch point inaccessible" appears if the maximum measuring range (MP6130) is
exceeded.
The probing sequence must be enabled by the PLC with marker M2503. This marker is set by the
NC after a probing cycle starts and the NC waits until the PLC resets marker M2503 before
executing the probing function. A number of conditions are transferred to the PLC with markers
M2022 to M2072. This information can be processed further in the PLC program. The probing
function is controlled entirely from the NC.
In all modes when the stylus is deflected and marker M2502 is set, the controller stops the
machine. If M2502 is not set, the controller only detects stylus deflection if the probing function has
started. This is why HEIDENHAIN recommend setting marker M2502 as soon as the touch probe is
in the spindle.
MP6120
Probing feed rate

Input range: 80 to 30000 [mm/min]
MP6130
Maximum measuring range

Input range: 0.001 to 99999.9999 [mm]
MP6150
Retraction feed rate in probing cycle

Input range: 80 to 30000 [mm/min]
M2502
NC STOP with deflected stylus in all modes
Set
PLC
Reset
PLC
M2503
Enable marker for probing functions
PLC
PLC
M2022
Touch probe not ready (no standby signal at

connector X12)
NC
NC
M2023
Probe triggered before start of probing cycle
NC
NC
M2025
Probe triggered (probing sequence is executed)
NC
PLC
M2026
Probing sequence ended or interrupted
NC
NC
M2027
Low battery voltage (battery warning at connector

X12); only evaluated during the probing sequence)
NC
NC
M2028
Probing function activated (for switch on/off test

voltage)
NC
NC
2/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
4-113
9.2 Successive probing

The probing procedure is so that the electrode automatically makes contact several times in
succession. MP6100 defines the number of times contact is to be made. The measured value
resulting from the first contact is not saved; it serves merely to push aside the small layer of dirt
from the surface of the electrode. The subsequent values are saved: their mean value is calculated
and used as the measuring result. If MP6100 = 0 or 1, the electrode makes contact twice but only
the second measured value is saved.
MP6110 defines the maximum permitted difference of probe values during successive probing. If
this value is exceeded the error message Probing value incorrect appears.
MP6100
Number of contacts in probing cycle

Input range: 0 to 5
MP6110
Maximum difference between probe values

Input range: 0 to 2 mm
9.3 Manual probing

The menu item TOUCH PROBE MANUAL is for probing in one axis (for example the Z axis),
whereby the other axes (for example X and Y) can be moved with the handwheel. The probing
process does not end upon contact; the electrode merely backs off by the value in MP6140 and then
probes again. In this way the user can find cavities, for example, in the workpiece. Probing continues
until marker M2617 is set by the PLC.
If the input value of MP6140 is 0, the electrode is returned to the starting point.
The probing path in the probing direction can be limited by entering a value before beginning.
Positioning stops when the entered limit is reached. If no value is entered, the value from MP6130
is used.
MP6140
Retraction distance in TOUCH PROBE MANUAL

Input range: 0 to 30 mm
MP6130
Maximum measuring range in TOUCH PROBE MANUAL

Input range: 0 to 30 000 mm
M2617
Probing stop in TOUCH PROBE MANUAL
4-114
TNC 406/TNC 306
Set
PLC
Reset
PLC
2/97
2/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
4-115
4-116
TNC 406/TNC 306
2/97
10 Handwheel
Either an integral handwheel (HR 130) or a portable handwheel (HR 330 or HR 410) can be
connected to HEIDENHAIN contouring controls TNC406 and TNC306 (see also chapter "Mounting
and Electrical Installation"). The operation of the electronic handwheel is described in the TNC User's
Manuals.
If electronic handwheel operation is chosen but no handwheel is connected, the error message
"HANDWHEEL NOT READY" will appear.
Shock and vibration can cause a slight movement of the handwheel and thus lead to an unwanted
traverse movement. To avoid this, a threshold sensitivity for the electronic handwheel can be
entered in machine parameter MP7660 .
The count direction for the encoder signals from the handwheel is entered in machine parameter
MP7650.
MP7640
Handwheel
Entry: 0 to 3
0 = no handwheel
1 = HR 330
2 = HR 130
3 = HR 410
MP7650
Count direction for handwheel

Entry: 0 or 1
0 = positive count direction
1 = negative count direction
MP 7660
Threshold sensitivity for electronic handwheel

Entry range: 0 to 65 535 [increments]
HR 330
A subdivision factor can be selected in the "Handwheel" operating mode (only HR330). This
subdivision factor determines the traverse distance per turn. In order to ensure that the rapid
traverse rate fixed by the machine parameter MP1010.x is not exceeded, the NC determines the
minimum entry value for the interpolation factor. The NC goes by the smallest value which was
entered, i.e. according to the slowest axis.
Machine parameter MP7670.0 can be used to select a higher limit than that calculated by the NC.
Interpolation factor
Traverse distance per turn [mm]
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
20
10
5
2.5
1.25
0.625
0.312
0.156
0.078
0.039
0.019
Effective from rapid traverse rate:

MP1010.x [mm/min]
12 000
6 000
3 000
1 500
750
80
80
80
80
80
80
10 Handwheel
4-117
MP7670.0
Minimum subdivision factor for handwheel HR 330 and HR 130

M2789
Operating mode "Handwheel"

0=highlight display on "Increment"
1= highlight display on "Interpolation factor"
Set
PLC
Reset
PLC
HR 410
Machine parameter MP7640=2 activates the functions for the HR410 handwheel.
When the control transfers the initializing parameters, it transmits to the handwheel a code that
depends on the value entered in MP7640. After initialization is completed, the handwheel must
answer with a corresponding code. If the code is incorrect, the error message "HANDWHEEL NOT
READY appears.
All keys of the handwheel except for the function keys A, B, and C are evaluated by the NC. All
outputs except O109 to O111 are driven by the NC. The function keys A, B, and C, and the outputs
O109 to O111 must therefore still be evaluated or controlled by the PLC.
Machine parameters MP7670.0 to MP7670.2 determine which subdivision factors are in effect for
low, medium and high speed.
The machine parameters MP7671.0 to MP7671.2 define the speed of the speed levels (low,
medium, high) with the percentage factor from MP1020. The last adjusted speed level (the key last
pressed) remains stored even if power is interrupted.
If the handwheel is active, that is, it the handwheel symbol is shown for one of the axes, the NC will
use the value entered in MP7671.x to calculate the feed rate when the HR 410 axis keys are
pressed. For this reason the axis direction keys on the machine control panel are inhibited whenever
the handwheel axis direction keys are being used.
Assignment of handwheel inputs/outputs for PLC evaluation:
Function key A
Function key B
Function key C
I173
I174
I175
O109
O110
O111
Assignment of handwheel inputs only for information to the PLC:

Slow feed rate
I168
Medium feed rate
I169
Fast feed rate
I170
Axis direction
I171
Axis direction +
I172
4-118
TNC 406/TNC 306
10 Handwheel
2/97
MP7670.0
Interpolation factor for HR 410 at smallest speed range

Input range: 0 to 10
MP7670.1
Interpolation factor for HR 410 at medium speed range

MP7670.2
Interpolation factor for HR 410 at greatest speed range

MP7671.0
% Factor from MP1020.x for feed rate with smallest speed range for HR410
Input range: 0 to 1000%
MP7671.1
% Factor from MP1020.x for feed rate with medium speed range for HR410
MP7671.2
% Factor from MP1020.x for feed rate with greatest speed range for HR410
2/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
10 Handwheel
4-119
11 Analog inputs
The analog input of the LE360 and LE406 is connected to the gap signal to effect gap control. The
gap signal is a voltage in the range of 0 to +5 V and should never exceed this.
A detailed description can be found in the chapter "Gap Control" and the chapter "Mounting and
Electrical Installation."
4-120
TNC 406/TNC 306
11 Analog inputs
2/97
2/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
11 Analog inputs
4-121
12 Jog increment positioning

In the operating mode "Electronic Handwheel" the jog increment feature may be activated by the
PLC program. By pressing one of the axis direction keys (e.g. X+) the corresponding axis will move
by the programmed increment (0.001 to 50mm).
Increment positioning is enabled by the PLC marker M2498. In "Electronic Handwheel" mode the
prompt "Increment" appears in the line above that of "Interpolation Factor."
Normally, jog increment positioning is initiated by the axis direction keys. In order to move only one
increment per press of a key, the edge evaluation of inputs function in the PLC is used. (See the
chapter "PLC Programming", section "Edge Evaluation of PLC Inputs.") The continuous jog function of
the axis direction keys must also be inhibited in "Electronic Handwheel" mode.
Marker
Function
M2052
Set
Reset
Operating mode "Electronic Handwheel"

also W272
NC
NC
M2497
Enable edge evaluation of PLC Inputs
PLC
PLC
M2498
Enable increment positioning
PLC
PLC
M2512
M2528
M2513
M2529
Increment positioning X+
Complement increment positioning X+
Increment positioning X
Complement increment positioning X
2A
PLC
PLC
2B
PLC
PLC
M2514
M2530
M2515
M2531
Increment positioning Y+
Complement increment positioning Y+
Increment positioning Y
Complement increment positioning Y
2C
PLC
PLC
2D
PLC
PLC
M2516
M2532
M2517
M2533
Increment positioning Z+
Complement increment positioning Z+
Increment positioning Z
Complement increment positioning Z
2E
PLC
PLC
2F
PLC
PLC
M2518
M2534
M2519
M2535
Increment positioning IV+

Complement increment positioning IV+
Increment positioning IV
Complement increment positioning IV
2G
PLC
PLC
2H
PLC
PLC
M2520
M2536
M2521
M2537
Increment positioning V+
Complement increment positioning V+
Increment positioning V
Complement increment positioning V
2I
PLC
PLC
2J
PLC
PLC
4-122
TNC 406/TNC 306
Error Message
2/97
Example:
Axis direction button X+ (I138)
Axis direction button X (I133)
L
L
L
CMT
.
.
EM
.
.
LBL 10
L
M2052
M2052
M2052
10
Electronic handwheel mode

Operating mode
Electronic handwheel mode
M2498
Enable increment positioning
M2512
Reset increment positioning

markers for X axis
R
S
S
M2513
M2528
M2529
L
AN
S
R
M1638
I133
M2512
M2528
Increment positioning X+
L
AN
S
R
M1633
I138
M2513
M2529
Increment positioning X
End of main program
M2052
EM
.
.
.
2/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
4-123
4-124
TNC 406/TNC 306
2/97
13 Datum correction
The PLC datum correction function is used to shift the zero or datum point with the PLC program.
Datum corrections are required for machines that have swivel heads.
Each axis (X, Y, Z, 4) is assigned a double word (D528 to D540) for the correction value. If a value for
the appropriate axis is entered via the PLC program, strobe marker M2716 is to be set during a
M/S/T strobe to active datum correction. The correction is computed in the actual position display.
The display then indicates the shifted coordinate system.
Example:
Actual position display for X axis without correction = 50
Correction in D528 = +20
Strobe marker M2716 set, i.e. correction is active
New actual position display X= +70
The corrections can be transferred to double words, D528 to D540 as follows:
Enter values in MP4210.0 to MP4210.47 and they will also be in D768 to D956; now copy values via
PLC program into D528 to D544.
Marker
Function
Set
Reset
M2716
Strobe marker for datum correction
PLC
NC
D528
D532
D536
D540
D544
1) only
2/97
Datum correction for X axis

Datum correction for Y axis
Datum correction for Z axis
Datum correction for axis 4
Datum correction for axis 5 1)
TNC 406
TNC 406/TNC 306
13 Datum correction
4-125
PLC example:
Datum correction in Z axis with M20 activated, with M21 deactivated
.
.
L
W260
==
K+20
;M20 activated
A
M2045
S
M10
;buffered marker for strobe marker 2716
CMT 200
;datum correction call
R
M10
L
W260
==
K+21
;M21 activated
A
M2045
S
M10
;buffered marker for strobe marker 2716
CMT 201
;deactivate datum correction call
R
M10
EM
;end of main program
LBL 200
L
=
...
...
L
S
EM
LBL 201
L
=
L
S
EM
.
.
4-126
D896
D536
;activate module for datum correction

;value from MP4210.32
;for the other axis the correction value 0 must be entered
M10
M2716
D900
D536
M10
M2716
;deactivate module for datum correction

;value from MP4210.33
TNC 406/TNC 306
13 Datum correction
2/97
14 Electrode changer
The PLC enables implementation of a simple electrode changer with fixed tool positions, such as a
pick-and-place rack type.
For electrode changers that function with proximity switches, reference should be made to the
description in the technical manual TNC360 / TNC335.
The geometric information of the electrodes is defined by the TOOL DEF or the "TOOL DEFINITION"
cycle in the NC program.
14.1 Controlling an electrode changer

The control of an electrode changer, i.e. positioning and change sequence, must be written in the
PLC program. The evaluation of the TOOL DEF and TOOL CALL blocks as well as the "TOOL
DEFINITION" cycle is performed by the NC. Communication between NC and PLC is via markers
and words.
NC Program Example
.
.
.
TOOL
CYCL
CYCL
CYCL
CYCL
.
.
.
TOOL
.
.
.
TOOL
.
.
.
2/97
DEF 1
DEF 3.0
DEF 3.1
DEF 3.2
DEF 3.3
L+2.73 R+5
TOOL DEFINITION
T2
R+2.7
X+10.3 Y15.02
Z+18.15 C+1.23
CALL 1
U+0.42
CALL 2
U+2.24
TNC 406/TNC 306
4-127
14.2 PLC program example

The following description covers a five station pick-and-place electrode changer with corresponding
flowcharts and PLC functions. Before production of a PLC program the outline structure for the
program run must be taken into consideration (sequencing, interlocks, buffer marks etc.)
Each electrode change should be commenced with a TOOL CALL command. The TOOL DEF
command has no function within the PLC. In this example each rack position in the electrode
changer is defined by two machine parameters (X coordinate and Y coordinate). In the following flow
charts variable names are used to aid understanding of the logic. In the PLC program these variable
names would be replaced by the word addresses.
In program run a TOOL CALL block is executed by the NC in accordance with the value in machine
parameter MP7480.0. If MP7480.0 = 1, the NC only loads the new tool number into the PLC word
W262 if it is different from the current tool number. If MP7480.0 = 2, PLC word W262 is loaded with
the new tool number at every TOOL CALL. When a value is loaded into W262, the NC sets strobe
marker M2046 to inform the PLC program which should then take appropriate action, i.e. change the
electrode. With the change sequence completed the PLC program should set marker M2483 to
indicate to the NC the end of the TOOL CALL block thus allowing the NC run to continue.
MP7480.0
Output of Tool Number

0 = No output
1 = Output only when tool number changes
2 = Output with every TOOL CALL
(See Chapter 5, "Machine Parameter List")
W262
4-128
Tool Number (if MP7480.0 = 1 or 2)
TNC 406/TNC 306
2/97
Function
Set
Reset
M2046
Strobe for tool number output
NC
NC
M2483
Acknowledgment for electrode change complete
PLC
PLC
Machine parameter allocation for this example:

MP4210.20
to
X-axis rack positions for electrode 1 to 5

(D848 to D864)
MP4210.24
MP4210.30
to
Y axis rack position for electrode 1 to 5

(D888 to D904)
MP4210.34
MP4210.40
Z axis UP position (D928)
MP4210.41
Z axis DOWN position (D932)
MP4210.42
X axis NEUTRAL position (D936)
MP4210.43
Y axis NEUTRAL position (D940)
2/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
4-129
The flowchart for this Electrode Changer example is written in the form of modules which are listed
below:
TOOL CALL
Automatic Electrode Change
REPLACE OLD TOOL
Return current electrode to original rack location
PLC POS. NEUTRAL
Move to clearance position in X, Y and Z
SELECT NEW TOOL
Take new electrode from defined rack position
POC. REG
Determine electrode rack position
PLC POS. POC 1/2/3/4/5 Move to defined rack position

PLC POS. Z DOWN
Move to Z axis position for electrode change
PLC POS. Z UP
Move to Z axis clearance position
For the electrode change, five conditions need to be considered:

1
T-code > Tmax

=> Error Message: "INCORRECT TOOL NUMBER"
0 < T-code < = Tmax and SPIREG = 0

=> No current tool, select new tool only
T-code = 0 and 0 < SPIREG <= Tmax

=>Replace old tool, no new tool
0 < T - code <= Tmax and 0 < SPIREG <= Tmax

=> Replace old tool, select new tool
T-code = SPIREG
=> No T-code is sent from the NC to the PLC or direct acknowledgment sent from
the PLC
Note:
4-130
T-code = New tool number transmitted to W262

Tmax = Maximum tool number (i.e. 5)
SPIREG = Current tool number
TNC 406/TNC 306
2/97
14.2.1 PLC module "TOOL CALL"

Automatic Electrode Change
T-code > Tmax
NO
T-code
<=
Tmax
ERROR
"INCORRECT
TOOL
NUMBER"
YES
T-code = SPIREG
NO
T-code
=
SPIREG
YES
Module:
PLC POS.
NEUTRAL
SPIREG
=
0
SPIREG = 0
NO
YES
Module:
Replace Old
Tool
T code
=
0
NO
Module
SELECT
NEW TOOL
YES
Module
PLC POS.
NEUTRAL
NO
Axis X and 4
in Position
?
Update necessary
operands &
acknowledge
TOOL CALL
Return to
NC program
YES
2/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
4-131
14.2.2 PLC module "REPLACE OLD TOOL"

Return Current Electrode to Original Rack Position
Push
SPIREG - 1
To Stack
Module:
POC. REG.
No
TOOL RACK
POS. REACHED
?
Yes
Module:
PLC. POS.
Z DOWN
Tool Unclamped
and set
SPRIEG to 0
Module:
PLC. POS.
Z UP
TOOL CLAMP
END
4-132
TNC 406/TNC 306
2/97
14.2.3 PLC Module "PLC POS. NEUTRAL"

Move to Clearance position in X, Y, & Z axes
PLC position
To Z UP
position
No
Achse Z
in position
Yes
PLC pos. in X and Y
to neutral pos.
X and Y
No
Axes X und Y
in position
Yes
END
2/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
4-133
14.2.4 PLC module "SELECT NEW TOOL"

Gather New Electrode from Defined Rack Position
Push
T-code -1
to Stack
Module:
POC. REG.
No
RACK
POSITION
REACHED
?
Yes
UNCLAMP
TOOL
Module:
PLC. POS.
Z DOWN
Clamp tool &

load SPIREG
with T-code
Module:
PLC. POS.
NEUTRAL
END
4-134
TNC 406/TNC 306
2/97
14.2.5 PLC module "POC. REG."

Determine Electrode Rack Position
LOAD
"POSREG"
with stack
contents
POSREG
=0
NO
POSREG = 0
Module:
PLC. POS. RACK
POSITION 1
YES
POSREG
=1
NO
POSREG = 1
Module:
PLC. POS. RACK
POSITION 2
YES
POSREG
=2
NO
POSREG = 2
Module:
PLC POS. RACK
POSITION 3
YES
POSREG
=3
NO
POSREG = 3
NO
POSREG = 4
Module:
PLC. POS. RACK
POSITION 4
YES
POSREG
=4
Module:
PLC. POS. RACK
POSITION 5
YES
END
(DEPENDENT ON Tmax)
2/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
4-135
14.2.6 PLC Module "PLC POS. POC. 1/2/3/4/5"

Move to Corresponding Rack Position
Marker
Mpocpos
no set
No
Yes
Mpocpos = 0
Mpocpos = 1
Axes X
and Y not
in pos.
No
Axes X and Y
in position
Yes
Assign Xp, Yp to the

addresses (D528, D532)
Assign PLC positioning

feed rate to the addresses (W560, W562)
Set start marker to

activate PLC pos.
in X, Y (M2704, M2705)
Set marker Mpocpos

for PLC pos. is active
Set marker Mxpyp rack

pos. reached
END
4-136
TNC 406/TNC 306
2/97
14.2.7 PLC module "PLC POS. Z DOWN"

Move to Z Axis Position for Electrode Change
PLC Position
to Z DOWN
Position
No
Axis Z
in Position
Yes
END
14.2.8 PLC module "PLC. POS. Z UP"

Move to Z Axis Clearance Position
PLC Position
to Z UP
Position
No
Axis Z
in Position
Yes
END
2/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
4-137
15 Commissioning and start-up procedure

This section describes the commissioning procedure for the controls step-by-step. Detailed
descriptions of the functions may be found by referring to the appropriate sections.
15.1 Code numbers for commissioning

Certain operating conditions and functions for the commissioning procedure must be selected by
code numbers (see section "Display and operation").
Code number
95 148
807 667
531 210
75 368
105 296
Function
List of machine parameters (see "Machine parameters")
PLC-operation (see "PLC-programming")
Erasing the entire physical RAM memory (not NC-programs, erosion tables
and datum shift table)
Automatic offset adjustment (see section "Servo positioning")
Non-linear axis error compensation (see "Machine integration")
15.2 Preparation of the machine

The machine is prepared without a control being connected.
For the commissioning of the drive amplifiers please follow the sequence below:
Disconnect and short together the nominal value inputs of the drive amplifiers.
0 V must be applied to the input!
Connect the servo-enable input to 24 V (normally) and thus activate the servo.
Connect the power supply to the drive amplifiers.
Rough offset adjustment. If the axis moves even though the nominal value input is clamped to
0 V, the offset potentiometer must be so adjusted that the axis comes to a stop. After the offset
adjustment remove the short-circuit link on the nominal value!
Rough velocity adjustment. Connect battery supply to the nominal value input. Adjust the battery
supply to 9 V and adjust the drive motor with the tacho-potentiometer to the desired speed
(which equals the maximum rapid traverse rate). The rated speed can be read from the drive
motor with a tachometer.
Tuning of the drive amplifier. As far as the control is concerned, the actual servo-loop consists of
the drive amplifier, motor and axis slide (see section "Servo positioning"). Before the position
control loop in the control can be optimized, the servo-loop must be tuned.
To achieve this, a battery supply is used to apply a (9 V) step function to the nominal value input
of the drive amplifier. The step response of the tachometer signal can be recorded by an
oscilloscope. The axis should be loaded with the permissible workpiece weight while the step
response is being recorded. The subordinate control loop (current control, spindle speed control)
must be so optimized that the step response shows an overshoot.
4-138
TNC 406/TNC 306
2/97
The following curve represents the ideal response of the tachometer signal:
U [V]
Given step
function
1 Overshoot
Umax
Tacho-signal
t [ms]
The following curves show incorrectly adjusted tachosignals:
Several overshoots
U [V]
Umax
Incorrect!
t [ms]
P-component of the subordinate control loop too
high or I-component too low
U [V]
Umax
Too flat
Incorrect!
t [ms]
P-component of the subordinate control loop too
low or I-component too high
2/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
4-139
Determining the acceleration

The maximum acceleration time T can be deduced from the step response.
U [V]
Umax
t [ms]
To calculate the acceleration, increase T by 10%.

From this it follows that:
a = vmax
vmax = velocity at Umax
----------
T1.1
a = acceleration
The step response must be investigated for all axes.

The acquired acceleration values are entered in MP1060.0 to MP1060.3.
After adjustment, switch off the supply voltage to the drive amplifiers.
The preparation of the drive amplifiers is now finished.
4-140
TNC 406/TNC 306
2/97
2/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
4-141
15.3 Commissioning the control

The preparation of the machine in accordance with section 16.2 must be completed before the
machine parameters for the commissioning can be optimized.
Before connecting the control, the NC- and PLC- supply voltages and the ground connections should
be tested once more (see "Mounting and Electrical Installation ").
15.3.1 Entry of the provisional and pre-defined machine parameters

After switching on the machine for the first time, the control will first display the message
"Operation parameters erased", which means that the machine parameters still have to be entered
(see "Machine parameters").
Most machine parameters can be pre-defined and entered according to the machine parameter list
and the functional descriptions. The parameters which affect the control loop must be assigned
provisional values (see section 16.3.6).
In order to avoid lengthy delays on restarting during the commissioning of the control, the memory
test can be suppressed by MP7690 (see section "Display and operation").
15.3.2 Entry of the PLC-program

A complete PLC-program for all machine functions must be created for commissioning and stored
either in EPROM or RAM (see "PLC-programming").
Machine parameter MP4010 (see section "Display and operation") selects whether the processing
uses a PLC-program from the EPROM or the RAM.
The PLC-program in RAM is used for commissioning purposes. It only makes sense to create an
EPROM when all functions are operating without error.
In case of doubt, please contact HEIDENHAIN customer service.
15.3.3 Testing the EMERGENCY STOP routine

Since the EMERGENCY STOP circuit is very important for the machine it is vital that it is tested.
Test the Function "Control operational" according to the section "EMERGENCY STOP routine."
Test the EMERGENCY STOP-circuit by pressing the EMERGENCY STOP keys and by traversing
past the EMERGENCY STOP limit switches.
15.3.4 Testing the direction of traverse

Test the controls for the direction of traverse according to the following diagram (effective machine
parameters: MP210 count direction of the encoder signals, MP1040 polarity of the nominal value
voltage, MP1320 direction of traverse on passing over the reference marks).
4-142
TNC 406/TNC 306
2/97
START
Line voltage on
"Cross positioning error"

or incorrect
traverse direction
after passing over
ref. marks?
Yes
Change
MP210
MP1040
MP1320
No
Erase POWER INTERRUPTED error message with CE
Line
voltage
off
Control voltage on;

axes are in the control loop
Gross
positioning error
(MP1040 or
MP210 incorrect)
?
Yes
No
Reference traverse with
machine START button
No
Traverse
direction correct?
(as defined
in MP1320)
No
Start reference
traverse with
axis direction keys
?
Yes
Axis traverse
direction correct?
(defined in MP1040
and MP210)
(Both types of
referencing must
be performed!)
No
Yes
Test the traverse direction of
referencing in each axis
Test the traverse direction

in each axis
This flow diagram must be worked through for every axis!
2/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
4-143
15.3.5 Setting the software limit switch ranges

Determine the software limit switch ranges (see section "Machine axes") as follows:
In "Manual operation" mode select the REFdisplay with the MOD key.
Positional-displays show the distance to the

reference point
Move all axes with the aid of the direction keys or

the handwheel in positive and negative direction to
just before the EMERGENCY STOP limit switches. Note the
values in the positional-displays and their sign.
Enter the noted values in MP910 or MP920.
Select actual-value display with MOD key.
15.3.6 Optimizing control with servo lag

The following provisional values can be entered for the machine parameters which determine the
control characteristics:
Machine parameter
Function
Preliminary entry value
MP1050
9V
MP1060
Analog voltage for rapid

traverse
Acceleration
MP1810
kv factor
As measured on the machine

(see "Preparation of the machine")
1
These values can usually be further optimized.
4-144
TNC 406/TNC 306
2/97
Kv factor
Adjust the Kv factor (MP1810) so that the voltage characteristic is as described in the section "Servo
positioning." If a different Kv factor is required for rapid traverse to that for the machining feed rate, it
must be optimized separately.
Optimize Kv factor for the machining feed rate (X axis)
Connect storage oscilloscope to tachometer
of the servo-amplifier of X axis.
Enter following program in

"PROGRAMMING AND EDITING"
operating mode:
LBL 1
X 1001) R0 F2)...
X 0 R0 F2)...
CALL LBL 1 REP 100/100
Press machine START button in the

"PROGRAM RUN/FULL SEQUENCE"
operating mode. Machine runs.
Note: Set feed override to 100%.
MP1810: Increase entry value until position loop oscillates or

until an overshoot occurs after the acceleration ramp.
U [V]
t [s]
Machining feed
MP1810 (kv factor): Reduce entry value until no oscillations are detectable.
U [V]
t [s]
Repeat adjustment for axes Y, Z, IV and V.

1)
2)
Program the traverse paths for the axis concerned as large as possible.
Enter the max. feed rate for machining.
For axes which are mutually interpolated the Kv factors must be the same.
In this case the worst axis determines the entry value.
2/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
4-145
4-146
TNC 406/TNC 306
2/97
15.3.7 Offset adjustment

The rough offset adjustment has already been carried out on the servo amplifier. The offset
adjustment possibility described in the section "Servo positioning" lets a fine offset adjustment be
performed.
15.3.8 Adjusting the monitoring functions

The following entry values are recommended for the monitoring functions (see section "Servo
positioning"):
Machine parameter
Function
Entry value
MP1710
MP1720
Position monitoring
Position monitoring (EMERGENCY
STOP)
1.2 lag in rapid traverse

1.4 lag in rapid traverse
MP1140
MP1030
MP1110
Movement monitoring
Positioning window
Standstill monitoring
0.5 [V]
0.005 [mm]
0.1 [mm]
If the drives of the machine permit narrower limits, these may be entered.
2/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
4-147
4-148
TNC 406/TNC 306
2/97
Machine parameters Contents

1
1.1
What are machine parameters?

User parameters
52
52
2
2.1
Input/output of machine parameters

Entry format
53
53
2.2
Activating the machine parameter settings
54
2.3
Changing input values
54
3
3.1
List of machine parameters

Measuring systems and machines
55
55
3.2
Positioning
511
3.3
Operation with servo lag
513
3.4
Eroding
514
3.5
Integral PLC
517
3.6
Adaptation of the data interface
518
3.7
Probing
519
3.8
Display and programming
519
3.9
Status display and graphics depiction
522
3.10
Color adjustment
524
3.11
Machining and program run
525
3.12
Hardware
527
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
5-1
A contouring control must have access to specific data (e.g., paths of traverse, acceleration) before
it can execute its programmed instructions.
The machine tool builder provides these data in so-called machine parameters. In addition, machine
parameters can be used to activate functions that are possible with HEIDENHAIN contouring
controls but are required only on certain types of machines (such as automatic tool changers).
The machine parameters are grouped according to function:
Machine parameters
Functional group
0
1000
1700
2000
4000
5000
6000
7200
7400
7600
Measuring systems and machines

Positioning
Operation with servo lag
Eroding
Integrate PLC
Setting the data interface
Probing
Display and programming
Machining and program run
Hardware
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
999
1399
1999
2999
4999
5999
6199
7399
7599
7699
If there is more than one input value for a single function (e.g., a separate input for each axis), the
parameter number is provided with indices.
Example:
MP330 Grating period
MP330.0 Grating period for axis X
MP330.1 Grating period for axis Y
MP330.2 Grating period for axis Z
MP330.3 Grating period for axis 4
MP330.4 Grating period for axis 5
The indices are assigned to the corresponding axes according to a fixed pattern. For example, if
entry is only possible in axis 4, then only index 3 will appear.
1.1 User parameters

The MOD function "User Parameters" permits the control operator to easily access and change
certain machine parameters. The machine tool builder can define up to 16 different machine
parameters as user parameters with MP7330 (see Chapter "Machine Adjustment", Section "Display
and operation").
5-2
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
3/2000
If the machine parameters have not yet been entered into the control (e.g., during commissioning),
the TNC presents the list of machine parameters after performing the memory test. The input values
must now be entered either by hand on the keyboard or through the data interface. The data
interface is activated by pressing EXT. It is pre-set to FE mode. This default setting can be changed
through the MOD functions (see Chapter "Data Interface").
2.1 Entry format

A number is entered for each machine parameter. This value can be, for example, the acceleration in
mm/s2 of an individual axis, or the analog voltage in volts.
Some machine parameters have multiple functions. The entry values for these machine parameters
are calculated in decimal values according to the function to be activated or they can be entered in
binary or hexadecimal format. This depends on the TNC type.
TNC 406: The input values can be entered in decimal, binary (%) or hexadecimal ($) format.
TNC 306: The input values can be entered in decimal.
Example:
Activating axes with encoders by setting machine parameter MP10:
Bit 0
X axis
Bit 1
Y axis
Bit 2
Z axis
Bit 3
4th Axis
Bit 4
5th Axis
+ 0 = Not active
+ 1 = Active
+ 0 = Not active
+ 2 = Active
+ 0 = Not active
+ 4 = Active
+ 0 = Not active
+ 8 = Active
+ 0 = Not active
+ 16 = Active
Example: If you wish to activate axes X, Y and Z, the decimal entry value for MP10 is 1 + 2 + 4=7,
the binary value is % 00111, the hexadecimal value is $ 07.
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
5-3
2.2 Activating the machine parameter settings

When the values for the machine have been entered, exit the machine parameter list by pressing
. Missing or incorrect entries result in error messages from the control that prompt you to
END
make corrections.
If the control does not recognize any errors, it automatically exits the machine parameter editor and
is ready for operation.
2.3 Changing input values

Call the machine parameter editor through the MOD function "code number."
Enter code number 95148 or 105296 to access the complete list of machine parameters.
Code number 123 opens a partial list of machine parameters. These are the machine parameters
that may be changed by the user (see TNC 306 User's Manual). Those machine parameters which
can be accessed with code number 123 are identified in the machine parameter list with "123" in the
column "Change via."
Exit the machine parameter editor by pressing END
Code number 53 12 10 delete all machine parameter settings.
5-4
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
3/2000
3.1 Measuring systems and machines

Machine
parameter
Function and input
MP10
Active axes
Entry range:
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4 *
MP31
Y
Z
IV
V*
Y
Z
IV
V*
Page
RESET
4-5
RESET
4-8
RESET
4-9
+0 = Monitoring not active

+1 = Monitoring active
Frequency monitoring
Entry range:
1 to 15 (TNC 306)
% xxxxx (TNC 416/406)
X
Reaction
1 to 15 (TNC 306)
% xxxxx (TNC 416/406)
X axis +0 = Not active
+1 = Active
Y axis +0 = Not active
+2 = Active
Z axis +0 = Not active
+4 = Active
4th axis +0 = Not active
+8 = Active
+16 = Active
Amplitude monitoring of the measuring

system signals
Entry range:
1 to 15 (TNC 306)
% xxxxx (TNC 416/406)
X
MP32
Change
via

* only TNC 416/406
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
5-5
Machine
parameter
Function and input
Reaction
Page
MP40
Display on screen
Entry range:
1 to 15 (TNC 306)
% xxxxx (TNC 416/406)
Bit 0
+1 = Active
Bit 1
+2 = Active
Bit 2
+4 = Active
Bit 3
+8 = Active
Bit 4 * 5th axis +0 = Not active
+16 = Active
RESET
4-12
MP50
Controlled axes
Entry range:
1 to 15 (TNC 306)
% xxxxx (TNC 416/406)
Bit 0
X axis +0 = Not controlled
+1 = Controlled
Bit 1
Y axis +0 = Not controlled
+2 = Controlled
Bit 2
Z axis +0 = Not controlled
+4 = Controlled
Bit 3
4th axis +0 = Not controlled
+8 = Controlled
Bit 4 * 5th axis +0 = Not controlled
+16 = Controlled
RESET
4-50
MP60
Axis as programmable position display

Entry range:
1 to 15 (TNC 306)
% xxxxx (TNC 416/406)
Bit 0
+1 = Active
Bit 1
+2 = Active
Bit 2
+4 = Active
Bit 3
4th Axis +0 = Not active
+8 = Active
Bit 4 * 5th axis +0 = Not active
+16 = Active
RESET
4-50
MP110.0-4
Assignment of encoder inputs to axes

Entry range: 0 to 5
0 = Encoder input X1
4 = Encoder input X5 (only LE 406)
RESET
4-11
Change
via
* only TNC 416/406
5-6
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
3/2000
Machine
parameter
Function and input
MP115.0
Position encoder inputs 1VPP or 11A

Input: %xxxxx
0 = 1 VPP
1 = 11A
MP115.1
Reserved
Input: %00000
Change
via
Reaction
Page
RESET
RESET
RESET
4-12
RESET
4-7
New MP in TNC 416 software 286 180-01

MP115.2
Input frequency of position encoders

Input: %xxxxx
0 = 50kHz for 1VPP; 50kHz for 11A
1 = 350kHz for 1VPP; 150kHz for 11A
MP 120.0-4
Assignment of the analog outputs

Entry range: 0 to 4
0 = Analog output 1
1 = Analog output 2
2 = Analog output 3
3 = Analog output 4
4 = Analog output 5 *
MP210
Counting direction of the encoder signals

Entry range:
0 to 31 (TNC 306)
% xxxxx (TNC 416/406)
Bit 0
X axis +0 = Positive
+1 = Negative
Bit 1
Y axis +0 = Positive
+2 = Negative
Bit 2
Z axis +0 = Positive
+4 = Negative
Bit 3
4th axis +0 = Positive
+8 = Negative
Bit 4 * 5th axis +0 = Positive
+16 = Negative
MP330.0-4
Grating period
Entry range: 1 to 360 [m] or [1/1000 ]
4-6
MP330.0
X axis
MP330.1
Y axis
MP330.2
Z axis
MP330.3
4th axis
MP330.4
5th axis
Canceled in TNC 416 software 286 180-01
Canceled in TNC 406 software 280 620-08
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
5-7
Machine
parameter
Function and input
MP331.0-4
Distance per number of signal periods out of

MP332
Input:
0.001 to 99 999.999 [mm or ]
Change
via
Reaction
Page
Reset

MP332.0-4
Number of signal periods in the distance from

MP331
Input:
1 to 16 777 215
Reset

MP334.0-4
Distance between reference marks for encoders

with distance-coded reference marks
Input: 0 to 65535 [grating periods]
0=1000 grating periods
(standard setting)
Reset

MP410
Entry value: 0 to 2
RESET
4-11
0=A
1=B
2=C
MP411 *
Entry value: 0 to 5
4-11
0=A
1=B
2=C
3=U
4=V
5=W
MP720.0-4
Correction factor for linear compensation

Entry range: 1.000 to +1.000 [mm/m]
MP720.0
X axis
MP720.1
Y axis
MP720.2
Z axis
MP720.3
4th axis
MP720.4 *
5th axis
4-18
MP710
Backlash compensation for axis 4

Input:
1.000 to +1.000 [mm] or []
MP711
Backlash compensation for axis 5

Input:
1.000 to +1.000 [mm] or []
5-8
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
3/2000
Machine
parameter
Function and input
MP720.0-4
Linear axis-error compensation

Input: 1.0000 to +1.0000 [mm/m]
MP730
Enable for non-linear axis error compensation

Entry range: 0 to 15 (TNC 306)
% xxxxx (TNC 416/406)
4-22
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4 *
Change
via
Page
X axis
+0 = Not active
+1 = Active
+2 = Active
+4 = Active
+8 = Active
+16 = Active
MP910
MP920

Entry range linear axis:
30 000.000 to +30 000.000 [mm]
Entry range rotary axis:
30 000.000 to +30 000.000 []
MP910.0
MP910.1
MP910.2
MP910.3
MP910.4 *
MP920.0
MP920.1
MP920.2
MP920.3
MP920.4 *
X+
Y+
Z+
IV+
V+
X
Y
Z
IV
V
MP911
MP921

Entry range, linear axis:
30 000.000 to +30 000.000 [mm]
Entry range, rotary axis:
30 000.000 to +30 000.000 []
MP911.0
MP911.1
MP911.2
MP911.3
MP911.4 *
MP921.0
MP921.1
MP921.2
MP921.3
MP921.4 *
X+
Y+
Z+
IV+
V+
X
Y
Z
IV
V
3/2000
Reaction
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
4-13
4-13
5-9
Machine
parameter
Function and input
MP912
MP922

30 000.000 to +30 000.000 [mm]
30 000.000 to +30 000.000 []
MP912.0
MP912.1
MP912.2
MP912.3
MP912.4 *
MP922.0
MP922.1
MP922.2
MP922.3
MP922.4 *
X+
Y+
Z+
IV+
V+
X
Y
Z
IV
V
MP950.04
Datum for positioning blocks with M92

30 000.000 to +30 000.000 [mm]
30 000.000 to +30 000.000 []
Change
via
Reaction
Page
414
477
Values referenced to machine datum (see

MP960.x)
MP960.04
Machine datum
Entry range:
30 000.000 to +30 000.000 [mm] or []
477
Values referenced to scale datum

*only TNC 416/406
5-10
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
3/2000
3.2 Positioning
Machine
parameter
Function and input
Change
via
MP1010.04 Rapid traverse
Reaction
Page
442

80 to 30 000 [mm/min]
80 to 30 000 [/min]
MP1020.04 Manual feed
80 to 30 000 [mm/min]
80 to 30 000 [/min]
443
MP1030.04 Positioning window

0.001 to 2.000 [mm]
0.001 to 2.000 []
448
MP1040
47
Polarity of the nominal value voltage for positive

traverse direction
Entry range: 0 to 15 (TNC 306)
% xxxxx (TNC 416/406)
Bit 0
+1 = Negative
Bit 1
+2 = Negative
Bit 2
+4 = Negative
Bit 3
+8 = Negative
+16 = Negative
MP1050.04 Analog voltage for rapid traverse

Entry range: +4.5 to +9 [V]
442
MP1060.04 Acceleration
Entry range: 0.001 to 9.0 [m/s2]
441
MP1070
Radial acceleration
Entry range: 0.001 to 3.0 [m/s2]
445
MP1090
Default feed rate during positioning

123
460
Circular feed rates in the disk cycle (marker M2640)

Modes 0 and 4 (erosion, M2640=0)
Modes 0 and 4 (sparkout, M2640=1)
Modes 1 and 5 (erosion, M2640=0)
Modes 1 and 5 (sparkout, M2640=1)
Modes 2/3 and 6/7 (erosion, M2640=0)
Modes 2/3 and 6/7 (sparkout, M2640=1)
123
488
MP1092
MP1093
MP1094
MP1095
MP1096
MP1097
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
5-11
Machine
parameter
Function and input
MP1110
Standstill monitoring (Error D)

Entry range: 0.001 to 30 [mm]
448
MP1140
Movement monitoring (Error C)

Entry range: 0.03 to 10 [V]
447
MP1141
Maximum voltage difference between two control

loop cycles (Error F)
Entry range: 0.03 to 10 [V]
447
Change
via
Reaction
Page
Removed in TNC 406 as of software version

280 620-07, because the acceleration monitoring
is now automatic.
MP 1220
Automatic drive offset adjustment

Entry range: 0 to 65 535 [s]
MP1320
Traverse direction when approaching the

reference marks
Entry range: 0 to 15(TNC 306)
% xxxxx (TNC 416/406)
Bit 0
+1 = Negative
Bit 1
+2 = Negative
Bit 2
+4 = Negative
Bit 3
+8 = Negative
+16 = Negative
444
0 = No automatic adjustment
433
MP1330.04 Feed rate for crossing the reference marks

433
MP1331.04 Feed rate when leaving reference end position

(only for encoders with one reference mark,
MP1350 = 1)
433

MP1340.04 Axis sequence for crossing the reference marks
Entry range: 0 to 5
433
0 = No reference mark evaluation

1 = X axis first
2 = Y axis first
3 = Z axis first
4 = 4th axis first
5 = 5th axis first *
only TNC 416/406
5-12
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
3/2000
Machine
parameter
Function and input
Change
via
Reaction
MP1350.04 Type of reference mark approach

+0 =
+1 =
Page
434
Encoder with distancecoded

reference marks (for square-wave inputs
the encoder must have a 5-fold EXE if
distance-coded reference marks are used.)
Encoder without distancecoded reference
marks
3.3 Operation with servo lag

Machine
parameter
Function and input
MP1530
Overshoot behavior during acceleration with

feedforward.
It influences the overshoot behavior during
acceleration in the gap control in feedforward
mode.
Entry range: 0 to 0.999
If MP1530 is programmed to equal 0, the
standard value 0.25 is used.
Input value 0.999 = steepest characteristic curve
MP1540
Braking behavior during feedforward

It influences braking to a target in feedforward
mode.
Entry range: 0 to 0.999
If MP1530 is programmed to equal 0, the
standard value 0.5 is used.
MP1550
Filter for feedforward

Entry range: 0 or 1
1 = Switch off the filter in the feedforward
voltages
MP1700
Selecting the system cycle times

Entry: 0 to 2
0
gap control 4ms PLC 40 ms
1
2
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Change
via
Reaction
Page
5-13
Machine
parameter
Function and input
Change
via
Reaction
MP1710.04 Position monitoring for operation with lag

(erasable)
Entry range: 0 to 100,000 [mm]
Page
446
Removed in TNC 406 as of software 280 620-07.

The control now multiplies the value of the normal
servo lag by 1.5 and uses the product as limit for
servo-lag monitoring (erasable error message). A
value of 1.8 * servo lag should therefore be used
for MP1720.x.
MP1720.04 Position monitoring for operation with lag
(Emergency Stop, error A)
Entry range: 0 to 100,000 [mm]
446
MP1810.04 Kv factor for positioning

Entry range: 0.1 to 10,000
442
3.4 Eroding
Machine
parameter
Function and input
MP2010
Characteristic gradient
Entry range: 0.001 to 60 . 000
MP2010.0
MP2010.1
Input characteristic range 2.5 to 5 V

Input characteristic range 0 to 2.5 V
MP2020
Multiplication factor
Entry range: 1.000 to 10 . 000
MP2020.0
MP2020.1

MP2030
Characteristic kink
Entry range: 0 to 100 [%]
MP2030.0
MP2030.1

MP2040
Factor for following electrode

Entry range: 0.1 to 60,000
123
464
MP2050
Move back reapproach position after short circuit

or CYCL STOP
Entry range: 0 to 2 [mm]
123
460
MP2051
Move back reapproach position after flushing

123
461
5-14
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Change
via
Reaction
Page
456
456
457
3/2000
Machine
parameter
Function and input
MP2052
Advanced switch-on distance for reapproach;

After timing (M2780=1), the oscillator signal of the
generator can be switch on earlier. In this way the
control receives a correct analog gap signal during
the transition from positioning to gap control.
MP2060
Infeed rate when eroding on (M36) and marker

M2620 is set
Change
via
Reaction
Page
123
460
Removed in TNC 406 as of software 280 620-07.

If the function is needed for special applications,
you can use MP2081=1 to realize a two-position
control without characteristic curve. An other
possibility: The threshold for free-run feed rate
from MP2141 can be defined with W520 (0..500).
MP2070
Feed rate at maximum gap voltage (5V) and

MP 2020 = 1 and MP 2030 = 1;
Calibration of input characteristic
457
MP2080
Gap signal input

Entry range: 0 to 2
0 = Not inverted
1 = Inverted
2 = Analog input from spindle potentiometer
(for testing purposes only)
456
MP2081
Selection of gap control

Entry range: 0 or 1
0 = Analog input is velocity signal
1 = Analog input is gap signal
MP2090
Speed for a non-controlled rotary axis (M3/M4)

Entry range: 1 to 100 [rpm]
MP2100
Editing possible in defined positions of eroding

table
Entry value: 0 to 255
MP2110
Delay of "spark-out is completed" signal (marker

M2616)
Entry range: 0.1 to 99.9 [s]
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
123
4-54
123
4-61
5-15
Machine
parameter
Function and input
Change
via
MP2120
Arc detection
(electrode retraction time)
Entry range: 1 to 99.9 [s]
123
MP2130
Maximum speed for feed forward control during

erosion
4-56
MP2131
Feed rate limit to switch to new eroding feed rate

from MP 2132
4-57
MP2132
New eroding feed rate when value from MP 2131

exceeded
4-57
MP2133
Retraction speed during short circuit detected at

connector X12
4-59
MP2141
Free-run feed rate if analog input is greater than

threshold from W520 (MP2081)
MP2142
Erosion feed rate (MP2081=1)

Forward: F = MP2142 * SV [%]
Backward: F = MP2142 * SV [%] * W522 [Factor]
MP2190
Constant-speed positioning during flushing

Entry values: 0, 1, 2
0=
1=
2=
123
Reaction
Page
4-60
Electrode braked between each block

If the path is geometrically continuous,
the electrode moves at constant speed
Electrode moves at constant speed even
if the path is non-continuous
Removed in TNC 406 as of software 280 620-07

MP2199
5-16
Erosion table on/off

0=
Tables not active
2=
Tables active
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
4-62
3/2000
3.5 Integral PLC

Machine
parameter
Function and input
MP4010
PLC program from RAM or from EPROM

Entry value: 0 or 1
0=
1=
Change
via
Reaction
Page
7-21
EPROM
RAM
MP4020
Erosion parameter table from RAM or from

EPROM
Entry value: 0 or 1
0=
EPROM
1=
RAM
4-64
MP4030
Switchover of the PLC interface from marker

area to word area
Input value: 0 or 1
0=
marker range active (M2000 to M2548)
1 = word range active (W1024 to W1060)"
MP4060.0-4
Path-dependent lubrication
Entry range: 0 to 65 535 (in units of 65 536 m)
4-16
MP4110.0-47
PLC: programmed duration for timers 047

Entry range: 0 to 65 535 (in units of
7-17
40 ms)20/40 ms, depending of MP1700)

MP4120.0-31
PLC: counter preset value for counters 031

Entry range: 0 to 65 535 in units of 40 ms
(TNC 406: 20 or 40 ms depending on MP 1700)
7-19
MP4210.0-47
PLC: 48 positioning values for PLC positioning or

datum shift
Entry range: 30.000 to +30.000 [mm]
7-16
MP4220.0-7
Setting a number in the PLC (W960 ... W974)

Entry range: 0 to 65 535
7-16
MP4310.0-15

7-16
MP4320.0-7

7-16
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
5-17
3.6 Adaptation of the data interface

Machine
parameter
Function and input
Change
via
MP5010
EXT mode:
ASCII character for end of data
123
8-26
MP5011
EXT mode:
ASCII character for end of transmission
123
8-26
MP5020
EXT mode: interface configuration

Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Bit 3
Bit 4
Bit 5
Bit 6
Bit 7
MP5100
123
Reaction
Page
8-27
Seven or eight data bits

+0 = 7 data bits
+1 = 8 data bits
No function
Transmission stop via RTS
+0 = inactive
+4 = active
Transmission stop via DC3
+0 = inactive
+8 = active
Character parity even or odd
+0 = even
+16 = odd
Character parity required
+0 = not required
+32 = required
No function
Number of stop bits
+0
= 2 stop bits
+128
= 1 stop bit
Parity Bit for LSV2-Protocol

Entry value: 0 to 2
0 = no parity
1 = even parity
2 = odd parity
MP5200
Baud rate for RS-422 interface of the

0 = baud rate 9600
1 = baud rate 38400
MP5990
Check block number sequence with external data

transfer
Entry value: 0 or 1
123
8-26
0 = Check block number sequence

1 = No check
5-18
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
3/2000
3.7 Probing
Machine
parameter
Function and input
MP6100
Successive probing
Entry range: 1 to 5
4-114
MP6110
Maximum difference of probe values during

successive probing
4-114
MP6120
Probing feed rate

Entry range: 1 to 30.000 [mm/min]
123
4-113
MP6130
Maximum measuring range

Entry range: 0 to 30.000 [mm]
123
4-114
MP6140
Retraction path
Entry range: 0 to 30 000 [mm]
MP6150
Retraction feed rate in probing cycle

Change
via
Reaction
Page
4-114
123
4-113
3.8 Display and programming

Machine
parameter
Function and input
Change
via
Reaction
Page
MP7210
Programming station
Entry values: 0, 1, 2
0 = Control
1 = Programming station: PLC active
2 = Programming station: PLC inactive
123
RESET
4-89
MP7212 *)
Acknowledgment of Power interrupted

0 = Power interrupted must be acknowledged
with CE key
1 = automatically acknowledged after 3 sec
MP7230
Dialog language
Entry values: 0 to 3
Software Nr.:
286 180/
286 181/
280 620
280 621
0 = English
English
1 = German
German
2 = French
Swedish
3 = Italian
Finnish
MP7231
3/2000
123
286 182/
280 622
English
German
Czech
Reserved
OEM label
0 = standard label
1 to 99 = number of PLC error message,
displayed as OEM label
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
5-19
Machine
parameter
Function and input
MP7232
Enable Chinese Dialog

Entry range: 0 to 9
0=
Disable Chinese dialog
1 to 9 = Enable Chinese dialog
Character spacing in pixels
MP7240
PGM entry inhibited if PGM NR. same as OEM

cycle number
0 = Program entry inhibited
1 = Program entry not inhibited
MP7241
Inhibit the blocks ELCALL and WPCALL

Entry value: 0 or 1
0 = Soft keys inhibited
1 = Soft keys not inhibited
MP7245.0
Inhibit the HEIDENHAIN standard cycles 1 to 15

0 = No cycle inhibited
4-86
MP7245.1
Inhibit HEIDENHAIN cycles 16 to 31

0 = No cycle inhibited
4-86
MP7250
Difference between Q parameter numbers for

DLG DEF block and DLG CALL block in OEM cycle
9-3
MP7251
Number of global Q parameters transferred from

OEM cycle to calling program
10 = Q parameters Q90 to Q99 are global
(Q90 to Q99 are eroding parameters)
9-4
5-20
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Change
via
Reaction
Page
123
9-3
3/2000
Machine
parameter
Function and input
Change
via
MP7271
Display feed rate

0 = Display
1 = Do not display
123
4-82
MP7272 *)
Display actual machining time

0 = Display
1 = No machining time display
123
4-84
MP7273
Display of blocks being tested during Program

Test
0 = No block display
1 = Block display
123
MP7274.0
Display of rotary axis defined with MP410

0 = Display 0 to 359.999 []
1 = Display - 180 to +179.999 []; (MP7470 = 0!)
MP7274.1
Display of rotary axis defined with MP411

0 = Display 0 to 359.999 []
1 = Display - 180 to +179.999 []; (MP7470 = 0!)
MP7280
Decimal character
123
Reaction
Page
4-89
0 = Comma
1 = Point
*) only TNC 306
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
5-21
Machine
parameter
Function and input
MP7290.0-5
Display step The finest resolution is 1/10 m.

Value of MP
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Change
via
Reaction
Page
Reaction
Page
Resolution of display
m
inch
0.1 m
0.00001
0.5 m
0.00002
1 m
0.0001
5 m
0.0002
10 m
0.001
50 m
0.002
100 m
0.01
3.9 Status display and graphics depiction

Machine
parameter
Function and input
Change
via
MP7300
Cancel program data and status display with M02,

M30 and end of program
Entry values: %xxx
Bit0
0=Do not cancel status display
1=Delete program data and display
status with PGM END or M02, M30
which means that it functions like a
program selection or the reset soft key
Bit 1
1=Do not delete Q parameters when
program is selected or reset soft key is
pressed
Bit 2
1=Do not delete tool data and Q
parameters when program is selected or
reset soft key is pressed.
123
4-84
The Q parameters are always deleted after power

interruption, and the tool data are always retained.
MP7305
5-22
GOTO to a CYCL CALL in mode program run

is permitted
0=
GOTO permitted
1=
GOTO not permitted
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
3/2000
Machine
parameter
Function and input
Change
via
MP7310
Graphics display
Entry range: 0 to 3
Bit 0
Projection type for "Projection in 3
planes" display
+ 0 = European preferred
+ 1 = American preferred
Bit 1
Rotation of coordinate system in the
working plane by +90
+ 0 = No rotation
+ 2 = Rotation
123
MP7315
Tool radius for graphic simulation without

TOOL CALL
Reaction
Page
4-79
Entry range: 0.000 to 30 000.000 [mm]

MP7316
Tool penetration depth
Entry range: 0.000 to 30 000.000 [mm]

MP7330.015
Determination of user parameters accessible via

MOD function
4-88
Entry range: 0 to 9999.99 (number of desired

machine parameter)
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
5-23
3.10 Color adjustment

Machine
parameter
Function and input
MP7350 *
MP7351*
Window frame
Error messages
$30200C
$3F0000
MP7352 *
MP7352.0
MP7352.1
MP7352.2
Operating mode "Machine"

Window background
Operating-mode display
Dialog
$000000
$342008
$3F3828
MP7353 *
MP7353.0
MP7353.1
MP7353.2
Operating-mode Programming
Window background
Operating-mode display
Dialog
$000000
$342008
$3F3828
MP7354 *
MP7354.0
MP7354.1
MP7354.2
MP7354.3
Program-text display Machine

Background
General program text
Current block
$080400
$38240C
$38341C
$302410
MP7355 *
MP7355.0
MP7355.1
MP7355.2
MP7355.3
Program-text-display Programming
Background
$080400
General program text
$38240C
Current block
$38341C
$302410
MP7356 *
MP7356.0
MP7356.1
MP7356.2
Status-window
Background
$0C0800
Axis positions in the status-display $3F2C18
Status-display, except axis position $3F280C
MP7357 *
MP7357.0
MP7357.1
Soft-key display Machine

Background
Symbols
$000000
$3F3828
MP7358 *
MP7358.0
MP7358.1
Soft-key display Programming

Background
Symbols
$000000
$3F3828
MP7360 *
MP7360.0
MP7360.1
MP7360.2
MP7360.3
MP7360.4
Graphics: 3-D view

Background
Surface
Front face
Text-display in graphics window
Side face
$000000
$203038
$0C1820
$3F3F3F
$102028
Change
via
Reaction
Page
4-91
*) only TNC 416/406
5-24
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
3/2000
Machine
parameter
Function and input
MP7361 *
MP7361.0
MP7361.1
MP7361.2
MP7361.3
MP7361.4
Graphics: view in three planes

Background
Plan (Grating)
Front and side view
Axis cross and text
Cursor
MP7362 *
MP7362.0
MP7362.1
MP7362.2
MP7362.3
Additional status-display in graphics window

Background graphics window
$080400
Background status display
$0C0800
Status symbols
$38240C
Status values
$3F2C18
MP7365 *
Colors of the oscilloscope
MP7365.0
MP7365.1
MP7365.2
MP7365.3
MP7365.4
MP7365.5
MP7365.6
MP7365.7
Background
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Reserved
Grating
Cursor and text
Change
via
Reaction
Page
4-92
$000000
$203038
$203038
$3F3F3F
$3F0000
$000000
$003F3F
$3F3F00
$003F00
$3F1230
$000000
$30200C
$3F3F3F

*) only TNC 416/406
3.11 Machining and program run

Machine
parameter
Function and input
Change
via
Reaction
Page
MP7410
Scaling factor cycle effective in two or three

axes
123
4-87
123
0 = Effective in three axes

1 = Effective in working plane
MP7411
Rotation of coordinate system during datum shift

from datum table
0 = Rotate coordinate system
1 = No rotation
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
5-25
Machine
parameter
Function and input
Change
via
Reaction
Page
MP7412
Behavior of CYCL CALL after a CYCL DEF 12:

PGM CALL xxxx block
0 = PGM xxxx is called with CYCL CALL like a
user cycle (PGM blocks do not appear)
1 = PGM xxxx is called with CYCL CALL or
M89/99 like a PGM CALL xxxx (PGM blocks
appear)
canceled in 286 18x-04/280 62x-10
123
MP7440
Output of M-functions
Entry range: 0 to 7
123
4-99
123
4-45
Programmed stop with M06

Bit 0
+0=
Programmed stop with M06
+1=
No programmed stop with M06
Output of M89, modal cycle call
Bit 1
+0=
No cycle call, normal output of
M89 at beginning of block
+2=
Modal cycle call at end of block
Axis standstill upon output of an M function
Bit 2
+0=
Axis standstill
+4=
No axis standstill
MP7460
Constant feed rate in corners

Entry range: 0 to 179.999 []
MP7470.0
Display mode for rotary axis defined with MP 410

Input: 0 or 1
0 =
0 to + 359.999 [] (no software limit
switch)
1 =
30 000.000 to + 30 000.000
(software limit switch active)
MP7470.1
Display mode for rotary axis defined with MP 411

Input: 0 or 1
0 =
0 to + 359.999 [] (no software limit
switch)
1 =
30 000.000 to + 30 000.000
(software limit switch active)
Output of tool numbers with TOOL CALL block
MP7480
5-26
0=
No output
1=
Output of tool number only when tool

number changes
2=
Output of tool number with every TOOL

CALL block
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
4-128
3/2000
Machine
parameter
Function and input
MP7481
Generate the last TOOL CALL after block scan in

test mode
0 = no TOOL CALL generating
1 = TOOL CALL generating before returning to
the contour
MP7490
Transmitting M-function after block scan in test

mode
0 = no transmission
1 = transmission of M-function
Activating software limit switch in test graphic
MP7491
Change
via
Reaction
Page
0 = software limit switch active
1 = software limit switch not active
3.12 Hardware
Machine
parameter
Function and input
Change
via
MP7620
Feed rate override

Entry range: 0 to 7
123
Reaction
Page
Feed rate override active when rapid traverse

button pressed in program run mode
Bit 0
+0 = Override not active
+1 = Override active
Feed rate override in 2% or 1% steps
Bit 1
+0 = 2% steps
+2 = 1% steps
Feed rate override if rapid traverse button and axis
direction button pressed
Bit 2
+0 = Override not active
+4 = Override active
MP7640
3/2000
Handwheel definition
0 = No handwheel is active
1 = HR 330
2 = HR 130
3 = HR 410
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
4-117
5-27
Machine
parameter
Function and input
MP7645
Initializing parameters for handwheel

HR410
Input: 0 or 1
0=
evaluation of the keys via NC
1=
evaluation of the keys via PLC
MP7650
Handwheel counting direction

4-117
Change
via
Reaction
Page
0 = Positive counting direction

1 = Negative counting direction
MP7651
Short circuit monitoring during manual handwheel

traversing
Input:
0 = Short-circuit monitoring on
1 = Short-circuit monitoring off
as of 286 18x-04/280 62x-10 removed
MP7655
Positioning with the handwheel

1 = Positioning with the handwheel is also
effective in the PROGRAMMING AND EDITING
mode of operation.
MP7660
Threshold sensitivity for electronic handwheel

Entry value: 0 to 65 535 [increments]
4-117
MP7670.0
Smallest interpolation factor for electronic

handwheel (HR 410/HR 130)
4-118
MP7670.0
MP7670.1
MP7670.2
Interpolation factor for HR 410 at smallest speed

Interpolation factor for HR 410 at medium speed
Interpolation factor for HR 410 at greatest speed
MP7671
% Factor from MP1020.x for feed rate for HR410
MP 7671.0
MP 7671.1
MP 7671.2
% Factor for HR 410 at smallest feed rate

% Factor for HR 410 at medium feed rate
% Factor for HR 410 at greatest feed rate
4-119

MP7680
Memory function for direction buttons

4-110
0 = Not stored
1 = stored
5-28
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
3/2000
Machine
parameter
Function and input
MP7690
Memory test at switch-on

Entry range: 0 to 3
Change
via
Reaction
Page
4-90
RAM test
Bit 0
+ 0 = Test performed
+ 1 = Test not performed
EPROM test
Bit 1
+ 0 = Test performed
+ 2 = Test not performed
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
5-29
1 List of Markers
Marker
Function
Set
Reset
Page
M2000
Axis enable X
NC
NC
4-51
M2001
Axis enable Y
NC
NC
4-51
M2002
Axis enable Z
NC
NC
4-51
M2003
Axis enable 4
NC
NC
4-51
M2004
Axis enable 5
NC
NC
4-51
M2008
Axis X in position
NC
NC
4-52
M2009
Axis Y in position
NC
NC
4-52
M2010
Axis Z in position
NC
NC
4-52
M2011
Axis 4 in position
NC
NC
4-52
M2012
Lubrication pulse axis X, since value of MP4060.0

was exceeded
NC
NC
4-16
M2013
Lubrication pulse axis Y, since value of MP4060.1

was exceeded
NC
NC
4-16
M2014
Lubrication pulse axis Z, since value of MP4060.2

was exceeded
NC
NC
4-16
M2015

was exceeded
NC
NC
4-16
M2016

was exceeded
NC
NC
4-16
M2019
Reapproach active in "Full sequence" or "Single block" mode
NC
NC
4-90
M2022
Stylus not ready
NC
NC
4-113
M2023
Stylus already deflected at start of probe operation
NC
NC
4-113
M2024
Error message Touch probe not ready
NC
NC
M2025
Stylus deflected (probe operation has been performed)
NC
PLC
4-113
M2026
Probe operation ended or interrupted
NC
NC
4-113
M2027
Battery voltage too low (battery-warning on connector X12);

evaluated only during the probe operation
NC
NC
4-113
M2028
Probing function activated (for switch test voltage on/off)
NC
NC
4-113
M2032
Axis 5 in position
NC
NC
4-52
M2039
NC PGM unit of measure: 0 = mm / 1 = inch
NC
NC
M2040
Axis display unit of measure, set in MOD: 0 = mm / 1 = inch
NC
NC
M2044
S Strobe (EL Call, WP Call)
NC
NC
M2045
M Strobe
NC
NC
4-94
M2046
T Strobe (TOOL CALL)
NC
NC
4-129
M2049
Operating mode programming and editing during

Program run
NC
NC
M2050
Operating mode programming and editing
NC
NC
M2051
Operating mode: Manual
NC
NC
3/2000
TNC416/TNC 406/TNC 306
List of Markers
61
Marker
Function
Set
Reset
Page
M2052
Operating mode: Electronic handwheel
NC
NC
M2053
Operating mode: Positioning with manual data input
NC
NC
M2054
Operating mode: Program run, single block
NC
NC
M2055
Operating mode: Program run, full sequence
NC
NC
M2056
Operating mode: Program test
NC
NC
M2057
Operating mode: Crossing the reference marks
NC
NC
M2059
Restore active in mode Program test
NC
NC
4-90
M2060
New program start in Full sequence or Single block

mode
NC
PLC
4-90
M2061
END PGM, or M02 or M30 has been executed
NC
NC
4-90
M2070
Status is transferred in bit 13 from M_RI
PLC
PLC
M2095
V key last pressed
NC
NC
4-80
M2096
X key last pressed
NC
NC
4-80
M2097
Y key last pressed
NC
NC
4-80
M2098
Z key last pressed
NC
NC
4-80
M2099
IV key last pressed
NC
NC
4-80
M2100
Axis X is tool axis
NC
NC
4-12
M2101
Axis Y is tool axis
NC
NC
4-12
M2102
Axis Z is tool axis
NC
NC
4-12
M2103
Axis 4 is tool axis
NC
NC
4-12
M2136
Reference mark X-axis not passed
NC
NC
M2137
Reference mark Y-axis not passed
NC
NC
M2138
Reference mark Z-axis not passed
NC
NC
M2139
Reference mark axis 4 not passed
NC
NC
M2140
Reference mark axis 5 not passed
NC
NC
M2149
Strobe marker FN19
NC
NC
M2160
Axis X traverse direction
0 = positive, 1 = negative
NC
NC
4-8
M2161
Axis Y traverse direction
NC
NC
4-8
M2162
Axis Z traverse direction
NC
NC
4-8
M2163
Axis 4 traverse direction
NC
NC
4-8
M2164
Axis 5 traverse direction
NC
NC
4-8
M2180
1st PLC scan after switch-on
NC
NC
M2181
Not disabled key was pressed
NC
PLC
4-101
M2182
Disabled key was pressed
NC
PLC
4-101
M2183
External Stop ("Control operational" symbol flashes)
NC
NC
4-84
M2184
Control operational ("Control operational" symbol on or

flashes)
NC
NC
4-84
M2185
1st PLC scan after interruption of PLC program
NC
NC
M2187
Severe control loop error
NC
NC
62
List of Markers
3/2000
Marker
Function
Set
Reset
Page
M2188
PLC utilization > 230%
NC
NC
M2189
PLC: error message displayed
NC
NC
M2190
NC: Cancelable error message displayed
NC
NC
4-85
M2191
EXTERNAL EMERGENCY STOP message displayed
NC
NC
4-71
M2192
to
M2239
Markers can be changed

via MP4310.0, MP 4310.1 and MP 4310.2
NC
NC
M2240
Disable OEM Cycle 68
PLC
PLC
9-5
M2241
PLC
PLC
9-5
M2242
PLC
PLC
9-5
M2243
PLC
PLC
9-5
M2244
PLC
PLC
9-5
M2245
PLC
PLC
9-5
M2246
PLC
PLC
9-5
M2247
PLC
PLC
9-5
M2248
PLC
PLC
9-5
M2249
PLC
PLC
9-5
M2250
PLC
PLC
9-5
M2251
PLC
PLC
9-5
M2252
PLC
PLC
9-5
M2253
PLC
PLC
9-5
M2254
PLC
PLC
9-5
M2255
PLC
PLC
9-5
M2256
PLC
PLC
9-5
M2257
PLC
PLC
9-5
M2258
PLC
PLC
9-5
M2259
PLC
PLC
9-5
M2260
PLC
PLC
9-5
M2261
PLC
PLC
9-5
M2262
PLC
PLC
9-5
M2263
PLC
PLC
9-5
M2264
PLC
PLC
9-5
M2265
PLC
PLC
9-5
M2266
PLC
PLC
9-5
M2267
PLC
PLC
9-5
M2268
PLC
PLC
9-5
M2269
PLC
PLC
9-5
M2270
PLC
PLC
9-5
M2271
PLC
PLC
9-5
3/2000
List of Markers
63
Marker
Function
Set
Reset
Page
M2448
NC start (edge evaluation)
PLC
PLC
4-110
M2449
Rapid traverse
PLC
PLC
4-110
M2450
Memory function for axis direction keys
PLC
PLC
4-110
M2451
Feed enable
PLC
PLC
4-110
M2452
Manual traverse 5+
PLC
PLC
4-111
M2453
Manual traverse 5
PLC
PLC
4-111
M2456
Manual traverse X+
PLC
PLC
4-110
M2457
Manual traverse X
PLC
PLC
4-110
M2458
Manual traverse Y+
PLC
PLC
4-110
M2459
Manual traverse Y
PLC
PLC
4-110
M2460
Manual traverse Z+
PLC
PLC
4-111
M2461
Manual traverse Z
PLC
PLC
4-111
M2462
Manual traverse 4+
PLC
PLC
4-111
M2463
Manual traverse 4
PLC
PLC
4-111
M2481
Acknowledgment of S-strobe
PLC
PLC
M2482
Acknowledgment of M-strobe
PLC
PLC
4-94
M2483
Acknowledgment of T strobe
PLC
PLC
4-129
M2485
Status-display and sign of analog voltage for C axis (M3)
PLC
PLC
4-54
M2486
Status-display and sign of analog voltage for C axis (M4)
PLC
PLC
4-54
M2487
Status-display for C axis Stop (M5)
PLC
PLC
4-54
M2488
NC-stop (0 signifies stop)
PLC
PLC
4-110
M2492
Await open control loop axis X
PLC
PLC
4-53
M2493
Await open control loop axis Y
PLC
PLC
4-53
M2494
Await open control loop axis Z
PLC
PLC
4-53
M2495
PLC
PLC
4-53
M2497
Activate the edge evaluation for PLC inputs;

Rising-edge marker M1500 to M1651
Falling-edge marker M1700 to M1851
PLC
PLC
7-20
M2498
Enable jog positioning
PLC
PLC
4-122
M2503
Enable marker for probe functions
NC
PLC
4-113
M2504
Enable marker for program run via LSV2
NC
NC
M2507
Status display M07
NC
NC
M2508
Status display M08
NC
NC
4-83
M2510
S-Override = 100% (ROT C-Axis)
PLC
PLC
M2511
F-Override = 100%
PLC
PLC
M2512
Jog positioning axis X+
PLC
PLC
4-122
M2513
Jog positioning axis X
PLC
PLC
4-122
M2514
Jog positioning axis Y+
PLC
PLC
4-122
M2515
Jog positioning axis Y
PLC
PLC
4-122
64
List of Markers
3/2000
Marker
Function
Set
Reset
Page
M2516
Jog positioning axis Z+
PLC
PLC
4-122
M2517
Jog positioning axis Z
PLC
PLC
4-122
M2518
Jog positioning axis 4+
PLC
PLC
4-122
M2519
Jog positioning axis 4
PLC
PLC
4-122
M2520
Jog positioning axis 5+
PLC
PLC
4-122
M2521
Jog positioning axis 5
PLC
PLC
4-122
M2544
Open control loop axis X
PLC
PLC
4-53
M2545
Open control loop axis Y
PLC
PLC
4-53
M2546
Open control loop axis Z
PLC
PLC
4-53
M2547
PLC
PLC
4-53
M2548
Reset of accumulated distance for lubrication axis X
PLC
PLC
4-17
M2549
Reset of accumulated distance for lubrication axis Y
PLC
PLC
4-17
M2550
Reset of accumulated distance for lubrication axis Z
PLC
PLC
4-17
M2551
Reset of accumulated distance for lubrication axis 4
PLC
PLC
4-17
M2552
Actual-nominal value transfer axis X

(M2552ff:
effective in all operating modes;
the servo lag is set to 0 for an axis that has been taken out
of the control loop;
monitoring the limit switches is active)
PLC
PLC
4-53
M2553
Actual-nominal value transfer axis Y
PLC
PLC
4-53
M2554
Actual-nominal value transfer axis Z
PLC
PLC
4-53
M2555
PLC
PLC
4-53
M2556
Reference end position for axis X
PLC
PLC
4-34
M2557
Reference end position for axis Y
PLC
PLC
4-34
M2558
Reference end position for axis Z
PLC
PLC
4-34
M2559
PLC
PLC
4-34
M2560
PLC
PLC
4-34
M2564
PLC
PLC
4-53
M2568
PLC
PLC
4-53
M2572
PLC
PLC
4-53
M2576
Reset of accumulated distance for lubrication axis 5
PLC
PLC
4-17
M2609
Status display M08 inverse
PLC
PLC
4-83
M2611
Acknowledgment FN19
PLC
PLC
M2616
Free run during erosion or spark out is completed
PLC
PLC
4-61
M2617
Retraction until signal is reset / Probing stop in TOUCH

PROBE MANUAL
PLC
PLC
4-60
4-114
M2618
Switch-on gap control (0=M37, 1=M36)
PLC
PLC
4-96
M2619
Complement switch on gap control (0=M36,1=M37)
PLC
PLC
4-96
M2620
Retraction feed rate from MP2060 during erosion
PLC
PLC
4-88
3/2000
List of Markers
65
Marker
Function
Set
Reset
Page
M2621
Strobe signal (flushing)
PLC
PLC
4-61
M2622
Blocking of the short circuit on socket X12
PLC
PLC
4-59
M2623
Retraction as long as marker is set
PLC
PLC
4-59
M2624
Limit switch X+
NC
NC
4-14
M2625
Limit switch X
NC
NC
4-14
M2626
Limit switch Y+
NC
NC
4-14
M2627
Limit switch Y
NC
NC
4-14
M2628
Limit switch Z+
NC
NC
4-14
M2629
Limit switch Z
NC
NC
4-14
M2630
Limit switch 4+
NC
NC
4-14
M2631
Limit switch 4
NC
NC
4-14
M2632
Limit switch 5+
NC
NC
4-14
M2633
Limit switch 5
NC
NC
4-14
M2640
Selects the circular feed rate in the disk cycle
PLC
PLC
4-88
M2642
Start marker after erosion error
PLC
PLC
4-60
M2704
Activate PLC positioning axis X
PLC
NC
4-24
M2705
Activate PLC positioning axis Y
PLC
NC
4-24
M2706
Activate PLC positioning axis Z
PLC
NC
4-24
M2707
Activate PLC positioning axis 4
PLC
NC
4-24
M2708
Activate PLC positioning axis 5
PLC
NC
4-24
M2713
Strobe marker, activate the transfer of the value from D528

to the Q parameter defined in W516
PLC
NC
4-90
M2716
Strobe marker for datum correction
PLC
NC
4-125
M2718
Strobe marker, activate the transfer of the value from D528

to the Q parameter Q99
PLC
NC
M2719
Always = 1 (in TNC 360 activating the word processing)
M2780
Electrode is retracting
NC
NC
4-60
M2781
Reversing point has been reached during retraction
NC
NC
4-60
M2782
Short circuit at socket X12
NC
NC
4-59
M2783
NC
NC
4-61
M2784
Reapproach the last eroded position
NC
NC
4-60
M2785
Erosion process on
NC
NC
4-56
M2786
Eroding a disk
NC
NC
4-88
M2787
Disk erosion in the last circle
NC
NC
4-88
M2788
Erosion error
NC
NC
4-60
M2789
Operating mode "handwheel" (0=Highlight display on

INCREMENT, 1=Highlight display on INTERPOL. FACTOR
NC
NC
4-118
M2790
NC
PLC
4-88
M2791
NC
PLC
4-88
66
List of Markers
3/2000
Marker
Function
Set
Reset
Page
M2794
Changed values in eroding parameters Q96 to Q98

(without erosion tables: Q90 to Q99)
NC
PLC
4-67
M27951)
Changed values in current table during program run

(M2796)
NC
PLC
4-67
M27961)
Transfer changed values in current table to the PLC

(M2795)
PLC
NC
4-67
M2797
M27981)
Changed values in the status line and Q99 during erosion
Manual generator setting

NC
PLC
4-67
M27992)
Strobe marker for activate the data transfer via RS-422/V.11
PLC
NC
4-70
1) Active if MP2199 = 2 (see chapter "Machine integration," section "Eroding parameters")

2) only TNC 416/406
3/2000
List of Markers
67
Marker
Function
Set
Reset
Page
M2800
Code for TNC keys (lsb)

(no function in TNC 416/TNC 406 as of software 280 62x-07)
NC
NC
M2801
Code for TNC keys
NC
NC
M2802
Code for TNC keys
NC
NC
M2803
Code for TNC keys
NC
NC
M2804
Code for TNC keys
NC
NC
M2805
Code for TNC keys
NC
NC
M2806
Code for TNC keys
NC
NC
M2807
Code for TNC keys (msb)
NC
NC
M2808
Strobe TNC key code

(no function in TNC 416/ TNC 406 as of software 280 62x-07)
NC
PLC
M2813
Activate the key from W516

PLC
NC
4-101
M2815
Blinking PLC error message
PLC
PLC
4-85
M2816
Software limit switch range Bit 0
PLC
PLC
4-14
M2817
Software limit switch range Bit 1
PLC
PLC
4-14
M2824
Activate software limit switch ranges
PLC
NC
4-14
M2826
Disable feed rate of the handwheel.
PLC
PLC
M2832
Code for disabled TNC keys (lsb)

NC
NC
M2833
Code for disabled TNC keys
NC
NC
M2834
NC
NC
M2835
NC
NC
M2836
NC
NC
M2837
NC
NC
M2838
NC
NC
M2839
Code for disabled TNC keys (msb)
NC
NC
M2855
to M2923
Disable a TNC key

PLC
PLC
4-102
M2924
to M3123
200 PLC error messages
NC;
PLC
PLC
4-85
M3168
Overflow during multiplication
NC
PLC
7-58
M3169
Division by 0
NC
PLC
7-59
M3170
MODULO incorrectly executed
NC
PLC
7-60
M3171
Error in module 90xx execution
M3172
Reserved for errors that the PLC programmer would like to

trap
NC
NC
M3200
to M3263
Values from MP4310.3 to MP4310.6
NC
NC
68
List of Markers
3/2000
2 List of Bytes, Words and Double Words

Word
Function
Transmission
Page
W258
S-Code (EL-Call, WP-Call)
W260
M-Code (Strobe M2045)
NC PLC
4-94
W262
T-Code, 16 bit (Strobe M2046)
NC PLC
4-128
W266
Number of NC error message
NC PLC
D268
T-Code, 32 bit
W272
Operating mode:
0 = Programming and editing
2 = Electronic handwheel
6 = Program test
7 = Pass over reference point
NC PLC
NC PLC
4-101
W274
Code number for the pressed disabled key, signal via M2182
Code number which is not evaluate from the NC
NC PLC
NC PLC
4-101
D276
D280
1st value with FN19
NC PLC
D284
2nd value with FN19
NC PLC
D288
Actual position X
NC PLC
D292
Actual position Y
NC PLC
D296
Actual position Z
NC PLC
D300
Actual position 4
NC PLC
D304
Actual position 5
NC PLC
D308
Start address PLC memory for first line in PLC window
NC PLC
D312
Start address PLC memory for second line in PLC window
NC PLC
D316
Start address PLC memory for third line in PLC window
NC PLC
D324
Nominal position X
NC PLC
D328
Nominal position Y
NC PLC
D332
Nominal position Z
NC PLC
D336
Nominal position 4
NC PLC
D340
Nominal position 5
NC PLC
D360
Programmed feed rate
NC PLC
D364
Ref position X
NC PLC
D368
Ref position Y
NC PLC
D372
Ref position Z
NC PLC
D376
Ref position 4
NC PLC
D380
Ref position 5
NC PLC
D384
Total length of path for erosion/positioning
NC PLC
D388
Current way to go (WTG)
NC PLC
4-61
3/2000
List of Bytes, Words and Double Words
69
Word
Function
Transmission
Page
W392
Current value of the analog input
NC PLC
4-57
W394
Actual angle while disk cycle
NC PLC
4-88
B396
Mode of cycle 17 disk (0...7)
B397
Axis of cycle 17 disk 0/1/2=X/Y/Z
B398
Actual feed rate [mm/min]
D400
Angle of basic rotation
NC PLC
D412
Q parameter Q96*
NC PLC
4-63
D416
Q parameter Q97*
NC PLC
4-63
D420
Q parameter Q98*
NC PLC
4-63
W490
Control temperature in degrees Celsius
W492
Spindle override factor in %
NC PLC
4-54
W494
Feed rate override factor in %
NC PLC
4-54
W498
Actual handwheel axis (X=1, Y=2, Z=3,...)
NC PLC
D512
Return value for FN19 (Q parameter xx)
NC PLC
W516
Word with multiple function;

Code number for simulating TNC keys activated by M2813
Number of the Q parameter to be overwritten (Q100 to Q107)
PLC NC
4-101
W520
Threshold for free-run velocity (when MP2081=1)
PLC NC
W522
Factor for gap feed rate backwards (when MP2081=1)
PLC NC
W524
Nominal value for sparking gap (when MP2081=1)
PLC NC
W526
Code no. for erosion parameter table (0 = JH standard table)
PLC NC
D528
Value to be transferred to the Q parameter (strobe 2718);

PLC position axis X (strobe M2704);
Datum correction, axis X (strobe M2716)
PLC NC
4-125
D532
PLC positioning axis Y (strobe M2705);

Datum correction axis Y (strobe M2716)
PLC NC
4-125
D536
PLC positioning axis Z (strobe M2706);

Datum correction axis Z (strobe M2716)
PLC NC
4-125
D540
PLC positioning axis 4 (strobe M2707);

Datum correction, axis 4 (strobe M2716)
PLC NC
4-125
D544
PLC positioning axis 5 (strobe M2708);

Datum correction, axis 5 (strobe M2716)
PLC NC
4-125
W560
Feed, axis X (strobe M2704)
PLC NC
4-24
W562
Feed, axis Y (strobe M2705)

Feed, axis Z (strobe M2706)
PLC NC
PLC NC
4-24
W564
W566
Feed, axis 4 (strobe M2707)
PLC NC
4-24
W568
Feed, axis 5 (strobe M2708)
PLC NC
4-24
W576
Axis error compensation, axis X
PLC NC
4-22
W578
Axis error compensation, axis Y

Axis error compensation, axis Z
PLC NC
PLC NC
4-22
W580
W582
Axis error compensation, axis 4
PLC NC
4-22
610
4-24
4-22
3/2000
Word
Function
Transmission
Page
W584
Axis error compensation, axis 5
PLC NC
4-22
W586
Nominal value output on analog output 6 (default value 500 =

5,0 Volt) (TNC 406 as of software 280 62x-08)
PLC NC
W588
MP2010.0 (100...10000)
W590
MP2010.1 (100...10000)
W592
MP2020.0 (100...10000)
W594
MP2020.1 (100...10000)
B596
MP2030.0 (0...100%)
B597
MP2030.1 (0...100%)
B600
Identifier: 1=EL CALL; 2=WP CALL
NC PLC
B601.... Vacant
.B603
NC PLC
B604...
B619
NC PLC
B620.... Vacant
B623
NC PLC
B624.... Vacant
B627
PLC NC
PLC NC
16-byte ASCII string EL name or WP name
D628
D632
D636
D640
D644
D648
Identifier 1, EL CALL
Compensation in X
Compensation in Y
Compensation in Z
Compensation in C
Undersize
Radius
B666
LS max cycle generator (Q150)
NC PLC
B667
LS min cycle generator (Q151)
NC PLC
B668
Power stage number
NR*
E-table PLC
4-63
B669
Low voltage current
LV*
E-table PLC
4-63
B670
High voltage current
HV*
E-table PLC
4-63
B671
Gap voltage
GV*
E-table PLC
4-63
W672
Pulse ON duration
TON*
E-table PLC
4-63
B674
Pulse OFF duration
TOF*
E-table PLC
4-63
B675
Servo sensitivity
SV*
E-table NC
4-63
W676
Auto jump distance
AJD*
E-table PLC
4-63
W678
Erosion time
ET*
E-table PLC
4-63
B680
Arc sensitivity
AR*
E-table PLC
4-63
B681
Polarity electrode 0="+", 1=""
P*
E-table PLC
4-63
W682
High voltage selector
HS*
E-table PLC
4-63
W684
Wear rate [%]
WR*
E-table PLC
4-63
W686
Surface finish
RA*
E-table PLC
4-63
D688
Stock removal
SR*
E-table PLC
4-63
3/2000
Identifier 2, WP CALL
Shift in X
Shift in Y
Shift in Z
Rotation in C
611
Word
Function
Transmission
Page
W692
Two-times gap
2G*
E-table PLC
4-63
W694
Minimum undersize
UNS*
E-table PLC
4-63
B696
AUX1*
E-table PLC
4-63
B697
AUX2*
E-table PLC
4-63
B698
AUX3*
E-table PLC
4-63
B699
AUX4*
E-table PLC
4-63
W700
AUX5*
E-table PLC
4-63
W702
AUX6*
E-table PLC
4-63
B703 B747
Bytes reserved for eroding table
W748
Free rotation of a second angular axis

If the 5th axis has also been defined as angle axis (A or B), you
can switch on the free rotation of this axis (behavior is similar
to ROT-C) by loading the PLC ouble word D748 with the speed
value (e.g. 10 000 for 10 rpm). By loading a negative value you
can reverse the direction of rotation.
An M function as with ROT-C is not required.
W750
Reserved
W752
Speed of a non-controlled rotary axis (M03, M04)
PLC NC
4-54
W756
Retraction distance for eroding timer
PLC NC
4-62
W760
First byte to transmit via RS-422/V.11
PLC NC
4-70
W762
Number of bytes to transmit via RS-422/V.11
PLC NC
4-70
W764
Spindle override factor in %
PLC NC
4-54
W766
Feed rate override factor in %
PLC NC
4-54
D768
to
D956
Value from MP4210.0 to MP4210.47
NC PLC
7-14
W960
to
W974
NC PLC
7-16
W976
to
W1006
NC PLC
7-16
W1008
to
W1022
NC PLC
7-16
W1024
Axis releases, bit-coded (5/4/Z/Y/X)
NC PLC
W1026
Axes in position, bit-coded (5/4/Z/Y/X)
NC PLC
W1028
Reserved
W1030
Traverse direction, bit-coded (5/4/Z/Y/X) 0 = positive; 1 =

negative
W1032
Reference marks not yet traversed, bit-coded (5/4/Z/Y/X)
612
NC PLC
3/2000
Word
Function
Transmission
W1034
Positive software limit switch was traversed, bit-coded

(5/4/Z/Y/X)
NC PLC
W1036
Negative software limit switch was traversed, bit-coded

(5/4/Z/Y/X)
NC PLC
W1038
Preparing to open the position control loop, bit-coded

(5/4/Z/Y/X)
NC PLC
W1040
Opening the control loop, bit-coded (5/4/Z/Y/X)
NC PLC
W1042
Reserved
W1044
Actual position capture, bit-coded (5/4/Z/Y/X)
NC PLC
W1046
Manual traversing with + direction button, bit-coded (5/4/Z/Y/X)
NC PLC
W1048
Manual traversing with direction button, bit-coded (5/4/Z/Y/X)
NC PLC
W1050
Incremental jog positioning +, bit-coded (5/4/Z/Y/X)
NC PLC
W1052
Incremental jog positioning , bit-coded (5/4/Z/Y/X)
NC PLC
W1054
Reference end position, bit-coded (5/4/Z/Y/X)
NC PLC
W1056
Lubrication pulse. Value from MP4060.x exceeded, bit-coded

(5/4/Z/Y/X)
NC PLC
W1058
Reset the accumulated distance for lubrication, bit-coded

(5/4/Z/Y/X)
NC PLC
W1060
Reserved
W1062
lock Handwheel pulses (bit-coded)
W1064
to
W1098
Reserved
3/2000
Page
613
PLC Programming Contents
1
1.1
PLC-functions
Selecting PLC-operation
7-5
7-5
1.2
PLC Main menu
7-6
1.2.1 Editing PLC-programs
7-6
1.2.2 Deleting PLC-programs
7-8
1.2.3 Transferring programs from EPROM
7-8
1.2.4 Translating PLC programs
7-8
1.2.5 Utilization
7-8
1.3
7-9
Test functions for the PLC-program
1.3.1 TRACE function
7-9
1.3.2 TABLE function
7-10
1.3.3 Debug Functions
7-10
1.3.4 Transferring the PLC-program
7-11
2
2.1
7-12
7-12
Program creation
Program structure
2.1.1 Command
7-12
2.1.2 Module technique
7-13
2.2
Address allocation
7-14
2.2.1 Operand directory
7-14
2.2.2 Addressing the word memory
7-14
2.3
Data transfer PLC NC and NC PLC
2.4
Timers and counters
7-15
7-18
2.4.1 Timers
7-18
2.4.2 Counters
7-20
2.5
Edge evaluation of the PLC-inputs
7-21
2.6
EPROM-creation
7-21
2.7
Error-messages
7-23
2.7.1 Syntax errors within a command line
7-23
2.7.2 Syntax errors in the course of a program
7-23
2.7.3 Run-time errors
7-24
3
3.1
7-26
7-26
Commands
Load and Assign Commands
3.1.1 LOAD (L) L
7-26
3.1.2 LOAD NOT (LN) LN
7-28
3.1.3 LOAD TWO'S COMPLEMENT (L) L
7-30
3.1.4 LOAD BYTE (LB) LB
7-31
3.1.5 LOAD WORD (LW) LW
7-31
3.1.6 LOAD DOUBLEWORD (LD) LD
7-31
3.1.7 ASSIGN (=) =
7-33
3.1.8 ASSIGN BYTE (B=) B=
7-35
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
PLC-functions
7-1
3.1.9 ASSIGN WORD (W=) W=
7-35
3.1.10 ASSIGN DOUBLEWORD (D=) D=
7-35
3.1.11 ASSIGN NOT (=N)
7-36
3.1.12 ASSIGN TWO'S COMPLEMENT (= -)
7-36
3.2
Set-commands
7-38
3.2.1 SET (S) S
7-38
3.2.2 RESET (R) R
7-39
3.2.3 SET NOT (SN) SN
7-40
3.2.4 RESET NOT (RN) RN
7-41
3.3
Logic Gates
7-43
3.3.1 AND (A) A
7-43
3.3.2 AND NOT (AN) A
7-45
3.3.3 OR (O)
7-47
3.3.4 OR NOT (ON)
7-49
3.3.5 EXCLUSIVE OR (XO)
7-51
3.3.6 EXCLUSIVE OR NOT (XON) XON
7-53
3.4
7-56
Arithmetic commands
3.4.1 ADDITION (+) +
7-56
3.4.2 SUBTRACTION ()
7-57
3.4.3 MULTIPLICATION (x) x
7-58
3.4.4 DIVISION (/) /
7-59
3.4.5 REMAINDER (MOD) MOD
7-60
3.5
Comparisons
7-62
3.5.1 EQUAL TO (==) ==
7-62
3.5.2 LESS THAN (<) <
7-63
3.5.3 GREATER THAN (>) >
7-64
3.5.4 LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO (<=) <=
7-65
3.5.5 GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO (>=)
7-66
3.5.6 UNEQUAL (<>)<

3.6
>
Parentheses with logical gating
7-67
7-69
3.6.1 AND [ ] (A[ ]) A[ ]
7-69
3.6.2 AND NOT [ ] (AN[ ]) AN[ ]
7-69
3.6.3 OR [ ] (O[ ]) O[ ]
7-69
3.6.4 OR NOT [ ] (ON[ ]) ON[ ]
7-69
3.6.5 EXCLUSIVE OR [ ] (XO[ ]) XO[ ]
7-70
3.6.6 EXCLUSIVE OR NOT [ ] (XON[ ]) XON[ ]
7-70
3.7
7-73
Parentheses with arithmetic commands
3.7.1 ADDITION [ ] (+[ ]) + [ ]
7-73
3.7.2 SUBTRACTION [ ] ([ ]) [ ]
7-73
3.7.3 MULTIPLICATION [ ] (x[ ]) X [ ]
7-73
3.7.4 DIVISION [ ] (/[ ]) / [ ]
7-73
3.7.5 REMAINDER [ ] (MOD[ ]) MOD [ ]
7-74
3.7.6 INCREMENT (INC)
7-76
3.7.7 DECREMENT (DEC)
7-76
7-2
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
PLC-functions
3/2000
3.8
Parentheses with comparison commands
7-77
3.8.1 EQUAL TO [ ] (==[ ]) (== [ ]
7-77
3.8.2 LESS THAN [ ] (<[ ]) < [ ]
7-77
3.8.3 GREATER THAN [ ] (>[ ])> [ ]
7-77
3.8.4 LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO [ ] (<=[ ]) <= [ ]
7-77
3.8.5 GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TOL[ ] (>=[ ]) >= [ ]
7-78
3.8.6 NOT EQUAL TO [ ] (<>[ ]) <> [ ]
7-78
3.9
Shift Commands
7-81
3.9.1 SHIFT LEFT (<<) <<
7-81
3.9.2 SHIFT RIGHT (>>) >>
7-82
3.10
Bit commands
7-84
3.10.1 BIT SET (BS, BSX) BS
7-84
3.10.2 BIT RESET (BC, BCX) BC
7-85
3.10.3 BIT TEST (BT, BTX) BT
7-86
3.11
Stack operations
7-88
3.11.1 Load data onto Data Stack (PS)PS
7-88
3.11.2 Pull data from Data Stack (PL)
7-89
3.11.3 Load logic accumulator onto Data Stack (PSL) PSL
7-89
3.11.4 Load word accumulator onto Data Stack (PSW) P
SW
7-90
3.11.5 Pull logic accumulator from Data Stack (PLL) PLL
7-90
3.11.6 Pull word accumulator from Data Stack (PLW)
7-90
3.12
Jump commands
7-93
3.12.1 Unconditional jump (JP) JP
7-93
3.12.2 Jump if Logic Accumulator = 1 (JPT)

3.12.3 Jump if Logic Accumulator = 0 (JPF) J
3.12.4 Call Module (CM) CM
7-93
PF
7-93
7-95
3.12.5 Call Module if Logic Accumulator = 1 (CMT) CMT
7-95
3.12.6 Call Module if Logic Accumulator = 0 (CMF) CMF
7-95
3.12.7 End of Module, Program End (EM) EM
7-97
3.12.8 Jump Label (LBL) LBL
7-97
3.12.9 End of Module if Logic Accumulator = 1 (EMT)
7-97
3.12.10 End of Module if Logic Accumulator = 0 (EMF)
7-97
3.13
CASE statement
7-99
3.13.1 Indexed call module (CASE) CASE
7-99
3.13.2 End indexed call module (ENDC) ENDC

3.14
Commands for STRING Execution
7-99
7-100
3.14.1 LOAD (L)
7-101
3.14.2 ADD (+)
7-102
3.14.3 Storing a STRING (=)
7-102
3.14.4 Overwriting of a STRING (OVWR)
7-103
3.15
7-104
Submit Programs
3.15.1 Call up of the Submit Program (SUBM)
7-104
3.15.2 Status Interrogation of a Submit Program (RPLY)
7-105
3.15.3 Cancellation of a Submit Program (CAN)
7-105
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
PLC-functions
7-3
3.16
INDEX-Register
7-108
3.17
Program Structures
7-109
3.17.1 IF ... ELSE ... ENDI Structure
7-109
3.17.2 REPEAT ... UNTIL Structure
7-110
3.17.3 WHILE ... ENDW Structure
7-110
4
4.1
PLC Modules for TNC 416/406

Copy in Marker or Word Range (Module 9000/9001)
7-111
7-111
4.2
Read Edges of PLC Inputs (Module 9004)
7-112
4.3
Read in Word Range (Module 9010/9011/9012)
7-113
4.4
Write in Word Range (Module 9020/9021/9022)
7-114
4.5
Read Machine Parameter (Module 9032)
7-115
4.6
Number Conversion binary to ASCII (Module 9051)
7-115
4.7
Compute string length (Module 9071)
7-116
4.8
Transmit String buffer to Log buffer (Module 9079)
7-117
4.9
Delete PLC Window (Module 9080)
7-117
4.10
Interrogate PLC Window (Module 9081)
7-117
4.11
Display String (Module 9082)
7-118
4.12
Display Bar Chart (Module 9083)
7-120
4.13
Reading the axis coordinates (Module 9040)
7-121
4.14
PLC Positioning (Module 9221)
7-122
7-4
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
PLC-functions
3/2000
1 PLC-functions
The integrated PLC in the TNC 406 and TNC 306 contains its own text editor for creating the list of
instructions for the PLC-program. Commands and comments are entered via the ASCII-keyboard on
the control panel of the TNC 406 or the keyboard of the TNC 306 (see Section "Programming and
editing-files").
The functions TRACE and TABLE, as well as a syntax check on entering the PLC commands and a
logical test with the Function COMPILE can make it easier to find faults in the PLC-program (see
section "Test functions").
8 ms are available for a PLC-run. Up to 4000 logic commands, equivalent to 32 Kbytes, can be
processed within this period (executable memory). A new PLC-run commences every 40 ms/20 ms
(depending on MP1700), i.e. every 40 ms/20 ms the inputs are read and outputs are set.
The following section shows how to start PLC-operation.
1.1
Selecting PLC-operation
PLC-operation covers all functions for creating and testing the PLC-programs.
It can be selected as follows, using code number 807 667.
Select NC operating-mode
"Programming and editing"
Press MOD
key
TNC 306: Enter code number 807 667

NC 406: Press soft key key code
and enter code number 807 667
TNC 306: ENT key
PLC-operation is selected
(Main menu)
PLC-operation can be stopped by pressing END
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
PLC-functions
7-5
1.2
PLC Main menu
TNC 406
PROCESSING TIME
MAXIMUM:
CURRENT:
TOTAL MEMORY
VACANT MEMORY
:
:
XX KBYTE
XX KBYTE
CODE LENGTH
XX KBYTE
Select PLC
editing
mode
Select
tables
M/I/O/T/C
/B/W/D
Select TRACE
mode
Compile PLC
program
XXX%
XXX%
Copy from
EPROM to
RAM
Erase PLC
Program
Quit PLC
Mode
TNC 306
ERASE PLC PROGRAM
TRANSFER PROGRAM FROM EPROM
PLC EDITING MODE
PLC PROGRAM TRACE MODE
TABLES M/I/O/C/T/B/W/D
TRANSLATE PLC PROGRAM
UTILIZATION/MEMORY
Select the desired mode with the cursor keys and and activate by pressing ENT.
To exit the menu and return to the previous NC mode, press END again.
1.2.1 Editing PLC-programs

In the operating mode PLC EDITING MODE (TNC 406 Soft key EDIT) an instruction list can be edited
via TNC keyboard.
The keys of the TNC 306 assume new assignments, which are indicated on a special tactile
membrane that is place over the TNC keyboard. The tactile membrane is included with this
Technical Manual. Before editing a new program, it is necessary to reserve memory in the
UTILIZATION/ MEMORY mode.
After the ENT key is pressed, the editor identifies itself with
"0
EM"
"0" stands for program line 0 and "EM" for End of Module.
When entering an instruction, "EM" automatically moves downward by one line.
The PLC editing mode can be exited by pressing the END key/ soft key.
7-6
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
PLC-functions
3/2000
A complete instruction list comprises:

.Line numbers
.Command from command store (see Section "Commands")
.Operand type
.Operand number
.Comment
The line number is automatically generated on entering a command.
The command, operand type, operand number and the comment must be transferred with ENT. The
cursor then jumps to the next positions within the instruction. The instruction is completed after the
comments are entered. If no comment is to be entered, the position is simply concluded the ENT.
Lines that are to contain only a comment should be started with a semicolon (;) instead of a
command. A comment can therefore cover several lines if each line commences with ";". A line
contains a maximum of 26 characters for the comment and may include all numeral, letters and
other characters on the keyboard.
A "find function" makes is easier to find certain operands.

If you wish to find a certain marker in the program listing, use the arrow keys to move the cursor to
a marker and press GOTO. Enter the number of the desired marker. Then press ENT to find the
marker.
Key assignments for the TNC 306 PLC editor
+
_
*
/
[
]
DEL
EXT
<
=
MOD
>
ENT
GOTO
NO
ENT
+/
CE
W
<
=
>
END
DEL
EXT
MOD
ENT
+/
CE
END
GOTO
J
O
K
P
L
Q
M
R
TE 355A
3/2000
A
NO
ENT
TE 355B
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
PLC-functions
7-7
1.2.2 Deleting PLC-programs

With the soft key DELETE (TNC406) or in the operating mode ERASE PLC PROGRAM (TNC 306), a
PLC program located in RAM can be deleted.
The entire RAM memory can be deleted by entering the code number 53 12 10
1.2.3 Transferring programs from EPROM

With the soft key COPY ROM RAM (TNC406) or in the operating mode TRANSFER PROGRAM
FROM EPROM (TNC 306), a program that is stored in the EPROM can be copied into the RAM (see
also MP 4010).
1.2.4 Translating PLC programs

A PLC program created with the PLC editor and stored in RAM must first be compiled by pressing
the soft key COMPILE (TNC406) or in the mode TRANSLATE PLC PROGRAM (TNC 306) before it
can be tested.
If a PLC program is already in the RAM prior to TNC switch-on, it is automatically translated.
Errors in the program can be found during the translation run (see Section "Program creation", "Error
messages").
1.2.5 Utilization
In the main menu (TNC 406) or in the mode UTILIZATION (TNC 306) the occupied PLC processing
time and the vacant PLC memory are displayed.
The vacant memory is derived from the total (reserved) memory and the occupied memory.
The vacant PLC memory is displayed in bytes.
100% processing time corresponds to 5 ms (TNC 406) or 4 ms (TNC 306). The maximum possible
processing time is 10 ms (TNC 406) or 8 ms (TNC 306). The current processing time indicates the
duration of the last PLC scan. If the current processing time exceeds the maximum, the blinking
error message ERROR IN PLC PROGRAM 53 will appear.
TNC 306:
Please note that the processing time increases by 20% during RS-232 data transfer and by 5%
during handwheel operation. A PLC program should therefore be tested during data transfer or
handwheel operation.
7-8
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
PLC-functions
3/2000
1.3
Test functions for the PLC-program
1.3.1 TRACE function

The TRACE function makes it possible to check the logical states of the markers, inputs, outputs,
timers and counters.
If this function is selected, the following menu appears:
TNC 406
TNC 306
SELECT I/O/C/T/M
DISPLAY TRACE BUFFER
START TRACE
END TRACE
SELECT I/O/C/T/M
Those inputs (I), outputs (O), counters (C), timers (T) or markers (M) whose logical states are to be
checked can be entered into a table in the SELECT I/O/C/T/M function. A maximum of 16 markers,
timers etc. can be simultaneously verified. Each position is interrogated via dialog. Erroneous entries
can be deleted by pressing DEL.
The memory for the trace mode (TRACE BUFFER) has space for 1024 individual states per operand,
i.e. 1024 PLC processes are recorded. In order to record the required time duration of the user, a
TRIGGER condition can be entered for each operand:
"1" = Recording when operand is logically "1"
"0" = Recording when operand is logically "0"
If the trigger position is verified with the NOENT key, it means that a trigger condition is not
required. 512 states are recorded before and after a trigger event. The trigger event is regarded as
fulfilled only when the conditions for all operands are simultaneously fulfilled with TRIGGER.
Example:
M2618 1
M2780 0
M2781 1
I5
Trigger event:
M2618 logical "1"

M2780 logical "0"
M2781 logical "1"
The state of I5 has no significance for the trigger event: it is, however, recorded.
If no trigger condition is entered for the operands, the states of the operands are continually
recorded and, after ending the trace mode, the last 1024 states are displayed.
To exit the SELECT I/O/C/T/M function, press END.
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
PLC-functions
7-9
DISPLAY TRACE BUFFER

In the TNC 406 the trace buffer is immediately shown after the soft key TRACE is pressed.
With the function DISPLAY TRACE BUFFER (TNC 306) the logic states 0 or 1 of the selected
operands are graphically displayed in a diagram. With simultaneous triggering, the counter is reset to
0 (upper left in screen). By using the cursor keys and (TNC 306) or the soft keys PAGE (TNC
406),
512 logic states before and after the trigger event can be observed.
This can be used to determine, for example, whether a marker, output etc. was set too late or too
early. Taking the PLC processing time of 40 ms into account, a time displacement in ms can be
detected.
START TRACE
With this mode, TRACE is started. Until the trigger event occurs, the display PCTR blinks in the
status field. When the trigger event occurs, PCTR is on, and after the trace is stored, the display
goes out.
If marker M2622 is set the display COLL (TNC 306) or a symbol for a electrode (TNC 406) blinks.
END TRACE / STOP TRACE
If the trigger event does not occur, the trace can be aborted with the END TRACE or STOP TRACE
function. In this case, the last 1024 states of the selected operands are stored.
1.3.2 TABLE function

In the TABLE function the states of inputs (I), outputs (O), counters (C), timers (T), markers (M),
bytes (B), words (W) and double words (D) can be dynamically displayed on the screen.
The individual tables for inputs, outputs, etc. are selected with the corresponding letter (TNC 306), or
with a soft key (TNC 406).
The desired operand number is selected with the cursor keys.
The operands I/O/C/T/M can be changed with Set (S) or Reset (R), and in the TNC 406 Bytes (B),
Words (W) and Double words (D) can be overwrite, provided they are not defined through the PLC
program.
Bytes (B), Words (W) and Double words (D) can be displayed in HEX or in DECIMAL.
1.3.3 Debug Functions

This Debug function can be activated only on the TNC 406! Double words D308/D312/D316 make it
possible to display any memory area of the PLC in the PLC status window in up to three lines. The
values are hexadecimal coded. The function is activated by entering the starting address of the
marker area to be tested in D308/D312/D316. With K+0 in D308/D312/D316 the function is made
inactive. Byte markers appear as 80..FF with Marker =1, and 00..7F with Marker = 0.
7-10
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
PLC-functions
3/2000
Base addresses of the individual areas:

Bit Marker M:
Input I:
Output O:
-34224
Counter C:
-34032
Timer T:
Word Marker B/W/D:
-37888
-34608
($FFFF6C00)
-33888
-33792
Example for the display of 12 markers starting with M2616:

L K-37888
+ K+2616
= D308
Example for the display of 12 bytes starting with B668:
L K-33792
+ K+668
= D312
1.3.4 Transferring the PLC-program

Data transmission can be activated with the EXT key from the main menu.
The following menu appears:
READ-IN SELECTED PROGRAM
OUTPUT ASCII
OUTPUT ASCII UNFORMATTED
OUTPUT ASCII WITH CROSS-REF.
BINARY OUTPUT
PLC programs written on a computer can be transferred into the PLC RAM with the RS-232-C
interface. To load a program, select READ IN SELECTED PROGRAM. It is not necessary to reserve
memory in the RAM when you transfer a PLC-program via RS-232-C.
With the OUTPUT ASCII function the PLC program can be transferred from the RAM to an external
device. It can be transferred with the cross references of all its operands.
It is also possible to transfer the program in unformatted or binary form by selecting the
corresponding menu items (see Section "Program creation", "EPROM creation").
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
PLC-functions
7-11
2 Program creation
The PLC program can be created directly on HEIDENHAIN contouring controls. For this purpose, the
PLC editor must be called with code number 807 667 (see Section "PLC-functions").
The PLC program can also be written with a special HEIDENHAIN compiler software (PLC.EXE).
2.1
Program structure
2.1.1 Command
A command is the smallest unit in a PLC-program. It consists of the operation and the operand.
A
Operation
Operand
designation
(I, O, M, T, C,
B, W, D, K)
(A, AN...)
28
;Comment
Operand
address;
constant value
Operand
The operation describes the function which is to be performed on the operand.

The operand indicates what is to be operated on. It consists of the operand abbreviation and a
parameter (address). Register and memory contents can be gated, erased and loaded by using PLCcommands.
Both Bit- and Word-processing are possible. In Word-processing it is possible to address memory
contents with a length of 8 Bits (Byte), 16 Bits (Word) or 32 Bits (Double word) (see Section
"Commands").
7-12
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Program creation
3/2000
2.1.2 Module technique

It is good practice to make the maintenance of the PLC-programs easier by creating the program
with the most transparent structure possible. This can be best achieved by dividing the PLC-program
into individual Modules (structured programming).
Only the most important PLC-functions should be programmed in the main routine.
Individual PLC-functions such as M-function evaluation are programmed in their own Modules.
0
1
2
3
4
5
L M2719
SN M2719
L M2497
SN M2497
L M2496
SN M2496
.
.
20
21
22
23
.
.
.
95
122
.
.
125
.
.
.
151
152
153
154
.
.
.
220
.
.
.225
.
.
.
.
L M1936
A M2045
AN M2618
CMT 36
.
.
.
EM
LBL 101
.
.
EM
.
.
.
LBL 36
CM 361
CM 101
EM
.
.
.
LBL 361
.
.
EM
.
.
;Activate the strobes for word processing

;Activate the edge evaluation
;Activate transfer of decoded M-codes
;(M1900 to M1999)
.
.
;M-Function M36
;Change-signal for M-function
;Gap control already active?
;Gap control
.
.
.
;End main program
;Acknowledgment for M function
.
.
.
.
.
;Gap control
;Eroding ON
Acknowledgment for M functions
.
.
.
.
;Eroding ON
.
.
.
.
Error conditions in the machine should be interrogated in the PLC-program and a plain language error
message should be displayed on the screen. See Chapter "Machine integration", Section "Display
and operation" and Chapter "PLC-programming", Section "Modules".
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Program creation
7-13
2.2
Address allocation
2.2.1 Operand directory

Operand
Abbreviation
Address range
Marker
Input
M (Marker)
I (Input)
Output
O (Output)
Counter
C (Counter)
Timer
T (Timer)
Byte
Word
Double word
Constant
B (Byte)
W (Word)
D (Double word)
K
0 to 3263
I0 to I31; I128 to I151;
I64 to I126 (PL 400) or up to I127 (PL 410)
O0 to O30;
O32 to O62(PL 400/PL 410)
Set counter : C0 to C31
Counter-contents: C48 to C79
Release count pulse: C96 to C127
Timer-start: T0 to T47
Timer running: T48 to T95
0 to 1023 (8 Bit)
0 to 1022 (16 Bit)
0 to 1020 (32 Bit)
2 147 483 647 to + 2 147 483 647
2.2.2 Addressing the word memory

The memory for the operands B (8 bits), W (16 bits), D (32 bits) is only 8 bits wide. Since the
operands can be 8,16 or 32 bits wide, an overlap of the memory areas will occur, which must be
taken into account in addressing the memory.
8 bit
D0
W0
W2
D4
W4
..
.
..
.
D1020
W1020
..
.
W1022
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
High-Byte for W; Highest-Byte for D

Low-Byte for W
Lowest-Byte for D
..
.
B1020
B1021
B1022
B1023
In byte addressing every address from 0 to 1023 is accessible. In word addressing, every second
address from 0 to 1022 is accessible and in double word addressing every fourth from 0 to 1020.
The address parameter gives the High byte for a word Address (W) , or the Highest byte for a double
word address (D).
Markers M1000 to M2000 and bytes B0 to B127 are non-volatile, i.e. the contents of this memory
are not lost when the power supply is switched off.
7-14
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Program creation
3/2000
B0 to B127
B128 to B255
B256 to B511
B512 to B767
B768 to B1023
2.3
Freely available, not deleted with RESET

Freely available, deleted with RESET
Data transfer NC PLC
Data transfer PLC NC
Machine parameters PLC
Data transfer PLC NC and NC PLC
PLC NC
The Q parameters Q100 to Q107 transfer numbers from the PLC to the part program. This means
that Q100 to Q107 can be overwritten by the PLC. The numerical value is registered in Double word
D528 and the Q parameter numbers 0 to 7 are defined in Word W516. The numbers 0 to 7
correspond to parameters Q100 to Q107. The transfer is activated with the strobe marker M2713,
which must be set with the next M/S/T strobe.
Marker
Function
Set
Reset
M2713
Activate the transfer of the value from D528

to the Q-Parameter defined in W516
PLC
NC
Address
Function
Double word with multiple function, here data for transfer from the
PLC to the NC
Q-Parameter No. for numerical transfer from PLC to NC
(0 7 = Q100 Q107)
D 528
W516
NC PLC
Various machine parameters are reserved for data transfer in the PLC. These machine parameters
are kept in the Double words D768 to D956 and the Words W960 to W974 and W976 to W1006.
PLC-positioning, datum-shifts, feed rates for PLC-positioning or coding for the release of certain
PLC-functions etc. can be filed in these machine parameters. The eroding parameters are still
available, which, depending on whether they are defined as Q parameters in the NC program or with
a table, are transferred by the NC or E-table into the PLC. The evaluation of all numerical values
transferred to the PLC takes place in the PLC program. (See chapter "Machine integration", section
"Eroding parameters.")
Address
D768
D772
D776
D780
D784
D788
3/2000
Function
Value from MP4210.0
Value from MP4210.1
Value from MP4210.2
Value from MP4210.3
Value from MP4210.4
Value from MP4210.5
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Program creation
7-15
Address
D792
D796
D800
D804
D808
Function
Value from MP4210.6
Value from MP4210.7
Value from MP4210.8
Value from MP4210.9
Value from MP4210.10
D812
D816
D820
D824
D828

D832
D836
D840
D844
D848

D852
D856
D860
D864
D868

D872
D876
D880
D884
D888

D892
D896
D900
D904
D908

D912
D916
D920
D924
D928

D932
D936
D940
D944
D948

D952
D956

7-16
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Program creation
3/2000
Address
W960
W962
W964
W966
W968
Function
Value from MP 4220.0
W970
W972
W974
W976
W978

W980
W982
W984
W986
W988

W990
W992
W994
W996
W998

W1000
W1002
W1004
W1006
W1008

W1010
W1012
W1014
W1016
W1018

W1020
W1022

MP4210.0
to MP4210.47
Set a number in the PLC

Input range: 99 999.999 to +99 999.999
MP4220
to MP4220.7
Set a number in the PLC: In the Word range W960 to W974

MP4310.0
to MP4310.15
and
MP4320.0
to
MP4320.7
Set a number in the PLC: in the Word range W976 to W1022

3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Program creation
7-17
2.4
Timers and counters
2.4.1 Timers
There are 48 timers available in the PLC. These timers are controlled by special markers with the
symbol T. The time period for the timers is defined in the machine parameter MP4110.X. The time
unit corresponds to the PLC cycle time.
The timers are started by setting markers T0 to T47 which also sets them to the value from
MP4110.X. This activation may only be performed for a single PLC run, as otherwise the timers will
be restarted upon every succeeding run.
The markers T48 to T95 (timer running) will remain set for the period defined in the machine
parameters.
Example:
Start of Timer 1
Period in MP4110.1 = 9 (PLC-cycles)
T1
T49
7-18
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Program creation
3/2000
Timer start
T0
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
T7
T8
T9
T10
T11
T12
T13
T14
T15
T16
T17
T18
T19
T20
T21
T22
T23
T24
T25
T26
T27
T28
T29
T30
T31
T32
T33
T34
T35
T36
T37
T38
T39
T40
T41
T42
T43
T44
T45
T46
T47
Timer running
T48
T49
T50
T51
T52
T53
T54
T55
T56
T57
T58
T59
T60
T61
T62
T63
T64
T65
T66
T67
T68
T69
T70
T71
T72
T73
T74
T75
T76
T77
T78
T79
T80
T81
T82
T83
T84
T85
T86
T87
T88
T89
T90
T91
T92
T93
T94
T95
MP4110.x
Time for timers

Input range: 0 to 65 535 [PLC cycles] (= 20/40 ms depending on MP1700)
3/2000
Machine parameter
MP4110.0
MP4110.1
MP4110.2
MP4110.3
MP4110.4
MP4110.5
MP4110.6
MP4110.7
MP4110.8
MP4110.9
MP4110.10
MP4110.11
MP4110.12
MP4110.13
MP4110.14
MP4110.15
MP4110.16
MP4110.17
MP4110.18
MP4110.19
MP4110.20
MP4110.21
MP4110.22
MP4110.23
MP4110.24
MP4110.25
MP4110.26
MP4110.27
MP4110.28
MP4110.29
MP4110.30
MP4110.31
MP4110.32
MP4110.33
MP4110.34
MP4110.35
MP4110.36
MP4110.37
MP4110.38
MP4110.39
MP4110.40
MP4110.41
MP4110.42
MP4110.43
MP4110.44
MP4110.45
MP4110.46
MP4110.47
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Program creation
7-19
2.4.2 Counters
There are 32 counters available in the PLC. Each of these counters is controlled by special markers
with the symbol C. After setting a marker from the range C0 to C31 the counter is loaded with the
value from machine parameter MP4120.X. The marker range C48 to C79 indicates whether the
count has been completed or not. The marker range C96 to C127 is used to start the counter
(counter release pulse).
Example:
Logic diagram for counter C1

Contents of machine parameter MP4120.1 = 10 (PLC cycles)
C1
C49
C97
C0
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
C10
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
C16
C17
C18
C19
C20
C21
C22
C23
C24
C25
C26
C27
C28
C29
C30
C31
7-20
C48
C49
C50
C51
C52
C53
C54
C55
C56
C57
C58
C59
C60
C61
C62
C63
C64
C65
C66
C67
C68
C69
C70
C71
C72
C73
C74
C75
C76
C77
C78
C79
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
C96
C97
C98
C99
C100
C101
C102
C103
C104
C105
C106
C107
C108
C109
C110
C111
C112
C113
C114
C115
C116
C117
C118
C119
C120
C121
C122
C123
C124
C125
C126
C127
Program creation
MP4120.0
MP4120.1
MP4120.2
MP4120.3
MP4120.4
MP4120.5
MP4120.6
MP4120.7
MP4120.8
MP4120.9
MP4120.10
MP4120.11
MP4120.12
MP4120.13
MP4120.14
MP4120.15
MP4120.16
MP4120.17
MP4120.18
MP4120.19
MP4120.20
MP4120.21
MP4120.22
MP4120.23
MP4120.24
MP4120.25
MP4120.26
MP4120.27
MP4120.28
MP4120.29
MP4120.30
MP4120.31
3/2000
MP4120.x
2.5
Pre-set value for counters C0 to C31

Input range: 0 to 65 535 [PLC cycles]
Edge evaluation of the PLC-inputs
The edge evaluation for the PLC-inputs can be activated by marker M2497. Edge evaluation means
that if the signal at the PLC-input changes, a certain marker will be set for the duration of one PLCrun. If marker M2497 is set, the following markers will be set if the signals change at the PLCinputs.
Marker for rising edges at the PLC-inputs:
Marker
M1500 to M1531
M1564 to M1626
M1628 to M1651
PLC-inputs
I0 to I31
I64 to I126 (PL 400) or I127 (PL410)
I128 to I151
Marker for falling edges at the PLC-inputs:

Marker
M1700 to M1731
M1764 to M1826
M1828 to M1851
Marker
M2497
2.6
PLC-inputs
I0 to I31
I64 to I126 (PL 400) or I127 (PL410)
I128 to I151
Function
Activate the edge evaluation for PLC-inputs
Rising-edge marker M1500 to M1651
Falling-edge marker M1700 to M1851
Set
PLC
Reset
PLC
EPROM-creation
Once the PLC program has been written and tested in the TNC 406 or TNC 306 it can then be
transferred in binary code to the PC via RS-232-C serial port (Motorola EXORMAX S3 Record
format).
This binary code is needed to create EPROMs with the MEGA-PROMMER software (version 2.12 or
higher). The TNC 306 must be equipped with 1-MB EPROMs, and the TNC 406 (beginning with
version 280 62x 03) with 2-MB EPROMs.
Starting with software version 280 62x 03 (code number for PLC chip is $0002, previously $0000 as
on the TNC 306) the output of the TNC 406 will be in a new binary format. This format cannot be
read by older software versions.
With binary output from the TNC 406, the machine parameters and the compensation value table
will be automatically transferred. The erosion parameter tables and OEM cycles must be confirmed
individually with the ENT key. A transfer in progress can be interrupted with the END
key.
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Program creation
7-21
During commissioning of the control the machine parameters and the compensation table can be
transferred to the RAM memory with the COPY ROMRAM soft key (only with TNC 406). They
become active the next time the control is started.
The PLC program can also be transferred to the RAM memory with the COPY ROMRAM soft key
(on TNC 406) or the TRANSFER PROGRAM FROM EPROM soft key (on TNC 306).
Machine parameter MP4010 selects whether the PLC program is run from the RAM area of the
control or the EPROM area.
During the creation and test of the PLC program the control should operate from the RAM area.
HEIDENHAIN recommends that an EPROM is created for the PLC-program before delivering the
machine to the customer (see also Chapter "Introduction").
MP4010
PLC program from RAM or from EPROM

Input: 0 or 1
0 = EPROM operation
1 = RAM operation
Please contact your HEIDENHAIN customer service representative if you have any questions.
7-22
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Program creation
3/2000
2.7
Error-messages
Error messages aid the programmer in creating the instruction list and testing of the program.
2.7.1 Syntax errors within a command line

These errors may occur when editing a line or on reading it in via the interface.
0
1
2
4
5
6
No valid command.
Operand for jump is not a Label. (Can only happen when reading in via the interface.
For a Jump command a type abbreviation is available for the Operand).
Invalid Operand-type (the command cannot be combined with this Operand).
Operand outside the permissible range (the stated number is too high, or odd address for
Word or Double word).
No limiter after command. (Can only happen when reading in via the interface. The comment
after the command was not designated by ";" or "*").
Line end not found (Can only happen when reading in via the interface. Comment too long).
2.7.2 Syntax errors in the course of a program

These errors are recognized during the compilation process. The Editor points to the line where the
error was found. If the PLC-program is compiled on switching-on (for example, because the control
was switched off immediately after editing the PLC-program) then a flashing message "ERROR IN
PLC-PROGRAM" will be displayed. Remedy: switch off and on again, and call the PLC-Editor with
the code-number. The Editor indicates the position of the error.
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Called Label has not been defined.

No End-program condition found (the program does not contain an EM instruction, or it
contains a JP-instruction without a following LBL-instruction).
Program is too long (RAM-overflow) (insufficient memory for the program code which is to be
generated).
Assign within parentheses (an =, S, SN, R, RN, or PS-instruction or a Jump-command has
been programmed, although arithmetic parentheses are open).
Excessive nesting of parentheses (more than 16 parentheses successively opened).
Jump within a gating sequence (an unconditional jump has been programmed, although the
gating sequence was not closed with an Assign ).
"Close-parentheses" without "open-parentheses" (a "close-parentheses" command was
programmed, although no parentheses were open).
Label within parentheses (a LBL-instruction has been programmed, although parentheses are
open).
Label within a gating sequence (a LBL-instruction has been programmed, although the
previous gating was not closed with an Assign).
Jump within parentheses (a jump instruction has been programmed, although parentheses
are open).
Parentheses open at end of block (an EM-instruction has been programmed, although
parentheses are open).
Label defined twice.
Word Assign missing (a Logic-instruction has been programmed, although the previous Wordgating was not closed with an Assign).
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Program creation
7-23
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Logic Assign missing (a Word-instruction has been programmed, although the previous Logicgating was not closed with an Assign)
Word Accumulator not loaded (a Word Assign or gating has been programmed, although the
Word Accumulator does not contain a definite value).
Logic-Accumulator not loaded (a Logic Assign has been programmed, although the Logic
Accumulator does not contain a definite value).
Accumulators not loaded on "open-parentheses" (an A[, AN[, O[, ON[, or XON[ command has
been programmed, although neither the Word- nor the Logic Accumulator has been gated or
loaded).
Incorrect type of the parentheses result (a different type has been calculated in the
parentheses from that which was defined at the "open-parentheses" command, i.e. Logic
instead of Word or vice versa).
Conditional jump with incorrect Logic Accumulator (a conditional jump has been programmed,
although the Logic Accumulator does not contain a definite value).
Empty CASE-instruction.
"END-CASE" missing.
Too many table entries in CASE
A CASE table with more than 128 entries has been programmed
Blank CASE instruction
A CASE instruction has been programmed followed immediately by an ENDC label
String accumulator not loaded
A command has been programmed which gates, assigns or manipulates the already loaded
string accumulator even though the accumulator was not previously loaded.
String instruction within parentheses
A string instruction has been programmed within parentheses even though string gates
cannot be nested with parentheses
No string assignment
A new gating chain has started without assigning the gating result previously formed in the
string accumulator
2.7.3 Run-time errors

These errors only appear when the PLC-program is executed. A flashing error-message "ERROR IN
PLC-PROGRAM NR" is displayed. After switching the control off and on again, the Editor can be
accessed by using the code number. The message INPUT ERROR is then displayed and the
Editor stands at the erroneous line or, if the program run-time has been exceeded, at the jump
instruction which was last processed.
50
51
52
53
54
7-24
Excessive nesting (too many modules nested inside one another).

STACK underflow (an attempt was made to acquire data from the STACK, although it was
empty).
STACK overflow (an attempt was made to load too much data onto the STACK).
Time-out (the permissible program run-time has been exceeded by more than twice. Check
the subprogram structure).
CASE arguments are larger than the number of entries in the table.
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Program creation
3/2000
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Program creation
7-25
3 Commands
3.1
Load and Assign Commands
3.1.1 LOAD (L)
Abbreviation for the PLC-Editor:
L (LOAD)
Logic
1.2
4
Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
Byte/Word
2.0/1.6
6
Double
1.6
4
Constant
1.2
6
Logic execution with LOAD command

Operands: M, I, O, T, C
Operation:
The addressed operand is copied into the Accumulator. A load command is always used at the start
of a logic chain, in order to enable subsequent gating commands. The same function is achieved
when the gating commands A, O, XO are used at the start of a logic chain, however this should
only be used when compatibility with the TNC 355 is required.
Example:
Inputs I4 and I5 are to be gated with AND and the result assigned to output O2. Thus the logic state
of input I4 is loaded into the Accumulator to enable subsequent gating commands.
Initial state:
Input
Input
Output
Line Instruction
I4 = 1
I5 = 0
O2 = ?
Accumulator contents
Bit
31
Operand contents
. . .
7
0
... x x x x x x X x x x x x x x
L I4
... x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x
A I5
= O2
Line 1: The operand contents are loaded into the Logic Accumulator.
Line 2: The contents of the Logic Accumulator and input I5 are gated with AND.
Line 3: The gating result is assigned to output O2.
7-26
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
3/2000
Word execution with the LOAD command

Operands: B, W, D, K
Operation:
The addressed Operand (B, W, D) or a Constant (K) is copied into the Word Accumulator. In addition,
the Accumulator is filled, if necessary, according to the sign bit. In contrast to logic execution the
start of a word gating chain must always be with the L command. It is not possible to use a gating
command.
Example:
A Constant and Byte B5 are to be gated with AND and the result assigned to Byte B8.
Initial state:
Byte
Constant:
Byte
Line Instruction
B5 = 2A (hex)
54 = 36 (hex)
B8 = ?
Bit
31 . . . 15
7
0
... x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
Operand contents
7
L K+54
... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0
A B5
... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0
00101010
= B8
... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0
00100010
Line 1: The Constant is loaded into the Word Accumulator.

Line 2: The contents of the Word Accumulator and Byte B5 are gated with AND.
Line 3: The gating result is assigned to Byte B8.
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
7-27
3.1.2 LOAD NOT (LN)
LN
LN (LOAD NOT)
Logic
1.6
6
Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
Byte/Word
2.4/2.0
8
Double
2.2
6
Constant
1.8
8
Logic execution with the LOAD NOT command

Operation:
The complement of the addressed operand is loaded into the Logic Accumulator. A load command is
always used at the start of a logic chain in order to enable subsequent gating commands. The same
function is achieved when the gating commands AN, ON, XON are used at the start of a logic chain,
however this should only be used when compatibility with TNC 355 is required.
Example:
The inverted logic state of inputs I4 and I5 is to be gated with AND and the result assigned to output
O2. Thus the inverted logic state of Input I4 is loaded into the Accumulator to enable subsequent
gating commands.
Initial state:
Input
Input
Output
Line Instruction
I4 = 0
I5 = 1
O2 = ?
Bit
31
Operand contents
. . .
7
0
LN I4
A I5
= O2
Line 1: The inverted operand contents are loaded into the Logic Accumulator.
Line 2: The contents of the Logic Accumulator and Input I5 are gated with AND.
Line 3: The gating result is assigned to Output O2.
7-28
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
3/2000
Word execution with the LOAD NOT command

Operation:
The complement of the contents of the addressed Operand (B, W, D) or Constant (K) is loaded into
the Word Accumulator. In addition, the Accumulator is filled, if necessary, according to the sign bit.
In contrast to logic execution a word gating chain must always start with a load command. It is not
possible to use a gating command.
Example:
The complement of Byte B6 and Byte B5 is to be gated with AND and the result assigned to Byte
B8.
Initial state:
Byte B5 = 2A (hex)
Byte B6 = B6 (hex)
Byte B8 = ?
Line Instruction
Bit
31 . . . 15
7
0
Operand contents
7
LN B6
... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1
10110110
A B5
... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
00101010
= B8
... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
00001000
Line 1: The inverted contents of Byte B6 are loaded into the Word Accumulator.
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
7-29
3.1.3 LOAD TWO'S COMPLEMENT (L)

Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
L (LOAD MINUS)
Logic
-------
Byte/Word
2.4/2.0
8
Double
2.2
6
Constant
1.8
8
Operation:
The contents of the addressed Operand (B, W, D) or a Constant (K) are loaded into the Word
Accumulator as a two's complement. In addition, the Accumulator is filled, if necessary, according to
the sign bit. The two's complement allows negative numbers to be stored. i.e. a number loaded with
the L command appears in the Accumulator with an inverted sign.
This command may only be used with Word execution.
Example:
The contents of Byte B5 is to be negated, added to Byte B6 and the result assigned to Byte B8.
Initial state:
Byte B5 = 15 (dec)
Byte B6 = 20 (dec)
Byte B8 = ?
Line Instruction
Bit
31 . . . 15
7
0
Operand contents
7
L B5
... 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 (15)
(+15) 00001111
+ B6
... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 (+ 5)
(+20) 00010100
= B8
... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 (+ 5)
(+5) 00000101
To aid understanding of this example, the contents of the Accumulator and operands are shown as
decimal values in parentheses.
Line 1: The contents of Byte B5 are loaded into the Accumulator and the sign of the value is
inverted.
Line 2: The contents of the Word Accumulator and Byte B6 are added.
Line 3: The result is assigned to Byte B8.
7-30
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
3/2000
3.1.4 LOAD BYTE (LB) LB

Execution time [s]
Number of bytes
LB (LOAD BYTE)
30.0
18
Operation:
With the command LB, 8 Markers, Inputs, Outputs, Timers or Counters with ascending numbering
are loaded into the Word Accumulator. Each operand occupies 1 bit in the Accumulator. The
designated operand address occupies the LSB in the Accumulator, the designated address + 1 the
LSB + 1 and so on. In this way, the last affected operand occupies the MSB!
If necessary, the Accumulator is filled according to the sign bit.
3.1.5 LOAD WORD (LW)

Execution time [s]
Number of bytes
LW
LW (LOAD WORD)
57.2
18
Operation:
With the command LW, 16 Markers, Inputs, Outputs, Timers or Counters with ascending numbering
3.1.6 LOAD DOUBLEWORD (LD)

Execution time [s]
Number of bytes
LD
LD (LOAD DOUBLE WORD)

117.2
16
Operation:
With the command LD, 32 Markers, Inputs, Outputs, Timers or Counters with ascending numbering
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
7-31
Example for the commands LB, LW and LD:

A binary coded value is to be read in via inputs I3 to I10 and assigned to byte B8 for further use.
Initial state:
Input
Input
Input
Input
Line Instruction
LB I3
=
=
=
=
1
1
1
0
Input
Input
Input
Input
I7 =
I8 =
I9 =
I10 =
0
1
1
0
Bit
I3
I4
I5
I6
31 . . . 15
7
0
... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1
Operand contents
I10
01100111
7
= B8
... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1
I3
01100111
Line 1: Inputs I3 to I10 are loaded into the Word Accumulator (Bit 0 to Bit 7).
Line 2: The Accumulator contents are assigned to Byte 8.
The commands LW and LD are processed in the same way except that 16 or 32 operands are used
accordingly.
7-32
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
3/2000
3.1.7 ASSIGN (=) =

= (ASSIGN)
Logic
1.2
4
Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
Byte/Word
1.2/1.2
4
Double
1.6
4
Constant
----
Logic execution with the ASSIGN command

Operation:
ASSIGN in conjunction with the Logic-Operands (M, I, O, T, C) copies the contents of the Logic
Accumulator to the addressed operand. The = command is only used at the end of a logic chain in
order that a gating result is available. The command may be used several times in succession (see
example).
Example:
Inputs I4 and I5 are to be gated with AND and the result assigned to Outputs O2 and O5.
Initial state:
Input
Input
Output
Output
Line Instruction
I4 = 1
I5 = 0
O2 = ?
O5 = ?
Bit
31
Operand contents
. . .
7
0
L I4
A I5
= O2
= O5
Line 1:
Line 2:
Line 3:
Line 4:
3/2000
The operand contents are loaded into the Logic Accumulator.

The contents of the Logic Accumulator and input I5 are gated with AND.
The gating result is assigned to output O2.
The gating result is assigned to output O5.
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
7-33
Word execution with the ASSIGN command

Operands: B, W, D
Operation:
ASSIGN in conjunction with the Word-Operands (B, W, D) copies the contents of the Word
Accumulator to the addressed operand. The = command is only used at the end of a gating chain in
order that a gating result is available. The command can be used several times in succession (see
example).
Example:
A Constant (K) and the contents of Byte B5 should be gated with AND and the result assigned to
Byte B8 and Byte B10.
Initial state:
Byte
Constant
Byte
Byte
Line Instruction
B5 = 2A
54 = 36
B8 = ?
B10 = ?
(hex)
(hex)
Bit
31 . . . 15
7
0
Operand contents
7
L K+54
... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0
A B5
... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0
00101010
= B8
... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0
00100010
= B10
... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0
00100010
Line 1:
Line 2:
Line 3:
Line 4:
7-34
The Constant is loaded into the Word Accumulator.

The contents of the Word Accumulator and Byte B5 are gated with AND.
The gating result is assigned to Byte B8.
The gating result is assigned to Byte B10.
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
3/2000
3.1.8 ASSIGN BYTE (B=)

Execution time [s]
Number of bytes
B=
B= (ASSIGN BYTE)
26.0
14
Operation:
With the command B=, 8 bits are copied from the Word Accumulator to Markers, Inputs, Outputs,
Timers or Counters with ascending numbering. Each bit corresponds to 1 operand. The LSB in the
Accumulator is copied to the designated operand address, the LSB + 1 to the designated address +
1 and so on. The last affected operand is occupied by the MSB.
3.1.9 ASSIGN WORD (W=)

Execution time [s]
Number of bytes
W=
W= (ASSIGN WORD)
50
14
Operation:
With the command W=, 16 bits are copied from the Word Accumulator to Markers, Inputs,
Outputs, Timers or Counters with ascending numbering. Each bit corresponds to 1 operand. The
LSB in the Accumulator is copied to the designated operand address, the LSB + 1 to the designated
address + 1 and so on. The last affected operand is occupied by the MSB.
3.1.10 ASSIGN DOUBLEWORD (D=) D=

Execution time [s]
Number of bytes
D= (ASSIGN DOUBLE)
104.4
14
Operation:
With the command D=, 32 bits are copied from the Word Accumulator to Markers, Inputs, Outputs,
Timers or Counters with ascending numbering. Each bit corresponds to 1 operand. The LSB in the
Accumulator is copied to the designated operand address, the LSB + 1 to the designated address +
1 and so on. The last affected operand is occupied by the MSB.
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
7-35
Example:
A bit pattern, as defined in Word W8 , is to be assigned to Outputs O5 to O20.
Initial state:
Word W8: 36 FF
Line Instruction
Bit
(hex)
L W8
31 . . . 15
7
0
... 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Operand contents
15
W= O5
... 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
00110110 11111111
O20
87
... ...
O5
00110110 11111111
Line 1: The contents of Word W8 are loaded into the Accumulator.

Line 2: The contents of the Accumulator are assigned to outputs O5 to O20.
The Commands B= and D= are processed in the same way except that 8 or 32 bits are used
accordingly.
3.1.11 ASSIGN NOT (=N)

Abbreviation for the PLC Editor: =N (STORE NOT)
Logic processing
Operation:
An ASSIGN NOT in conjunction with a logic operand (M,I,O,T,C) copies the one's complement of the
contents of the logic accumulator to the addressed operand.
For example see ASSIGN command (=).
Word processing
Operands: B, W, D
Operation:
An ASSIGN NOT in conjunction with a word operand (B,W,D) copies the one's complement of the
contents of the word accumulator to the addressed operand.
3.1.12 ASSIGN TWO'S COMPLEMENT (= -)

Abbreviation for the PLC Editor: = - (STORE MINUS)
Operands: B, W, D
Operation:
An ASSIGN TWO'S COMPLEMENT copies the two's complement of the contents of the word
accumulator to the addressed operand.
7-36
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
3/2000
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
7-37
3.2
Set-commands
3.2.1 SET (S)
Abbreviation for the PLC Editor:
Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
S (SET)
Operand changed
2.0 to 2.40
8 (6)
Operand unchanged
1.0 to 1.4
Byte value in parentheses:

With certain preceding program sequences, the command may be shortened.
Operation:
The function of the command depends on the contents of the Logic Accumulator. If the Logic
Accumulator = 1, the addressed operand is set to 1, otherwise the operand remains unchanged. An
S-command is used at the end of a logic chain so that the gating result may influence the operand.
The command may be used several times in succession (see example).
Example:
Inputs I4 and I5 are to be gated with OR.
If the gating result is 1, output O2 and marker M500 are to be set.
Initial state:
Input
Input
Output
Marker
Line Instruction
I4
I5
O2
M500
=1
=0
=?
=?
Bit
31
Operand contents
. . .
7
0
L I4
O I5
S O2
S M500
Line 1:
Line 2:
Line 3:
Line 4:
7-38
The contents of the operand are loaded into the Accumulator.

The contents of the Logic Accumulator and Input I5 are gated with OR.
The gating result = 1: output O2 is set.
The gating result = 1: marker M500 is set.
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
3/2000
3.2.2 RESET (R) R

Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
R (RESET)
Operand changed
2.0 to 2.4
8 (6)
Operand unchanged
1.0 to 1.4

With certain preceding program sequences the command may be shortened.
Operation:
The function of the command is dependent on the contents of the Logic Accumulator. If the Logic
Accumulator = 1, the addressed operand is set to 0, otherwise the operand remains unchanged. An
R command is used at the end of a logic chain, in order that a gating result may influence the
operand. The command may be used several times in succession (see example).
Example:
If the gating result = 1, Output O2 and Marker M500 are to be reset.
Initial state:
Input
Input
Output
Marker
Line Instruction
I4
I5
O2
M500
=1
=0
=?
=?
Bit
31
Operand contents
. . .
7
0
L I4
O I5
R O2
R M500
Line 1:
Line 2:
Line 3:
Line 4:
3/2000
The operand contents are loaded into the Accumulator.

The contents of the Logic Accumulator and input I5 are gated with OR.
The gating result = 1: Output O2 is reset.
The gating result = 1: Marker 500 is reset.
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
7-39
3.2.3 SET NOT (SN)
SN
SN (SET NOT)
Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
Operand changed
2.0 to 2.4
8 (6)
Operand unchanged
1.0 to 1.4

Operation:
The function of the command is dependent upon the contents of the Logic Accumulator. If the Logic
Accumulator = 0 , then the addressed operand is set to 1, otherwise the operand remains
unchanged. An SN command is used at the end of a logic chain, in order that a gating result may
influence the operand. The command may be used several times in succession (see example).
Example:
Input I4 and Input I5 are to be gated with OR.
If the gating result = 0, Output O2 and Marker M500 are set.
Initial state:
Input
Input
Output
Marker
Line Instruction
I4
I5
O2
M500
=0
=0
=?
=?
Accumulator Contents
Bit
31
Operand Contents
. . .
7
0
L I4
O I5
SN O2
SN M500
Line 1:
Line 2:
Line 3:
Line 4:
7-40

The contents of the Logic Accumulator and Input I5 are gated with OR.
The gating result = 0: Output O2 is set.
The gating result = 0: Marker 500 is set.
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
3/2000
3.2.4 RESET NOT (RN) RN

Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
RN (RESET NOT)
Operand changed
2.0 to 2.4
8 (6)
Operand unchanged
1.0 to 1.4

Operation:
The function of the command is dependent upon the contents of the Logic Accumulator. If the Logic
Accumulator = 0, then the addressed operand is set to 0, otherwise the operand remains
unchanged. An RN command is used at the end of a logic chain, in order that a gating result may
influence the operand. The command may be used several times in succession (see example).
Example:
If the gating result = 0, Output O2 and Marker M500 are reset.
Initial state:
Input
Input
Output
Marker
Line Instruction
I4
I5
O2
M500
=0
=0
=?
=?
Bit
31
Operand contents
. . .
7
0
L I4
O I5
RN O2
RN M500
Line 1:
Line 2:
Line 3:
Line 4:
3/2000

The contents of the Logic Accumulator and input I5 are gated with OR.
The gating result = 0: Output O2 is reset.
The gating result = 0: Marker M500 is reset.
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
7-41
7-42
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
3/2000
3.3
Logic Gates
3.3.1 AND (A)
A (AND)
Logic
1.2
4
Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
Byte/Word
1.2/1.2
4
Double
1.8
4
Constant
1.6
6
Logic execution with the AND command

Operation:
This command functions in different ways according to its position in the program:
a) At the start of a logic chain the command functions as an L command, i.e. the logic state of the
operand is loaded into the Logic Accumulator. This is to ensure compatibility with the TNC 355
control which did not have the special L command. In PLC programs for the TNC 306, a logic
chain should always be started with a load command (see L, LN, L).
b) Within a logic chain the contents of the Logic Accumulator and the logic state of the operand (M,
I, O, T, C) are gated with AND. The gating result is stored in the Logic Accumulator.
Example:
Inputs I4 and I5 are to be gated with AND and the result assigned to Output O2.
Initial state:
Input
Input
Output
Line Instruction
I4
I5
O2
=1
=0
=?
Bit
31
Operand contents
. . .
7
0
... x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
L I4
A I5
= O2
Line 1: The operand contents are loaded into the Accumulator.

Line 2: The contents of the Logic Accumulator and input I5 are gated with AND.
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
7-43
Word execution with the AND Command

Operation:
The contents of the Word Accumulator and the contents of the operand (B, W, D, K) are gated with
AND. In accordance with the different sizes of operand (B = 8 bit; W = 16 bit; D = K = 32 bit), 8, 16
or 32 bits will be influenced in the Accumulator.
Thus:
Bit 0 of the Accumulator is gated with bit 0 of the operand

Bit 1 of the Accumulator is gated with bit 1 of the operand and so on.
The result of the operation is stored in the Word Accumulator.

Example:
The contents of Byte B5 and Byte B6 should be gated with AND and the result assigned to Byte B8.
Initial state:
Byte B5 = 2A
Byte B6 = 36
Byte B8 = ?
Line Instruction
(hex)
(hex)
Bit
31 . . . 15
7
0
Operand contents
15
87
L B6
... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0
00110110
A B5
... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0
00101010
= B8
... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0
00100010
Line 1: The contents of Byte B6 are loaded into the Accumulator.

7-44
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
3/2000
3.3.2 AND NOT (AN)
AN
AN (AND NOT)
Logic
2.0
8
Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
Byte/Word
2.0/2.0
8
Double
3.0
8
Constant
2.6
10
Logic execution with the AND NOT command

Operation:
a) At the start of a logic chain the command functions as an LN command, i.e. the complement of
the operand is loaded into the Logic Accumulator. This is to ensure compatibility with the
TNC 355 control which did not have the special LN command. In PLC programs for the TNC 306 a
logic chain should always be started with a load command (see L, LN, L).
b) Within a logic chain, the contents of the Logic Accumulator and the logic state of the operand (M,
I, O, T, C) are gated with AND NOT.
The gating result is stored in the Logic Accumulator.
Example:
Inputs I4 and I5 are to be gated with AND NOT and the result assigned to Output O2.
Initial state:
Input
I4
Input
I5
Output O2
Line Instruction
=1
=1
=?
Bit
31
Operand contents
. . .
7
0
L I4
AN I5
= O2

Line 2: The contents of the Logic Accumulator and input I5 are gated with AND NOT.
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
7-45
Word execution with the AND NOT command

Operation:
AND NOT. In accordance with the different sizes of operand (B = 8 bit; W = 16 bit; D = K = 32 bit),
8, 16 or 32 bits will be influenced in the Accumulator.
Thus:
Bit 0 in the Accumulator is gated with bit 0 in the operand.

Bit 1 in the Accumulator is gated with bit 1 in the operand and so on.

Example:
The contents of Word W4 and Word W6 should be gated with AND NOT and the result assigned to
Word W8.
Initial state:
Word W4 = 36 AA (hex)
Word W6 = 3C 36
(hex)
Word W8 = ?
Line Instruction
Bit
31 . . . 15
7
0
Operand contents
15
87
L W6
... 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0
00111100 00110110
AN W4
... 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
00110110 10101010
= W8
... 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0
00001000 00010100

Line 2: The contents of the Word Accumulator and Word W4 are gated with AND NOT.
Line 3: The gating result is assigned to Word W8.
7-46
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
3/2000
3.3.3 OR (O)
O (OR)
Logic
1.2
4
Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
Byte/Word
1.2/1.2
4
Double
1.8
4
Constant
1.6
6
Logic execution with the OR command

Operation:
control which did not have the special L command. In PLC programs for the TNC 306 a logic chain
should always be started with a load command (see L, LN, L).
I, O, T, C) are gated with OR. The result of the operation is stored in the Logic Accumulator.
Example:
Input I4 and Input I5 are to be gated with OR and the result assigned to Output O2.
Initial state:
Input
Input
Output
Line Instruction
I4 = 0
I5 = 1
O2 = ?
Bit
31
Operand contents
. . .
7
0
L I4
O I5
= O2

Line 2: The contents of the Logic Accumulator and input I5 are gated with OR.
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
7-47
Word execution with the OR command

Operation:
OR. In accordance with the different sizes of operand (B = 8 bit; W = 16 bit; D = K = 32 bit), 8, 16 or
32 bits will be influenced in the Accumulator.
Thus:
Bit 0 in the Accumulator is gated with bit 0 in the operand


Example:
The contents of Byte B5 and Byte B6 are to be gated with OR and the result assigned to Word W8.
Initial state:
Byte B5 = 2A (hex)
Byte B6 = 36 (hex)
Word W8 = ?
Line Instruction
Bit
31 . . . 15
7
0
Operand contents
15
87
L B6
... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0
00110110
O B5
... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0
00101010
= W8
... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0
00000000 00111110

Line 2: The contents of the Word Accumulator and Byte B5 are gated with OR.
7-48
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
3/2000
3.3.4 OR NOT (ON)

ON (OR NOT)
Logic
2.0
8
Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
Byte/Word
2.0/2.0
8
Double
3.0
8
Constant
2.6
10
Logic execution with the OR NOT command

Operation:
a) At the start of a logic chain this command functions as an LN command, i.e. the complement of
the operand is loaded into the Logic Accumulator. This is to ensure compatibility with the
TNC 355 control which did not have the special LN command. In PLC programs for the TNC 306
a logic chain should always be started with a load command (see L, LN, L).
I, O, T, C) are gated with OR NOT. The result of the operation is stored in the Logic Accumulator.
Example:
Inputs I4 and I5 are to be gated with OR NOT and the result assigned to Output O2.
Initial state:
Input
Input
Output
Line Instruction
I4
I5
O2
=0
=0
=?
Bit
31
Operand contents
. . .
7
0
L I4
ON I5
= O2

Line 2: The contents of the Logic Accumulator and input I5 are gated with OR NOT.
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
7-49
Word execution with the OR NOT command

Operation:
OR NOT. In accordance with the different sizes of operand (B = 8 bit; W = 16 bit; D = K = 32 bit), 8,
16 or 32 bits will be influenced in the Accumulator.
Thus:


Example:
The contents of Word W4 and Word W6 are to be gated with OR NOT and the result assigned to
Word W8.
Initial state:
Word W6 = 3C 36 (hex)
Word W8 = ?
Line Instruction
Bit
31 . . . 15
7
0
Operand contents
15
87
L W6
... 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0
00111100 00110110
ON W4
... 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1
00110110 10101010
= W8
... 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1
11111101 01110111

Line 2: The contents of the Word Accumulator and Word W4 are gated with OR NOT.
7-50
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
3/2000
3.3.5 EXCLUSIVE OR (XO)

XO (EXCLUSIVE OR)
Logic
1.6
6
Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
Byte/Word
1.6/1.6
6
Double
2.4
6
Constant
2.0
8
Logic execution with the EXCLUSIVE OR command

Operation:
control which did not have the special L command. In PLC programs for the TNC 306 a logic chain
should always be started with a load command (see L, LN, L).
I, O, T, C) are gated with EXCLUSIVE OR. The result of the operation is stored in the Logic
Accumulator.
Example:
Inputs I4 and I5 are to be gated with EXCLUSIVE OR and the result assigned to Output O2.
Initial state:
Input
Input
Output
Line Instruction
I4 = 1
I5 = 1
O2 = ?
Bit
31
Operand contents
. . .
7
0
L I4
XO I5
= O2

Line 2: The contents of the Logic Accumulator and input I5 are gated with EXCLUSIVE OR.
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
7-51
Word execution with the EXCLUSIVE OR command

Operation:
EXCLUSIVE OR. In accordance with the different sizes of operand (B = 8 bit; W = 16 bit;
D = K = 32 bit), 8, 16 or 32 bits will be influenced in the Accumulator.
Thus:


Example:
The contents of Byte B5 and Byte B6 are to be gated with EXCLUSIVE OR and the result assigned
to Word W8.
Initial state
Byte
Byte
Word
Line Instruction
B5 = 2A
B6 = 36
W8 = ?
(hex)
(hex)
Bit
31 . . . 15
7
0
Operand contents
15
87
L B6
... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0
00110110
XO B5
... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0
00101010
= W8
... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0
00000000 00011100

Line 2: The contents of the Word Accumulator and Byte B5 are gated with EXCLUSIVE OR.
7-52
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
3/2000
3.3.6 EXCLUSIVE OR NOT (XON)

XON (EXCLUSIVE OR NOT)

Logic
2.0
8
Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
XON
Byte/Word
2.0
8
Double
3.0
8
Constant
2.6
10
Logic execution with the EXCLUSIVE OR NOT command

Operation:
a) At the start of a logic chain this command functions as a LN command, i.e. the complement of the
control which did not have the special LN command. In PLC programs for the TNC 306 a logic
chain should always be started with a load command (see L, LN, L).
I, O, T, C) are gated with EXCLUSIVE OR NOT. The result of the operation is stored in the Logic
Accumulator.
Example:
Input I4 and Marker M500 are to be gated with EXCLUSIVE OR NOT and the result assigned to
Output O2.
Initial state:
Input
Marker
Output
Line Instruction
I4
=0
M500 = 0
O2
=?
Bit
31
Operand contents
. . .
7
0
L M500
XON I4
= O2

Line 2: The contents of the Logic Accumulator and input I4 are gated with
EXCLUSIVE OR NOT.
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
7-53
Word execution with the EXCLUSIVE OR NOT command

Operation:
EXCLUSIVE OR NOT. In accordance with the different sizes of operand (B = 8 bit; W = 16 bit; D = K
= 32 bit), 8, 16 or 32 bits will be influenced in the Accumulator.
Thus:

The result of the operation is stored in the Logic Accumulator.

Example:
The contents of Word W4 and Word W6 are to be gated with EXCLUSIVE OR NOT and the result
assigned to Word W8.
Initial state:
Word W6 = 3C 36 (hex)
Word W8 = ?
Line Instruction
Bit
31 . . . 15
7
0
Operand contents
15
87
L W6
... 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0
00111100 00110110
XON W4
... 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1
00110110 10101010
= W8
... 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1
11110101 01100011

Line 2: The contents of the Word Accumulator and Word W4 are gated with
EXCLUSIVE OR NOT.
7-54
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
3/2000
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
7-55
3.4
Arithmetic commands
3.4.1 ADDITION (+)
+ (PLUS)
Logic
-------
Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
Byte/Word
2.8/2.4
8
Double
1.8
4
Constant
1.6
6
Operation:
With arithmetic functions the operand is firstly expanded to the size of the Accumulator (32 bits).
Then the contents of the operand are added to the Word Accumulator. The result of the operation is
stored in the Word Accumulator and may be processed further.
Example:
A constant and a stored value in Word W6 are to be added. The result is then stored in Double word
D8.
Initial state:
Constant
= 100 000 (dec)
Word
W6 = 200
(dec)
Double word D8 = ?
In the interests of clarity the contents of the Accumulator and operand are shown in decimal
notation.
The 10 bit wide Accumulator allows the entry of the highest possible Accumulator contents
(2 147 483 647).
Line Instruction
x
x x x
Operand contents
x x x
x x x
L K100000
1 0 0
0 0 0
+ W6
1 0 0
2 0 0
= D8
1 0 0
2 0 0
2 0 0
1 0 0
2 0 0
Line 1: The Constant is loaded into the Accumulator.

Line 2: The contents of the Accumulator and Word W6 are added.
Line 3: The result is assigned to Double word D8.
7-56
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
3/2000
3.4.2 SUBTRACTION ()
(MINUS)
Logic
-------
Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
Byte/Word
2.8/2.4
8
Double
1.8
4
Constant
1.6
6
Operation:
Then the contents of the operand are subtracted from the contents of the Word Accumulator. The
result of the operation is stored in the Word Accumulator and may be processed further.
Example:
A stored value in Word W6 is to be subtracted from a Constant. The result is then stored in Double
word D8.
Initial state:
Constant
= 100 000 (dec)
Word
W6 = 200
(dec)
Double word D8 = ?
In the interests of clarity the contents of the Accumulator and the operand are shown in decimal
notation. The 10 bit wide Accumulator allows the entry of the highest possible Accumulator
contents (2 147 483 647).
Line Instruction
x
x x x
Operand contents
x x x
x x x
1 0 0
0 0 0
L K100000
W6
9 9
8 0 0
= D8
9 9
8 0 0
2 0 0
9 9
8 0 0

Line 2: The contents of Word W6 are subtracted from the Accumulator.
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
7-57
3.4.3 MULTIPLICATION (x)

x (MULTIPLY)
Logic
-------
Execution time [s]*

Number of bytes
Byte/Word
10.2/9.4
14
Double
--10
Constant
9.8
14
* Only a maximum processing time can be entered with the arithmetic operations X, / and MOD.
The processing time may be shorter, depending on the operands.
Operation:
Then the contents of the operand are multiplied with the contents of the Word Accumulator. The
result of the operation is stored in the Word Accumulator and may be processed further. If the result
of multiplication causes an overflow, Marker M3168 is set, otherwise it is reset.
Example:
A Constant and a value stored in Word W6 are to be multiplied. The result is then stored in Double
word D8.
Initial state
Constant
= 100
Word
W6 = 20
Double word D8 = ?
(dec)
(dec)
contents (2 147 483 647).
Line Instruction
x
x x x
Operand contents
x x x
x x x
L K100
1 0 0
x W6
0 0 0
= D8
0 0 0
2 0
2
0 0 0

Line 2: The contents of the Accumulator are multiplied by the contents of Word W6.
7-58
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
3/2000
3.4.4 DIVISION (/)
/ (DIVIDE)
Logic
-------
Execution time [s] *) **)

Number of bytes
Byte/Word
20.2/19.8
16
Double
--14
Constant
19.8
16
*) see Multiplication
**) An error in division and modulo (divisor = 0) results in a execution time of 3.8 s.
An error condition (Divisor = 0) results in an execution time of 1.0 to 1.8 s.
Operation:
With arithmetic functions the operand is firstly expanded to the size of the Accumulator (32 bits) .
Then the contents of the Word Accumulator are divided by the contents of the operand. The result
of the operation is stored in the Word Accumulator and may be processed further. If division by 0 is
attempted, the Marker M3169 is set, otherwise it is reset.
Example:
A Constant is to be divided by the value stored in Word W6 . The result is then assigned to Double
word D8.
Initial state:
Constant
= 100 (dec)
Word
W6 = 20
(dec)
Double word D8 = ?
contents (2 147 483 647).
Line Instruction
x
x x x
x x x
Operand contents
x x x
L K100
1 0 0
/ W6
2 0
= D8

Line 2: The contents of the Accumulator are divided by the contents of Word W6.
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
7-59
3.4.5 REMAINDER (MOD)

MOD
MOD (MODULO)
Logic
-------
Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
Byte/Word
20.6 to 20.2
18
Double
16
Constant
20.2
12
*) see Multiplication
**) see Division
An error condition (Divisor = 0) results in an execution time of 1.0 to 1.8 s.
Operation:
Then the REMAINDER is determined from a division of the contents of the Word Accumulator by
the contents of the operand. The REMAINDER is stored in the Word Accumulator and may be
processed further. If the MOD command is not correctly executed then the Marker M3170 is set,
otherwise it is reset.
Example:
The REMAINDER of a division of the value stored in Word W6 by a constant is to be determined.
The REMAINDER is then stored in Double word D8.
Initial state:
Word
W6 = 50
Constant
K
= 15
Double word D8 = ?
(dec)
(dec)
contents (2 147 483 647).
Line Instruction
x
x x x
x x x
Operand contents
x x x
L W6
5 0
MOD K15
5 0
= D8

Line 2: The contents of the Accumulator are divided by the constant and the integer
REMAINDER is left in the Accumulator.
Line 3: The REMAINDER is assigned to Double word D8.
7-60
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
3/2000
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
7-61
3.5
Comparisons
3.5.1 EQUAL TO (==)
==
== (EQUAL)
Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
Byte/Word/Double
1.8 to 2.4
6
Constant
2.0
8
Operation:
With this command, a direct transfer from Word to Logic processing occurs. The contents of the
Word Accumulator and the contents of the addressed operand are compared. If the Word
Accumulator and the operand are equal, the condition is true and the Logic Accumulator is set to 1.
If they are not equal the Logic Accumulator is set to 0. The comparison takes place over the number
of bits corresponding to the operand, i.e. B = 8 bit, W = 16 bit and D = K = 32 bit.
Example:
A constant is to be compared with the contents of Double word D8. The result is then assigned to
Marker M500.
Initial state:
Constant
= 16 000
Double word D8 = 15 000
The Accumulator and operand contents are shown in decimal notation. The 10 bit wide Accumulator
allows the entry of the highest possible Accumulator contents (2 147 483 647).
Line Instruction
x
x x x
Operand contents
x x x
x x x
1 6
0 0 0
L K16000
== D8
. . .
7
0
= M500
Bit
31
1 5
0 0 0
0
Line 1: The constant is loaded into the Accumulator.

Line 2: The contents of the Accumulator and the Double word D8 are compared
( Accumulator = Operand ? ).
As the condition is not fulfilled the Logic Accumulator is set to 0.
Line 3: The contents of the Logic Accumulator (The result of the comparison) are
assigned to Marker M500.
7-62
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
3/2000
3.5.2 LESS THAN (<)
<
< (LESS THAN)
Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
Byte/Word/Double
1.8 to 2.4
6
Constant
2.0
8
Operation:
Word Accumulator are compared with the contents of the addressed operand. If the Word
Accumulator is smaller than the operand, the condition is true and the Logic Accumulator is set to 1.
If the Word Accumulator is smaller or equal to the operand, the Logic Accumulator is set to 0. The
comparison takes place over the number of bits in the operand, i.e. B = 8 bit, W = 16 bit and
D = K = 32 bit.
Example:
Marker M500.
Initial state:
Constant
= 16 000
Line Instruction
x
x x x
Operand contents
x x x
x x x
1 6
0 0 0
L K16000
< D8
. . .
7
0
= M500
Bit
31
1 5
0 0 0
0
Line 1: The constant is loaded into the Accumulator

Line 2: The contents of the Accumulator and the Operand are compared
(Accumulator < Operand ?).
As the condition is not fulfilled the Logic Accumulator is set to 0.
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
7-63
3.5.3 GREATER THAN (>)

Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
>
> (GREATER THAN)
Byte/Word/Double
1.8 to 2.4
6
Constant
2.0
8
Operation:
Accumulator is greater than the operand, the condition is true and the Logic Accumulator is set to 1.
If the Word Accumulator is less than or equal to the operand, the Logic Accumulator is set to 0. The
comparison takes place over the number of bits in the operand, i.e. B = 8 bit, W = 16 bit and D = K
= 32 bit.
Example:
Marker M500.
Initial state:
Constant
= 16 000
Line Instruction
x
x x x
Operand contents
x x x
x x x
1 6
0 0 0
L K16000
> D8
. . .
7
0
= M500
Bit
31
1 5
0 0 0
1
Line 1: The constant is loaded into the Accumulator

Line 2: The contents of the Accumulator and the Operand are compared (Accumulator
> Operand ? ). As this condition is fulfilled the Logic Accumulator is set to 1.
7-64
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
3/2000
3.5.4 LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO (<=)

Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
<=
<= (LESS EQUAL)
Byte/Word/Double
1.8 to 2.4
6
Constant
1.8 to 2.0
8
Operation:
Accumulator is less than or equal to the operand, the condition is true and the Logic Accumulator is
set to 1. If the Word Accumulator is greater than the operand, the Logic Accumulator is set to 0. The
comparison takes place over the number of bits in the operand, i.e. B = 8 bit, W = 16 bit and D = K
= 32 bit.
Example:
Marker M500.
Initial state:
Constant
= 16 000
Line Instruction
x
x x x
Operand contents
x x x
x x x
1 6
0 0 0
L K16000
<= D8
. . .
7
0
= M500
Bit
31
1 5
0 0 0
0
Line 1: The constant is loaded into the Accumulator.

Line 2: The contents of the Accumulator and the Operand are compared (Accumulator <=
Operand). As this condition is not fulfilled the Logic Accumulator is set to 0.
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
7-65
3.5.5 GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO (>=)

Abbreviation for PLC Editor:
Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
>= (GREATER EQUAL)
Byte/Word/Double
1.8 to 2.4
6
Constant
1.8 to 2.0
8
Operation:
With this command, a direct transfer from Word to Logic execution occurs. The content of the Word
Accumulator is compared with the content of the addressed operand. If the Word Accumulator is
greater than or equal to the operand, the condition is true and the Logic Accumulator is set to 1. If
the Word Accumulator is smaller than the operand, the Logic Accumulator is set to 0. The
comparison takes place over the number of bits corresponding to the operand i.e. B=8 bit, W=16 bit
and D=K=32 bit.
Example:
A constant is to be compared with the content of Double word D8. The result is then assigned to
marker M500.
Initial state:
Constant
= 16 000
Accumulator and operand contents are entered here in decimal notation. The ten-position
Accumulator thus permits the maximum possible Accumulator content (2 147 483 647).
Line Instruction
Accumulator content
x
x x x
Operand content
x x x
x x x
1 6
0 0 0
L K16000
>= D8
. . .
7
0
= M500
Bit
31
1 5
0 0 0
1
Line 1: The constant is loaded into the Word Accumulator.

Line 2: The contents of the Word Accumulator and operand are compared according to the
following criteria: Word Accumulator >= Operand. As this condition is fulfilled, the Logic
Accumulator is set to 1.
Line 3: The content of the Logic Accumulator (result of the comparison) is assigned to marker
M500.
7-66
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
3/2000
3.5.6 UNEQUAL (<>)<>

Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
<> (NOT EQUAL)
Byte/Word/Double
1.8 to 2.4
6
Constant
1.8 to 2.0
8
Operation:
With this command, a direct transfer from Word to Logic execution occurs. The content of the Word
Accumulator is compared with the content of the addressed operand. If the Word Accumulator and
the operand are not equal, the condition is true and the Logic Accumulator is set to 1. If the Word
Accumulator is equal to the operand, the Logic Accumulator is set to 0. The comparison takes place
over the number of bits corresponding to the operand i.e. B=8 bit,W=16 bit and D=K=32 bit.
Example:
marker M500.
Output state
Constant
= 16 000
Accumulator and operand contents are entered here in decimal notation. The ten position
Accumulator thus permits the maximum possible Accumulator content (2 147 483 647).
Line Instruction
Accumulator content
x
x x x
Operand content
x x x
x x x
1 6
0 0 0
L K16000
<> D8
. . .
7
0
= M500
Bit
31
1 5
0 0 0
1
Line 1: The constant is loaded into the Word Accumulator.

Line 2: Contents of the Word Accumulator and operand are compared according to the following
criteria: Word Accumulator <> Operand. If this condition is fulfilled, the Logic Accumulator
is set to 1.
Line 3: The contents of the Logic Accumulator [result of the comparison] is assigned to
marker M500.
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
7-67
7-68
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
3/2000
3.6
Parentheses with logical gating
Execution time and code length are summarized respectively for the "open-parentheses" and
corresponding "close-parentheses" commands.
3.6.1 AND [ ] (A[ ])
A[ ]
A[ ] (AND [ ])
Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
Logic
1.6
6
Byte/Word/Double
2.6
6
Operands: none
3.6.2 AND NOT [ ] (AN[ ])

Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
AN[ ]
AN[ ] (AND NOT [ ])

Logic
2.0
6
Byte/Word/Double
3.2
6
Operands: none
3.6.3 OR [ ] (O[ ]) O[ ]
Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
O[ ] (OR [ ])
Logic
1.6
6
Byte/Word/Double
2.6
6
Operands: none
3.6.4 OR NOT [ ] (ON[ ])

Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
ON[ ]
ON[ ] (OR NOT [ ])

Logic
2.0
6
Byte/Word/Double
3.2
6
Operands: none
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
7-69
3.6.5 EXCLUSIVE OR [ ] (XO[ ])

Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
XO[ ]
XO[ ] (EXCL: OR [ ])
Logic
2.0
6
Byte/Word/Double
3.2
6
Operands: none
3.6.6 EXCLUSIVE OR NOT [ ] (XON[ ])

Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
XON[ ]
XON[ ] (EXCL: OR NOT [ ])

Logic
2.4
8
Byte/Word/Double
3.8
8
Operands: none
Function of Parentheses with Logic Commands:

The execution sequence in a ladder may be altered by the use of parentheses. The "openparentheses" command loads the contents of the Accumulator onto the Program Stack. If the Logic
Accumulator is addressed in the previous command, prior to a "parentheses-open" instruction, the
content of the Logic Accumulator is loaded into the Program Stack. By addressing the Word
Accumulator, the content of the Word Accumulator will be distributed.
The "close-parentheses" instruction initiates the gating of the buffered value from the Program Stack
with the Logic Accumulator and/or the Word Accumulator, depending on which Accumulator was
addressed prior to the "parentheses-open" instruction. The result is then available in the
corresponding Accumulator. The maximum nesting level is 16 parentheses.
7-70
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
3/2000
Examples for the commands AND [ ], AND NOT [ ], OR [ ], OR NOT [ ], EXCLUSIVE OR [ ],

EXCLUSIVE OR NOT [ ].
With the use of parentheses, an instruction listing may be developed according to the following logic
block-diagram.
M500
OR
M501
AND
O12
I0
OR
I1
Initial state:
Line
Marker M500 = 0Input I0 = 0

Marker M501 = 1Input I1 = 1
Instruction
bit
Output O12 = ?
31
Operand Contents
0
... x x x x x x
x x x x x x x x
L M500
... x x x x x x
0 x x x x x x x
O M501
... x x x x x x
1 x x x x x x x
A [
... x x x x x x
1 x x x x x x x
L I0
... x x x x x x
0 x x x x x x x
O I1
... x x x x x x
1 x x x x x x x
... x x x x x x
1 x x x x x x x
= O12
... x x x x x x
1 x x x x x x x
1
Program-stack:
xxxxxxxx
1 xxxxxxx
bit
15
7
0
Marker state M500 is loaded into the Logic Accumulator.
The Logic Accumulator is gated with Marker M501.
Open parentheses: the Accumulator contents are buffered on the Program Stack.
Input state I0 is loaded into the Logic Accumulator.
The Logic Accumulator is gated with Input I1.
Close parentheses: Accumulator content is gated with the content of the Program Stack,
according to the command (A[, O[, NO[ ...).
Line 7: The result of the complete logical process is assigned to Output O12.
Note:
The functional sequence is in principle the same for word execution, with the exception that the
whole Accumulator is written onto the Stack.
Line 1:
Line 2:
Line 3:
Line 4:
Line 5:
Line 6:
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
7-71
7-72
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
3/2000
3.7
Parentheses with arithmetic commands
Execution time and code length are summarized respectively for the "open-parentheses" and
corresponding "close-parentheses" commands.
3.7.1 ADDITION [ ] (+[ ])

Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
+[]
+ [ ] (PLUS [ ])
Logic
---------
Byte/Word/Double
2.6
6
Operands: none
3.7.2 SUBTRACTION [ ] ([ ]) [ ]
Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
[ ] (MINUS [ ])
Logic
---------
Byte/Word/Double
3.2
6
Operands: none
3.7.3 MULTIPLICATION [ ] (x[ ])

Execution time [s] *)

Number of bytes
X[]
x [ ] (MULTIPLY [ ])
Logic
---------
Byte/Word/Double
11.0
12
Operands: none
3.7.4 DIVISION [ ] (/[ ]) / [ ]


Number of bytes
/ [ ] (DIVIDE [ ])
Logic
---------
Byte/Word/Double
20.2
16
In the event of an error (Divisor = 0) in the Division and MODULO functions, the execution time will
be in the range 0.9 to 1.3 s.
Operands: none
*) See Multiplication
**) See Division
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
7-73
3.7.5 REMAINDER [ ] (MOD[ ])


Number of bytes
MOD [ ]
MOD [ ] (MODULO [ ])
Logic
---------
Byte/Word/Double
20.6
14
*) See Multiplication
**) See Division
In the event of an error (Divisor = 0) in the Division and MODULO functions, the execution time will
be in the range 0.9 to 1.3 s.
Operands: none
Function of Parentheses with Arithmetic Commands:
With arithmetic commands, only word execution comes into question. The execution sequence in a
ladder may be altered by the use of parentheses. The "open-parentheses" command loads the
content of the Word Accumulator onto the Program Stack. Then the Accumulator is available for the
calculation of intermediate results. The "close-parentheses" instruction initiates the gating of the
buffered value from the Program Stack with the content of the Word Accumulator. The result is
again loaded into the Accumulator. The maximum nesting level is 16 parentheses.
Example for the commands ADD [ ], SUBTRACT [ ], MULTIPLY [ ], DIVIDE [ ], DIVISION
REMAINDER [ ]
The following example demonstrates how parentheses influence the result of the operation.
Initial state:
Constant
Double word
Double word
Double word
D12
D36
D100
= 1000
= 15000
= 100
=?
(decimal)
(decimal)
(decimal)
The specification of Accumulator and operand contents is given in decimal notation. The ten-place
Accumulator thus permits the maximum possible Accumulator content of (2 147 483 647).
7-74
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
3/2000
Command sequence without parentheses:

Line Instruction
Accumulator content
x
x x x
Operand content
x x x
x x x
L D12
1 5
0 0 0
1 5
0 0 0
+ K1000
1 6
0 0 0
/ D36
1 6 0
1 0 0
= D100
1 6 0
1 0 0
Commend sequence with parentheses:

Line
Instruction
x
x x x
Operand Contents
x x x
x x x
L D12
1 5
0 0 0
+ [
1 5
0 0 0
L K1000
0 0 0
/ D36
1 5
0 1 0
= D100
1 5
0 1 0
1 5
1 0
0 0 0
1 0 0
1 5
0 1 0
1 5
0 0 0
Program-stack:
Line 1:
Line 2:
Line 3:
Line 4:
Line 5:
The content of Double word D12 is loaded into the Word Accumulator.
Open parentheses: buffer the Accumulator content in the Program Stack.
A constant is loaded into the Word Accumulator.
The content of the Word Accumulator is divided by the content of Double word D12.
Close parentheses: Accumulator content is gated, corresponding to the command (+[, -[, x[
...) with the content of the Program Stack.
Line 6: The result of the complete logical process is assigned to Double word D100.
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
7-75
3.7.6 INCREMENT (INC)

INCREMENT Operand
Abbreviation for the PLC Editor: INC
Operands: B, W, D
Operation:
The contents of the addressed operand increases by one.
INCREMENT Word Accumulator
Abbreviation for the PLC Editor: INCW
Operation:
The contents of the word accumulator increases by one.
3.7.7 DECREMENT (DEC)

DECREMENT Operand
Abbreviation for the PLC Editor: DEC
Operands: B, W, D
Operation:
The contents of the addressed operand decreases by one.
INCREMENT Word Accumulator
Abbreviation for the PLC Editor: DECW
Operation:
The contents of the word accumulator decreases by one.
7-76
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
3/2000
3.8
Parentheses with comparison commands
Execution time and code length are summarized respectively for the "open-parenthesis" and the
corresponding "close-parenthesis" commands.
3.8.1 EQUAL TO [ ] (==[ ])

Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
(== [ ]
== [ ] (EQUAL [ ])
Logic
-------
Byte/Word/Double
3.0 to 3.2
6
Operands: none
3.8.2 LESS THAN [ ] (<[ ])

Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
<[]
< [ ] (LESS THAN [ ])

Logic
-------
Byte/Word/Double
3.0 to 3.2
6
Operands: none
3.8.3 GREATER THAN [ ] (>[ ])> [ ]

Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
> [ ] (GREATER THAN [ ])

Logic
-------
Byte/Word/Double
3.0 to 3.2
6
Operands: none
3.8.4 LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO [ ] (<=[ ]) <= [ ]

Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
<= [ ] (LESS EQUAL [ ])

Logic
-------
Byte/Word/Double
3.0 to 3.2
6
Operands: none
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
7-77
3.8.5 GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TOL[ ] (>=[ ]) >= [ ]

Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
>= [ ] (GREATER EQUAL [ ])

Logic
-------
Byte/Word/Double
3.0 to 3.2
6
Operands: none
3.8.6 NOT EQUAL TO [ ] (<>[ ])

Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
<> [ ]
<> [ ] (NOT EQUAL [ ])

Logic
-------
Byte/Word/Double
3.0 to 3.2
6
Operands: none
Function of parentheses with comparison commands:
The execution sequence in a ladder may be altered by the use of parentheses. The "openparentheses" command loads the contents of the Word Accumulator onto the Program Stack. The
Accumulator is now available for the calculation of intermediate results.
The "close-parentheses" instruction initiates the gating of the buffered value from the Program Stack
with the content of the complete Word Accumulator. The result is loaded again into the
Accumulator. The maximum nesting depth is 16 parentheses.
A direct transition from Word to Logic execution takes place with comparison commands. If the
comparison condition is "true", the Logic Accumulator is set to "1". If the condition is not fulfilled, the
Logic Accumulator is set to "0".
7-78
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
3/2000
Example:
Initial state:
Constant
Double word D12= 15000
Double word D36= 10
Output
O15 = ?
= 1000
(decimal)
(decimal)
(decimal)
The Accumulator contents and operand contents are shown in decimal notation. The ten-position
Accumulator thus permits the maximum possible Accumulator content of 2 147 483 647.
The Accumulator is again represented in binary notation after program line 5, as the transition to
logic execution occurs here.
Line
Instruction
x
x x x
Operand Contents
x x x
x x x
L D12
1 5
0 0 0
>= [
1 5
0 0 0
L K1000
0 0 0
x D36
1 0
0 0 0
bit 31
. . .
1 5
0 0 0
1 0
x x x x
1 x x x x x x x
= O15
x x x x
1 x x x x x x x
1
Program-stack:
1 5
0 0 0
Line 1:
Line 2:
Line 3:
Line 4:
Line 5:
The content of Double word D12 is loaded into the Word Accumulator.
Open parentheses: buffering of the Accumulator content in the Program Stack.
Loading of a Constant into the Word Accumulator.
The content of the Word Accumulator is multiplied by the content of Double word D12.
Close parentheses: Word Accumulator content is gated, corresponding to the
command(==[, >=[, <=[ ...) with the content of the Program Stack . The transition from
Word to Logic processing occurs in this program line. The Logic Accumulator is set or
reset, depending on the result of the comparison.
Line 6: The result of the complete logical process is assigned to output O15.
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
7-79
7-80
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
3/2000
3.9
Shift Commands
3.9.1 SHIFT LEFT (<<) <<

Execution time [s]
Number of bytes
<< (SHIFT LEFT)
Byte/Word/Double
Constant
2.0 + 0.2 x n
2.0 + 0.2 x n
6
8
Operation:
Since the sign bit (MSB) is included with this command, it is grouped in with arithmetic commands.
For this reason and out of time considerations, this command should not be used for the isolation of bits.
A SHIFT LEFT instruction causes the contents of the Word Accumulator to be multiplied by two. For this
purpose, the bits in the Accumulator are simply shifted by one place to the left. The number of the shift
operations is determined via the operand. Thus the set bits, which are shifted beyond the Accumulator to
the left, are lost; the Accumulator is filled with nulls from the right-hand side. With operand contents
greater than 32, the operand value Modulo 32 is used, i.e. the integer remainder from the division (operand
value)/32.
Example:
The content of the Double word D8 is to be shifted four times to the left and then stored in D12.
Initial state:
Double word D8 = 3E 80 (hex)

Double word D12 = ?
The Accumulator content is shown here in binary notation, and the operand content in hexadecimal
notation.
Line Instruction
Accumulator content
Operand content
xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxx
L D8
00000000
00000000 00111110
10000000
<< K+1
00000000
00000000 01111101
00000000
<< K+1
00000000
00000000 11111010
00000000
<< K+1
00000000
00000001 11110100
00000000
<< K+1
00000000
00000011 11101000
00000000
= D12
00000000
00000011 11101000
00000000
Line 1:
Line 2 to 5:
Line 6:
3/2000
00
00
3E
80
00
03
E8
00
Load Double word D8 into the Accumulator.

The content of the Word Accumulator is shifted to the left by the number of bits
specified in the operand. The complete operation can also be undertaken with the
command << K+4.
The result is stored in the Double word D12.
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
7-81
3.9.2 SHIFT RIGHT (>>) >>

Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
>> (SHIFT RIGHT)
Byte/Word/Double
Constant
2.0 + 0.2 x n
2.0 + 0.2 x n
6
8
Operation:
Since the sign bit (MSB) is included with this command, it is grouped in with arithmetic commands.
For this reason and out of time considerations, this command should not be used for the isolation of bits.
A SHIFT RIGHT instruction causes the contents of the Word Accumulator to be divided by two. For this
purpose, the bits in the Accumulator are simply shifted by one place to the right. The number of the shift
operations is determined via the operand. Thus the set bits, which are shifted beyond the Accumulator to
the right, are lost; the Accumulator is filled according to the sign, from the left-hand side. With operand
contents greater than 32, the operand value Modulo 32 is used, i.e. the integer remainder from the division
(operand value)/32.
Example:
The content of the Double word D8 is to be shifted four times to the right and then stored in D12.
Initial state:
Double word D8 = 3E 80 (hex)

Double word D12 = ?
The Accumulator content is shown here in binary notation and the operand content in hexadecimal
notation.
Line Instruction
Accumulator content
Operand
content
xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxx
L D8
00000000
00000000 00111110
10000000
>> K1
00000000
00000000 00011111
01000000
>> K1
00000000
00000000 00001111
10100000
>> K1
00000000
00000000 00000111
11010000
>> K1
00000000
00000000 00000011
11101000
= D12
00000000
00000000 00000011
11101000
Line 1:
Line 2 to 5:
Line 6:
7-82
00
00
3E
80
00
00
03
E8
Load Double word D8 into the Accumulator.

The content of the Word Accumulator is shifted to the right by the number of bits
specified in the operand. The complete operation can also be undertaken with the
command >> K+4.
The result is stored in Double word D12.
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
3/2000
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
7-83
3.10
Bit commands
3.10.1 BIT SET (BS, BSX)

Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
BS
BS (BIT SET)
Byte/Word/Double
2.0 to 2.4
6
Constant
2.0
8
Operands: B, W, D, K, X
Operation:
With this command, each bit in the Accumulator can be acted on. The addressed bit is set to "1"
through the use of the BS command. The selection (addressing) of the corresponding bit is derived
from the content of the specified Operand or a Constant. In the bit-numbering, bit 0 corresponds to
the LSB and bit 31 the MSB. For operand contents larger than 32, the operand value Modulo 32 is
used, i.e. the integer remainder from the division (operand value)/32.
Example:
Load Double word D8 in the Accumulator, set the bit 0 of the Accumulator to "1" and store the result
in Double word D12.
Initial state:
Double word D8 = 3E 80
Double word D12 = ?
(hex)
Accumulator and operand contents are shown here in hexadecimal notation.

Line Instruction
Accumulator content
xx
xx
xx
xx
L D8
00
00
3E
80
BS K+0
00
00
3E
81
= D12
00
00
3E
81
Operand content
00
00
3E
80
00
00
3E
81
Line 1: Load Double word D8 into the Accumulator.

Line 2: The bit specified in the operand is set to 1.
Line 3: The result is stored in Double word D12.
7-84
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
3/2000
3.10.2 BIT RESET (BC, BCX) BC

Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
BC (BIT CLEAR)
Byte/Word/Double
2.2 to 2.6
6
Constant
2.2
8
Operation:
With this command, each bit in the Accumulator can be acted on. The addressed bit is set to "0"
through the use of the BC command. The selection (addressing) of the corresponding bit is derived
from the content of the specified Operand or a Constant. In the bit-numbering, bit 0 corresponds to
the LSB and bit 31 the MSB. For operand contents larger than 32, the operand value Modulo 32 is
used, i.e. the integer remainder from the division (operand value)/32.
Example:
Load Double word D8 in the Accumulator, set bit 0 of the Accumulator to "0" and store the result in
Double word D12.
Initial state:
Double word D8 = 3E
Double word D12 = ?
81 (hex)
Accumulator and operand contents are shown here in hexadecimal notation.

Line Instruction
Accumulator content
xx
xx
xx
xx
L D8
00
00
3E
81
BC K+0
00
00
3E
80
= D12
00
00
3E
80
Operand content
00
00
3E
81
00
00
3E
80

Line 2: The bit specified in the operand is set to "0".
Line 3: The result is stored in Double word D12.
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
7-85
3.10.3 BIT TEST (BT, BTX)

Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
BT
BT (BIT TEST)
Byte/Word/Double
2.2 to 2.8
8
Constant
2.2 to 2.4
0
Operation:
With this command, the status of each individual bit in the Accumulator may be interrogated. Direct
transition from Word to Logic execution takes place. The BIT TEST tests the status of a bit from the
Word Accumulator and then acts correspondingly on the Logic Accumulator. If the tested bit is "1",
then the Logic Accumulator is also set to "1"; if it is "0" ,it is set to "0". The program continues in logic
execution. The selection (addressing) of the corresponding bit is derived from the content of the
specified Operand or a Constant. In the bit-numbering, bit 0 corresponds to the LSB and bit 31 the
MSB. For operand contents larger than 32, the operand value Modulo 32 is used, i.e. the integer
remainder from the division (operand value)/32.
Example:
Load Double word D8 in the Accumulator, and assign the logic state of bit 0 to an Output.
Initial state:
Double word D8 = 3E 81
Output
O12 = ?
(hex)
Word Accumulator and operand contents are shown here in hexadecimal notation, the Logic
Accumulator in binary representation.
Line Instruction
Accumulator content
xx
xx
xx
xx
L D8
00
00
3E
81
BT K+0
00
00
3E
81
= O12
Operand content
00
x x x x x x 1 x x x x x x x
00
3E
81

Line 2: The bit specified in the operand is tested as to its status.
Line 3: The Logic Accumulator is assigned to Output O12.
7-86
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
3/2000
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
7-87
3.11
Stack operations
It should be noted that with Stack operations all read/write operations on the Data Stack take place
according to the LIFO principle (Last In First Out).
3.11.1 Load data onto Data Stack (PS)PS

Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
PS (PUSH)
Logic
4.2
24
Byte/Word
5.4/5.0
26
Double
5.5
22
Constant
4.2
24
Logic Execution with the PS Command

Operation:
With the PS command, data can be buffered. Thus the addressed operand is loaded onto the Data
Stack. Since the Data Stack is organized as 16 bit, a minimum width of one Word must be used in
writing to it. During this the operand value is copied into bit 7 of the current address in the Data
Stack. The free bits of the reserved memory are undefined or unused. In the event of a Stack
overflow, an error message will be issued.
Memory allocation in the Data Stack:
Bit 15
7
0
x x x x x x x x L x x x x x x x
Word Execution with the PS Command

Operation:
With the PS command, data can be buffered. Thus the addressed memory area (B, W, D, K) is
copied into the current address of the Data Stack. With Word execution, two Words are reserved as
standard on the Data Stack per PS command. The operand is extended in the Stack with sign
justification corresponding to the MSB. In the event of a stack overflow, an error message will be
issued.
Memory allocation in the Data Stack upon saving of:
Byte
Bit 31
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
15
7
0
X X X X X X X X B B B B B B B B
Word
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
W WW WW WW W W W W WW WW W
Double word
DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD
Constant
K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K
K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K
7-88
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
3/2000
3.11.2 Pull data from Data Stack (PL)

PL (PULL)
Logic
3.4
20
Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
Byte/Word
3.8
20
Double
4.2
18
Constant
-------
Logic Execution with the PL Command

Operation:
The PL command complements the PS command. Data which are saved with PUSH can be taken
from the Data Stack again with PULL. With logic execution, bit 7 is copied from the current address
of the Data Stack into the addressed operand with a PL command. If the Stack is empty, an error
message will be issued.
Logic Execution with the PL Command

Operands: B, W, D
Operation:
The PL command complements the PS command. Data which are saved with PUSH can be taken
from the Data Stack again with PULL. With Word execution, two Words are copied from the current
address of the Data Stack into the addressed memory area with a PL command. If the Stack is
empty, an error message will be issued.
3.11.3 Load logic accumulator onto Data Stack (PSL) PSL

Execution time [s]
Number of bytes
PSL (PUSH LOGICACCU)

3.0
20
Operands: none
Operation:
The Logic Accumulator can be buffered with the PSL command. For this purpose, the Logic
Accumulator is loaded onto the Data Stack. Since the Data Stack is organized as 16 bits, it must be
written to with a minimum width of one Word. During this the content of the Logic Accumulator is
copied into the current address of the Data Stack. The free bits of the reserved memory are
undefined or unused. In the event of a Stack overflow, an error message will be issued.
Memory allocation in the Data Stack:
Bit 15
7
0
x x x x x x x x L x x x x x x x
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
7-89
3.11.4 Load word accumulator onto Data Stack (PSW) PSW

Execution time [s]
Number of bytes
PSW (PUSH WORDACCU)

3.4
20
Operands: none
Operation:
The content of the Word Accumulator can be buffered with the PSW command. For this purpose,
the Word Accumulator is copied into the Data Stack. The content of the Word Accumulator (32 bit)
reserves two Words on the Data Stack. In the event of a stack overflow, an error message will be
issued.
3.11.5 Pull logic accumulator from Data Stack (PLL)

Execution time [s]
Number of bytes
PLL
PLL (PULL LOGICACCU)

2.2
16
Operands: none
Operation:
The PLL command complements the PSL command. With a PLL instruction, bit 7 from the current
address of the Data Stack is copied into the Logic Accumulator. If the stack is empty, an error
message will be issued.
3.11.6 Pull word accumulator from Data Stack (PLW)

Execution time [s]
Number of bytes
PLW (PULL WORDACCU)

2.6
16
Operands: none
Operation:
The PLW command complements the PSW command. With a PLW instruction, two Words are
copied from the Data Stack into the Word Accumulator. If the stack is empty, an error message will
be issued.
7-90
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
3/2000
Examples for the commands PS, PL, PSL, PSW, PLL, PLW
The Module 15 is to be called at a specific point in the program. After the return into the main
program, the original Accumulator content is again required for further program run.
Accumulator contents prior to the Call Module:
Line
1A 44 3E 18
49
Instruction
.
.
.
1 A
4 4
3 E
1 8
50
PSW
1 A
4 4
3 E
1 8
52
CM 15
54
PLW
1 A
4 4
3 E
1 8
55
.
.
.
Data stack:
1 A
3 E
4 4
1 8
Line 50: Save the Word Accumulator onto the Data Stack.
Line 52: Subprogram 15 is called up.
Line 54: The original Accumulator contents are transferred back from the Data Stack and
is available for further program run.
Note:
The sequence for stack operations is the same for all commands. Only the data width varies.
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
7-91
7-92
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
3/2000
3.12
Jump commands
3.12.1 Unconditional jump (JP)

Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
JP
JP (JUMP)
Jump processed
2.2
8
Jump not processed

----
Operands: jump address (LBL)

Operation:
A JP command instructs the processor to continue the program at the specified jump address
(Label). This command interrupts a logic sequence.
3.12.2 Jump if Logic Accumulator = 1 (JPT)

JPT (JUMP IF TRUE)
Jump processed
Jump not processed
Execution time [s]
3.0 to 3.4
1.0 to 1.4
Number of bytes
12 (10)
Byte information in brackets:
A shorter command is employed in certain high-priority program sequences.
Operation:
A JPT command is a conditional jump command. If the Logic Accumulator is "1", the program is
continued from the specified jump address (Label). If the Logic Accumulator is "0" the jump is not
processed. This command interrupts a logic sequence.
3.12.3 Jump if Logic Accumulator = 0 (JPF)

JPF
JPF (JUMP IF FALSE)
Jump processed
Jump not processed
Execution time [s]
3.0 to 3.4
1.0 to 1.4
Number of bytes
12 (10)
Operation:
A JPF command is a conditional jump command. If the Logic Accumulator is "0", the program is
continued from the specified jump address (Label). If the Logic Accumulator is "1", the jump is not
processed. This command interrupts a logic sequence.
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
7-93
Example for the commands JP, JPT, JPF

A certain program section is to be skipped, depending on Input 15.
Initial state:
Input I5 = 1
Line Instruction
Accumulator content
Bit
31
. . .
7
0
L I5
JPT 10
L I3
O M500
= O20
LBL 10
L M100
Line 1:
Line 2:
Line 3:
Line 4:
Line 5:
Line 6:
7-94
Operand content
Load the operand contents in the Accumulator.

Dependent on Input I5, a program jump is processed.
Skipped in this example.
Jump address: The program run is continued from here.
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
3/2000
3.12.4 Call Module (CM)

CM
CM (CALL MODULE)
Jump processed
Jump not processed
Execution time [s]
5.0
----
Number of bytes
22
Special Library Call:

Execution time [s]
Number of bytes
6.2
24
----

Operation:
A Call Module instructs the processor to leave the main program and process the Module
designated by the jump address (LBL). Modules are independent subprograms and are terminated
by the command EM. They can also be called at multiple points in the main program. This command
interrupts a logic sequence.
3.12.5 Call Module if Logic Accumulator = 1 (CMT)

CMT
CMT (CALL MODULE IF TRUE)
Jump processed
Jump not processed
Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
6.8 to 7.2
26 (24)
1.0 to 1.4

Execution time [s]
Number of bytes
7.4
28
1.4

Operation:
A CMT command is a conditional Call Module. If the Logic Accumulator is "1", the Module with the
specified jump address (Label) is processed. If the Logic Accumulator is "0", the main program
continues without a Call Module. This command interrupts a logic sequence.
3.12.6 Call Module if Logic Accumulator = 0 (CMF)

CMF (CALL MODULE IF FALSE)
Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
Jump processed
6.8 to 7.2
26 (24)
Jump not processed

1.0 to 1.4

Execution time [s]
Number of bytes
7.4
28
1.4
3/2000
CMF
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
7-95

Operation:
A CMF command is a conditional Call Module. If the Logic Accumulator is "0", the Module with the
specified jump address (Label) is processed. If the Logic Accumulator is "1", the main program
continues without a Call Module. This command interrupts a logic sequence.
Example for the commands CM, CMT, CMF
A certain Module is to be called, depending on input I5.
Initial state:
Input I5 = 0
Line Instruction
Accumulator content
Bit
31
Operand content
. . .
7
0
L I5
CMF 10
L M100
499 EM
501 L I3
502 OM 500
503 = O20
500 LBL 10
504 EM
Line 1:
Line 2:
Line 499:
Line 500:
Line 501:
Line 502:
Line 503:
Line 504:
Line 3:
Load the operand contents in the Accumulator.

Dependent on input I5, the Call Module is processed.
End Module of the main program.
Start of the Module, identified by LBL.
Instruction in the subprogram.
End Module: Effects the return to the main program.
The main program continues at this point once the Module is processed.
7-96
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
3/2000
3.12.7 End of Module, Program End (EM) EM

Execution time [s]
Number of bytes
EM (END OF MODULE)
2.0
4
Operands: none
Operation:
Every program and/or every subprogram (Module) is terminated with an EM command. An EM
command in a Module initiates the return jump to the Call Module (CM, CMT, CMF). The program is
continued with the instruction following the Call Module. The command EM is handled as program
end criterion; thus subsequent program instructions can be reached using a jump address.
3.12.8 Jump Label (LBL)
LBL
LBL (LABEL)
Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
0
0
Operands: 0 to 1023
Operation:
The jump label defines a program position as an entry point for the CM and JP commands. Jump
labels may be allocated addresses in the range 0 to 1023.
3.12.9 End of Module if Logic Accumulator = 1 (EMT)

Abbreviation for the PLC Editor: EMT (END OF MODULE IF TRUE)
Operation:
An EMT command only initiates a return jump to the Call Module (CM, CMT, CMF) when the Logic
Accumulator is "1".
3.12.10 End of Module if Logic Accumulator = 0 (EMF)

Abbreviation for the PLC Editor: EMF (END OF MODULE IF FALSE)
Operation:
An EMF command only initiates a return jump to the Call Module (CM, CMT, CMF) when the Logic
Accumulator is "0".
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
7-97
7-98
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
3/2000
3.13
CASE statement
3.13.1 Indexed call module (CASE) CASE

Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
CASE (CASE OF)

Byte
12.0
46
Word
12.0
44
4 Bytes must be added to the length for each entry in the table (CM).
Operands: B, W
Operation:
With the CASE command, a specific subprogram may be selected from a list of Call Modules (CM).
These CM commands immediately follow the CASE command and are internally numbered in an
ascending sequence from 0 to a maximum of 127. The content of the operands (B, W) addresses
the required Module.
3.13.2 End indexed call module (ENDC)

Execution time [s]

Number of bytes
ENDC
ENDC (ENDCASE)
Byte
0
0
Word
0
0
Operands: none
Operation:
The ENDC command is used in conjunction with the CASE command. It must immediately follow
the list of CM commands.
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
7-99
Structure of a CASE statement:

Internal Addressing (0 to max. 127)
CASE B 150
CM 100 <------- (0)
CM 200 <------- (1)
CM 201 <------- (2)
CM 202 <------- (3)
CM 203 <------- (4)
CM 204 <------- (5)
CM 300 <------- (6)
ENDC
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Line 1: Command + operand; The internal address of the required Module must be loaded into the
operand
Line 2: Call Module for operand contents 0
Line 9: End of the CASE statement
3.14
Commands for STRING Execution
STRING execution is only possible with TNC 406/TNC 416!

STRING execution allows the creation and manipulation of any texts via the PLC program. These
texts may be displayed in the PLC window of the screen by the use of Module 9082, and/or deleted
again with Module 9080 (refer to PLC modules). A STRING Accumulator and four STRING memories
are provided in the control for STRING execution. A maximum of 128 characters may be loaded into
this.
STRING accumulator:
128 Characters
128
STRING memory:
128 Characters
128
S0
S1
S2
S3
Example:
1
C O O L A N T
7-100
128
1
O N
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
3/2000
STRING Accumulator and STRING memory are volatile, and so are again deleted upon powering off.
For STRING execution, the new operand "S" has been introduced. The operand "S" may be used with
various arguments.
Explanation of the Operand:
The operand "S" is only used in STRING execution. The following locations may be addressed with
the various arguments:
STRING memory: Should a STRING memory be addressed, the number of the required memory
(S0-S3) must be specified after the Operand-Designation.
Immediate STRING: A STRING can also be entered directly into the PLC program. The Text
STRING, which may contain 0 37 characters, must be identified by quotation marks.
Example: S "COOLANT 1 ON"
Text from the PLC error messages and/or from the PLC dialogs: Text from the active error
message or dialog files may be read by the input of the line number.
PLC-ERROR:
PLC-DIALOG:
S#Exx
S#Dxx
xx: Number from the PLC-Error Messages (0 to 199)

xx: Number from the PLC-Dialogs (0 to 199)
The character sequence #Exx or #Dxx is entered in the Argument <arg> for the STRING-Command.
A 5 Byte long character train <SUB> E0xx or <SUB> D0xx is loaded into the Accumulator ( <SUB>
= ASCII <SUB> ). Instead of this character train, the line xx of the active error message or dialog file
is read for display on the screen.
Note:
The execution times depend on the length of the STRINGS. The specified times indicate maximum
values. For the Immediate STRINGS, the length "n" of the STRINGS must respectively be added to
the command length; should this be odd, the next larger even length must be added.
3.14.1 LOAD (L)

Execution time [s]
Number of bytes
L (LOAD)
STRING memory:
Immediate STRING:
STRING from error message or dialog files
< 80
10
18 + n
24
Operands: S <arg>
Operation:
The STRING Accumulator is loaded with this L command. The selection of the STRINGS to be
loaded, proceeds using the Argument <arg> after the operand designation.
Refer also to operand explanation.
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
7-101
3.14.2 ADD (+)

Execution time [s]
Number of bytes
STRING memory:
Immediate STRING:
< 80
10
18 + n
24
Operands: S <arg>
Operation:
With this command another STRING is added to the STRING in the STRING Accumulator. The
selection of the STRINGS, which should be added, proceeds using the Argument <arg> after the
operand designation. Refer also to operand explanation. The resultant STRING must not be longer
than 128 characters.
3.14.3 Storing a STRING (=)

Execution time [s]
Number of bytes
STRING memory
Immediate STRING
< 80
10
Operands: S <arg>
Operation:
With the = command a STRING from the STRING Accumulator is stored in a STRING memory. The
selection of the memory, into which the STRING should be copied, proceeds using the Argument
<arg> after the operand designation. Whereby only the Arguments 0 3, which address a STRING
memory (S0 S3) are valid here.
7-102
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
3/2000
3.14.4 Overwriting of a STRING (OVWR)

Execution time [s]
Number of bytes
OVWR (OVERWRITE)
STRING memory
Immediate STRING
< 80
10
Operands: S <arg>
Operation:
With the OVWR command a STRING from the STRING Accumulator is stored in a STRING memory.
This command functions in a similar manner to the = command, with the difference that the
character "STRING-End" is not transferred alongside. By this means, the beginning of a STRING
which is already in the STRING memory, can be overwritten.
The selection of the memory, into which the STRING should be copied, proceeds using the
Argument <arg> after the operand designation. Whereby only the Arguments 0 3, which address a
STRING memory (S0 S3) are valid here.
Example for storing a string:
Initial condition:
PLC ERROR MESSAGE (Line 10):HYDRAULIC OIL
128
S0
S1
S2
S3
Instructions
Line
STRING Accumulator
Instruction
1
128
L S#E10
H Y D R A U L I C
O I L
= S0
H Y D R A U L I C
O I L
Final condition:
S0
S1
S2
S3
128
H Y D R A U L I C
O I L
Line 1: Load the STRING from PLC ERROR MESSAGE line 10 into the STRING accumulator.
Line 2: The contents of the STRING accumulator is loaded into the STRING memory S0
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
7-103
3.15
Submit Programs
Submit programs are subprograms which the PLC submits to the NC for processing. This allows
tasks to be performed which are very processor-intensive, require program loops or must wait for
external results. It is assumed, however, that these programs are not bound by a particular time
frame. Depending on processor loading, each Submit program is allocated a certain computing
power, but always at least 5% of the total power. Submit programs are started from the PLC
program and can access all the same data memories (M/B/W/D) as can the main program. This can
lead to problems in certain circumstances. Such problems can be avoided if the data processed by
the PLC program are clearly separated from the data processed by the Submit program.
Up to eight Submit programs can be entered in a queue (Submit Queue). Each receives an
"Identifier", a number between 1 and 255 allocated by the NC, which is transferred into the Word
Accumulator. With this "Identifier" and the REPLY function, it can be interrogated whether or not the
program is in the queue, is being processed or is already complete. The Submit programs are
executed in the order of their placement in the queue. Should an error occur during the execution of
the Submit programs, the following Markers are set:
M3168:
M3169:
M3170:
M3171:
M3172:
Overflow during Multiplication

Division by 0
MODULO incorrectly executed
Error status for PLC module
Reserved for errors, which the PLC programmer would like to intercept
These markers are listed separately in the submit job. This means that the same markers can be
edited as those in the PLC run program without changing the original markers.
Exact times cannot be given for the commands for the management of the Submit queue. The
execution times denote maximum values.
3.15.1 Call up of the Submit Program (SUBM)

Execution time [s]
Number of bytes
SUBM (SUBMIT)
< 30
10

Operation:
The SUBM command allots an "Identifier" (1 to 255) to the subprogram, designated by the jump
address (LBL). Simultaneously, the allocated number is written to the Word Accumulator. If there
are already programs transferred into the Submit queue, the addressed program will not be
processed until the program immediately prior to it is finished. A submission to the queue may only
take place from a PLC program, a SUBM command in a Submit program is not possible.
If no location is free in the queue, or if the SUBM command is programmed in a Submit program
(nesting), a "0" will be returned to the Word Accumulator.
7-104
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
3/2000
3.15.2 Status Interrogation of a Submit Program (RPLY)

Execution time [s]
Number of bytes
RPLY (REPLY)
<5
10
Operands: B
Operation:
With the RPLY command the Status of the Submit program is interrogated with the specified
Identifier. This Identifier must already be stored in a Byte prior to the calling up of the Submit
program. With the RPLY command and the memory address specified above, which contains the
Identifier, one of the following messages about the status is transferred to the Word Accumulator:
Word Accumulator 0: Program complete/not in the queue
Word Accumulator 1: Program running
Word Accumulator 2: Program in the queue
3.15.3 Cancellation of a Submit Program (CAN)

Execution time [s]
Number of bytes
CAN (CANCEL)
< 40
10
Operands: B
Operation:
With the CAN command the Submit-Program with the specified Identifier is canceled during
execution or removed from the queue. This Identifier must already be stored in a Byte prior to the
calling up of the Submit-Program. After the cancellation of the Program, the next Submit program in
the queue will immediately be processed.
The PLC modules 908x cannot be canceled with CAN at any desired point.
In these cases, the RPLY command must be used to check whether or not the CAN command may
be used.
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
7-105
Example of the use of the SUBM command:

Dependent on Input I10 the subprogram with the Label LBL 300 is handed over to the NC for
processing. In addition, the execution of the subprogram is checked in the main program with the
RPLY command and canceled with the CAN command in conjunction with Input I11.
Line
Instruction
Program Comments:
1
2
L
JPF
I10
100
3
4
RPLY
<>
B 128
K+0
JPT
100
6
7
8
9
10
SUBM 300
=
B 128
LBL 100
L
I 11
JPF
110
11
CAN
12
XX
LBL 110
EM
;Interrogate state of Input I10

;Dependent on Input I10 skip
;Call Module
;Interrogate status of the Submit program
;Submit program already transferred to
;the NC for processing ?
;If program already transferred to the NC,
;renewed program call skipped
;Call up Submit program
;Store Identifier in Byte 128
;Jump address
;Interrogate state of Input I11
;Dependent on Input I11, skip the deletion
;of the Submit program
;Interrupt execution of the Submit program
;or remove program from the queue
;Jump address
;Continuation
;Main program
;
;End main program
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
LBL
EM
B 128
300
;Begin Submit program (is added as with Modules

;at the end of the main program)
;
;
;End Submit program
In this case, the contents of the Submit program could, for example, be a display in the PLC
window, which can be done via a fixed PLC Module.
7-106
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
3/2000
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
7-107
3.16
INDEX-Register
Under the control of the PLC programmer this register can be used for data transfer, intermediate
storage of results and for indexed addressing of operands. The register is 32 bits wide but only the
lower 16 bits are used for index addressing. The X register can be used anywhere in the program
there is no contents validity check however there is a check for address space overflow with
indexed write accesses.
Example: =
B100[X]
If the address space is overshot the error message PLC: index range incorrect flashes in the
display. Reset with END to display the error line in the PLC Editor.
Before using a command with the index-register it must be assigned a defined value. At the
beginning of each PLC cycle the index register is set to 0.
The following operands can be addressed.

Mn[X]
In[X]
On[X]
Cn[X]
Tn[X]
Operand number = n+X
Bn[X]
Wn[X]
Dn[X]

Operand number = n+2*X
Operand number = n+4*X
BTX
BCX
BSX
Contents of index register = operand

Commands for operating the Index Register:

The following commands have been introduced to permit data interchange between the Word
Accumulator and the Index Register or between the Stack and Index Register:
LX
=X
PSX
PLX
INCX
DECX
7-108
(Load Index to Accu)

(Store Accu to Index)
(Push Index Register)
(Pull Index Register)
(Increment Index Register)
(Decrement Index Register)
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
Index Register --> Word Accumulator

Word Accumulator --> Index Register
Index Register --> Stack
Stack --> Index Register
3/2000
3.17
Program Structures
A program is split up into program sequences so as to make it clearer. To do this the programmer
uses jump labels (LBL) and conditional and unconditional jumps.
When structured instructions are used, the jump labels and jump commands are created by the
Compiler. Remember that internal jump labels are generated to implement these structured
commands, so the total number of available jump labels will be reduced accordingly. Structured
instructions can be nested to up to 16 levels but there must be no "interleaving".
Right:
IFT
...
WHILEF
...
ENDW
...
ENDI
Wrong: IFT
...
WHILEF
...
END
...
ENDW
Instructions IFT, IFF, WHILET, WHILEF, ENDW, UNTILT and UNTILF require a valid gating result in
the Logic Accumulator. They terminate the gating chain. Instructions ELSE, ENDI and REPEAT
require all gating chains to be terminated first.
3.17.1 IF ... ELSE ... ENDI Structure

The IF ... ELSE ... ENDI structure permits the alternative processing of two program branches
depending on the value in the Logic Accumulator. The ELSE branch can be omitted. The following
commands are available:
IFT
IFF
ELSE
ENDI
(If Logic Accu True)

(If Logic Accu False)
(else)
(End of IF-Structure)
Following code only if Logic Accumulator=1

Following code only if Logic Accumulator=0
Following code only if IF not fulfilled
End of IF Structure
Example:
L
IFT
....
ELSE
....
ENDI
3/2000
I0
;If Logic Accu=1
;Program code for I0 = 1
;
;Program code for I0 = 0
;end of conditional processing
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
can be omitted
can be omitted
7-109
3.17.2 REPEAT ... UNTIL Structure

The REPEAT ... UNTIL structure repeats a program sequence until a condition is fulfilled.
Under no circumstances may this structure wait for an external event in the cyclical PLC
program to happen!
The following commands are available:
REPEAT
UNTILT
UNTILF
(Repeat)
(Until True)
(Until False)
Repeat program sequence from here

Repeat sequence until Logic Accumulator=1
Repeat sequence until Logic Accumulator=0
A REPEAT ... UNTIL loop is always run at least once!

Example:
=
REPEAT
.....
LX
>=
UNTILT
M100
K100
;end of previous chain

;repeat following code
;code to be executed
;load Index Register
;check Index Register
;repeat until X>=100
3.17.3 WHILE ... ENDW Structure

The WHILE ... ENDW structure repeats a program sequence if a condition is fulfilled.
Under no circumstances must this structure wait for an external event in the cyclical PLC program to
happen!
The following commands are available:
WHILET
WHILEF
ENDW
(While True)
(While False)
(End While)
Execute sequence if Logic Accumulator=1

Execute sequence if Logic Accumulator=0
End of program sequence, go back to beginning
A WHILE ... ENDW loop is only run when the WHILE condition is fulfilled at the beginning. The
execution condition must be repeated before the ENDW instruction. The condition can also be
repeated differently than before the WHILE instruction!
Example:
.....
L
WHILET
.....
L
A
ENDW
M100
M101
M102
;create condition for 1st WHILE scan

;execute following code if Logic Accumulator = 1
;code to be executed
;create condition for repeat processing
;next condition
;return to WHILE scan
Two internal jump labels are generated for the WHILE ... ENDW structure.
7-110
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Commands
3/2000
4 PLC Modules for TNC 416/406

A number of PLC modules are available for PLC functions that cannot be executed or which are very
complicated to execute with PLC commands. The error status is displayed after execution of the
module in Marker 3171.
4.1
Copy in Marker or Word Range (Module 9000/9001)
Modules 9000 (Marker) and 9001 (Byte/Word/Double) copy a block with a certain number of markers
or bytes beginning from the start address to the specified target address.
For module 9001 the length should always be defined in bytes.
Constraints:
- Copying is sequential, starting with the first memory cell. This means that the function is not
guaranteed when the source and destination blocks overlap and the source block begins at a lower
address than the destination block. In this case the overlapping part of the source block is
overwritten before copying takes place.
Possible errors:
- A block of the defined length cannot be read from the defined address in the marker or word RAM
(address is too high or block is too long).
- A block of the defined length cannot be written to the defined address in the marker or word RAM
(address is too high or block is too long).
Call:
PS
PS
PS
CM
B/W/D/K
B/W/D/K
B/W/D/K
9000
<Number 1st marker source block>

<Number 1st marker destination block>
<Length of block in markers>
Transfer in marker range
B/W/D/K
B/W/D/K
B/W/D/K
9001
<Number 1st byte source block>

<Number 1st byte destination block>
<Length of block in bytes>
Transfer in word range
or
PS
PS
PS
CM
Error status after call: M3171 =
3/2000
0: Block was transferred

1: Error conditions see above
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
7-111
4.2
Read Edges of PLC Inputs (Module 9004)
Module 9004 detects the rising or falling edges of PLC inputs and sets corresponding edge markers
or bits in the specified byte range. Changes to inputs can be detected only if a change has also
been made to the PLC memories.
Constraints:
Ensure that the edge markers or bytes are placed in a range which is still free
The edge bytes are assigned beginning with the LSB in ascending order and rising byte
address; unnecessary bits are deleted.
Possible errors:
One of the input parameters is negative.
The parameter for the edge evaluation is set greater than three.
The sum of the 1st PLC input and the number of PLC inputs is greater than the
maximum permitted PLC input number (I383).
The sum of the 1st edge marker and the number of PLC inputs is greater than the
maximum permitted marker number (M3279).
The sum of the 1st edge byte and the number of bytes required is greater than the
maximum permitted byte number.
Call:
PS
PS
PS
PS
B/W/D/K
B/W/D/K
B/W/D/K
B/W/D/K
CM
9004
Error status after call: M3171
7-112
<Number 1st PLC input>

<Number 1st edge marker or 1st edge byte>
<Number of PLC inputs>
<edge evaluation>
0: rising edge; entry in edge marker
1: falling edge; entry in edge marker
2: rising edge; entry in edge byte
3: falling edge; entry in edge byte
=0:
=1:
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Edge markers have been set

See above for error conditions
3/2000
4.3
Read in Word Range (Module 9010/9011/9012)
A byte, word or double word is read from the defined position in the word memory and returned to
the stack as an output variable. Indexed reading in the memory is possible by specifying a variable
as the name of the memory cell.
Possible errors:
- The defined address is outside the valid range (0..1023).
- Module 9011: The defined address is not a word address (not divisible by 2).
- Module 9012: The defined address is not a double word address (not divisible by 4).
Call:
PS
CM
PL
B/W/D/K
9010
B
<Number of byte to be read>

read byte
<byte read>
(Address)
B/W/D/K
9011
W
<Number of word to be read>

read word
<word read>
(Address)
B/W/D/K
9012
D
<Number of double word to be read>

read double word
<double word read>
(Address)
(Value)
or
PS
CM
PL
(Value)
or
PS
CM
PL
(Value)
Example of Module 9010

Wortspeicher
B10
STACK
35
35 (80)
B35
80
B100
80
3/2000
..
.
PS B10
CM9010
PL
.. B100
.
0: Byte/word/double word was read

1: Error condition see above
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
7-113
4.4
Write in Word Range (Module 9020/9021/9022)
The defined byte, word or double word is written to the defined position in the word memory.
Indexed reading in the memory is possible by specifying a variable as the name of the memory cell.
Possible errors:
- The defined address is outside the valid range (0..1023).
- Module 9021: The defined address is not a word address (not divisible by 2).
- Module 9022: The defined address is not a double word address (not divisible by 4).
Call:
PS
PS
CM
B/W/D/K
B/W/D/K
9020
<Number of byte to be written>

<byte to be written>
write byte
(Address)
B/W/D/K
B/W/D/K
9021
<Number of word to be written>

write word
(Address)
B/W/D/K
B/W/D/K
9022
<Number of double word to be written>

write double word
(Address)
(Value)
or
PS
PS
CM
(Value)
or
PS
PS
CM
(Value)
Example of Module 9020

Wortspeicher
B10
STACK
35
120
B35
120
B100
120
7-114
35
..
.
PS B10
PS B100
CM9020
..
.
0: Byte/word/double word was written

TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
3/2000
4.5
Read Machine Parameter (Module 9032)
Reads the value of a machine parameter that is defined by its number and index from the editable
machine parameter list.
Constraints:
- The value of the machine parameter is returned as an integer, with the decimal point being shifted
by the number of possible places after the decimal. Example MP910.0 = 100.12 mm is read as
1001200 (four places after the decimal lead to a multiplication by 10000).
- Only the value from the editable machine parameter list is read, not any value in the run-time
memory.
- Zero must be given as the index for non-indexed machine parameters.
Possible errors:
- The machine parameter specified by the MP number and index does not exist.
- The module was not called from a Submit Job.
Call:
PS
PS
CM
PL
B/W/D/K
B/W/D/K
9032
B/W/D
<MP Number>
<MP Index>
<MP value> / <Error Code>
1: No such MP number
2: No separator
3: MP value out of range
4: MP not in file
5: No MP file found
6: Call was not from SUBMIT Job
4.6
0: MP was read
Number Conversion binary to ASCII (Module 9051)
Converts a binary numerical value to an ASCII-coded decimal number in the format specified.
The specified number is converted to a decimal number and stored as a string in the specified
address.
The number is notated as a two's complement. When notated without a sign the absolute amount
of the number is converted without a sign being put before the string. With the signed notation a
sign ("+" or "-") is placed before the string in any event.
With the inch notation the numerical value is divided by 25.4 before being converted. If the number
has more decimal places than the total of specified places before and after the decimal point, then
the highest-value decimal places are omitted. With right-justified notation leading zeroes before the
decimal point are replaced by blanks, with left-justified notation they are suppressed. Trailing zeroes
after the decimal point are always converted.
Constraints:
- The decimal sign is defined by machine parameter MP7280 as a decimal comma (MP7280 = 0) or
a decimal point (MP7280 = 1).
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
7-115
Possible errors:
- The number of the target string is outside the permitted range (0..3).
- There are more than 16 decimal places in all (before and after decimal point).
- No places before the decimal point are specified.
Call:
PS
PS
K/B/W/D
K/B/W/D
<numerical value to be converted>

<display mode (bit coded)>
Bit #3: display with sign
Bit #2: display converted to INCH
Bit #1/#0: Format
00: Sign and number left-justified
01: Sign left-justified, number right-justified
10: Sign and number right-justified
11: Not permitted
PS
PS
PS
CM
K/B/W/D
K/B/W/D
K/B/W/D
9051
<Number of places after the decimal point>

<Number of places before the decimal point>
<Target address in string buffer>
4.7
0: Number was converted

Compute string length (Module 9071)
Computes the length of the string with the specified number in the string buffer.
Possible errors:
The number of the source string is outside the valid range (0..3).
The source string has been searched without an end of string (<NUL>) being found.
Call:
PS
CM
PL
K/B/W/D
9071
PL
<Number of source string>

<Length of string>
7-116
0: String length was computed

1: Error conditions see above
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
3/2000
4.8
Transmit String buffer to Log buffer (Module 9079)
Transmits the String buffer (0 to 3) to the log buffer.

Call:
PS
CM
K
9079
; string 0...3
4.9
0: String was transferred

1: String was not transferred
Delete PLC Window (Module 9080)
Deletes the screen window for the PLC status display. The background color of the window is
defined in machine parameter MP7320.2 or MP7356.0.
Constraints:
- This job cannot be aborted by a CAN command during processing of the module in a SUBMIT Job.
The module is also active when the currently selected screen shows no PLC status window (e.g.
large graphic displays) or when the screen with PLC status window is in the background.
Possible errors:
- The module has not been called from a SUBMIT Job.
Call:
CM
9080
4.10
0: Screen window was deleted

Interrogate PLC Window (Module 9081)
Interrogates the status of the screen window for the PLC status display.
The status is transferred bit-coded to the stack. Bit #0 is set when a window for PLC status display
is on the selected screen. This is not the case with a full-page graphic display, when a program is
selected or in the MOD operating mode. Bit #1 is set when the screen with the PLC status window
is in the foreground. All other bits are canceled.
Call:
CM
PL
9081
B/W/D
<Status of screen window>
Marker M3171 is not affected.
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
7-117
4.11
Display String (Module 9082)
Displays a string in the screen window for the PLC status display at the specified position and in the
specified color.
The string that is identified by the string number and which ends on the ASCII character <NUL> is
displayed in the screen window for the PLC status display on line 0 (top line) or 1 (bottom line) and
from column 0 (left margin) to 37 (right margin) in the specified color (1 to 15).
Line 0
Line 1
Column
37
References to PLC dialogs or PLC error messages are deleted. If the specified dialog or error
number is greater than the length of the corresponding file, then ASCII character `@' is displayed
instead . If the text contains a non-displayable character except the string end, then ASCII character
`^' is displayed instead.
Constraints:
- The character set that is used is determined by the size of the screen window, i.e. the current
operating mode, and cannot be modified. The color refers to one of the machine parameters
MP735x and can be seen from the following table:
Color 0:
Color 1:
Color 2:
Color 3:
Color 4:
Color 5:
Color 6:
Color 7:
Color 8:
Color 9:
Color 10:
Color 11:
Color 12:
Color 13:
Color 14:
Color 15:
Operating mode Machine

MP736x.0
MP7354.0
MP7356.0
MP7352.0
MP7353.0
MP7357.0
MP7352.1
MP7354.3
MP7350
MP7357.1
MP7354.1
MP7356.2
MP7356.1
MP7354.2
MP7352.2
MP7351
Operating mode Edit

MP736x.0
MP7355.0
MP7356.0
MP7353.0
MP7352.0
MP7358.0
MP7353.1
MP7355.3
MP7358.1
MP7355.1
MP7356.2
MP7356.1
MP7355.2
MP7356.2
MP7353.2
MP7351
If color 0 is specified, then the text appears in the same color as the last displayed character.
Because the complete line is always displayed again in the window when a string is displayed (even
when a column greater than 0 is specified), a text with the color 0 is always displayed in the color of
the numerical value to its left (e.g. color 11 when output is under 110% and color 15 when output is
over 110%) even though PLC Module 9082 only displays the numerical value again. If the color 0 is
specified for the first characters on a line however, then the color in which these characters are
displayed is defined in the MP7356.1.
If no screen window is currently shown for the PLC status display (window is not opened or in
background) the module will run through normally and the string is not displayed until the
7-118
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
3/2000
corresponding screen window is displayed again and provided the string has not been overwritten
by a repeat call of Module 9082 in the meantime. Module 9081 can be used to check whether the
display is currently active.
This job cannot be aborted by a CAN command during processing of the module in a SUBMIT Job.
Possible errors:
- A line less than 0 or greater than 1 was specified.
- A column less than 0 or greater than 37 was specified.
- The number of the string is outside the permitted range (0..3).
- No end of string was found.
- The last character(s) in the string cannot be displayed in the screen window.
The string is not displayed on screen in any of these error modes.
Call:
PS
PS
PS
PS
CM
K/B/W/D
K/B/W/D
K/B/W/D
K/B/W/D
9082
Line number (0...1)

Column number (0...37)
Color number (0...15)
String number (0...3)
3/2000
0: String displayed (when screen window for

PLC status is displayed)
1: No display, error condition see above
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
7-119
4.12
Display Bar Chart (Module 9083)
Displays a bar chart in the screen window for the PLC status display on the specified line, with the
specified lengths and in the specified colors.
A bar chart can be displayed in the left half of each line in the PLC status window. In this mode the
ASCII text only appears in the right half of every line (19 characters max.).
Line 0
Line 1
Column
150
19
The operator must specify the line, maximum length (0...150), current length (<= maximum length)
and the colors of the bars or the margin and scale graduation (0...15). If the maximum length
exceeds 150 it is limited to 150. If current length exceeds maximum length then it is limited to the
maximum length.
The chart comprises a rectangular grid with the maximum length and height of the ASCII characters.
A scale graduation is shown at the top after every 10 units. The bar starts from the left hand edge of
the grid. The unused part of the grid is filled in with the background color.
Constraints:
- The height of the bar chart varies according to the size of the screen window, i.e. the current
operating mode, and cannot be modified.
The specified color refers to one of the machine parameters MP735x and can be seen from the
following table:
Color 0:
Color 1:
Color 2:
Color 3:
Color 4:
Color 5:
Color 6:
Color 7:
Color 8:
Color 9:
Color 10:
Color 11:
Color 12:
Color 13:
Color 14:
Color 15:
7-120
Operating mode Machine

MP736x.0
MP7354.0
MP7356.0
MP7352.0
MP7353.0
MP7357.0
MP7352.1
MP7354.3
MP7350
MP7357.1
MP7354.1
MP7356.2
MP7356.1
MP7354.2
MP7352.2
MP7351
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Operating mode Edit

MP736x.0
MP7355.0
MP7356.0
MP7353.0
MP7352.0
MP7358.0
MP7353.1
MP7355.3
MP7358.1
MP7355.1
MP7356.2
MP7356.1
MP7355.2
MP7356.2
MP7353.2
MP7351
3/2000
Color 2 is the background color for the screen window and can be used for margin and scale
graduations if these are not to be displayed. If no screen window is currently shown for the PLC
status display (window is not opened or in background) the module will cycle normally and the bar
chart will not be displayed until the corresponding screen window reappears and provided the chart
is not overwritten by a repeat call of Module 9083 in the meantime. Module 9081 can be used to
check whether the display is currently active. This job cannot be aborted by a CAN command during
processing of the module in a SUBMIT Job.
Possible errors:
- A line less than 0 or greater than 1 was specified.
The bar chart is not displayed on screen in any of these error modes.
Call:
PS
PS
PS
PS
PS
CM
K/B/W/D
K/B/W/D
K/B/W/D
K/B/W/D
K/B/W/D
9083
Line number (0...1)

Color for bar (0...15)
Color for frame and scale graduation (0...15)
Current length of bar (0...150)
Maximum length of bar (0...150)
4.13
0: String displayed (when screen window for PLC status is

displayed)
1: No display, error condition see above
Reading the axis coordinates (Module 9040)
With Modules 9040 you can read the axis coordinates. The values are stored in five double words,
beginning with the given target address. Regardless of whether individual axes have been excluded
through MP10, the coordinate values are always read for all axes. The values for excluded axes
remain undefined. The coordinate value of an axis remains undefined until the reference point has
been traversed.
PS
PS
K/B/W/D
K/B/W/D
CM
3/2000
<Target address Dxxxx>

<Coordinate type>
0 = actual values
1 = nominal values
2 = actual values in the reference system
3 = servo lag
4 = distance-to-go
9040 or CM 9041
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
7-121
4.14
PLC Positioning (Module 9221)
With Module 9221 you can position a NC axis by transferring the following parameters:
Axis to be positioned
Target position
Feed rate
A simultaneous PLC positioning movement of several axes is interpolated. If you start an additional
axis while already positioning another, the first movement is aborted, and then all the programmed
axes (e.g. X, Y and Z) are positioned together.
There is no tool compensation. The tool path compensation must be ended before a PLC
positioning command. PLC positioning is not shown in the test graphics.
After the module call the corresponding markers M4120 to M4128 are set. You can abort
the PLC positioning command by resetting this marker. If you wish to change a parameter (e.g. feed
rate) of a positioning command in progress, you must first abort it with M4120 to M4128, change
the parameter, and call Module 9221 again.
The NC aborts the PLC positioning command when:
An NC STOP occurs in the Manual or Handwheel mode of operation.
An NC STOP and internal stop occur in the automatic modes of operation.
An EMERGENCY STOP occurs.
An error message occurs that results in a STOP.
Start PLC positioning command :
PS B/W/D/K
<Axis>
[0 to 8]
PS B/W/D/K
<Target position>
[0.0001mm]
PS B/W/D/K
<Feed rate>
[mm/min]
PS B/W/D/K
<Mode>
Bit 0: Target position type
=0: Absolute, referenced to the machine datum
=1: Incremental
Bit 1: Software limit switch
=0: Not active
=1: Active
CM 9221
7-122
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
3/2000
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
7-123
Data Interface Contents 8

1
1.1
Introduction
Principles of data transfer
8-3
8-4
1.1.1 Serial/parallel
8-4
1.1.2 Asynchronous data format
8-5
1.1.3 Checking data
8-7
1.1.4 Data transfer rate
8-8
1.2
Handshaking
8-9
1.2.1 Hardware handshaking
8-9
1.2.2 Software handshaking
8-9
2
2.1
TNC data interfaces

General
8-10
8-10
2.2
RS-232-C/V.24 interface
8-10
2.2.1 Hardware
8-10
2.2.2 Signal levels
8-11
2.2.3 Signal designation
8-11
2.2.4 Pin layouts
8-13
2.3
8-14
Data interface functions
2.3.1 Saving/reading files
8-14
2.3.2 Output to external devices
8-15
2.3.3 Communication between TNCs
8-15
2.4
8-16
Data transmission protocols
2.4.1 Standard transmission protocol (ME and EXT modes)
8-16
2.4.2 Data transfer with Block Check Character (FE1 mode)
8-17
2.5
8-22
Interface configuration
2.5.1 Selection of the interface
8-22
2.5.2 Freely configurable interfaces
8-22
2.6
External programming
8-26
2.7
Interfacing with other equipment
8-26
3
3.1
Standard data transmission protocol

General
8-28
8-28
3.1.1 Calling the program directory
8-28
3.1.2 Outputting a selected program
8-30
3.1.3 Outputting all programs
8-30
3.1.4 Reading in selected program
8-30
3.1.5 Reading in all programs
8-32
3.1.6 Reading in an offered program
8-33
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
8-1
4
4.1
Data transfer with BCC

General
8-34
8-34
4.1.1 Calling a program directory
8-35
8-36
8-36
4.1.4 Reading in a selected program
8-37
8-38
Data transfer with LSV2-protocol
8-39
6
6.1
Error messages
TNC error messages
8-40
8-40
6.2
Error codes of HEIDENHAIN peripheral devices
8-41
6.3
Data transmission software error messages
8-42
8-2
TNC 406/TNC 306
3/97
1 Introduction
In addition to its CPU (Central Processing Unit), a computer system (for example a PC or controller)
utilizes a wide variety of peripheral equipment such as printers, external memories (floppy disk
drives, hard disks) or other computer systems.
A data interface makes it possible for the CPU and its peripheral equipment to communicate with
each other.
Such communication requires facilities for transferring data to the peripherals. Peripheral device
control and communication via the interface is generally the responsibility of the computer system,
which therefore has to meet certain requirements.
The interfaces, which consist primarily of the physical links between the computer system and the
peripherals, need appropriate software in order to control the transfer of information between the
individual devices. The relationship between hardware and software, which fully defines an interface, is illustrated in the following diagram:
Interface
Computer
Software
Hardware
e.g. PC,
Controller
Software
Peripheral
e.g. Printer,
external memory
The "hardware" in the diagram includes all the physical components such as the circuitry, pin layout,
electrical characteristics, and so forth. The "software" includes such components as the drivers for
the output modules and is associated with both the operating software of the computer system and
the peripherals.
Due to the wide variety of computers, controllers and peripherals available today, standard
interfaces have been introduced whichideallyenable widely different types of devices to be
connected to each other.
Standard interfaces include the RS-232-C/V.24 interface which is described in detail later.
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
1 Introduction
8-3
1.1 Principles of data transfer

Since all information is conveyed as data, one first needs to become familiar with a few of the
principles of data transfer. The term data is used to describe all of the information which the
computer is capable of collecting and processing.
1.1.1 Serial/parallel
Data can be transmitted in either serial or parallel format.
Data in a computer system is coded, e.g. as bytes (8 bits), and supplied to the interface in parallel.
In the case of serial data transmission, the parallel information from the computer system has to be
converted into a serial data-flow by using a USART (Universal Synchronous/Asynchronous
Receiver/Transmitter).
The receiver accepts the serial data-flow and converts it back again into parallel information.
Sender
Transmitter
Empfnger
Receiver
Speicher Schnittstellen-Puffer
Memory
Interface buffer
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
Schnittstellen-Puffer
Interface buffer
MSB 0
1
1
0
1
0
1
LSB 1
Speicher
Memory
0 MSB
1
1
0
1
0
1
1 LSB
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
bertragungsstrecke
Transmission path
A parallel interface, on the other hand, does not need a USART, just a line driver. The computer
system and the peripheral are usually connected with a 36-pole ribbon cable. The maximum cable
length is generally about 3 metros.
8-4
TNC 406/TNC 306
1 Introduction
3/97
Empfnger
Receiver
Sender
Transmitter
Speicher Schnittstellen-Puffer
Memory
Interface buffer
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
Schnittstellen-Puffer Speicher
Memory
Interface buffer
MSB 0
1
1
0
1
0
1
LSB 1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0 MSB
1
1
0
1
0
1
1 LSB
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
bertragungsstrecke
Transmission path
One obvious advantage of serial data transmission becomes apparent when long distances have to
be covered. With parallel transmission, the cost of the cable increases with every additional bit
which has to be transmitted. In addition, the effect of interference on adjacent wires from sharp
signal edges and electrical coupling is far greater over long lines than it is with serial transmission
which is relatively slower and uses fewer wires.
The comparatively slow speed of serial data transmission is, at the same time, its greatest
drawback. Since the individual bits are sent along the line one after the other and each transfer takes
a certain amount of time, it takes far longer to send a binary word to the receiver than with parallel
transmission. As it happens, however, most peripheral devices work fairly slowly and in fact cannot
cope with high-speed data transmission. Serial data transmission is generally adequate for devices
such as external memories or mechanical printers, especially as such devices have a large internal
buffer for incoming characters.
1.1.2 Asynchronous data format

In order for communication to be established between two devices involved in data interchange,
they have to use a common language. In the field of computer engineering, this language consists
digitally coded letters, numbers and control characters.
One of the most common codes is the ASCII code (American Standard Code for Information
Interchange) which codes all characters with seven bits.
In all, it is possible to code 27 = 128 characters. According to the ASCII code, the control character
"Line Feed" or <LF> is coded with the following combination of bits:
0 0 0 1 0 1 0
MSB
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
10 dec = 0A hex
LSB
1 Introduction
8-5
The letter z is represented by the following combination of bits:

1 1 1 1 0 1 0
MSB
122 dec = 7A hex
LSB
That is, when the letter z is transmitted serially, the appropriate bits are sent one after the other. The
ASCII code is shown in full in the Appendix.
Proper data transmission requires the device concerned to interpret incoming data correctly and, in
particular, to detect the start of a transmission. For this purpose there is a synchronization process
which ensures that the receiver detects the first bit of a character correctly. With an asynchronous
data format, a start bit is sent before each data word and the word is then ended by one or two stop
bits. One feature of this data format is that, starting from a quiescent state, transmission of a data
word can begin at any time.
A quiescent state exists before switch-on and is reverted to after each transmission. Before a data
bit can be transmitted this has to be communicated to the receiver. Otherwise, if the first bit of the
data word has the same value as the quiescent state, the receiver will not notice any difference
from the quiescent state.
A so-called start bit is used for this purpose:
For the duration of a single bit, the transmitter emits a logic value which clearly differs from the
quiescent state and which gives the receiver an opportunity to prepare its polling logic to read in the
data bit. After the start bit has been sent, the data word is transmitted, bit by bit, starting with the
LSB (Least Significant Bit). After the MSB (Most Significant Bit) of the data word, a so-called parity
bit is inserted (see Section 1.1.3 "Checking data").
The parity bit is followed by one or two stop bits. These final stop bits ensure that the receiver has
enough time to recognize the transmitter again before the start of the next character.
Synchronization is repeated before each character.
Synchronization is repeated before every word and is valid for one character frame.
Character frame
Quiescent state
Quiescent state
Start 1st Bit 2nd Bit 3rd Bit 4th Bit 5th Bit 6th Bit 7th Bit Parity 1 or 2
bit
stop bits
LSB
MSB bit
Data bits
8-6
TNC 406/TNC 306
1 Introduction
3/97
1.1.3 Checking data

With an asynchronous character frame, transmission errors can be detected by using a parity-check
procedure. A parity bit is sent in addition to the data bits. The evaluation of this bit enables the
receiver to check the parity of received data.
The parity bit can take three different forms; the same form of parity must be set at both interfaces.
No parity check
Error detection is dispensed with.
Even parity
The transmitter counts bits with a value of 1. If the number is odd, the parity bit is set to 1,
otherwise it is reset to 0. The sum of the set data bits and the parity bit is therefore always even.
Upon receiving a word, the receiver counts all of the set bits, including the parity bit. If this count
yields an odd number, there is a transmission error and the data word must be repeated, or an error
message will be displayed.
Odd parity
In this case, the parity bit is so chosen by the transmitter that the total number of all the set bits is
odd. In this case, an error will be detected if the receiver observes an even number of set bits in its
evaluation.
Example:
Parity bit
1
Even parity
Letter: "z" 1111010

0 Odd parity
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
1 Introduction
8-7
1.1.4 Data transfer rate

The data transfer rate of an interface is given in baud and indicates the number of bits of data
transmitted in one second.
[ Bits]
1 baud = 1
Common baud rates are:

110, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19 200 and 38 400
The time required for transmission of one bit (tB) can be calculated from the baud rate:
"1"
"0"
t
tB
tB =
1
bits
Baud rate[
]
s
For example, a baud rate of 19,200 baud will have a bit duration of tB = 52.083 s.
The number of characters transmitted per second can be calculated from the baud rate and the
transmission format:
bits
]
Baud rate[
s
Characters per second =
Number of bits per character
Example:
With a transmission format of one start bit, seven data bits and two stop bits, and assuming a data
transfer rate of 300 baud, the number of characters transmitted per second will be
300 Baud
= 30 characters per second
10 bits
8-8
TNC 406/TNC 306
1 Introduction
3/97
1.2 Handshaking
A handshake procedure is often used in connection with interfaces. This means that two devices
are, as it were, working "hand in hand" in order to control data transfer. A distinction is drawn
between "software handshaking" and "hardware handshaking".
Either hardware or software handshaking can be chosen for communication between two units.
1.2.1 Hardware handshaking

Here, data transfer is controlled by electrical signals. Important information, such as Clear To Send,
Data Set Ready, Start Transmission and Stop Transmission, is signaled by the hardware.
For example, when a computer character is to be transmitted, the CTS (Clear To Send) signal line
(see Section 2.2 "RS-232-C/V.24 interface") is checked to see whether it is active (ON). If it is, the
character is transmitted. Otherwise the computer will delay transmission until the CTS line is
switched to active.
Hardware handshaking requires, as a minimum, two data lines TxD and RxD, the RTS control line,
the CTS signal line and a ground connection.
1.2.2 Software handshaking

With the software handshake, control of data transfer is achieved by appropriate control characters
transmitted via the data line. One such handshake is the XON/XOFF method, which is in widespread
use on the RS-232-C/V.24 interface. The meaning "XON" is assigned to an ASCII code control
character (DC1) and the meaning "XOFF" to another (DC3). Before transmitting a character, the
computer checks whether the receiving unit is transmitting the XOFF character. If it is, it delays
transmission until it receives the character XON, indicating that the connected unit is ready to
receive further characters.
Apart from the data lines (TxD, RxD), and ground, no other lines are needed for software
handshaking.
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
1 Introduction
8-9
2 TNC data interfaces

2.1 General
The TNC 306 has a data interface, the RS-232-C. The HEIDENHAIN FE 401 floppy disk unit, ME 101
magnetic tape unit and external devices with appropriate data interfaces (computers, printers,
readers, punches) can be connected via the RS-232-C interface.
Two transmission protocols are available for data transfer:
Standard data transmission protocol (ME 101 and non-HEIDENHAIN devices)
Data transfer with Block Check Character (FE 401 and PC with HEIDENHAIN data transfer
software)
2.2 RS-232-C/V.24 interface

RS-232-C is the designation of a serial interface based on the EIA standard of the same name and
can handle transmission rates up to 19 200 baud. Data transfer is executed asynchronously, with a
start bit before each character and one or two stop bits after each character. The interface is
designed for transmission distances of up to 20 metros.
The RS-232-C interface has been adopted with slight modifications and introduced into Europe as
the V.24 interface. The relevant German standard is DIN 66020.
2.2.1 Hardware
The physical connection between two RS-232-C interfaces is an asymmetrical line, i.e. the common
ground connection between transmitter and receiver is used as a return line.
Physical connections:
Sender
Transmitter
Empfnger
Receiver
TxD
RxD
RxD
TxD
bertragungsstrecke
Transmission path
8-10
TNC 406/TNC 306
3/97
2.2.2 Signal levels

The RS-232-C interface must differentiate between two different signal lines and their levels.
Data lines:
The data signals are defined as being logic "1" (MARK) over the range 3V to 15V and as logical "0"
(SPACE) over the range +3V to +15V.
Control and signal lines:
These signals are defined as being ON (High) over the range +3V to +15V and as OFF (Low) over the
range from 3V to 15V.
For all of the signals, the voltage range from 3V to +3V is not defined as a logic level and can
therefore not be evaluated.
Datensignale
Data signals
U [V]
Steuer- und Meldesignal

Control and message signal
+ 15
"0"
SPACE
HIGH
ON
"1"
MARK
LOW
OFF
+ 13
0
13
15
2.2.3 Signal designation

The RS-232-C interface distinguishes between data lines, control/signal lines and the earth
conductor.
Data lines:
TxD
RxD
3/97
Transmitted data
Received data
TNC 406/TNC 306
8-11
Control and signal lines:

DCD (Data Carrier Detect):
Received signal level. The DCD signal indicates

to the transmitter that the information received
at the receiver lies within the defined level.
The DCD signal (pin 8) is not used by the TNC,
i.e. the TNC delivers no signal from pin 8.
DTR (Data Terminal Ready):
This signal shows that the TNC is ready for service

(e.g. receiving buffer full => DTR = Low).
DSR (Data Set Ready):
Peripheral ready for service.
RTS (Request to Send):
Hardware handshake:
Output of the receiving unit
CTS (Clear to Send):
Hardware handshake:
Output of the transmitting unit
Earth conductor (cables for power supply):

Chassis GND:
Signal GND:
Housing connection
0-volt lines for all signals
Chassis GND
Transmitted data
TxD
Received data
RxD
Switch on transmission unit
RTS
Transmission readiness
CTS
Operational readiness
DSR
Received signal level
DCD
Terminal unit ready for service DTR
Signal ground
Peripheral
8-12
GND
TNC
TNC 406/TNC 306
3/97
2.2.4 Pin layouts

Note the differences between the pin layouts of the logic unit and the adapter block of the TNC. The
corresponding pin layouts are shown below (see the Chapter "Mounting and electrical installation").
V.24-Adapter-Block
RS-232-C Adapter block
Chassis GND
TXD
RXD
RTS
CTS
DSR
Signal GND
DTR
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
ws/br
WH/BN
LE
ge
gn
rs
gr
br
rt
GN
YL
GY
PK
BL
RD
bl
BN
ws/br
WH/BN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
GND Chassis
RXD
TXD
CTS
RTS
DTR
GND Signal
DSR
Note: The LE and adapter block are connected with crossed lines.
A 9-pin plug on a PC should have the following pin layout:
Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Allocation
Do not use
RxD
TxD
DTR
GND
DSR
RTS
CTS
Do not use
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
8-13
2.3 Data interface functions

The data interfaces on the TNC can be used to save data and files and read them back in again, to
output programs to external devices (e.g. printers), to read in programs and simultaneously execute
them and to carry out data transfer (communication) between TNCs.
2.3.1 Saving/reading files

The following table lists all the files which can be saved to external memory units (floppy disk unit,
magnetic tape unit and PC) and read back in from them.
File type
HEIDENHAIN-dialog NC program
Datum shift table
Eroding table
Machine parameters
Correction table
PLC program
Identification code
H
O
E
M
S
P
After the appropriate code numbers for the PLC, the machine parameters and the correction table
have been entered, these files can be written to or read from via the data interfaces.
Data transfer is initiated with the EXT key as usual.
Current values of Q parameters, PLC error messages and dialogs can also be outputted via the two
interfaces (NC program: FN 15: PRINT).
The magnetic tape unit has only limited suitability as an external data medium, because only one file
can be stored per cassette side. However, this file can contain more than one program.
The floppy disk unit can store up to 256 programs (approximately 25,000 program blocks). This
represents a storage capacity of approximately 790 kilobytes.
When transmitting and receiving a file, the appropriate code file is outputted and read in again
complete with a Block Check Character (BCC).
If the file is stored in an external computer using HEIDENHAIN's TNC.EXE data transfer software, a
new file extension is generated. This extension consists of the identification code and the letters
NC.
Example:
If an eroding table is stored, it is given the file extension *.ENC.
8-14
TNC 406/TNC 306
3/97
2.3.2 Output to external devices

Any external device, e.g. computers, printers, readers and punches, can be addressed via the
interface. For this purpose the TNC has a freely configurable interface mode (EXT) which, within
certain limits, permits any setting of the data format and control characters of the required data
transmission protocol.
The setting selected at the external devices must of course match the TNC. On printers, this is done
by setting the DIP-switches or adjusting the transmission parameters.
Data transfer to a computer requires appropriate data transfer software. HEIDENHAIN offer their
TNC.EXE data transfer software for this purpose, which permits transfer between TNC and a PC
using a fixed transmission protocol.
2.3.3 Communication between TNCs

For certain applications, it is necessary for TNCs to be able to exchange data or to communicate
with each other. The RS-232-C interface enables this type of communication.
The simplest form of data exchange is the transfer of files (e.g. NC programs) from one TNC to
another. To do this, the same transmission format (ME mode) must be set at both control units and
transfer started. Be sure that the control receiving the data is started first.
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
8-15
2.4 Data transmission protocols

The TNC enables data and files to be transferred using two different protocols (which can be
selected via the interface setup).
These transmission protocols can be selected in three different operating modes, as follows:
FE1
EXT
Transmission with BCC (Block Check Character) and with

fixed control characters (7 data bits, 1 start bit, 1 stop bit)
Freely configurable baud rate
Standard transmission protocol: data format and control
characters can be freely set via machine
parameters. Freely configurable baud rate.
The following applies to data transmission protocols:

If a file being read in is already present in the TNC memory, the following message is displayed:
ERASE=ENT / OVERREAD=NOENT
In this case the TNC aborts transmission with the appropriate handshake and does not continue
transfer until after acknowledgment.
In the event of an attempt to erase write-protected files, the error message PROTECTED PGM
and the dialog OVERREAD=ENT/END=NOENT are displayed. In this case, either the next file can
be read in or transfer can be aborted.
If a file has been read out and the data transfer menu has been terminated with the END key,
the TNC outputs characters <ETX> and <EOT> (or ASCII characters according to setting in
MP5010 and MP5011 in operating modes EXT).
If a transmission is terminated with the END-key, the error message "PROGRAM INCOMPLETE" is
issued.
2.4.1 Standard transmission protocol (EXT mode)

With this protocol, the TNC first transmits the character <NUL> 50 times. This is followed by the
individual program blocks, which each end with the characters <CR> and <LF>.
These blocks are transmitted in order, but they are not error checked. If the receiver's data buffer is
full, the receiver has two alternatives for stopping and recommencing transmission:
Software handshake - Stopping transfer by sending character <DC3> (XOFF), continuing transfer
by sending character <DC1> (XON).
Hardware handshake - By putting appropriate voltage level on the RTS and CTS control and signal
lines of the RS-232-C/V.24 interface.
8-16
TNC 406/TNC 306
3/97
Example: protocol for dialog program:

<NUL><NUL><NUL><NUL><NUL><NUL><NUL>.. 50 times
0 BEGIN PGM 1 MM<CR><LF>
1st program block
1 TOOL DEF 1 L+0 R+3<CR><LF>
2nd program block
.
.
.
26 END PGM 1 MM <CR><LF>
Program end
<ETX><EOT>
Close data transfer menu
Example of software handshake:
Peripheral unit
Transmission path
TNC
.
.
.
12 Z+2 F400 <CR> <LF>
Receiving buffer full

<DC3>
Receiving buffer again

ready to accept data
<DC1>
13 Z10 M36 <CR> <LF>

.
.
.
Hardware handshake (see Section "Freely configurable interfaces").
2.4.2 Data transfer with Block Check Character (FE1 mode)

This protocol, specific to HEIDENHAIN, works with different control characters and with additional
data checking when transmitting.
When a file is transferred, the first block, called the header, is sent. It consists of the following
characters:
<SOH>"H" "Name" "M" <ETB>BCC<DC1>
<SOH> (Start of Header): This character indicates the start of the header.
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
8-17
The header contains 'H' - the identification code for the program (see Section "Saving/reading files"),
'Name' - the program name and 'M' - the transmission mode(E=input/A=output).
This header ends with character <ETB>, ending a data transfer block.
The subsequent BCC (Block Check Character) provides additional confidence.
In addition to the parity check of the individual characters (see Section "Checking data"), a parity
check is carried out on a complete transmitted block. The BCC always supplements the individual
bits of the transmitted characters of a data transfer block to give even parity.
Example for formation of BCC:
Character
SOH
H
1
5
E
ETB
BCC
Bit 6
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
Bit 5
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
Bit 4
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
Bit 3
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
Bit 2
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
Bit 1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
Bit 0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
In this example, the HEIDENHAIN dialog (identification code 'H') has been used to write program
'15' which is read in via the data interface ('E'). A parity bit is also formed for the BCC (with even
parity, the parity bit of the BCC in this example is given a value '1').
The character <DC1> is sent after the BCC. This character (XON) is needed for some devices to
request an explicit reply from them in order to start transfer again.
At the end of each block, a check is conducted to see whether the block has been correctly
transferred. To do this, the receiver calculates a BCC from the block received and compares it with
the received BCC. If the received and calculated BCCs are identical, the receiver sends character
<ACK> (= positive ACKnowledgment), meaning the data block has been received without error.
If the received and calculated BCCs are not identical, the receiver sends the character <NAK>
(= Not AcKnowledged), meaning the data block has been incorrectly received and the same block
must be sent again. This process is repeated up to three times. If transfer is still unsuccessful, the
error message TRANSFERRED DATA INCORRECT N is displayed and transfer is aborted.
If, however, this header is acknowledged with <ACK>, the first data block can be transmitted:
<STX>0 BEGIN PGM 1 MM <ETB> BCC <DC1>.
The start of a data block is always indicated by control character <STX>. The other control
characters in this block are identical to the control characters of the header.
If the block is acknowledged with <ACK>, the next program block is sent. In the event of a <NAK>,
the same block must be repeated, and so on...
If the last program block has been sent successfully (acknowledged with <ACK>), transmission
ends with characters <ETX> (End of Text) and <EOT> (End of Transmission).
8-18
TNC 406/TNC 306
3/97
Table of control characters:

Character
SOH
Meaning
Start of Header
Description
Indicates start of transfer of the data
header. The header is a sequence of
characters containing the program
number and information concerning
the type of program and
transmission mode.
STX
Start of Text
Indicates start of program block.
ETB
End of Transmission Block
ETB ends a data transfer block. The

character following ETB is used for
data checking (BCC).
DC1
Start data transfer (XON)
DC1 starts data transfer after a stop.
DC3
Stop data transfer (XOFF)
DC3 stops data transfer.
ETX
End of Text
ETX is sent at the end of the

program.
EOT
End of Transmission
EOT ends data transmission and

produces the quiescent state. This
character is sent by the TNC at the
end of program input, and as an error
to external devices
ACK
ACKnowledged
ACK is sent by receiver when a data

block has transferred without error.
NAK
Not AcKnowledged
NAK is sent by the receiver when a

data block has transferred incorrectly. The transmitter must then
transmit the data block again.
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
8-19
Example:
An erosion table with the name "8455" is to be sent to a peripheral unit (e.g. FE 401).
FE 401
Transmission path
TNC
<SOH> <E> 8455 <A> <ETB> BCC <DC1>
<ACK>
.
.
.
<STX> "1st line" <ETB> BCC <DC1>
<ACK>
.
.
.
.
.
.
<STX> "10th line" <ETB> BCC <DC1>

<NAK>

<ACK>

.
.
.
<ACK>
.
.
.
.
.
.
<STX> "last line" <ETB> BCC <DC1>
<ACK>
<ETX> <EOT>
8-20
TNC 406/TNC 306
3/97
The software handshake can easily be achieved when transmitting with a BCC. At first the receiver
sends neither a positive (<ACK>) nor a negative acknowledgment (<NAK>), and the transmitter
waits until it receives one of these characters. When the buffer in the receiver is again capable of
accepting data, it again sends an <ACK> and the transmitter continues its data transmission.
It is also possible, however, to conduct the software handshake with control characters <DC1> and
<DC3>.
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
8-21
2.5 Interface configuration

2.5.1 Selection of the interface
The following settings can be selected with the appropriate data format and the data transmission
protocol.
In addition to the freely configurable operating mode EXT (standard data transfer protocol), there is a
fixed mode FE1. The FE1 mode must be set if the HEIDENHAIN floppy disk unit or an external
computer using the TNC.EXE transmission software is connected. In this mode, the transmission
protocol with Block Check Character is rigidly defined.
2.5.2 Freely configurable interfaces

The operating mode EXT (standard transmission protocol) is freely configurable via machine
parameters.
The data format and the type of handshake are set in the MP 5020.
Data bits
Bit 0 can be set to determine whether transmission is to be with 7 or 8 data bits. Transmission with
7 bits is normally used, but for printer interfacing 8 bits are needed.
8-22
TNC 406/TNC 306
3/97
Hardware handshaking
Bit 2 can be set to determine whether the TNC stops transfer from an external device by using RTS.
Data output TNC -> EXT

When the receiving buffer is full, the external device resets the RTS signal. The TNC thereby
detects that the peripheral unit receiving buffer is full because of the CTS input.
TNC
RTS
CTS
TxD
RxD
EXT
+
CTS
Receiving
buffer full
Data
+
RTS
Data
Start
Data
+
RxD
+
TxD
+ Positive voltage level

Negative voltage level
Data input EXT -> TNC

When the receiving buffer is full, the TNC removes the RTS signal, which is detected by the
peripheral device at its CTS input.
TNC
EXT
Receiving
buffer full
RTS
CTS
+
RTS
TxD
+
RxD
RxD
+
TxD
Start
+
CTS
+ Positive voltage level

negative voltage level
The DTR and DSR signals from the TNC indicate the operational status of the TNC and peripheral
(these cannot be set via the machine parameters).
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
8-23
DTR: Polled by peripheral; it is logical "1" if TNC is ready for service.

DSR: Polled by TNC.
LOW level => ext. data input/output not ready.
HIGH level => ext. data input/output ready.
Software handshaking
Bit 3 determines whether the TNC stops transfer from an external device with control character
<DC3>. Transfer is resumed with character <DC1>.
If transfer is stopped with character <DC3>, up to 12 characters can still be stored. The remaining
incoming characters are lost. Software handshake is normally recommended when interfaces are
connected to an external device.
The following pin layout is possible for the external device:
Peripheriegert
Peripheral unit
GND
TXD
RXD
RTS
CTS
DSR
GND
DTR
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
V.24-Adapter-Block
RS-232-C Adapter block
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
LE
ws/br
WH/BN
ge
gn
rs
gr
br
rt
GN
Yl
GY
PK
BL
RD
bl
BN
ws/br
WH/BN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
GND Chassis
RXD
TXD
CTS
RTS
DTR
GND Signal ground
DSR
A HEIDENHAIN standard cable, ref. 242 869, is recommended.
If the TNC is transmitting data, it reacts both to hardware and software handshakes, regardless of
the setting in MP5020.
If the TNC is receiving data, and no transmission stop is set in the MP5020, the TNC stops the
peripheral unit with the software handshake.
If transmission stop by both RTS and by DC3 is active, the TNC stops transfer with the hardware
handshake.
Character parity
Bits 4 and 5 determine the type of parity check (see Section "Checking data").
8-24
TNC 406/TNC 306
3/97
Stop bits
Bit 7 determines the number of stop bits sent at the end of a character.
MP 5020
EXT mode: Data format and transmission stop

Bit 07 or 8 data bits
+0 = 7 data bits
+1 = 8 data bits
Bit 1No function
Bit 2Transmission stop by RTS
+0 = not active
+4 = active
Bit 3Transmission stop by DC3
+0 = not active
+8 = active
Bit 4Character parity
+0 = even
+16 = uneven
Bit 5Character parity
+0 = not desired
+ 32 = desired
Bit 6No function
Bit 7Stop bits
+0 =
2 stop bits
+128 = 1 stop bit
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
8-25
For the control characters (<ETX>, <EOT>), any other ASCII characters can be chosen using the
following machine parameters (for table of ASCII characters, see Appendix). If these machine
parameters are set to 0 (zero), no character will be sent.
MP5010
MP5011
EXT mode: ASCII character for end of data (EXT)

EXT mode: ASCII character for end of transmission (EOT)
When selecting ASCII characters, it must be ensured that the control characters are not arbitrarily
mixed and that no numbers or letters which occur in the transferred text are used.
2.6 External programming

In the case of external programming and subsequent transfer, attention should be paid to the
following:
<CR> <LF> or <LF> must be programmed at the start of the program and after each program
block
<CR> <LF> and the end-of-text control character must be programmed after the end-of-program
block.
Blank characters between the individual words can be omitted in NC programs (HEIDENHAIN
dialog).
Comments are separated from the NC block by a semicolon
Comments are stored only in PLC programs
Comments located before the program are not stored
Block numbers do not need to be programmed. They are generated automatically by the TNC
(only for dialog programming and MP5990 = 1)
2.7 Interfacing with other equipment

Any other external devices can be interfaced with the TNC by using configurable operating modes
EXT. For this purpose, machine parameters MP5010 to MP5020 permit relatively free adjustment of
the data format and the control characters.
Consider the example of interfacing EXT with a printer using a serial interface (Example: NEC P7
PLUS).
The following settings are made at the printer (see the operating manual of the printer concerned):
Serial interface
8 data bits
Even character parity
XON/XOFF protocol (software handshake)
9600 baud
8-26
TNC 406/TNC 306
3/97
The following settings (EXT) are made at the TNC:

MP5020 = 169
8 data bits (+1)

Transfer stop by RTS not active (+0)
Transfer stop by DC3 active (+8)
Character parity even (+0)
Character parity desired (+32)
1 stop bit (+128)
In the TNC, the EXT operating mode must still be assigned to the RS-232 interface and the baud rate
set to 9600 (see the TNC 306 User's Manual).
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
8-27
3 Standard data transmission protocol

3.1 General
This protocol can be set in operating mode EXT via the machine parameters.
In the following, the control characters which are sent and received with this protocol are listed for
the various transmission alternatives. When outputting a file, the <NUL> character is sent 50 times
at the start of the file. When reading in, however, the control ignores this character. Therefore it
does not matter how often the peripheral device sends the <NUL> character before the file.
In this protocol, if an error is to be signaled to the TNC, the following sequence of instructions must
be sent:
<ESC> <1> 'ERROR NUMBER'
Listed below are the transmission protocols for the various alternatives for data output and input.
EXT mode is set:
Control character for "End of Text" - <ETX>
Control character for "End of Transmission" - <EOT>
Software handshake
3.1.1 Calling the program directory

Using the menu item "Program Directory", the list of file names can be requested from an external
memory and displayed in the TNC.
If the external directory is requested, the TNC sends control character <DC1>.
If the request is immediately interrupted with the END key, the TNC sends characters <ETX><EOT>
and no directory is read in.
If the request is not interrupted, the peripheral unit sends all of the external programs in order. Their
names are then shown in the TNC.
8-28
TNC 406/TNC 306
3/97
Peripheral unit
Transmission path
TNC
<DC1>
1st file
<NUL> <NUL> <NUL>

1st line of file <CR> <LF>
.
.
.
Last line of file <CR> <LF>
<DC1>
<NUL> <NUL> <NUL>

2nd file
.
.
.
.
.
.
<DC1>
<NUL> <NUL> <NUL>

Last
file
1st line of file <CR><LF>

.
.
.
<ETX>
<EOT>
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
8-29

The TNC outputs all of the program lines in order. The peripheral unit can stop transmission with
character <DC3> and start it again with character <DC1>.
Peripheral unit
Transmission path
.
.
.
TNC
<NUL> <NUL> <NUL>. . .
.
.
.
5th line of file <CR> <LF>
<DC3>
<DC1>
6th line of file <CR> <LF>

.
.
.

The procedure is similar to the protocol described in Section 3.1.2 "Outputting a selected program".
The TNC arranges all the programs in order and transmits them. No control character is sent
between the individual files.
3.1.4 Reading in selected program

If a file is read in from a peripheral unit (e.g. a PC), the corresponding name must be indicated in the
TNC and the TNC be started first, i.e. the TNC outputs the character <DC1>. Transmission of the file
concerned is then initiated at the peripheral unit.
When the entire file has been transferred, the TNC sends character <EOT>.
8-30
TNC 406/TNC 306
3/97
Peripheral unit
Transmission path
TNC
<DC1>
<NUL> <NUL> <NUL>

.
.
.
.
.
.
Last line of file <CR> <LF> <ETX>
<EOT>
In this transfer method, the TNC can stop transmission with <DC3> and continue it with <DC1>.
If the file name in the first line of the file and the name indicated in the TNC are not identical, the
TNC reads each block in and searches for the file name concerned.
If the END PGM-block has been read in, and the selected name is not known, the TNC remains
static without an error message, and transfer must be terminated with the END key.
Example: Reading in program 100.H.
Peripheral unit
Transmission path
TNC
100.H "START"
<DC1>
<NUL> <NUL>
1st line PGM100 <CR> <LF>
.
.
.
.
.
.
Last line PGM 100 <CR> <LF> <ETX>
<EOT>
In this case, if the last PGM block ends without the <ETX> character then transfer is terminated
without an error message but the data is not stored. This means that the program was stored on
the data medium with an incorrect program name (PGM NAME file name).
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
8-31

If both the peripheral unit and the TNC have been started, the following protocol is followed:
Peripheral unit
Transmission path
TNC
<DC1>
<NUL> <NUL>
Last line of file 1. <CR> <LF>
..
1st line of file 1 <CR> <LF>
.
.
.
<DC1>
<NUL> <NUL>
..
.
Last line of file 2 <CR> <LF>
.
.
.
<DC1>
<NUL> <NUL>
1st line of last file <CR> <LF>
..
.
Last line of last file <CR> <LF> <ETX>
.
.
.
<DC1>
<ETX>
<EOT>
If several programs are gathered together in a file which ends with <ETX> then these programs are
read in without being requested by <DC1>.
Data read-in does not stop until a program has ended with <ETX>.
8-32
TNC 406/TNC 306
3/97
3.1.6 Reading in an offered program

After commencement of transfer, the peripheral unit sends the first program module until the
receiving buffer of the TNC is full. The TNC then stops transmission with <DC3> and awaits
acknowledgment from the user. If the file is to be transferred, the TNC sends <DC1> and the
program is read in and stored. Otherwise the file is only read in and not stored. If hardware
handshaking is set, transfer by using the RTS signal is stopped and restarted.
Peripheral unit
Transmission path
TNC
<DC1>
<NUL> <NUL>
<DC3> Polling:
<DC1> Read in
Yes / No
2nd line of file 1 <CR> <LF>
.
.
.
Last line of file 1 <CR> <LF> <ETX>
.
.
.
.
.
.
<NUL>
.
.
.
Last line of last file <CR> <LF> <ETX>
<DC1>
.
.
.
<DC1>
<ETX>
<EOT>
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
8-33
4 Data transfer with BCC

4.1 General
HEIDENHAIN TNCs, as well as allowing data transfer with the standard data transmission protocol,
also allow data transfer with a Block Check Character (BCC).
This protocol is only set in FE1 mode:
In the following, the transmission protocols are listed for the various file input and output
possibilities. In FE1 mode, a command sequence which requests the directory from the peripheral
device is automatically output at the start if the function "Download selected program" was selected.
If an error occurs at a peripheral device, the following block must be sent to the TNC.
<SOH>"Error text"<ETB>BCC
Peripheral unit
Transmission path
TNC
<SOH> "Error" <ETB> BCC <DC1>
<ACK>
<EOT>
The received error message is displayed in the TNC, but can be acknowledged and erased with the
CE key.
8-34
TNC 406/TNC 306
3/97
4.1.1 Calling a program directory

In FE1 mode, the following ESC sequence is output for the external directory request if the function
"Download selected program" was selected.
<DC3><ESC><DC1><0><SP><D><CR><LF>
After this request the TNC expects the following input:
The first 4 characters which are each concluded with <CR><LF> are not considered. Then in the
following lines which are each concluded with <CR><LF>, only the program name and after any
number of blank spaces the number of sectors is stored.
XXXXXX "Name" "Sectors" XXXXXX <CR><LF>
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
8-35

The following protocol is followed:
Peripheral unit
Transmission path
TNC
<SOH> <N> Name <A> <ETB> BCC <DC1>
<ACK>
<STX> 1st line of file <ETB> BCC <DC1>
<ACK>
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
<STX> Last line of file <ETB> BCC <DC1>
<ACK>
<ETX> <EOT>
The program name may contain up to eight characters.

The files are output in order, as in Section 4.1.2 "Outputting a selected program". Control characters
<ETX><EOT> are sent to the peripheral device between files.
8-36
TNC 406/TNC 306
3/97
4.1.4 Reading in a selected program

If a file is to be read in from an external memory, the TNC sends a header with the file name
concerned, whereupon the peripheral sends the file.
Transmission path
Peripheral unit
TNC
<SOH> <N> Name <E> <ETB>
BCC <DC1>
<ACK>
<STX> 1st line of file <ETB> BCC <DC1>
<ACK>
.
.
.
.
.
.
<STX> Last line of file <ETB> BCC <DC1>
<ACK>
<ETX>
<EOT>
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
8-37

In this case the TNC sends a header without a program name, and the peripheral unit sends the first
file. The TNC then immediately outputs a header again without a program name, and the next
program is sent and so on.
Transmission path
Peripheral unit
TNC
<SOH> <H> <E> <ETB>
BCC <DC1>
<ACK>
<STX> 1st line PGM1 <ETB> BCC <DC1>
.
.
.
<ACK>
.
.
.
<STX> Last line PGM1 <ETB> BCC <DC1>
<ACK>
<SOH> <H> <E> <ETB>
BCC <DC1>
<ACK>
.
.
.
.
.
.
<STX> Last line of last file <ETB>

BCC <DC1>
<ACK>
<SOH> <H> <E> <ETB>
BCC <DC1>
<ETX>
<EOT>
8-38
TNC 406/TNC 306
3/97
5 Data transfer with LSV2-protocol

The LSV2-protocol can be used on the TNC 406.
The LSV2-protocol is a data transfer protocol for the two-way transfer of commands and data
according to DIN 66019.
The commands and data are transferred in so-called telegrams, i.e. the data is split up into blocks
(telegrams) and transmitted via RS232-C.
The following functions are possible:
Data transfer
Delete, copy and rename files in the control
Select a program in mode PROGRAM RUN
NC-Start and NC-Stop in mode PROGRAM RUN
Receive NC status information
NC-Start is enabled by marker M2504. Marker M2504 must be set to make a NC-Start possible.
Otherwise no modifications are necessary in the PLC-program.
HEIDENHAIN offers the software package LSV2 - DLL with detailed documentation for developing a
remote control software.
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
5 Data transfer with LSV2-protocol
8-39
6 Error messages
6.1 TNC error messages
Listed below are the error messages for data transfer, which are displayed at the TNC. In most
cases the messages are self-explanatory.
These error messages occur only in ME mode:
WRONG MODE
TRANSFERRED DATA INCORRECT
WRONG PROGRAM DATA
ME: END OF TAPE
DATA CARRIER FULL
DATA CARRIER EMPTY
DATA CARRIER WRITE-PROTECTED
General error messages:
INTERFACE ALREADY ASSIGNED
Transfer is already taking place via interface, or data transfer has not been completed.
PROGRAM INCOMPLETE
Transfer has been interrupted or the file has not ended correctly (no END character or END block).
EXT. OUTPUT/INPUT NOT READY
Interface is not connected; peripheral unit is switched off of faulty.
TRANSFERRED DATA INCORRECT X
can assume the values A to H, K or L (error codes).
The error message TRANSFERRED DATA INCORRECT N is displayed if, in the case of data transfer
with BCC (Block Check Character), a Not Acknowledged control character (<NAK>) has been
received three times.
The remaining error codes (A to H) in this error message indicate that an error has been detected in
the received module. The error can have the following causes, with no assignment to the code
letters:
Same baud rate not set at TNC and peripheral unit
Parity bit wrong
Incorrect data frame (e.g. no stop bit)
Receiving module of interface faulty
Error code K or L is only displayed for transfer with standard data transmission protocol:
K: When an error was transmitted to TNC, character <1> not sent after the <ESC> character.
L: The wrong error number was received after the error sequence <ESC><1>. (Error number
range: 0 to 7).
8-40
TNC 406/TNC 306
6 Error messages
3/97
6.2 Error codes of HEIDENHAIN peripheral devices

These error messages refer to the FE 401 floppy disk unit and to magnetic tape unit ME 101/
ME 102. With the FE 401 floppy disk unit connected, one of the following error codes could be
output by the TNC:
Error code
ERR: 001
ERR: 002
ERR: 003
ERR: 004
Meaning
Wrong instruction code
Illegal program name
Defective data transmission
Program incomplete
ERR: 010
ERR: 011
ERR: 012
ERR: 013
ERR: 014
Program not on floppy disk

Program protected against erasure
Program storage in progress
Program directory full
Floppy disk full
ERR: 100
ERR: 101
ERR: 102
ERR: 103
ERR: 104
ERR: 105
ERR: 106
ERR: 107
ERR: 108
Floppy disk not formatted

Sector number too large
Drive not ready
Floppy disk write-protected
Data on floppy disk defective
Sectors not found
Check sum defective
Disk controller faulty
DMA faulty
If a magnetic tape unit is connected, the following error codes could be sent to the TNC and an
appropriate error message outputted:
Error code
<ESC><1><0>
<ESC><1><1>
<ESC><1><2>
<ESC><1><3>
<ESC><1><4>
<ESC><1><5>
<ESC><1><6>
<ESC><1><7>
Error message
DATA CARRIER MISSING
DATA CARRIER WRITE-PROTECTED
WRONG OPERATING MODE
WRONG PROGRAM DATA
DATA CARRIER EMPTY
PROGRAM INCOMPLETE
ME: END OF TAPE
A detailed description of these peripherals can be found in the appropriate operating manual.
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
6 Error messages
8-41
6.3 Data transmission software error messages

The following error messages may come up on the TNC during data transfer with the HEIDENHAIN
TNC.EXE data transmission program:
DATA CARRIER @: IS FULL
This data carrier cannot receive any additional data because it is full.
FILE NAME NOT PROGRAM NAME
The name of the NC program is not the same as the file name.
INSTRUCTION NOT ALLOWED
The request instruction issued by the control is not allowed.
PROGRAM INCOMPLETE
The NC program does not contain an end block.
PROGRAM NOT PRESENT
The file requested by the control does not exist in the currently configured access path.
PROTECTED FILE
An attempt was made to overwrite a write-protected file or a file with hidden attribute.
SEARCH FEATURE NOT ALLOWED
The search feature is not included in the number of permissible characters.
Four unsuccessful attempts have been made to transmit a block to the control.
A detailed description of this software is given in the User's Manual of the transmission software.
8-42
TNC 406/TNC 306
6 Error messages
3/97
User cycles Contents 9

1
1.1
Creating user cycles

Dialog block with DLG-DEF or DLG-CALL
9-2
9-3
1.2
Q parameters and functions in user cycles
9-6
Dialogs for user cycles
9-7
Output in binary code
9-8
"Bolt hole circle" user cycle example
9-9
5
5.1
User cycles in NC programs

Calls in a HEIDENHAIN dialog program
9-10
9-10
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
9-1
1 Creating user cycles

User cycles (customized macros) are programmed in the HEIDENHAIN dialog format as NC
programs.
These cycles can be used in machining programs for executing repetitive machining tasks or
machine-specific functions with a single call in part programs written in HEIDENHAIN dialog format.
Execution of user cycles can be influenced by parameter transfer.
Up to 32 different user cycles can be produced, tested and stored in the NC program memory.
In order not to tie up the NC program memory (RAM) with the user cycles and dialogs, this data can
be stored in the PLC EPROM together with a maximum of 100 different customer-specific dialog
texts.
Instructions for creating user cycles
User cycles in the NC program memory can be called for testing by cycle 12: "Program call". It is
thus also possible to test functional capability in the "Program run/single block" mode. (With a
program call, all Q parameters are globally effective.)
Functions permitted in user cycles
Tool call.
M functions apart from M02, M30, M06 without program stop.
Nesting user cycles:
Other user cycles or standard cycles can be called from within a user cycle (nesting depth up to
four levels).
Call of HEIDENHAIN dialog programs from within user cycles. The called programs are not
displayed.
Functions not permitted in user cycles
M functions M02, M30, M06 with program stop.
Programmed STOP block.
Program calls with PGM-CALL.
Program section repeats with CALL LBL ... REP .../...:
User cycles with program section repeats stored in PLC EPROM cannot be executed. However,
program-section repeats can also be programmed via the Q parameter function (IF ... GOTO LBL
...) (see the "Bolt hole circle" example).
9-2
TNC 406/TNC 306
3/97
1.1 Dialog block with DLG-DEF or DLG-CALL

Programming a user cycle and, by the same token, the dialog block, is only possible if the program
number is in the range 99 9 99 9 68.H to 999 9 99 99.H (TNC 306) and 999 999 30.H to
99 9999
99.H (TNC 406).
Each of these program numbers is permanently assigned to a cycle number (e.g. program number
99 999 968.H represents user cycle 68).
Programming the dialog block is initiated with the key "LBL SET" and then "NO ENT".
DLG-DEF
If a user cycle is to be active in the NC program immediately upon being defined, a "DEF-active" user
cycle is programmed with the "ENT" key, e.g. cycle for coordinate transformation.
DLG-CALL
If a user cycle is to be activated later in the NC program via CYCL CALL or M99, a "CALL-active" user
cycle is programmed with the "NO ENT" key, e.g. for a fixed cycle.
Up to 15 dialog numbers can then be input. The first dialog number is always assigned to the
designation of the user cycle. The remaining numbers are assigned to the Q parameters in
ascending order.
If fewer than 15 dialogs are to be programmed, the dialog block can end with "END". See also
MP7250 in the following description of the relevant machine parameters.
Example:
0 BEGIN PGM 99999968 MM
1 DLG-DEF 0/2/8/99
.
.
.
15 END PGM 99999968 MM
Machine parameter MP7240 can be used to inhibit program input in the case that the program
number is the same as the user cycle number.
If MP7240 = 0, no program with the program number of a user cycle which is stored in EPROM can
be input or read into the NC program memory.
If MP7240 = 1, the program number range of the user cycles can also be used when the user cycles
are stored in the PLC EPROM. If a user cycle is generated in the NC program memory and if at the
same time there is a user cycle with the same number in the PLC EPROM, then the user cycle in
the NC program memory will be executed at a cycle call.
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
9-3
In the NC program, when defining the user cycles created with dialog support, Q parameters are
assigned specified input values. The Q-parameter numbers are automatically generated by the TNC.
In order to prevent the same Q-parameter numbers from being generated for "DLG-DEF" cycles and
"DLG-CALL" cycles, MP7250 can be used to specify the difference between Q-parameter numbers
for "DLG-CALL" and "DLG-DEF" blocks.
In the case of a "DLG-CALL" block, the input values of the user cycles are assigned in ascending
order to the Q parameters Q1 to Q14. For the "DLG-DEF" block, the input values are assigned to Q
parameters Q[1 + MP7250] to Q[14 + MP7250].
Example for MP7250 = 30
Cycle parameter 1
Cycle parameter 2
.
.
.
Cycle parameter 14
Parameter number in user cycle with

DLG-CALL
DLG-DEF
Q1
Q31
Q2
Q32
.
.
.
.
.
.
Q14
Q44
MP7251 determines whether the values of the Q parameters which are changed in the user cycles
by calculation or assignment are transferred globally to the called program (e.g. in the case of
"nesting" of user cycles).
Machine parameter MP7251 defines the range of Q parameters from Q[100 MP7251] to Q99 as
"global".
The effect of global and local Q parameters may be shown by reference to following example:
MP7251 = 40
Q [100 40] = Q60 => Q60 to Q99 are global Q parameters and
Q1 to Q59 are local Q parameters
Q1
BEGIN PGM 100 MM
FN0: Q1 = +1
FN0: Q60 = +5
CYCL DEF 69.0 USERCYCLE 1
CYCL DEF 69.1 Q1 = +2
BEGIN PGM 99999969 MM
DLGDEF 0/32
FN1: Q1 = Q1 + 10
FN1: Q60 = Q60 + 10
END PGM 99999969 MM
STOP
END PGM 100 MM
9-4
TNC 406/TNC 306
MP7251 = 40
MP7251 < 40
Q60 = local
Q60 = global Q1
+1
+1
+1
+2
+0
+5
+5
+5
+1
+1
+1
+2
+0
+5
+5
+5
+12
+12
+5
+15
+12
+12
+5
+15
+2
+15
+2
+5
3/97
MP7240
Inhibit program input if [program number] = [user cycle number in

EPROM].
Input value: 0 or 1
0 = Inhibit
1 = Do not inhibit
MP7250
Difference between Q-parameter number for "DLG-CALL" and "DLG-DEF" block

in user cycles.
MP7251
Number of global Q parameters transferred from user cycle to calling program.

User cycles stored in the PLC EPROM can be inhibited in the PLC program via markers M2240 to
M2271. It is then not possible to define inhibited cycles in NC programs.
If programs with definitions of inhibited user cycles are transferred to the control, an error message
"PGM 999999.. UNAVAILABLE=..." is generated in the transferred program and the program cannot
be executed.
Marker
Function
Set
Reset
M2240
M2241
M2242
.
.
.
M2271
Inhibit user cycle 68

.
.
.
PLC
PLC
PLC
PLC
PLC
PLC
PLC
PLC
User cycle 30 to 67 can not be inhibited.
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
9-5
1.2 Q parameters and functions in user cycles

Q-parameter programming can be used to create user cycles with variable program data, such as for
eroding extremely varied hole patterns, curves (e.g. spirals, sinusoidal, ellipse, parabola) and mold
components.
A detailed description of Q parameters and functions is given in the TNC User's Manual.
Q parameters with special significance
Q80
Q81
Q82
Q83
Q84
Number of the datum point in the datum point table

Coordinate of the X-axis
Coordinate of the Y-axis
Coordinate of the Z-axis
Coordinate of the C-axis
Eroding table OFF:

Q90Q99
Eroding parameters
Eroding table ON:

Q96Q98
Q99
Q150
Q151
Q152
Q154
Q155
Q156
Q201Q225
Q231Q255
Additional eroding parameters

Current power stage NR
Maximum power stage
Minimum power stage
Current table number
Minimum undersize (UNS) of min. NR
Two-times gap (2G) of min. NR
Two-times gap (2G) of max. NR
Two-times gap of min. to max. NR
Minimum undersize of min. to max. NR
General Q parameters:
Q100Q107
Q108
Q109
Q110
Q111
9-6
Transfer values from PLC to NC

Electrode radius
Current tool axis
Rotational status of the C axis
Contents Q110
no M3/4/5
-1
M3 active
0
M4 active
1
M5 active
2
Flushing ON/OFF
Contents Q111
no M8/9
M9 active
M8 active
TNC 406/TNC 306
-1
0
1
(after PGM-NR ENT)
(after PGM-NR ENT)
3/97
Q113
Q114
MM or INCH programming
Contents Q113
-1
main program mm 0
main program inch 1
MM or INCH Eroding table
Contents Q113
-1
Eroding table mm
0
Eroding table inch
1
(after PGM-NR ENT)

(after program START)
(after program START)
(after PGM-NR ENT)

(after executing CYCL GENERATOR)
(after executing CYCL GENERATOR)
Q115Q118 Values from the programmable touch probe function in the machining system
Q120Q124 Values from the programmable touch probe function in the workpiece system
Q153
Return to main program from subprogram or user cycle Q153 = 0

Eroding with time limit finished
Q153 = 1
Eroding with time limit active
Q153 = 2
Q157
Q158
Q159
Q160
Q162
Following electrode (see TNC User's Manual)

Electrode undersize
Length of electrode
Electrode number
Number of actual CYCL DEF
FN functions with special significance

FN14 Output of error messages and dialogs to VDU
FN15 Output of error messages, dialogs and Q-parameter values over RS-232-C data interface
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
9-7
2 Dialogs for user cycles

The dialog numbers defined in the dialog blocks of the user cycles determine the text to be
displayed from PLC EPROM.
The following dialog texts are stored in the standard PLC EPROM for the designation of the user
cycle and the input parameters:
Dialog number in user cycle
0
1
2
.
.
.
Standard dialog in PLC EPROM

USER CYCL
CYCL PARAMETER 01
CYCL PARAMETER 02
.
.
.
Instead of these standard dialogs, up to 200 different customer-specific dialogs can be stored in PLC
EPROM.
9-8
TNC 406/TNC 306
2 Dialogs for user cycles
3/97
3 Output in binary code

When the user cycles have been fully tested they can be output in binary form, together with the
PLC program and the eroding tables, for EPROM programming. It is possible to output the files
located in both the PLC EPROM and the NC program memory in binary code.
An exact description of file output via the data interface is given in the chapter "PLC Programming".
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
3 Output in binary code
9-9
4 "Bolt hole circle" user cycle example

The following bolt hole circle program is an example of a user cycle. (This cycle has not been loaded
into the control.)
The Z-axis acts as the tool axis. The first cavity in the circle is at 0. The cycle calculates the angular
positions of the cavities and of the C axis from the number of cavities. The cavities are approached
in succession in counter-clockwise direction and automatically eroded. Before the cycle is called, the
electrode is held at the safety clearance.
Y
Q2
0
Input parameters:
Q1 = Number of cavities
Q2 = Radius of bolt hole circle
Q3 = X coordinate of center of bolt hole circle
Q4 = Y coordinate of center of bolt hole circle
Q5 = Safety clearance for Z axis
(enter as negative)
Q6 = Cavity depth in Z axis (enter as negative)
Q4
Q3
"Bolt hole circle" user cycle

0 BEGIN 99999968 MM
1 DLG-CALL 0/1/2/3/4/5/6
2 FN1: Q6 = +Q6 + +Q5
3 FN4: Q50 = +360 DIV + Q1
4 FN0: Q60 = +0
5 CC X+Q3 Y+Q4
6 LBL 11
7 LP PR +Q2 PA +Q60 C+Q60 R0 FMAX
8 L IZ +Q6 M36
9 L IZ Q6 FMAX M37
10 FN 1: Q60 = +Q60 + +Q50
11 FN12: IF +Q60 LT +360 GOTO LBL 11
12 END PGM 99999968 MM
Dialog block
Distance traversed in Z
Angle increment
Starting angle
Center of bolt hole circle
Jump label
Approach cavity, position C axis
Erode cavity
Retract, generator off
Next angle
Last cavity?
Dialogs for "Bolt hole circle" user cycle

Dialog no.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
9-10
DIALOGUE
BOLT HOLE CIRCLE
NUMBER OF CAVITIES?
RADIUS?
X COORDINATE CC?
Y COORDINATE CC?
SAFETY CLEARANCE?
TOTAL CAVITY DEPTH?
TNC 406/TNC 306
4 "Bolt hole circle" user cycle example
3/97
5 User cycles in NC programs

User cycles in the NC program memory or PLC EPROM are defined and called in HEIDENHAIN
dialog programs.
5.1 Calls in a HEIDENHAIN dialog program

User cycles are defined as standard cycles in the HEIDENHAIN dialog program (see "Dialog
Programming" in the TNC 306 User's Manual).
The dialog for cycle definition is initiated with the "CYCL DEF" key. Select the desired cycle either by
paging using the vertical arrow keys or by "GOTO" and entering the cycle number (e.g. 68). Confirm
your entry with the "ENT" key.
The individual parameters are input via the numerical keyboard. Confirm your entries with "ENT".
In the case of a "DEF-active" user cycle, the cycle is effective immediately upon being defined. Once
defined, a "CALL-active" user cycle can be called and hence activated either via "CYCL CALL" or
M99.
Example:
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
BEGIN PGM 1000 MM

TOOL DEF 1 L+0 R+2
TOOL CALL 1 Z U 0.1
CYCL DEF 1.0 GENERATOR
CYCL DEF 1.1 PTAB 1
CYCL DEF 1.2 MAX = 25 MIN = 1
L Z+2 R0 FMAX
CYCL DEF 68.0 BOLT CIRCLE
CYCL DEF 68.1 Q1=+8 Q2=+40 Q3=+60
CYCL DEF 68.2 Q4=+50 Q5=2 Q6=20
CYCL CALL
END PGM 1000 MM
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
Tool definition
Tool call
Definition and call of the generator
with corresponding eroding
parameters
Approach safety clearance
Definition of cycle 68 "Bolt hole circle"
Call cycle
5 User cycles in NC programs
9-11
7-Bit ASCII code

Character
NUL
SOH
STX
ETX
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
DLE
DC1 (X-ON)
DC2
DC3 (X-OFF)
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN
EM
SUB
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US
SP
!
"
#
$
%
&
(
)
*
+
,
.
/
3/97
DEC
000
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
023
024
025
026
027
028
029
030
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
038
039
040
041
042
043
044
045
046
047
TNC 406/TNC 306
OCT
000
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
020
021
022
023
024
025
026
027
030
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
040
041
042
043
044
045
046
047
050
051
052
053
054
055
056
057
7-Bit ASCII code
HEX
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
10-1
Character
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?
@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
10-2
DEC
048
049
050
051
052
053
054
055
056
057
058
059
060
061
062
063
064
065
066
067
068
069
070
071
072
073
074
075
076
077
078
079
080
081
082
083
084
085
086
087
088
089
090
091
092
093
094
095
TNC 406/TNC 306
OCT
060
061
062
063
064
065
066
067
070
071
072
073
074
075
076
077
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
7-Bit ASCII code
HEX
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F
3/97
Character
`
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
}
~
DEL
3/97
DEC
096
097
098
099
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
TNC 406/TNC 306
OCT
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
7-Bit ASCII code
HEX
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
10-3
10-4
TNC 406/TNC 306
7-Bit ASCII code
3/97
Subject index
A
Acceleration...................................................................................................4-40
Acceleration, radial ........................................................................................4-45
Active axes ....................................................................................................4-5
Actual/nominal value transfer ........................................................................4-53
ADD (+)........................................................................................................7-102
ADDITION......................................................................................................7-56; 7-73
Address allocation .........................................................................................7-14
Addressing the word memory.......................................................................7-14
alphabetic keyboard.......................................................................................4-101
Ambient temperature ....................................................................................3-8
Amplitude of the measuring system signals .................................................4-8
Analog inputs.................................................................................................4-120
Analog outputs, Assignment .........................................................................4-12
Analog voltage ...............................................................................................4-42
AND ...............................................................................................................7-43; 7-69
AND NOT.......................................................................................................7-45; 7-69
Angular measurement ...................................................................................4-6
Arc recognition ..............................................................................................4-60
Arithmetic commands ...................................................................................7-56
ASSIGN..........................................................................................................7-33
ASSIGN BYTE................................................................................................7-35
ASSIGN DOUBLEWORD ..............................................................................7-35
ASSIGN NOT (=N) .........................................................................................7-36
ASSIGN TWO'S COMPLEMENT (= -) ...........................................................7-36
ASSIGN WORD .............................................................................................7-35
Axes in position .............................................................................................4-52
Axis designation ............................................................................................4-10
Axis enable ....................................................................................................4-51
Axis limit ........................................................................................................4-13
Axis of rotation ..............................................................................................4-10
B
Bar Chart........................................................................................................7-117
Baud rate .......................................................................................................8-9
BCC (Block Check Character) ........................................................................8-20
BIT RESET ....................................................................................................7-85
Bit commands ...............................................................................................7-84
BIT SET..........................................................................................................7-84
BIT TEST........................................................................................................7-86
Buffer battery ................................................................................................3-19
Byte ...............................................................................................................7-14
C
Call Module (CM)..........................................................................................7-95
Call Module if Logic Accumulator = 0 (CMF) ...............................................7-95
Call Module if Logic Accumulator = 1 (CMT) ...............................................7-95
CALL-active user cycle ..................................................................................9-3
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
Subject index
11-1
CAN (CANCEL) ............................................................................................7-105

Cancellation of a Submit Program (CAN).....................................................7-105
CASE statement ............................................................................................7-99
Checking data ................................................................................................8-8
Circular feed rates .........................................................................................4-88
Clamped axis .................................................................................................4-53
Code number 105296....................................................................................4-20
Code number 75368......................................................................................4-44
Code numbers ...............................................................................................4-138; 4-89
Color adjustment ...........................................................................................4-91
Command ......................................................................................................7-12
Commands ....................................................................................................7-26
Commissioning..............................................................................................4-138
Comparisons..................................................................................................7-62
Compensation, axis error ..............................................................................4-18
Compensation, linear axis error.....................................................................4-18
Compensation, non-linear axis error..............................................................4-19
Components, hardware TNC 406 ..................................................................3-4
Connection box..............................................................................................3-33
Connections, overview ..................................................................................3-13
Control loop ...................................................................................................4-37
Control loop, open .........................................................................................4-53
Control with lag .............................................................................................4-39
Controlled ......................................................................................................4-50
Cooling...........................................................................................................3-8
Copy in Marker ..............................................................................................7-108
Correction table .............................................................................................4-19
Correction-value difference ...........................................................................4-21
Counters ........................................................................................................7-20
Counting direction .........................................................................................4-7
Counting step ................................................................................................4-6
Cycle inhibit ...................................................................................................4-86
Cycles, OEM..................................................................................................4-86
D
Data bits ........................................................................................................8-24
Data exchange, PLC/generator......................................................................4-68
Data interface ................................................................................................3-41
Data transfer..................................................................................................8-4
Data transfer PLC ..........................................................................................7-15
Data transfer rate ..........................................................................................8-9
Data transfer with Block Check Character ....................................................8-19
Data transmission protocols..........................................................................8-18
Datum correction...........................................................................................4-125
Debug Functions, PLC...................................................................................7-10
Decimal sign ..................................................................................................4-89
DECREMENT (DEC) ......................................................................................7-76
DEF-active user cycle ....................................................................................9-3
Degree of protection .....................................................................................3-12
Dialog language .............................................................................................2-6
Dialog number ...............................................................................................9-3
Dialogs for user cycles ..................................................................................9-8
Direction of traverse ......................................................................................4-7
Display, active power stage number .............................................................4-84
11-2
TNC 406/TNC 306
Subject index
3/97
Display, actual machining time......................................................................4-84

Display, feed rate...........................................................................................4-82
Display, M-functions......................................................................................4-83
Display, position and status...........................................................................4-80
Display, way-to-go (WTG)..............................................................................4-83
DIVISION .......................................................................................................7-59; 7-73
DLG CALL......................................................................................................9-3
DLG DEF........................................................................................................9-3
E
Edge evaluation of the PLC-inputs ................................................................7-21
Edge separation of the measuring system signals........................................4-9
Editing PLC-programs....................................................................................7-6
Electrical noise immunity...............................................................................3-8
Electrode changer..........................................................................................4-127
EMERGENCY STOP routine ..........................................................................4-71
EMERGENCY STOP, connection diagram.....................................................4-72
Encoder inputs, Assignment .........................................................................4-11
Encoder monitoring .......................................................................................4-8
Encoders........................................................................................................4-5
End indexed call module (ENDC)..................................................................7-99
End of Module if Logic Accumulator = 0 (EMF) ............................................7-97
End of Module if Logic Accumulator = 1 (EMT) ............................................7-97
End of Module, Program End (EM)...............................................................7-97
Entry format...................................................................................................5-3
EPROM..........................................................................................................2-8
EPROM creation............................................................................................7-21
EPROM operation..........................................................................................7-22
EPROM slots .................................................................................................3-9
EPROM test ..................................................................................................4-90
EQUAL TO.....................................................................................................7-62; 7-77
Eroding parameters .......................................................................................4-62
Eroding parameters, Transmission to the PLC..............................................4-67
Erosion table from PLC..................................................................................4-64
Error in PLC-program .....................................................................................4-110
Error message ...............................................................................................4-48; 4-85; 4-110; 7-23
ERROR= ........................................................................................................9-5
Errors, PLC ....................................................................................................7-23
EXCLUSIVE OR .............................................................................................7-51; 7-70
EXCLUSIVE OR NOT .....................................................................................7-53; 7-70
External programming ...................................................................................8-28
Extra linear axis .............................................................................................4-11
F
Feed forward control .....................................................................................4-56
Feed rate override .........................................................................................4-54
Feed rate, constant........................................................................................4-45
Flushing the gap ............................................................................................4-61
Free run .........................................................................................................4-61
G
Gap control ....................................................................................................4-56
Gap signal ......................................................................................................4-56
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
Subject index
11-3
Generator ON/OFF (M36/M37) .....................................................................4-96

Global Q parameters .....................................................................................9-4
Graduation period} .........................................................................................4-5
Graphics.........................................................................................................4-79
Graphics display ............................................................................................4-79
GREATER THAN............................................................................................7-77
GREATER THAN (>) ....................................................................................7-64
GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO...................................................................7-66; 7-78
Gross positioning error A...............................................................................4-46
Gross positioning error C...............................................................................4-47
Gross positioning error D...............................................................................4-48
Gross positioning error F ...............................................................................4-47
Grounding plan, TNC 306 ..............................................................................3-22
Grounding plan, TNC 406 ..............................................................................3-21
H
Handshaking ..................................................................................................8-10
Handwheel ....................................................................................................4-117
Handwheel HR 130 .......................................................................................3-45
Handwheel HR 330 .......................................................................................3-43; 3-44
Handwheel HR 410 .......................................................................................4-118
Handwheel input ...........................................................................................3-43
Handwheel, count direction...........................................................................4-117
Hardware handshaking..................................................................................8-10
Hardware version ..........................................................................................0-7
Heat generation .............................................................................................3-8
HR 130...........................................................................................................4-117
HR 330...........................................................................................................4-117
Humidity ........................................................................................................3-9
I
Identifier ........................................................................................................7-104
INCREMENT (INC).........................................................................................7-76
Indexed call module (CASE) .........................................................................7-99
Inhibited key ..................................................................................................4-101
Installation, hardware ....................................................................................3-8
Interface configuration...................................................................................8-24
Interpolation factor ........................................................................................4-117
J
Jog increment positioning .............................................................................4-122
Jump commands...........................................................................................7-93
Jump if Logic Accumulator = 0 (JPF) ...........................................................7-93
Jump if Logic Accumulator = 1 (JPT) ...........................................................7-93
Jump Label (LBL)..........................................................................................7-97
K
Key simulation ...............................................................................................4-101
Key-code........................................................................................................4-101
Kv factor ........................................................................................................4-41; 4-42; 4-145
11-4
TNC 406/TNC 306
Subject index
3/97
L
L (LOAD)......................................................................................................7-101
Lag.................................................................................................................4-41
LESS THAN ...................................................................................................7-63; 7-77
LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO ..........................................................................7-65; 7-77
List of machine parameters...........................................................................5-5
LOAD.............................................................................................................7-26
LOAD (L)......................................................................................................7-101
LOAD BYTE ...................................................................................................7-31
Load command..............................................................................................7-26
Load data onto Data Stack (PS) ....................................................................7-88
LOAD DOUBLEWORD..................................................................................7-31
Load logic accumulator onto Data Stack (PSL).............................................7-89
LOAD NOT ....................................................................................................7-28
LOAD TWO'S COMPLEMENT......................................................................7-30
LOAD WORD ................................................................................................7-31
Load word accumulator onto Data Stack (PSW) ..........................................7-90
Local Q parameters .......................................................................................9-4
Logic gates ....................................................................................................7-43
Logic unit .......................................................................................................3-4; 3-5
LSV/2 Protocol ...............................................................................................8-41
Lubrication pulse ...........................................................................................4-16
Lubrication, path-dependent..........................................................................4-16
M
M06, program-halt on ....................................................................................4-99
M36 off..........................................................................................................4-59
M36 on ..........................................................................................................4-59; 4-96
M37 off..........................................................................................................4-96
M89 ...............................................................................................................4-99
Machine axes ................................................................................................4-5
Machine control panel ...................................................................................3-56; 4-110
Machine datum..............................................................................................4-34; 4-76
Machine parameter, read ..............................................................................7-112
Machine parameters .....................................................................................5-2
Machine parameters, list of...........................................................................5-5
Manual feed...................................................................................................4-43
Measuring system cables .............................................................................3-29
Measuring system, inputs .............................................................................3-28
Measuring systems .......................................................................................3-27; 4-5
Measuring systems, angular .........................................................................3-27
Measuring systems, linear ............................................................................3-27
Mechanical vibration......................................................................................3-9
Memory test..................................................................................................4-90
M functions ...................................................................................................4-93
Module 9051 .................................................................................................7-112
Module 9071 .................................................................................................7-113
Module 9079 .................................................................................................7-114
Module 9000/9001 ........................................................................................7-108
Module 9020/9021/9022 ...............................................................................7-111
Module 9032 .................................................................................................7-112
Module 9080 .................................................................................................7-100; 7-114
Module 9081 .................................................................................................7-114
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
Subject index
11-5
Module 9082 .................................................................................................7-100; 7-115

Module 9083 .................................................................................................7-117
Module technique..........................................................................................7-13
Monitoring analog voltage .............................................................................4-47
Monitoring functions .....................................................................................4-46; 4-147
Monitoring, movement..................................................................................4-47
Monitoring, standstill .....................................................................................4-48
Mounting dimensions....................................................................................3-64
Mounting position..........................................................................................3-9
MULTIPLICATION .........................................................................................7-58; 7-73
N
NC software number .....................................................................................2-6
Nesting depth ................................................................................................9-2
Nominal value potential .................................................................................3-31
NOT EQUAL TO ............................................................................................7-78
O
Offset adjustment .........................................................................................4-44; 4-147
Operand directory..........................................................................................7-14
Operating mode.............................................................................................4-101
OR .................................................................................................................7-47; 7-69
OR NOT .........................................................................................................7-49; 7-69
Overflow........................................................................................................7-104
Overwrite Q-parameters ...............................................................................4-91
Overwriting of a STRING (OVWR)...............................................................7-103
OVWR (OVERWRITE)..................................................................................7-103
P
Parentheses...................................................................................................7-69; 7-73
PL 410 B ........................................................................................................3-52
PLC Main menu ..........................................................................................7-6
PLC DIALOG..................................................................................................7-101
PLC ERROR...................................................................................................7-101
PLC functions ................................................................................................7-5
PLC input/output board..................................................................................3-4; 3-6; 3-12
PLC inputs .....................................................................................................3-47
PLC Modules .................................................................................................7-108
PLC operation, selecting................................................................................7-5
PLC outputs...................................................................................................3-47
PLC positioning..............................................................................................4-24
PLC positioning, Feed for ..............................................................................4-24
PLC program, translating ...............................................................................7-8
PLC programs, deleting .................................................................................7-8
PLC programs, editing ...................................................................................7-6
PLC software.................................................................................................0-8
PLC window ..................................................................................................7-100
Position monitoring........................................................................................4-46
Positional deviation........................................................................................4-43
Positioning window .......................................................................................4-48
Power supply.................................................................................................3-16
Power supply, NC..........................................................................................3-16
Power supply, PLC ........................................................................................3-17
11-6
TNC 406/TNC 306
Subject index
3/97
Power supply, VDU .......................................................................................3-20

Probing function ............................................................................................4-112
probing, manual .............................................................................................4-114
probing, successive .......................................................................................4-114
Program creation ...........................................................................................7-12
Program, ........................................................................................................4-90
Programming station .....................................................................................4-89
Programs, transferring from EPROM ............................................................7-8
Pull data from Data Stack (PL)......................................................................7-89
Pull logic accumulator from Data Stack (PLL)...............................................7-90
Pull word accumulator from Data Stack (PLW) ............................................7-90
Q
Q parameters.................................................................................................4-63; 9-4
Q parameters, global .....................................................................................9-4
Q parameters, local .......................................................................................9-4
R
RAM operation ..............................................................................................7-22
RAM test .......................................................................................................4-90
Range (Module 9010/9011/9012 ...................................................................7-110
Rapid traverse................................................................................................4-41; 4-42
Read in Word.................................................................................................7-110
Reference end-position .................................................................................4-28
Reference marks ...........................................................................................4-27; 4-33
Reference marks, direction for traversing .....................................................4-33
Reference marks, distance-coded.................................................................4-27
Reference marks, feed rate for leaving .........................................................4-33
Reference marks, passing over.....................................................................4-28
Reference marks, Sequence for traversing...................................................4-33
Reference point, shift of the..........................................................................4-77
Referencing to machine datum with M92 positioning blocks .......................4-77
REMAINDER .................................................................................................7-60; 7-74
REPLY............................................................................................................7-104
RESET............................................................................................................7-39
RESET NOT ...................................................................................................7-41
Restore position ............................................................................................4-90
Retraction of the electrode............................................................................4-59
Retraction speed ...........................................................................................4-59
Rotary axis, non-controlled ............................................................................4-54
Rotary encoder and ballscrew .......................................................................4-5
RPLY (REPLY)..............................................................................................7-105
RS 422/V.11...................................................................................................3-42; 4-68
RS-232-C interface.........................................................................................8-3; 8-11
S
Scaling factor .................................................................................................4-87
Servo accuracy ..............................................................................................4-43
Servo lag........................................................................................................4-41
Servo lag, optimizing .....................................................................................4-144
Servo positioning ...........................................................................................4-37
Servo sensitivity ............................................................................................4-66
SET ................................................................................................................7-38
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
Subject index
11-7
SET NOT........................................................................................................7-40
Set commands ..............................................................................................7-38
Shift commands ............................................................................................7-81
SHIFT LEFT....................................................................................................7-81
SHIFT RIGHT .................................................................................................7-82
Short circuit ...................................................................................................4-59; 4-112
Short-circuit signal .........................................................................................3-37
Signal period ..................................................................................................4-5
soft key..........................................................................................................4-101
Software handshaking ...................................................................................8-10
Software limit switch.....................................................................................4-13; 4-144
Software types ..............................................................................................2-7
Spark-out .......................................................................................................4-61
Stack operations ............................................................................................7-88
Standard data transmission protocol .............................................................8-30
Standard transmission protocol.....................................................................8-18
Status display, canceling ...............................................................................4-84
Status Interrogation (RPLY) ...........................................................................7-105
Status window...............................................................................................4-80
Storing a STRING (=) ...................................................................................7-102
STRING accumulator .....................................................................................7-100
STRING Execution .........................................................................................7-100
STRING memory ...........................................................................................7-100
SUBM (SUBMIT) .........................................................................................7-104
Submit Programs...........................................................................................7-104
Submit Queue ...............................................................................................7-104
Subprograms .................................................................................................7-104
SUBTRACTION..............................................................................................7-57; 7-73
T
TABLE function..............................................................................................7-10
Technical data................................................................................................2-3
Test functions, PLC .......................................................................................7-9
Threshold sensitivity......................................................................................4-117
Timers............................................................................................................7-18
TNC keyboard ................................................................................................3-4; 3-5; 3-59; 4-101
Tool axis.........................................................................................................4-12
Touch probe systems, TS 120.......................................................................3-39
TRACE BUFFER, DISPLAY ............................................................................7-10
TRACE function .............................................................................................7-9
TRACE, END..................................................................................................7-10
TRACE, START ..............................................................................................7-10
Transferring programs from EPROM ............................................................7-8
Transferring the PLC-program .......................................................................7-11
Translating PLC programs .............................................................................7-8
U
Unconditional jump (JP)................................................................................7-93
UNEQUAL .....................................................................................................7-67
User cycles ....................................................................................................9-2
User parameters............................................................................................4-88; 5-2
Utilization .......................................................................................................7-8
11-8
TNC 406/TNC 306
Subject index
3/97
V
VDU display ...................................................................................................4-12
Visual display unit ..........................................................................................3-6; 3-12; 3-35
Voltage step...................................................................................................4-43
W
Workpiece datum ..........................................................................................4-76
Write in word range.......................................................................................7-111
X
X1 ..................................................................................................................3-60
Z
Zero reference mark ......................................................................................4-28
3/97
TNC 406/TNC 306
Subject index
11-9
Update Information No. 15

The following software was released for the TNC 416:
Software 286 18x-02 was released in April 99 (no additional functions)
Software 286 18x-03 was released in April 99 (no additional functions)
Software 286 18x-04 was released in February 2000
The following software was released for the TNC 406:

Software 280 62x-9 was released in March 1999 (no additional functions)
Software 280 62x-10 was released in February 2000.
In the software 286 18x-04 and 280 62x-10 the following additions were made:
New Cycle 14 Contour

Cycle 14 enables you to move continuously in the working plane in a freely programmable,
closed contour with programmed feed rate (not gap-controlled) and simultaneously erode in the
tool axis (gap-controlled), and plunge to a programmable depth.
If this depth is reached when a certain percentage (PRC) of the programmed contour length is
attained, the cycle ends.
Conditions for the contour program:
The erosion axis programmed in Cycle 14 must not appear in the contour program.
The programmed contour must be closed. This means that the contour must end at the point at
which it begins.
The starting point of the contour should be in the contour center so that the contour can be
scaled with Cycle 11.
When the cycle ends, the erosion axis remains at the final depth and does not retract as it does,
for example, in Cycle 17.
Example:
CYCL DEF 14.0 CONTOUR GEOMETRY
CYCL DEF 14.1 IZ-1 M36
(IZ-Qnn)
CYCL DEF 14.2 PGM CONTOUR1
CYCL DEF 14.3 PRC=90
(PRC=Qnn)
During a reference run with the direction keys, traverse continues in manual mode after the
reference mark has been evaluated.
New Q parameter Q164

The minimum undersize UNS of the maximum power stage is loaded after Q164 during
execution of the generator cycle.
If a program was interrupted with ext./int stop and restarted with NC Start, then an incremental
positioning after a GOTO is always started from the current machine position.
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
1-1
In MODE/AXIS LIMIT, limit values can be entered in addition to the software limit switch values
of the machine parameters. The smaller of each two values is used for range checking.
An edited value is saved with the END key. The previous value can be restored through NOENT.
The software limit switch values from the machine parameters can be transferred by soft key
(TRANSFER FROM MP) to the MODE window.
The following structured program commands were added to the PLC syntax:
IFT
IFF
ELSE
ENDI
(IF LOGIC-ACCU TRUE)

(IF LOGIC-ACCU FALSE)
(ELSE)
(END OF IF-STRUCTURE)
Following code only if logic accu=1

Following code only if logic accu=0
Following code only if IF is not fulfilled
End of the IF structure
REPEAT (REPEAT)
UNTILT (UNTIL TRUE)
UNTILF (UNTIL FALSE)
Repeat from here the program sequence

Repeat sequence until logic accu = 1
Repeat sequence until logic accu = 0
WHILET (WHILE TRUE)

WHILEF (WHILE FALSE)
ENDW (END WHILE)
Runs the sequence if logic accu = 1

Runs the sequence if logic accu = 0
End of program sequence, return jump to beginning
To operate the index register, commands were introduced that permit data exchange between
word accumulator and index register or stack and index register:
LX (Load Index to Accu)
Index register
--> Word accu
=X (Store Accu to Index)
Word accu
--> Index register
PSX (Push Index Register)
Index register
--> Stack
PLX (Pull Index Register)
Stack
--> Index register
INCX (Increment Index register)
DECX (Decrement Index register)
BSX (BIT SET)
The bit that was addressed by index is set to 1.
BCX (BIT CLEAR) The bit that was addressed by index is set to 0 .
BTX (BIT TEST)
Status of the bit that was addressed by index is interrogated.
The following address types are possible:
Mn[X]
In[X]
On[X]
Cn[X]
Tn[X]
Bn[X]
Wn[X]
Dn[X]
1-2
Operand number= n+X

Operand number= n+2*X
Operand number= n+4*X
It is now possible to assign label names with up to 8 places instead of the previous label
numbers. The maximum label number is 1000.
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
3/2000
Handwheel
Besides in the MANUAL and JOG INCREMENT modes, the handwheel is also effective with:
Manual Touch Probe: depth finding, but not in the probe axis;
Manual erosion, but not in the erosion axis;
After an EXT stop and when a PGM is being run (for workpiece inspection).
Tool Def or Cycle 3 Tool Def blocks can now be included in the OEM cycle in the PLC-EPROM.
Read machine parameter 7651 was removed. MP7651 made it possible to switch off the
special short-circuit monitoring in manual mode. The monitor is now always active during
traverse with the handwheel and axis direction keys .
The short circuit monitor can now also be switched on or off with the aid of marker M2622 in
manual and handwheel mode.
Machine parameter MP7412 (behavior during cycle call) has been removed.
Change in machine parameter MP4060.x

The input in MP4060.x (distance for lubrication pulse) is in millimeters.
Marker M2500 (actual-to-nominal value transfer in case of short circuit) and the complement
markers as of M2464 and as of M2528 have been removed.
New marker M2507

The status display M7 can be switched on with marker M2507. This same applies for status
display M8 (M2508). M7 can be used to display a second flushing.
New PLC word W498

W498 is the encoded current handwheel axis (X=bit 0, Y=bit 1, Z=bit 2, ...)
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
1-3
New machine parameter MP4030

Extension of the word marker range up to W1098
With MP 4030 = 1 you can switch to the new axis marker interface of the PLC. Here the new
words W1024 to W1060 are used instead of the previous markers.
If MP 4030 = 0 the markers are active as before and the new words from W1024 to W1060 can
then be used as desired.
The following PLC words are used when MP 4030 = 1 instead of the corresponding bit marker:
Words
W1024 Axis release
W1026 Axes into position
W1028 Reserved
W1030 Traverse direction negative
W1032 Reference marks not yet traversed
W1034 Limit switch plus
W1036 Limit switch minus
W1038 Preparing to open the control loop
W1040 Opening the control loop
W1042 Reserved
W1044 Actual-to-nominal value transfer
W1046 Manual direction key plus
W1048 Direction keys manual minus
W1050 Jog increment plus
W1052 Jog increment minus
W1054 Reference limit switch
W1056 Lubrication pulse
W1058 Acknowledgment of lub. pulse
W1060 Reserved
Markers
(M2000...)
(M2008...)
(M2160...)
(M2136...)
(M2624...)
(M2625...)
(M2492...)
(M2544...)
(M2552...)
(M2456...)
(M2457...)
(M2512...)
(M2513...)
(M2556...)
(M2012...)
(M2548...)
W1062 Axis-specific disabling of handwheel pulse

W1064 ... W1098 Reserved
New PLC Module 9040

Module 9040 Read axis positions
Call:
PS
K/B/W/D Destination address (Dxxxx) for coordinate value of the first axis;
The coordinate values of the further axes are saved in the five following
double words;
PS
K/B/W/D Coordinate type to be read 0..4
0: Actual value
1: Nominal value
2: Reference value
3: Following error
4: Distance-to-go
CM 9040
M3171 = 1 if error occurs during execution of the module
1-4
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
3/2000
New PLC Module 9221

Module 9221 Start PLC positioning
Call
PS
B/W/D/K
PS
B/W/D/K
PS
B/W/D/K
CM 9221
PL
B/W/D
<axis> 0..4 = X .. 5th axis

<target position in the reference system> (0,001 mm)
<feed rate> (mm/min)
<error code>
Error code :
0: No error, positioning started
1: Error
M3171 = 1 if error occurs during execution of the module
3/2000
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
1-5
Filing instructions
This Update Information issue includes a set of replacement sheets for your Technical Manual
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306. Please incorporate them into your Manual, following the filing
instructions below.
Change
Title page March 1997
Update Information
Introduction
Page 2-9 Software releases
Chapter 5 Machine parameters
Page 5-7
Page 5-17
Page 5-26
Page 5-28
Chapter 6 Marker and Words
New markers and words
Chapter 7 PLC programming
Contents
Page 7-84 BTX
Page 7-85 BCX
Page 7-86 BSX
Page 7-108 to 7-123 structured
instructions, new PLC Modules
1-6
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Remove
Title page
Introduction
Page 2-9, 2-10
Insert
New title page
New chapter Introduction
Page 2-9, 2-10
Page 5-7, 5-8

Page 5-17, 5-18
Page 5-25, 5-26
Page 5-27, 5-28
List of markers and words
Page 5-7, 5-8

Page 5-17, 5-18
Page 5-25, 5-26
Page 5-27, 5-28
New list of markers and
words
Contents
Page 7-83, 7-84 BTX
Page 7-85 BCX
Page 7-86 BSX
Page 7-107 to 7-120
New Contents
Page 7-83, 7-84 BTX
Page 7-85 BCX
Page 7-86 BSX
Page 7-107 to 7-124
3/2000

The new TNC 416 control for electrical discharge machining is being introduced in early 1999. It
supersedes the TNC 406, which will be removed from the product program in the autumn.
The TNC 416 consists of the following components:
LE 416D Logic Unit for BC 120 (CRT)
or as an alternative:
LE 416D Logic Unit for BF 120 (TFT)
Id. Nr. 336 486-3x
Id. Nr. 313 038-01
BC 120 Visual Display Unit

Id. Nr. 313 037-01

(10.4-inch color flat panel display)
Id. Nr. 313 506-01
Id. Nr. 336 487-3x
The hardware design of the LE 416D corresponds to that of the new HEIDENHAIN logic units
LE 4xxM. Please note this when using the LE.
For installation instructions, dimensions, and connector layout for the new components, please refer
to Chapter 3 "Mounting and electrical installation.
Please note that the LE 416D has no TTL position encoder inputs. All position encoder inputs are
1 VPP or 11APP, switchable by machine parameter MP115.0 (see Chapter 5 List of machine
parameters).
The LE 416D is supplied with Id. Nr. 286 180-xx software
The features of the TNC 416 with software version 286 180-01 are the same as those on the
TNC 406 with software version 280 620-08. PLC programs that can run on the TNC 406 (software
280 620-08), can also run on the TNC 416.
Software version 1 for the TNC 416 was released in March 1999.
3/99
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
1-1
Software version 8 for the TNC 406 was released in March 1999.

MP331.0-4 Distance per number of signal periods out of MP332
Input: 0.001 to 99 999.999 [mm or ]

MP332.0-4 Number of signal periods in the distance from MP331
Input: 1 to 16 777 215

MP334.0-4 Distance between reference marks for encoders with distance-coded reference
marks
Input:
0 to 65535 [grating periods]
0=1000 grating periods (standard setting)
New Restore Position function

After pressing the manual soft key to switch to manual operation, you can now use the
handwheel to move axes in the stopped condition (NC stop, internal stop). With the then
available Restore position soft key and the NC start key you can return to the starting position
in the sequence determined via soft key. Then you can resume machining by pressing the NC
start key.
Cycle 16 has been changed

To reduce the risk of collision, in Cycles 16 when PAT 4 or 5 is entered, the electrode is now
retracted first on the erosion path and then to the starting point.
Key codes are available for RR, RL, CL PGM, and EXT (already in version 07).
RR =
$1BE
RL =
$1BF
EXT =
$1CD
CL PGM = $1CC
New word W586

The analog voltage on analog output 6 (X8 Pin 8) is determined by the value in word W586.
The value is to be entered in mV, i.e., the value range is +/ 10 000 mV, which is +/ 10 volts.
New marker M2187 (already in version 07)

The error messages gross positioning error ... and measuring system defective... are now
no longer shown blinking. The machine is switched off through EMERGENCY STOP, and M2191
(emergency stop) and M2187 (control loop error) are set. Pressing the CE key after the
emergency stop circuit is closed clears the error message. When the "measuring system
defective..." error occurs, the control makes a reference run after the error message is
acknowledged.
1-2
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
3/99
Filing instructions
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306. Please incorporate them into your Manual, following the filing
instructions below.
Change
Title page March 1997
Update Information
Introduction
Mounting and electrical installation
New machine parameters
Remove
Title page
Introduction
Mounting and electrical
installation
New markers and words
3/99
TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306
Insert
New title page
New chapter Introduction
New chapter Mounting and
electrical installation
New list of machine
parameters
New list of markers and
words
1-3

Software version 7 for the TNC 406 was released at the end of December 1998.
The new software version introduces the following new features:
1. New Functions in the PLC

1.1 Note! Changed key codes for the disabling, enabling and simulating of keys!
All PLC programs that use the previous key codes must be changed! The old key codes are no
longer available! The new key codes are the same as those of the TNC 426/TNC 430.
The markers for the disabling, enabling and simulating of keys have been eliminated and the
following modules have been introduced:
Module 9180 key simulation,
Module 9181/9183 disabling of individual keys/groups of keys,
Module 9182/9184 enabling of individual keys/groups of keys.
The module calls must be programmed as follows:
Key simulation
PS B/W/D/K <PLC key code (Word : 0x0000...0xFFFF)>
CM 9180
PL B/W/D <Status/Error code>
0: PLC key code was accepted and the key was simulated
1-16: PLC key(s) have not yet been simulated
-1: Key code > maximum value
-2: Key code invalid
-3: Key queue overrun
M3171 = 0 if module execution was successful, 1 if not
Disabling of individual NC keys by the PLC
CM 9181
PL B/W/D <Status/Error code>
0: NC key was disabled
Enabling of individual NC keys by the PLC
CM 9182
PL B/W/D <Error code>
0: NC key was enabled
1/98
TNC406/TNC 306
1-1
Disabling of a group of NC keys by the PLC

PS B/W/D/K <PLC group code>
0 : All keys
1-7 : 1st to 7th key group
CM 9183
0: Group of NC keys was disabled
-1: Group code > maximum value
Enabling of a group of NC keys by the PLC
PS B/W/D/K <PLC group code>
0 : All keys
1-7 : 1st to 7th key group
CM 9184
0: Group of NC keys was enabled
-1: Group code > Maximum value
The groups of keys are arranged as follows:
0: All keys
1: ASCII keys
2: Soft keys
3: Cursor keys
4: Numerical keys
5: Operating mode keys
6: Block opening keys
7: Axis keys
Example: Disabling the operating mode keys
PS K+5
;Operating mode group
CM 9183
;Disable group of keys
PLW
= K+0
;If disabling OK
CMT ...
;Output acknowledgment
Example: Key simulation
If an existing PLC program is already using the key simulation, it can be quickly fixed with the
following code:
L M2813
CMT 790
EM
;KEY STROBE LOCAL

;SEND KEY CODE
;END OF MAIN PROGRAM
LBL 790
L M980
JPT 799
;WAIT FOR PROCESSING

;KEY CODE ALREADY FIXED
PS W516
CM 9180
PL W240
L W240
< K+0
JPT 795
;SEND KEY CODE

;RETURN CODE
;ERROR
L W240
1-2
TNC 406/TNC 306
1/98
= K+0
JPT 791
;KEY WAS PROCESSED
SN M980
;SET: WAIT FOR PROCESSING
LBL 791
EM
LBL 795
EM
LBL 799
PS K+0
CM 9180
PLW
= K+0
R M980
R M2813
EM
;ERROR HANDLING KEY SIMULATION
;ASK WHETHER KEY HAS BEEN SIMULATED
;KEY PROCESSED
M980 and W240 can be replaced by any free markers/words. M2813 and W516 no longer evaluate
the PLC.
1.2 New and Changed Markers and Words

M2826 added: Disable handwheel feed rate
M2826 disables the feed rate of the handwheel.
M2552 and following changed: Actual position capture
With markers M2552 and following you can capture an actual value as a nominal value with clamped
axes and at the same time monitor the limit switches. This permits the servo lag to be set to 0 for
an axis that has been taken out of the control loop with the clamping markers 2492 and following,
and 2544 and following. Up to now these markers were active only in manual operation. Now they
are effective for every clamped axis regardless of the control operating mode.
D748 added: Free rotation of a second angular axis
If the 5th axis has also been defined as angle axis (A or B), you can switch on the free rotation of
this axis (behavior is similar to ROT-C) by loading the PLC doubleword D748 with the speed value
(e.g. 10 000 for 10 rpm). By loading a negative value you can reverse the direction of rotation. An M
function as with ROT-C is not required.
W490 added: Control temperature
The PLC word W490 contains the control temperature in degrees Celsius.
PLC functions keys A,B,C on the HR 410
The three PLC function keys on the HR 410 are now effective in all operating modes.
2. New Functions for the Control Loop and for Commissioning

Higher resolution in the position control loop
The previous resolution of 1 m for the internal position values has been increased to 1/16 m. This
enables more exact positioning and gap control. The entire control loop has been redeveloped and
the calculation of the feedforward voltage for gap control has been completely redesigned. Also, a
filter was integrated that is automatically activated for eight control loop cycles if a step in the
feedforward voltage is too large.
1/98
TNC406/TNC 306
1-3
Integrated 4-channel storage oscilloscope

The integrated storage oscilloscope can record various values in the position control loop as well as
all PLC data. The oscilloscope is activated in MOD by a soft key. Machine adjustment has now been
greatly simplified because you no longer need any external devices. You can create oscillograms in a
connected PC by using the screen dump function of TNCremo as of version 3.00.
MP7365 added: Colors of the oscilloscope
MP 7365.0: Background
$000000
MP 7365.1: Channel 1
$003F3F
$3F3F00
$003F00
$3F1230
MP 7365.5: Reserved
$000000
MP 7365.6: Grating
$30200C
MP 7365.7: Cursor and text $3F3F3F
The various functions of the oscilloscope can be selected with the aid of soft keys. With the cursor
keys on the keyboard you can switch channels and move the screen cursor. In the setup menu you
can select the various inputs with ENT/NOENT.
Step output has been expanded
The step response time measured with the integrated oscilloscope can be edited. The control
calculates the associated value for MP1060 (acceleration) and displays it.
One further soft key (INPUT RAMP) has been added. This produces an increasing (+) or decreasing
() ramp on the analog input. If a channel is switched to the analog input and another to the feed
rate, it can be used to graphically display the programmed input characteristic (MPs 2010, ...2070, ...)
during an active erosion process (electrode in the air!).
New code numbers for machine commissioning
For debugging, under the code number 105296 or 415263 (like TNC 410) you will find the following
menu for machine commissioning (setup):
OFFSET COMPENSATION
OUTPUT STEP FUNCTION
PLC FUNCTIONS
MACHINE PARAMETER PROGRAMMING
COMPENSATION VALUE LIST
(Here also you can go into the parameter list)

(Trace: here also you can go into the oscilloscope)
Under the code number 79513 you will find the following menu and the corresponding data outputs
on RS-232-C:
DIALOG CODE NUMBERS OUTPUT
LOGBOOK OUTPUT
PROGRAM RUN DATA OUTPUT
MACHINE PARAMETER OUTPUT
(All control dialogs and numbers)

(Contents of log)
(Data from geometry module to control loop)
(Machine parameters)
Because this is purely data output, the code number 79513 can be given to any end user.
MP1710.x removed: Position monitoring for operation with servo lag (can be deleted)
MP1710.x was removed. The control multiplies the value of the normal servo lag by 1.5 and uses
the product as limit for servo-lag monitoring (erasable error message). A value of 1.8 * servo lag
should therefore be used for MP1720.x.
1-4
TNC 406/TNC 306
1/98
MP1141 removed: Maximum voltage between two control loop cycles

MP1141 was removed because the acceleration monitoring is now automatic.
MP2190 removed: Constant speed for timing
MP1530 added: Overshoot behavior during acceleration with feedforward
MP1530 has been added. It influences the overshoot behavior during acceleration in the gap control
in feedforward mode.
Input: 0 to 0.999
If MP1530 is programmed to equal 0, the standard value 0.25 is used.
MP1540 added: Braking behavior during feedforward
MP1540 is also new. It influences braking to a target in feedforward mode.
Input: 0 to 0.999
If MP1530 is programmed to equal 0, the standard value 0.5 is used.
MP 1550 added: Filter for feedforward
1 = Switch off the filter in the feedforward voltages
MP7655 added: Positioning with the handwheel
1 = Positioning with the handwheel is also effective in the PROGRAMMING AND EDITING mode of
operation.
MP7290.0-5 added: Display step
MP 7290 (axis-specific) sets the display step of the position values. The finest resolution is 1/10 m.
Value of MP
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Resolution of display
m
inch
0.1 m
0.00001
0.5 m
0.00002
1 m
0.0001 (previous resolution)
5 m
0.0002
10 m
0.001
50 m
0.002
100 m 0.01
MP2060 removed: Erosion feed rate for M2620

MP2060 (erosion feed rate if marker 2620 is set) was removed. If the function is needed for special
applications, you can use MP2081=1 to realize a two-position control without characteristic curve.
An other possibility: The threshold for free-run feed rate from MP2141 can be defined with W520
(0..500).
Error handling in the control loop changed
The error messages "gross positioning error ..." and "... measuring system defective" no longer result
in a black screen with blinking error message. Rather they are now shown in the normal error line.
The machine is switched off by an EMERGENCY STOP and the markers M2191 (EMERGENCY
STOP) and M2187 (control loop error) are set. In the event of a "... measuring system defective"
error, after you acknowledge the error message by pressing CE and the EMERGENCY STOP circuit
is reclosed, the control goes into the reference run mode.
1/98
TNC406/TNC 306
1-5
3. New Functions for Programming and Operation

New Cycle 16 ORBIT
Cycle 16 ORBIT was developed from Cycle 17 with additional parameters for more functions. All
input values except the M functions can be transferred by Q parameter. Cycle 17 can therefore
completely replace Cycle 17.
Example:
CYCL DEF 16.0 ORBIT
CYCL DEF 16.1 IZ-5.02 M36
CYCL DEF 16.2 RAD=20.014 DIR=0
CYCL DEF 16.3 PAT=0 SPO=0
Input value and dialogs:
16.1: IZ-5.02
Eroding axis and depth
16.1: M36
Miscellaneous function M
16.2: RAD=20.014 Expansion radius
16.2: DIR=0
Orbit direction (0=CCW, 1=CW)
16.3: PAT=0
Expansion pattern (0...5)
16.3: SPO=0
Sparking out condition (0/1)
(Q-Parameter)
(Q-Parameter)
(Q-Parameter)
(Q-Parameter)
(Q-Parameter)
PAT (=expansion pattern)

0 = Continuous widening on a circular path with simultaneous plunging in the erosion axis, gap
control on revolving oblique vector; retraction with Timing/Cycle Stop on oblique vector to the
starting point
1 = Same as 0, but with quadratic instead of circular expansion
2 = Orbital erosion with constant radius, gap control only in erosion axis, retraction with
Timing/Cycle Stop on oblique vector to the starting point
4 = Execution in 2 phases (new):
1. Erosion in radius to final radius with simultaneous erosion in erosion axis to final depth at 0
degree angle. Gap control on vector.
2. Expansion on circular path with constant final radius, gap control on the circular path, but
retraction with Timing/Cycle Stop on oblique vector to the starting point.
SPO (=sparking out condition)
0 = End sparking out if final radius has been reached and the sparking-out time (MP2110 or Cycle 4)
has expired (fast sparking out)
1 = End sparking out if final radius has been reached and there have been 1 revolutions of
continuous free-running (M2616) (complete sparking out)
1-6
TNC 406/TNC 306
1/98
Change in Cycle 17 DISK, MOD 2 Orbiting

Up to now, with the expansion mode MOD 2, during timing the TNC has retracted the electrode first
in the erosion axis and then in the direction of the center of orbital movement. Now the TNC retracts
the electrode as in MOD 3 in the direction of the starting point. The gap control during orbital sinking
is as before only in the erosion axis.
CYCL DEF 17.0 DISK
CYCL DEF 17.1 IZ-x.xxx M36
CYCL DEF 17.2 RAD=y.yyy MOD=0..7
MOD (0...7)
Bit 1 and bit 0:
00 = Circular expansion together with sinking (corresponds to PAT = 0 in Cycle 16)
01 = Quadratic expansion together with sinking (corresponds to PAT = 1 in Cycle 16)
10 = Orbital sinking with retraction to starting point (corresponds to PAT = 2 in Cycle 16)
11 = Same as 10
Bit 2:
0 = Terminate sparking out if final radius has been reached and the sparking-out duration (MP2110
or Cycle 4) has expired (fast sparking out, corresponds to SPO = 0 in Cycle 16)
1 = Terminate sparking out if final radius has been reached and there have been 11/4 revolutions
of continuous free running (M2616 complete sparking out, corresponds to SPO = 1 in Cycle 16)
Change in Cycle 19: WORKING PLANE: Tilting the working plane
The datum of the tilting motion is now identical with the manually set datum (as in the milling
machine controls TNC 426/TNC 430). The TNC shows the tilting angle in the graphic status after the
soft key STATUS TILT has been pressed. If there is a basic rotation, it is calculated into the tilt in the
basic axis of rotation. The TOUCH PROBE cycle is also possible in the tilted system (through a 3-D
straight line).
Probing with the electronic handwheel
If the short circuit monitor (MP 7651=0) is active, you can probe with the electronic handwheel. If
the electrode makes contact with the workpiece during probing with the electronic handwheel (short
circuit), then the TNC stops the positioning in the direction of the workpiece and permits traverse
only in the opposite direction. It is also impossible to switch axes. The TNC permits normal operation
again if the electrode is retracted by at least 100 m. The short circuit monitoring during handwheel
positioning for a reference run is not active in this form.
Coping files
Now you can copy files in the PROGRAMMING AND EDITING mode of operation.
MP7300 has been expanded and is now bit-coded:
MP 7300 was expanded from 1 bit to 3:
Bit 0:
1= Delete program data and display status with PGM END or M02, which means that PGM END
or M02 function like a program selection or the reset soft key (function unchanged).
new:
Bit 1:
1 = Do not delete Q parameters when program is selected or reset soft key is pressed
Bit 2:
1 = Do not delete tool data and Q parameters when program is selected or reset soft key is
pressed.
The Q parameters are always deleted after power interruption, and the tool data are always retained.
1/98
TNC406/TNC 306
1-7

Software version 6 for the TNC 406 was released at the beginning of December 1997.
The new software version introduces the following new features:
Change in MP1700
The PLC cycle time is now fixed at 40 ms.
The position loop cycle, 2 or 4 ms, remains definable with MP 1700:
0 = 4 ms --> machine with normal acceleration
1 = reserved (same as 0)
2 = 2 ms --> Machine with high acceleration >1 m/s*s
PLC utilization, new marker M2188

The PLC utilization for 100% is fixed, as before, to 5 ms.
The maximum possible utilization was increased from 200 to 240%.
If you exceed the utilization by 240%, which corresponds to a PLC program run time of
12 ms, the control goes into the blinking error condition ERROR IN PLC PROGRAM 53.
If you exceed the utilization by 230% the new PLC marker M2188 is set as warning. If the
utilization falls below 230% the marker is reset.
New machine parameters MP710 and MP 711

MP710 backlash compensation for 4th axis; Input -1.000 to +1.000 mm
MP711 backlash compensation for 5th axis; Input -1.000 to +1.000 mm
(With this amount of play, effective gap control is no longer possible).
Datum tables / Position tables

More than one position table xxxxxxxx.D can now be defined.
MP10 defines whether a table is generated with 4 or 5 axes.
The block CYCL DEF 7.2 NAME has been added to Cycle 7. This makes it possible to select the
desired position table. If you want only a table definition without a shift, you must program a
#0 as datum number.
If NAME is not programmed, the control accesses the table 0.D. If the selected table is
missing, an error message appears.
If a CYCL 7.2 NAME was executed, all further access refers only to this table (M38, M39).
A selected table is displayed in the status window.
Changes in MP410
MP410 defines the identifier of the 4th axis.
A linear axis can also be defined as 4th axis.
Input values:
0/1/2/3/4/5 = A/B/C/U/V/W
A/B/C = angular axes
U/V/W = linear axis
MP410 (4th axis) and MP411 (5th axis) must have different values. For machines with angular
axis and secondary linear axis, the angular axis must be programmed as 4th axis and the linear
axis as 5th axis.
Machine parameter MP2130 has been removed

In order to avoid exceeding permissible machine accelerations resulting from gap control signals,
the acceleration of the input signal (gap value) has been limited to the lowest acceleration of the
axes involved. Machine parameter MP2130 is therefore obsolete and has been removed.
3/98
TNC406/TNC 306
1-1
New possibilities for infeed in free run

If the voltage of the analog input (W392) lies above the value from W520 (if W520 > 0), the
electrode moves into the workpiece at the free-run feed rate from MP2141.
Change in MP2081
With MP2081 = 2 you can transfer the comparison of the actual gap with the nominal gap (from
W524) out of the generator and into the control. This is the same procedure as when MP 2081 =
1 except that, instead of using the subsequent two-point controller, it uses the characteristic
curve. The feed rate for the control is calculated from the characteristic curve.
To transfer the comparison function to the control, make the following change in the PLC
program:
The gap nominal value for good in the PLC must be read from the corresponding parameter
(GV) of the current generator setting, calculated to 0...500, and loaded to W524. The threshold
for the free-run feed rate must be loaded to W520.
e.g.
L B671
X K+5
= W524
L K+450
= W520
;GV nominal Gap Voltage (from erosion parameter)

;5..495 (=nominal Gap)
;for example 4.5
;= threshold for free-run feed rate (0...500)
The complete input curve for MP2081=0 or 2 can now also be changed from the PLC. Before the
PLC run, the PLC words 599 ... 597 are always loaded from the machine parameters MP2010 ...
MP2030. If you change the curve, you must also change the values in W588 ... B597 in the PLC.
After the PLC scan, the control uses these values for the characteristic curve.
The exact assignment is:
Rising characteristic curve before the kink point in thousandths
0.1 ... 10.0 ==> 100 ... 10000 in thousandths
W588 for positive feed rate
(MP2010.0)
W590 for negative feed rate
(MP2010.1)
Characteristic curve after kink point: Multiplication factor
0.1 ... 10.0 ==> 100 ... 10000 in thousandths
W592 positive
(MP2020.0)
W594 negative
(MP2020.1)
Kink as a percentage of the characteristic curve
0 ... 100%
B596 positive
(MP2030.0)
B597 negative
(MP2030.1)
New bytes and words

B396
MOD from Cycle 17 disk (0..7)
B397
Axis from Cycle 17 disk 0/1/2 = X/Y/Z
W398
Actual feed rate
It is now possible to input MOD via Q parameters in Cycle 17 Disk.
The status window also displays the values of feed rate and angular position when running the
disk cycle. If the control is set to inch values, the feed rate is shown in tenths of an inch.
1-2
TNC 406/TNC 306
3/98
Servo Sensitivity SV is no longer read directly out of the corresponding byte of the erosion table,
but rather from the new byte B763. During control with a table, SV is automatically transferred to
B763. During control without a table (MP2199=0), the value of the corresponding SV-Q
parameter in the PLC program can be transferred to B763, and SV can therefore be changed
during erosion.
The step-output function was modified so that the duration of output can be determined by
pressing the key. This also makes it possible to move across larger distances with constant
voltage.
Markers 2688 and following (switching off monitoring functions in the control loop) was removed
to ensure safety.

With the new MP 7651 you can select whether the short circuit monitoring during manual
handwheel traversing is switched on or off.
Input:
0 = Switch short-circuit monitoring on
1 = Switch short-circuit monitoring off
New Cycle 4 SPARK OUT TIME

The new Cycle 4 enables you to program the sparking out time during erosion in the range of
1...9999 seconds. This value remains effective until another Cycle 4 is run or the part program is
reselected. After reset or reselection the value from MP2110 becomes effective.
Comment blocks are now also saved if they begin with a semicolon ; are now also saved. The
binary format of an NC block limits the string length of these comment blocks to 22 characters.
As before, comment blocks that begin with an asterisk * are not saved.
A comment block is editable only if it begins with a semicolon. A comment can be
inserted only between the NC blocks. It is not possible to insert a comment at the end of an NC
block.
Change in MP2081
The input range for MP2050 was expanded from 0..2 mm to 0..20 mm.
New Cycle 19 WORKING PLANE for tilting the working plane

Now you can program up to three tilt angles for the axes A, B and C. The tilt angles are shown in
a special status window. The control uses the entered angle to calculate movement in axes X, Y
and Z. Positioning commands are executed in the tilted plane if Cycle 19 has been run and at the
same time an OEM cycle or the disk cycle is being run. Positioning commands outside an OEM
cycle and PLC positioning commands are always executed in an untilted plane.
The tilting point is the disk origin for Cycle 17 Disk, or the starting point of an OEM cycle
(30...99). The OEM cycle can be composed of any linear blocks and disks. Circles are not
possible in a tilted OEM cycle, which is indicated by the error message CIRCLE TILTING NOT
POSSIBLE.
3/98
TNC406/TNC 306
1-3
Filing instructions
This Update Information issue includes a set of replacement sheets for your Technical Manual TNC
406/TNC 306. Please incorporate them into your Manual, following the filing instructions below.
Change
Title page April 1996
1-4
TNC 406/TNC 306
Remove
Title page
Insert
New title page
1-1 to 1-2
3/98

Software version 15 for the TNC 306 was released at the end of November 1996.
Software version 16 for the TNC 306 was released at the end of January 1997.
Software version 5 for the TNC 406 was released at the beginning of February 1997.
The new software version 15 of TNC 306 introduces the following new features:
If M36 is active while the "Touch Probe" cycle is running, M37 is automatically output (erosion
switched off).
Functions for HR 410 handwheel are available.
Output of a step function for machine adjustment

Under the code number 105296 it is possible to start the output of a step function (analog
voltage). The step is adjustable in amplitude (voltage or feed rate) and duration through the arrow
keys. The axis is selected through the axis key. With the step function you can optimize the
servo amplifier adjustment and find the values for acceleration and Kv.
Sampling rate of the analog signal for gap control

The digital scanning rate of the analog input is now 1 ms. This means that for each cycle, four
analog values are read and their mean value is accounted for in the following control-loop cycle (4
ms). This makes it possible to read input frequencies up to 250 Hz.
New gap control via gap signal

New MP2081
Input value = 0 analog input = velocity signal (previous type of gap control)
= 1 analog input = gap signal (new type of gap control)
The previous definition of the analog input for gap control requires that the actual sparking gap is
compared with the nominal spark gap (difference formation for velocity signal) in the generator
(MP2081=0, analog input = velocity signal).
Now you can switch MP2081=1 (analog input = gap signal) so that the values are compared in
the control software. The nominal value is read from the PLC word W524; the actual value is
found in W392. A value of 0 to 500 in W392 corresponds to 0 to 5 volts at the analog input. In
the generator a signal must be formed corresponding to the instantaneous status of the sparking
gap (too small / good / too large).
The following commands are needed in the PLC program for control by gap signal:
- The factor for backward feed rate must be loaded in W522.
- The gap nominal value for "good" must be read in the PLC from the corresponding parameter
(GV, B671) of the active generator setting, converted to a value from 0 to 500 and loaded in
W524.
- The threshold must be loaded in W520.
3/97
TNC406/TNC 306
1-1
Example of PLC program:

L
=
L
X
=
L
+
=
K+140
W522
B671
K+5
W524
W524
K+150
W520
;e.g. factor 1.4

;Factor for backward feed rate
;GV Gap Voltage nominal (from erosion parameter)
;5...495 (=nominal Gap)
;nominal Gap
;Calculate threshold for free-run feed rate
;Threshold for free run feed rate
Feed-rate calculation when MP2081 = 1

The voltage at the analog input is compared with the value from W524 and is calculated for
forward motion as follows:
The analog input voltage is greater than the value from W520; the electrode is moved at the freerun feed rate from MP2141.
Otherwise,
F = MP2142 * SV (Servo Sensitivity [%]).
Example: 50 * 20% = 10 mm/min.
The analog input voltage is calculated for backward motion as follows:
F = MP2142 * SV (Servo Sensitivity [%]) * W522;
Example: 50 * 20% * 1.4 = 14 mm/min
If a short circuit is reported through the fast input X12, the electrode is returned at the feed rate
from MP 2133 (input value > 0).
Calculation example of a control-loop cycle (clc) of 4 ms (1 min = 15000 clc):
MP2142 = 50 mm/min and SV=60% results in a forward velocity at the gap of
F = 50 mm/min * 0.6 = 30 mm/min.
F = 30 mm/min = 30 000 m / 15000 clc = 2 m/clc.
Therefore the electrode is moved forward or backward by 2 m per control-loop cycle.
These very small feed rates permit a stable gap control. The optimum setting for GV and SV
must be found for the particular machining application.
According to the formula:
a=V/t
a change in direction where
V = (+30 30*1.4) = 72 mm/min
and
t = 4 ms
results in the acceleration
a = 72 mm / (4 ms * 60 s) = 1.2 m / 4 s * s = 0.300 m/s2.
If the machine can no longer achieve this acceleration, the gap control becomes unstable.
If MP2081=1, the following machine parameters of the input characteristic for conventional gap
control are no longer applicable:
MP2010 to MP2030, MP2060, MP2070, MP2080, MP2131 and MP 2132.
1-2
TNC 406/TNC 306
3/97
The following machine parameters and PLC words are applicable when MP2081=1:
MP 2133 Retraction velocity for short circuit during erosion; short circuit is quickly detected
through X12. (MP 2133 has no function if = 0.)
MP 2141 Free-run feed rate forward if analog voltage has crossed the threshold.
MP 2142 Feed rate for gap control at SV=100%
W520
Threshold for positioning with free-run feed rate from MP2141 value range 0 to 500
(corresponds to the voltages 0 to 5 V).
W522
Factor for gap feed rate backwards

Value range 0 to 1000 (corresponds to factor 0.0 to 10.0).
W524
Nominal value of sparking gap (GV)

Value range 0 to 500 (corresponds to 0 to 5 V
New M function M93, backward positioning

The new M function M93 was introduced to make it simpler to program the OEM cycle
necessary for erosion of vector cavities and star cavities. Erosion blocks (also circle / helix) that
are programmed with this M function are automatically repositioned to the starting point after
execution (as in the disk cycle). M93 is permitted only when M36 is active.
Improvement of the function for erosion with time limit

Cycle 2 (eroding with time limit) is also effective for erosion blocks with M93.
New marker M2189

M2189 is set by the NC if an error message is displayed from the PLC by error markers M2924
to M3123. PLC error messages are deleted by resetting the error marker or by pressing the CE
key.
The input range for MP 1060.x (acceleration) was changed to the values 0.01 to 9.0.
The input range for MP 330.x (resolution of encoder) was changed to the values 1 to 360 ([m or
1/1000 degrees] per encoder period. For square-wave inputs, the encoder must be equipped
with a 5-fold EXE if it has distance-coded reference marks (MP1350). If an angular axis is
connected to a square-wave input, the encoder must output 90 000 pulses per revolution (ppr) or
a divisor thereof.
Example:
For a rotary encoder and 5-fold EXE (square-wave input): (RON 275 C or ROD 270 C)
18 000 ppr * 5 = 90 000 ppr
MP330 = 4 (min. value for square wave)
9 000 ppr * 5 = 45 000 ppr
MP330 = 8
If an angular axis is connected to sinusoidal inputs, the encoder must output a total of 360 000 or
a divisor thereof:
ROD 4xx with 2000 ppr * transmission ratio 180 (no EXE) = 360 000
MP330=1
ROD 4xx with 1000 ppr * transmission ratio 180 (no EXE) = 180 000
MP330=2
ROD 4xx with 1000 ppr * transmission ratio 90 (no EXE)
= 90 000
MP330=4
ROD 4xx with 3000 ppr without transmission ration
=
3 000
MP330=120
3/97
TNC406/TNC 306
1-3
Machine parameters MP7470 and MP7274 are axis-specific

The MPs 7470.0 and 7274.0 are assigned to the 4th axis (MP410).
The MPs 7470.1 and 7274.1 are assigned to the 5th axis(MP411).
New machine parameter MP2052 for advanced switch-on distance

Input value = 0...2.0 [mm]
In MP2052 you can enter an advanced switch-on distance. This makes it possible to switch on
the oscillator signal of the generator earlier during workpiece reapproach after timing (marker
M2780). The control then receives a correct analog gap signal during the transition from
positioning to gap control.
New machine parameter MP7241 for the NC blocks EL CALL and WP CALL
(See below for description of EL CALL and WP CALL)
Input value = 0 NC blocks disabled
= 1 NC blocks enabled
New machine parameter MP2081 for gap control

Input value = 0 Analog input corresponds to the velocity signal (previous type of gap control)
= 1 Analog input corresponds to the gap signal (new type of gap control)
New machine parameter MP5200 for the baud rate of the RS-422 interface
Input value = 0 baud rate is 9 600
= 1 baud rate is 38 400

Input value = 0
Disable OEM fonts display
= 1 to 9 Enable OEM-Fonts display, the number sets the distance in pixels
between any 2 characters on the screen
Machine parameter MP5030 (baud rate after reset) was canceled. After reset the baud rate is
always 9600.
The input range for MP 1060.x (accelerations) was changed to 0.01 ... 9.0.
The input range for MP 330.x (resolution of encoder) was changed to 1 to 360 [m or 1/1000
degrees] per encoder signal period.
For more information see above description of new features for TNC 306.
New PLC word D400

D400 = angle of rotation (basic rotation)
New marker M2189

If a PLC error message is displayed (one or more error markers 2924 and following is set), then
marker M2189 is set. PLC error messages are erased after the error message is reset or by
pressing the CE key.
1-4
TNC 406/TNC 306
3/97
New soft key under code number 98 148

The new soft key "SETUP COLORS" enables you to adjust the colors red, green, and blue in the
machine parameter for the respective color. You can mix the colors for foreground and
background separately and accept the change with ENT. Pressing END terminates without
changing the color.
Change in reading the analog input for gap control

The digital sampling rate of the analog input is now 1 or 0.5 ms, i.e., each time four analog values
are read and the mean value is used in the following control loop cycle (4/2 ms). This makes it
possible to acquire input frequencies up to max. 250 / 500 Hz.
TOUCH-PROBE functions
If M36 is active when the TOUCH PROBE cycle is executed, M37 is output automatically
(erosion switched off). The selection of the TOUCH PROBE functions was assigned to soft keys.
The datum number can be entered directly in the TOUCH PROBE basic menu. This eliminates
the need to make the datum selection beforehand through Q80.
Output of a step function for machine adjustment

Under the code number 105296 the output of a step function can be activated. The issued step,
activated over the OUTPUT STEP soft key, is adjustable in amplitude (voltage or feed rate) and
pulse duration through the arrow keys. The axis is selected by axis key. The step function makes
it possible to best adjust the servo amplifier and define the values for acceleration and Kv.
Output of dialogs
Under the code number 105 296 it is possible to activate the output of dialogs. The following
control dialogs can be output in the adjusted language with the corresponding dialog number
through the RS-232 port under NAME.CNC (in connection with TNC.EXE):
all NC control dialogs
DIA:
all NC error messages
ERR:
all dialogs of the table editor
TAB:
all PLC dialogs from PLC chip PLC:
all cycle dialogs from PLC chip CYC:
This makes it possible, for example, to proofread the control dialogs and the dialogs on the PLC
chip for correctness of translation and spelling.
Output of analog values

On connector X8, pin 8 you can output the analog values by selecting the code number 79 513
and the function SELECT SOURCE FOR ANALOG OUTPUT.
The following analog values are selectable:
1. Analog value from PLC word 524, value in mV (default setting)
2. Actual velocity of the selected axis (derived from the actual position value)
3. Servo lag of the selected axis
4. Nominal velocity (analog output) of the axis
5. Reference input variable of the axis (derived from the nominal position value)
6. Erosion velocity of the axis
The analog values can also be output during execution.
3/97
TNC406/TNC 306
1-5
Output of a logbook (Menu item LOGBOOK OUTPUT under code number 79 513)
Until now, the contents of the control's internal logbook (keys, error messages, PLC messages,
blinking error register) have been accessible only with TNCDIAG.EXE. Now you can access them
directly via RS-232 by using NAME.LNC (in TNC.EXE). This makes it possible, for example, to log
any data from the PLC during the erosion process (with Module 9079) and output them through
the RS-232 interface during or at the conclusion of erosion. If a blinking error message has
occurred at the control, after a restart you can now determine the sequence of keystrokes prior
to the error.
Upper screen switchover key

With this key you can now switch directly between the normal operating modes and the MOD
functions. By pressing MOD one also accesses this second user interface.
The display and manual editing of Q parameters was also moved to this interface and is
activated with the soft key Q-PAR. During program run all Q parameters can be checked; they
can be changed when the program run is stopped.
Expanded timing function (TIME.W)

In the Program Run mode the pointer can be set to the beginning of the timing table TIME.W by
pressing the PGM NR and ENT or the soft key RESET. If there is no table yet, it will automatically
be generated during program start.
If a new generator setting goes to the PLC during execution of a program, the program
name, block number, tool number, datum table, datum number, power stage, erosion parameter
table, and the current machining time are registered in the table. The time difference from an
earlier generator setting is calculated and saved in the line of the previous power stage (operating time of the previous power stage). If a new program is run, the old entries are overwritten.
Datum tables
Multiple datum tables with the extension ".D" can be created. This serves, for example, to assign
sets of positions of electrodes, i.e. a separate table for each electrode. Depending on MP10 a
structure is generated with 4 or 5 axes. If there are 5 axes, 5 values (Q81...Q85) are used for
Cycle 7 and M38/M39. Cycle 7 has been expanded by one block (CYCL DEF 7.2 NAME), so that
you can give a name to the selected position table. If block 7.2 is not programmed, the control as
before uses table 0.D.
MDI mode
When MDI is selected, an $MDI file is automatically opened in which more than one NC block
can be directly programmed. To run a block, you must select it with the cursor and press NC
START. After execution the cursor jumps to the next NC block.
Special characteristics of MDI mode:
- PGM CALL and LBL CALL are not permitted.
- When TOOL CALL is run, the associated TOOL DEF must be programmed in the $MDI file.
- Incremental positioning movements are always started from the current position of the axes.
- Radius-compensated positioning movements are not possible.
1-6
New gap control via gap signal

For more information see above description of new features for TNC 306.
TNC 406/TNC 306
3/97
New M function M93 for repositioning

The M function M93 was introduced to facilitate programming the OEM cycles required for
erosion of vector or star cavities. Erosion blocks (also circles / helixes) that are programmed with
this M function are automatically returned by the control to the starting point after execution (as
in the disk cycle). M93 is permitted only when M36 is active.
Improvement of the eroding-with-time-limit function

Cycle 2 (erosion with time limit) is now effective also for erosion blocks with M93.
The number of retraceable contour elements was doubled from at least 20 to at least 40 (worst
case). The actual number depends on the complexity of the blocks, whereby for example more
simple line segments can be retraced than helical contour elements. For most contours
consisting of circular arcs and line segments, approx. 56 to 60 blocks can be retraced.
CASE branch in the PLC

The maximum number of calls programmable in a CASE branch was increased from 32 to 128.
Improved test functions

In the Test mode, pressing the STOP AT N soft key now calls menu with which you can program
the block number (break point), the program name and a repetition counter. The breakpoint can
therefore also be set in any subprogram with loop counter. The test run up to the breakpoint is
started with the START soft key.
Customized character set

Input value: 0 to 9:
0 = disable OEM fonts display
1 9 = enable OEM fonts display, the number sets the distance in pixels between any 2
characters on the screen.
In the PLC chip you can now program your own character sets to be used in the display. You can
activate these so-called OEM fonts with MP7232. This function is limited to the display of
dialogs, operating modes, and NC error messages. PLC error messages and PLC dialogs cannot
be display in OEM fonts. The character set and character sequence for OEM fonts must be
programmed with the PLC compiler (PLCEPROM version V2.44 and later).
Two new code words FONT and OEMTEXT were introduced. They must be programmed
in the EPROM project file (see User's Manual for PLC.EXE).
Example:
Content of OEMTEST.EPJ:
...
FONT
CHINESE.FON
OEMTEXT
CHINESE.TXT
...
3/97
TNC406/TNC 306
; Project file
; Code word in project file
; Code word in project file
1-7
Content of CHINESE.FON:
...
CHR_A:
PIX
PIX
PIX
PIX
PIX
PIX
PIX
PIX
PIX
PIX
PIX
PIX
PIX
PIX
PIX
......####......
.....##..##.....
....##....##....
....##....##....
....##....##....
....##....##....
....##....##....
....##....##....
....##....##....
....########....
....##....##....
....##....##....
....##....##....
....##....##....
....##....##....
A character matrix must always be 15 lines in height and 16 columns in width. It must be
identified with a symbolic name. A period "." in the matrix definition stands for the background
color and a hatch mark "#" stands for the foreground color. CHINESE.TXT is generated before
programming through a dialog number under the code number 105296.
Example:
Content of CHINESE.TXT:
...
33: CHR_E,CHR_R,CHR_R,CHR_O,CHR_R ;comment optional
...
45: ;comment optional
...
This means that the error message no. 33 is shown with the characters CHR_E, CHR_O and
CHR_R from the customized character set. Error message no 45 is shown as control-internal
message, since no character is defined.
New NC blocks EL CALL (ELECTRODE CALL) and WP CALL (WORKPIECE CALL).

Both NC blocks EL CALL and WP CALL can be activated for editing and execution through MP
7241 (0=disabled, 1=enabled). With EL CALL and WP CALL, an automatic handling system can
be used to load electrodes and workpieces onto the machine and remove them. The changing
process is controlled by the PLC.
EL CALL functions like TOOL DEF with compensation and TOOL CALL
The electrode offset data (D628 ... D640) are always applied in the X/Y plane depending on the
current C position, regardless of a programmed tool axis. A compensation of the C position on
the basis of a C offset must not be included in this matrix rotation.
Example: C offset 10.0
L X 1 Y 0 C +30.0 R F M; positioning of C to 40 Rotation by 30
The tool axis serves also for the determination of the rotational plane for the Cycles 7 and 10 if
the coordinate system is to be rotated.
The effect of WP CALL is to:
- Set the tool axis to Z
- Rotate about the Z axis to 0 (the plane has been rotated)
- Set the datum in X/Y/Z to values from the PLC, followed by a rotation about the Z axis to a
value from the PLC
1-8
TNC 406/TNC 306
3/97
The coordinate system is first shifted in X/Y/Z and then rotated about the Z axis. The rotation
results in an automatic shift in C.
The control takes the data for the two blocks from the PLC. When EL CALL or WP CALL is
executed the programmed name and an identifier are transferred to the PLC. Then the NC sets
the S strobe (M2044). The PLC can then decide which of the two blocks is to be executed in
order to operate an EWIS robot system, for example. After the electrode, workpiece or pallet has
been changed, the data of the electrode or workpiece must be available in the PLC in the word
markers starting with D628. Then the acknowledgment marker M2481 must be set in the PLC
for a PLC scan. The NC takes the EL CALL and WP CALL data from the PLC and resets the
strobe M2044. Now the corresponding calculations are made (compensation/shift/rotation) and
executed. The datum-shift data of the workpiece are always relative to pallet datum, which must
agree with the manual preset.
It is recommended that after an EL CALL/TOOL CALL with a block L X... Y... C... the
electrode be moved to a compensated position for further machining, since the electrode
shifting movements are rotated depending on the C position. This means that for all erosion
processes in which the electrode must move in the proper direction, the compensated C
position must first have been reached.
Marker assignment:
M2044
S strobe (special function EL CALL, WP CALL set/reset NC)
M2481
Reset S strobe (set/reset PLC)
B600 ... B623
B600
B601 ... B603
B604 ... B619
B620
B621 ... B623
Data NC --> PLC

Identifier: 1 = EL CALL, 2 = WP CALL
Free
16-byte ASCII string EL name or WP Name
Number of tilts for identifier 2
Free
B624 ... B655

B624 ... B627
B628 ... B651
Data PLC --> NC

Free
Data for identifier 1 (EL CALL) or identifier 2 (WP CALL)
Identifier 1:
Identifier 2:
Compensation X
Shift X
Compensation Y
Shift Y
Compensation Z
Shift Z
Compensation C
Rotation C
Undersize
Radius
Free
D628
D632
D636
D640
D644
D648
B652 ... B655
FN14
With numbers 300...499, PLC dialogs 0 to 199 are accessed during FN 14 (PLC error messages).
FN14: ERROR = 0..299
Display: "FN14: ERROR CODE 0...299"
FN14: ERROR = 300..499
Display: Text from PLC chip
FN15
With numbers 0...199, PLC dialogs 0...199 are accessed during FN 15 (PLC error messages).
FN15: PRINT 0..199
Output to RS-232: Text from PLC chip
FN15: PRINT 200
Output to RS-232: special character ETX
FN15: PRINT Q1..Q255 Output to RS-232: content of the Q parameter
3/97
TNC406/TNC 306
1-9
FN19
With FN 19 you can sent commands (also with data) to the PLC and receive resulting values. FN
19 is to be considered an expansion of the M functions.
Example:
FN19: PLC= +11 / +Q13 / Q77
11
= 1st parameter after D280
Q13 = 2nd parameter after D284
Q77 = 3rd parameter answer to PLC
During execution of FN19 the first parameter is transferred to D280, and the second parameter
(if programmed) to D284.
The strobe M2149 is set and the control waits for the acknowledgment M2611. After
an acknowledgment is recognized, the strobe M2149 is reset and the value from D512 (if the 3rd
parameter was programmed) is transferred to this Q parameter (result parameter), and the
program run is continued. The result can be evaluated in the subsequent NC stage.
Strobes and data in the PLC:

M2149
Strobe for FN19
M2611
Acknowledgment FN19
Set/reset NC
Set/reset PLC
D280
D284
D512
Must be programmed
Optional
Optional
1st value for FN19

2nd value for FN19
Return value from PLC
Note: Change in the binary block format in an RND block

If an RND block has been used in an OEM cycle, the PLC chip must be remade!
1-10
TNC 406/TNC 306
3/97
Filing instructions
TNC 406/TNC 306 (April 1996 edition). Please incorporate them into your Manual, following the filing
instructions below.
Change
Remove
Insert
Title page April 1996

Title page
New title page

1-1 to 1-11
Contents
Software releases TNC 406/TNC 306;
2-1/22
2-7/2-8
2-1/22
2-7/2-8/2-9
Contents
TS 120 removed
PLC Input I152
RS232C adapter
3-1...3-4
339/340
355/356
379/380
3-1...3-4
339/340
355/356
379/380
Contents
Input range MP330
Temperature compensation removed
Incorrect illustration
M2568 /D752
Description expanded
Color adjustment via soft key
Marker M2503
Adjustment for MP1820/MP1830 removed
4-1...4-4
45/46
421...424
429/430
453/454
457/470
491/492
4113/4114
4145/4146
4-1...4-4
45/46
421...424
429/430
453/454
457/470
491/492
4113/4114
4145/4146
Contents
5-1/5-2
55...523
5-1/5-2
55...525
61...612
61...612
Contents
String processing, module
7-3/7-4
7101...7118
7-3/7-4
7101...7119
Subject index
111...11...9
111...119
3/97
TNC406/TNC 306
1-11

CNC PROGRAMING FOR HEIDENHEIN AND ARDUINO thb416 PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Descrizione originale:

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

CNC PROGRAMING FOR HEIDENHEIN AND ARDUINO thb416 PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Technical Manual

For the NC software types

up to version 04 (TNC 416)

up to version 10 (TNC 406)

up to version 16 (TNC 306)

DR. JOHANNES HEIDENHAIN GmbH

TNC 406/TNC 306

Contents Technical Manual TNC 416, TNC 406, TNC 306

2 Technical data TNC 416/406/TNC 306

3.1.1 NC Software number

3.1.2 Software types and hardware

3.1.3 Software releases

TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306

PLC I/0 unit

Visual display unit

Machine operating panel

TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306

2 Technical data TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306

TNC 416/TNC 406

LE 360C logic unit

Contouring control for 5 axes

10 000 program blocks

Contouring control for 4 axes

5000 program blocks

(NC programs, EDM parameters tables, one datum shift table)

TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306

Technical data TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306

TNC 416/TNC 406

In HEIDENHAIN plain language format

Nominal position (absolute or incremental) in Cartesian or polar

TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306

Technical data TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306

TNC 416/TNC 406

Maximum traverse range

30 000 mm (1181 in.)

Maximum traverse speed

30 m/min (1181 ipm)

Closed-loop cycle time

2 / 4 ms (selected with MP)

PLC cycle time

20 / 40 ms (selected with MP)

TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306

(with 2000 logical PLC

Technical data TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306

TNC 416/TNC 406

5 encoder inputs (4 sinusoidal,

1 analog input for eroding gap

1 input for electronic handwheel 1 input for electronic handwheel

5 analog outputs for axes

1 input for short circuit detection

Programming according to instruction list, 4000 PLC commands

Power supply for LE

TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306

Technical data TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306

TNC 416/TNC 406

TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306

Technical data TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306

TNC 416/TNC 406/TNC 306

3.1.2 Software types and hardware

336 487 3x (for flat panel display BF)

TNC 306 for BE 212

3.1.3 Software releases